JP2024103718A - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Abstract

[Problem] To ensure that games utilizing the rotation of a rotating body can be played in an optimal manner. [Solution] When a game medium has been bet on and a start lever is operated, the reels start to rotate. When the reels start to rotate, acceleration control is first executed, and the reels are accelerated. When the acceleration period is completed, constant speed control is executed, and the reels rotate at a constant speed. When the reels are rotating at a constant speed, operation of a stop button is enabled, and when the stop button is operated, stop control is started for the corresponding reel, and the rotation of that reel is stopped by that stop control. In this case, if the supply of operating power to an MPU 72 is stopped when the reel rotation has not yet been stopped, acceleration control for that reel is newly started when the supply of operating power to the MPU 72 is resumed. [Selected Figure] Figure 9

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, pachinko machines are equipped with a storage section for storing gaming balls, and the gaming balls stored in the storage section are guided to a gaming ball launching device and launched toward the gaming area in response to the player's launching operation. Then, for example, when a gaming ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, a lottery process is executed, or a process is executed to increase the number of gaming balls available to the player.

In a slot machine, when a game value such as medals has been bet on and the start lever is operated to start a new game, a lottery process is executed by the control means. Also, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation stop control to stop the rotation of the reels. Then, if the stop result after the rotation of the reels has stopped corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2020-044062 A

Here, it is necessary to ensure that gaming machines such as those exemplified above can be played properly, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The present invention was made in consideration of the circumstances exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that allows games to be played appropriately.

In order to solve the above problem, the present invention provides a game progress device for progressing a predetermined game based on an operation by a player,
An attention event control means for executing a predetermined attention event that can prompt a player to give a predetermined attention when an advantageous game state advantageous to the player ends;
A predetermined execution means for executing a predetermined attention event that can prompt a player to take a predetermined caution in a predetermined situation in which the advantageous game state continues;
A means for executing a termination corresponding display corresponding to the termination of the advantageous gaming state when the advantageous gaming state is terminated;
Preparation,
The predetermined execution means is configured not to execute the predetermined attention event when the predetermined game is started before the predetermined attention event is started in the predetermined situation,
The attention event control means is characterized by comprising means for causing the predetermined attention event to occur in a situation in which the termination response display is being executed.

The present invention makes it possible to ensure that games are played appropriately.

1 is a front view of a slot machine according to a first embodiment. 1 is an oblique view of the slot machine with the front door open. FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the arrangement of symbols on each reel. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the patterns visible through the display window and the combination lines. FIG. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and the benefits provided. 1A is a front view of a common display area, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of information corresponding to a stop order displayed on the common display section. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating the relationship between the notification content of the stop order in the image display device and the display content of the stop order in the multi-purpose display unit. FIG. 2 is an electrical configuration diagram of the slot machine. 4 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by a main MPU; 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by a main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing normal processing executed by a main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the role selection process executed by the main MPU. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a role selection table when three coins are bet. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a role selection table when two coins are bet. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the stopping order of the reels and the winning patterns that are achieved. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a reel control process executed by a main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the corresponding processing executed by the main MPU when a game ends. 1 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the game states and game zones existing in a slot machine. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the first control processing of the game area executed by the main MPU. A flowchart showing the second control processing of the game area executed by the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the processing for advantageous states at the start of a game executed by the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a pseudo bonus process executed by the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the AT state processing executed by the main MPU at the start of a game. 13 is a flowchart showing an AT process executed by a main MPU. A flowchart showing the performance control processing for AT executed by the performance side MPU. (a) An explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a display presentation corresponding to the base presentation of the AT state in an image display device; (b) An explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a display presentation corresponding to a false premonition state or a real premonition state in an image display device; and (c) An explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a display presentation corresponding to the end of the AT state in an image display device. (a) to (f) are time charts showing the progression of effects corresponding to premonition states. An explanatory diagram for explaining the combinations of patterns that result in a normal replay winning, a first special replay winning, and a second special replay winning in the second embodiment. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a role selection table when three coins are bet. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the stopping order of the reels and the winning patterns that are achieved. FIG. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining how a notification is made on the main line to encourage the achievement of a first special replay winning, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining how a notification is made on the main line to encourage the achievement of a second special replay winning. 11 is a flowchart showing a stop order notification control process executed by a main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a notification control process executed by the production side MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a pseudo bonus process executed by the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the winning determination process executed by the main MPU. (a) to (k) are time charts showing the operation contents when the first special replay winning or the second special replay winning is achieved in each game state. 13 is a flowchart showing a winning determination process executed by the main MPU in the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the AT state processing at the start of a game executed by the main MPU in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing an AT process executed by a main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for a top-up period executed by the main MPU. This is an explanatory diagram to explain the selection manner of the number of points to be awarded when an additional lottery process for the add-on period is executed by referring to a lottery table for the first add-on period, and the selection manner of the number of points to be awarded when an additional lottery process for the add-on period is executed by referring to a lottery table for the second add-on period. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the execution contents of the performance executed on the image display device during the first added-on period. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the execution contents of the performance executed on the image display device during the second added-on period. FIG. 11 is an electrical configuration diagram for enabling image display during a first added period and a second added period. A flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the production side MPU. A flowchart showing the performance setting process for the added period executed by the performance side MPU. A flowchart showing the display control processing for the added period executed by the production side MPU. 11 is a flowchart showing a divided image drawing process executed by the VDP. 13A to 13D are explanatory diagrams for explaining how drawing data is created in a frame area of a frame buffer that is the drawing target by executing drawing processing for a divided image. 13 is a flowchart showing a divided image drawing process executed by a VDP according to the fifth embodiment. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display contents of the image display device when a pseudo bonus state without a transition to an AT state in the sixth embodiment ends. 13 is a flowchart showing a pseudo bonus process executed by the main MPU. (a) is a flowchart showing the presentation control process for a pseudo bonus executed by the presentation side MPU, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data structure of the presentation side RAM. 13 is a flowchart showing the control processing of various end displays executed by the production side MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the control process for warning display executed by the production side MPU. (a) to (f) are time charts showing how the bonus end display and the warning display are executed when a pseudo bonus state ends without a transition to an AT state. (a) and (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display contents of the image display device when the AT state ends, and (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the revival performance. 13 is a flowchart showing an AT process executed by a main MPU. A flowchart showing the second control processing of the game area executed by the main MPU. A flowchart showing the performance control processing for AT executed by the performance side MPU. A flowchart showing the revival-compatible performance processing executed by the performance side MPU. 11A to 11H are time charts showing how the AT end display and the caution display are executed in the AT state. A flowchart showing the revival-compatible performance processing executed by the performance side MPU in the seventh embodiment. 13A to 13C are explanatory diagrams for explaining the execution content of the revival-responsive effect when a bet setting for gaming media is made to start a new game before the timing for the revival effect to occur. (A) An explanatory diagram for explaining the display content of the image display device when the reel stopping operation is performed in accordance with the stopping order notified by the image display device in the eighth embodiment, and (B) an explanatory diagram for explaining the display content of the image display device when the reel stopping operation is performed in a stopping order different from the stopping order notified by the image display device. A flowchart showing the stop order monitoring process executed by the production side MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a medium providing process executed by a main MPU. (a) is a flowchart showing the display information update process executed by the production side MPU, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the memory area of the production side RAM. 13 is a flowchart showing an AT process executed by a main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the AT state processing executed by the main MPU at the start of a game. A flowchart showing the performance control processing for AT executed by the performance side MPU. 11A to 11I are time charts showing how the AT end display and the caution display are executed in the AT state. 23 is a flowchart showing an AT process executed by a main MPU in the ninth embodiment. A flowchart showing the performance control processing for AT executed by the performance side MPU. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the image display device when the setting process for the end indication display is executed, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the image display device when the setting process for the result display and the setting process for the warning display are executed in response to the receipt of the second section initialization command after the setting process for the end indication display is executed. FIG. 23 is an assembled oblique view of the left reel in the tenth embodiment. FIG. 2A is a connection diagram showing a drive system of a stepping motor, and FIG. 2B is a diagram showing drive characteristics of the stepping motor. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of an excitation sequence table. FIG. 10A is an explanatory diagram for explaining an acceleration table, and FIG. 10B is an explanatory diagram for explaining a stop table. 13 is a flowchart showing a reel control process executed by a main MPU. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining each area of the main RAM used to execute rotation control of each reel. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a stepping motor control process executed by a main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing an acceleration control process executed by a main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a stop control process executed by a main MPU. 4 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by a main MPU; 13 is a flowchart showing a recovery process executed by a main MPU. 23 is a flowchart showing a reel control process of a master MPU in the eleventh embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing an acceleration control process executed by a main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a pseudo-stop start process executed by a main MPU. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a pseudo-stopped table; 13A to 13C are explanatory diagrams for illustrating how, during a pseudo stop, each reel moves up and down in small increments while a pseudo stop symbol combination is present on the main line. (a) to (g) are time charts showing how a pseudo stop is performed in the start game of the pseudo bonus state. 23 is a flowchart showing the advantageous state processing at the start of a game by the main MPU in the twelfth embodiment. An explanatory diagram for explaining an AT transition lottery table. 23 is a flowchart showing the lottery process for the initial number of grants to the master MPU in the thirteenth embodiment. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first initial award number lottery table, (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second initial award number lottery table, and (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the initial award number table. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the programs stored in the main ROM and the addresses of the main ROM in the fourteenth embodiment; (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data structure of a 3-byte CALLS instruction; (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data structure of a 2-byte CALLS instruction; and (d) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the circuit configuration provided in the main MPU for providing the 2-byte starting address of the program to be read to the management controller of the main ROM when the 2-byte CALLS instruction is executed. 4 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by a main MPU; 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by a main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing normal processing executed by a main MPU. A flowchart showing the pseudo bonus processing of the main MPU in the fifteenth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing an AT process executed by a main MPU. A flowchart showing the second control processing of the game area executed by the main MPU. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the programs stored in the main ROM and the addresses of the main ROM; FIG. FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the programs stored in the main ROM and the addresses of the main ROM in the sixteenth embodiment. FIG. 1A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data structure of a CALLV instruction; FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram for explaining an index table; and FIG. 1C is an explanatory diagram for explaining the circuit configuration provided in a main MPU for providing a two-byte start address of a program to be read to a management controller of a main ROM when a CALLV instruction is executed. 13 is a flowchart showing a pseudo bonus process executed by the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing an AT process executed by a main MPU. A flowchart showing the second control processing of the game area executed by the main MPU.

First Embodiment
A first embodiment of the present invention applied to a slot machine 10, which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. Fig. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, Fig. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, and Fig. 3 is a front view of the cabinet 11.

As shown in Figures 2 and 3, the slot machine 10 has a housing 11 that forms its outer shell. The housing 11 is formed into a box shape that is open at the front as a whole by fixing multiple wooden panels.

As shown in Figs. 1 and 2, a front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11. The front door 12 is supported by the housing 11 around an axis 15 provided on the left side of the housing 11 as a pivot axis so that the internal space of the housing 11 can be opened and closed. The front door 12 is locked so that it cannot be opened by a locking device 13 provided on the back side of the front door, and this locked state is released by unlocking the key cylinder 14 with a specified key.

As shown in FIG. 1, a game panel 20 is provided near the upper center of the front door 12. The game panel 20 has three vertically long display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R arranged side by side. The display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R are made of a transparent or translucent material, and the interior of the slot machine 10 can be seen through each of the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R.

2 and 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into two parts, an upper part and a lower part, by a partition plate 11a, and a reel unit 31 is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 11a. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a center reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, each of which is formed in a cylindrical shape. Each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is supported so that it can rotate with its central axis being the axis of rotation of the reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. The axes of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are arranged on the same axis extending in a substantially horizontal direction, and each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponds one-to-one to each of the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R. Therefore, a part of the surface of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is visible through the corresponding display window 21L, 21M, and 21R. Furthermore, when reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are displayed through display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R as if they are moving from top to bottom.

As shown in FIG. 1, a start lever 41 is provided on the lower left side of the game panel 20, which is operated to start the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. When the start lever 41 is operated when a predetermined number or more of game media (or game value), which are either medals or virtual medals, have been bet, each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R starts to rotate simultaneously.

On the right side of the start lever 41, there are stop buttons 42, 43, 44 that are operated to individually stop each of the spinning reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Each stop button 42, 43, 44 is located directly below the display window 21L, 21M, 21R that corresponds to the reel 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped. Each stop button 42, 43, 44 becomes capable of stopping the left reel 32L when a predetermined time has elapsed since the reel started spinning.

One game (play) is the period from when the start lever 41 is operated to when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate, when the stop buttons 42, 43, and 44 are operated to when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop to when the various processes, such as the awarding of game media and management of the game status, are completed.

A medal insertion port 45 for inserting medals is provided on the lower right side of the display window parts 21L, 21M, and 21R. The medals inserted from the medal insertion port 45 are guided to a hopper device 53 by a selector 52 provided on the back side of the front door 12 when reception is permitted, and are guided to a medal receiving tray 59 from a medal discharge port 58 provided on the lower front side of the front door 12 when reception is prohibited (see FIG. 1). The hopper device 53 has a function of discharging medals stored in a storage tank to the medal receiving tray 59 through the medal discharge port 58 when a winning event corresponding to the award of game media is established on the main line ML described later. Below the medal insertion port 45, a return button 46 is provided, which is pressed when a medal inserted into the medal insertion port 45 gets stuck in the selector 52, as shown in FIG. 1.

On the lower left side of the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R, there are provided a first credit insertion button 47 for inserting the maximum number of credited virtual medals that can be bet at one time, and a second credit insertion button 48 for inserting two virtual medals at one time. In this slot machine 10, there are two situations in which the number of gaming media (medals or virtual medals) that can be bet (i.e., bet setting) at one time is "3" and "2".

When the first credit insertion button 47 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be made at one time is "3", the current number of bets is "0", and three or more virtual medals are stored and stored, the number of bets is reduced by three virtual medals and becomes "3". When the first credit insertion button 47 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be made at one time is "3", the current number of bets is "1", and two or more virtual medals are stored and stored, the number of bets is reduced by two virtual medals and becomes "3". When the first credit insertion button 47 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be made at one time is "3", the current number of bets is "2", and one or more virtual medals are stored and stored, the number of bets is reduced by one virtual medal and becomes "3". When the first credit insertion button 47 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be made at one time is "2", the current number of bets is "0", and two or more virtual medals are stored and stored, the number of bets is reduced by two virtual medals and becomes "2". When the number of bets that can be made at one time is "2", the current number of bets is "1", and one or more virtual medals are stored and stored, if the first credit insertion button 47 is operated, one virtual medal will be deducted and the number of bets will become "2".

If the first credit insertion button 47 is operated when the number of stored virtual medals is less than the difference between the available number of bets and the current number of bets, the number of bets increases by the number of virtual medals, and the number of virtual medals becomes 0.

In a situation where the number of bets that can be made at one time is "3", the current number of bets is "0", and two or more virtual medals are stored and stored, when the second credit insertion button 48 is operated, the number of virtual medals decreases by two and becomes "2". In a situation where the number of bets that can be made at one time is "3", the current number of bets is "1", and one or more virtual medals are stored and stored, when the second credit insertion button 48 is operated, the number of bets decreases by one and becomes "2". In a situation where the number of bets that can be made at one time is "2", the current number of bets is "0", and two or more virtual medals are stored and stored, when the second credit insertion button 48 is operated, the number of virtual medals decreases by two and becomes "2". In a situation where the number of bets that can be made at one time is "2", the current number of bets is "1", and one or more virtual medals are stored and stored, when the second credit insertion button 48 is operated, the number of bets decreases by one and becomes "2".

If the second credit insertion button 48 is operated when the number of stored virtual medals is one and the current number of bets is "0," the number of bets becomes "1" and the number of virtual medals becomes zero.

The first credit insertion button 47 has a larger pressing surface that is pressed when the player operates the button than the second credit insertion button 48. This improves the operability of the first credit insertion button 47.

A settlement button 51 is provided to the left of the start lever 41. This slot machine 10 has a credit function that stores and stores, as virtual medals, any surplus medals inserted up to a predetermined maximum value (equivalent to 50 medals) and any medals paid out when a prize is won. When the settlement button 51 is operated while virtual medals are stored and stored, the virtual medals are paid out from the medal outlet 58 as real medals.

As shown in Figures 2 and 3, inside the cabinet 11, a power supply unit 54 is provided to the left of the hopper unit 53. The power supply unit 54 is provided with a power switch 55 that is operated when the power is turned on or off, a reset button 56 for resetting various states of the slot machine 10, and a setting key insertion hole 57 into which a setting key held by the amusement hall manager is inserted and operated to change the setting value of the slot machine 10 within the range of "1" to "6."

Next, we will explain the symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Figure 4 shows the arrangement of symbols on the left reel 32L, center reel 32M, and right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a row on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Numbers from "0" to "20" are also assigned to each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, but these numbers are numbers used by the main control device 70 (described below) to identify the symbols that are visible through the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R, and are not actually assigned to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, these numbers will be used in the following explanation.

There are seven types of symbols: "Bell" symbol (e.g., 20th on left reel 32L), "Replay" symbol (e.g., 19th on left reel 32L), "Watermelon" symbol (e.g., 18th on left reel 32L), "Red 7" symbol (e.g., 15th on left reel 32L), "BAR" symbol (e.g., 10th on left reel 32L), "Cherry" symbol (e.g., 9th on left reel 32L), and "White 7" symbol (e.g., 5th on left reel 32L). The number and arrangement order of the various symbols are different on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Figure 5 is a front view of the display window sections 21L, 21M, and 21R. Each display window section 21L, 21M, and 21R is formed so that of the 21 symbols on the corresponding reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, only three symbols are visible in their entirety. Therefore, when each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is all stopped, 3 x 3 = 9 symbols are visible through the display window section 21L, 21M, and 21R.

In this slot machine 10, one main line ML is set to connect the positions where the symbols on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are visible. The main line ML is a line that connects the middle symbols on the left reel 32L, the middle symbols on the middle reel 32M, and the middle symbols on the right reel 32R. When a predetermined number or more of gaming media have been bet, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate, and if a winning combination corresponding to a winning combination is established on the main line ML, one of the following benefits is awarded: the provision of gaming media, the provision of a replay, or a transition to a new gaming state.

In other words, in this slot machine 10, only one main line ML is set as a line that can result in a win. The main line ML is set as a line that extends in a straight line. Therefore, even if a combination of symbols that can result in a win is formed on a line that extends in a straight line, such as the subline SL1 connecting the upper pattern of the left reel 32L, the middle pattern of the middle reel 32M, and the lower pattern of the right reel 32R, the subline SL2 connecting the upper pattern of the left reel 32L, the upper pattern of the middle reel 32M, and the upper pattern of the right reel 32R, the subline SL3 connecting the lower pattern of the left reel 32L, the lower pattern of the middle reel 32M, and the lower pattern of the right reel 32R, and the subline SL4 connecting the lower pattern of the left reel 32L, the middle pattern of the middle reel 32M, and the upper pattern of the right reel 32R, no win is formed.

Below, we will explain the relationship between winning symbol combinations and the benefits that will be awarded if a prize is won, with reference to Figure 6. Figure 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between winning symbol combinations and the benefits that will be awarded if a prize is won.

The minor prizes that result in the awarding of gaming media include the first compensation prize, the second compensation prize, the third compensation prize, the fourth compensation prize, the fifth compensation prize, the sixth compensation prize, the seventh compensation prize, the eighth compensation prize, the ninth compensation prize, the first bell prize, the second bell prize, the first watermelon prize, the second watermelon prize, and the cherry prize. In detail, when the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "bell" pattern, the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" pattern, and the stopping pattern on the right reel 32R is a "red 7" pattern, it is the first compensation prize. If the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L is a "bell" pattern, the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "red 7" pattern, and the stopping pattern on the right reel 32R is a "bell" pattern on the main line ML, a second supplementary win will be made. If the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L is a "red 7" pattern, the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" pattern, and the stopping pattern on the right reel 32R is a "bell" pattern on the main line ML, a fourth supplementary win will be made. If the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L is a "bell" pattern, the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "BAR" pattern, and the stopping pattern on the right reel 32R is a "bell" pattern on the main line ML, a fifth supplementary win will be made. If the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L is a "BAR" pattern, the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" pattern, and the stopping pattern on the right reel 32R is a "bell" pattern on the main line ML, a sixth supplementary win will be made. If the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L is a "bell" pattern, the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" pattern, and the stopping pattern on the right reel 32R is a "white 7" pattern on the main line ML, a seventh supplementary win will be made. If the stopped pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "bell" pattern, the stopped pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "white 7" pattern, and the stopped pattern on the right reel 32R is a "bell" pattern, then an 8th supplementary win is awarded. If the stopped pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "white 7" pattern, the stopped pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" pattern, and the stopped pattern on the right reel 32R is a "bell" pattern, then a 9th supplementary win is awarded. If any of the 1st to 9th supplementary wins are awarded, the number of game media to be awarded will be "1".

When the stopped pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "bell" pattern, the stopped pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" pattern, and the stopped pattern on the right reel 32R is a "bell" pattern, the first bell win is achieved. When the stopped pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "bell" pattern, the stopped pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" pattern, and the stopped pattern on the right reel 32R is a "replay" pattern, the second bell win is achieved. When either the first bell win or the second bell win is achieved, the number of gaming media to be awarded becomes "15".

If the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "watermelon" pattern, the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "watermelon" pattern, and the stopping pattern on the right reel 32R is a "watermelon" pattern, the first watermelon win is obtained. If the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "watermelon" pattern, the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "watermelon" pattern, and the stopping pattern on the right reel 32R is a "BAR" pattern, the second watermelon win is obtained. If either the first watermelon win or the second watermelon win is obtained, the number of game media to be awarded is "5". If the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "cherry" pattern, a cherry win is obtained regardless of the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R. If a cherry wins, the number of gaming media awarded will be "4".

Winnings that grant a replay privilege, which allows the player to play the next game without betting gaming media, include the normal replay winning, the first chance replay winning, and the second chance replay winning. In detail, if the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "replay" pattern, the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "replay" pattern, and the stopping pattern on the right reel 32R is a "replay" pattern, if the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "red 7" pattern, the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "red 7" pattern, and the stopping pattern on the right reel 32R is a "BAR" pattern, then If the stopping pattern is a "red 7" and the stopping pattern on the right reel 32R is a "replay", if the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "replay", the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "red 7" and the stopping pattern on the right reel 32R is a "BAR", or if the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "watermelon", the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "red 7" and the stopping pattern on the right reel 32R is a "bell", a normal replay is won. If the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "replay", the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "cherry", and the stopping pattern on the right reel 32R is a "bell", a first chance replay is won. If the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L along the main line ML is a "watermelon" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "replay" symbol, a second chance replay win will occur.

If any of the above replay wins are won, a replay bonus will be awarded, which allows you to play the next game without having to bet on a gaming medium. Specifically, if any of the replay wins are won in a game where you have bet on gaming medium "3", you will be able to start playing the next game with gaming medium "3" betted, without having to bet on a gaming medium. Also, if any of the replay wins are won in a game where you have bet on gaming medium "2", you will be able to start playing the next game with gaming medium "2" betted, without having to bet on a gaming medium.

State transition winnings that only result in a transition of the game state include the first CB winning and the second CB winning. In detail, when the stopped pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "red 7" pattern, the stopped pattern on the center reel 32M is a "red 7" pattern, and the stopped pattern on the right reel 32R is a "white 7" pattern, a first CB winning occurs. When the stopped pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "white 7" pattern, the stopped pattern on the center reel 32M is a "white 7" pattern, and the stopped pattern on the right reel 32R is a "red 7" pattern, a second CB winning occurs. When the first CB winning occurs, the game state transitions to the first CB state ST2, and when the second CB winning occurs, the game state transitions to the second CB state ST3 (see FIG. 19).

The first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are game states in which, when a combination of symbols corresponding to a minor winning combination stops on the main line ML, a winning combination is established and medals are paid out regardless of whether or not a winning combination is achieved. For example, even if the winning flag corresponding to the first bell winning combination is not set to "1," gaming media is awarded to the player when the combination of symbols corresponding to the first bell winning combination stops on the main line ML. On the other hand, a replay winning combination is established on the condition that the corresponding combination has been won in a lottery.

In the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, reel control different from that in the non-CB state is performed. In the non-CB state, reel control that allows the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to slide up to four symbols after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated is performed for each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. In other words, in the non-CB state, reel control that stops the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R within a specified time (190 milliseconds) after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated is performed for each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. On the other hand, in the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the above reel control is performed for the center reel 32M and the right reel 32R, that is, the same reel control as in the normal game, but the above reel control is not performed for the left reel 32L. For the left reel 32L, reel control that allows the reel to slide up to one symbol after the left stop button 42 is operated is performed. In other words, in the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, reel control is performed on the left reel 32L to stop it within a specified time (75 msec) that is shorter than the specified time after the left stop button 42 is operated.

In the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the reel control that only allows a maximum of one symbol to slide is not limited to the left reel 32L, but may be performed on the reel corresponding to the first operated stop button only for a maximum of one symbol, or may be performed on a predetermined reel only for a maximum of one symbol. Furthermore, reel control that only allows a maximum of one symbol to slide on the reel corresponding to the stop button operated in a certain order may be performed, such as reel control that only allows a maximum of one symbol to slide on the reel corresponding to the second or last operated stop button.

In the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, if a role corresponding to a replay win is won, the replay win takes priority, and if a replay win is not possible, the first bell win may occur. Also, the first bell win may occur even if a role corresponding to a replay win is not won.

The first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are both game states that do not increase the number of game media owned by the player. Furthermore, the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are both game states that reduce the number of game media owned by the player at the end of the game state compared to the number of game media owned by the player at the start of the game state.

Next, we will explain the devices used to make various announcements and perform various effects.

As shown in FIG. 1, an upper lamp 61 and a speaker 62 are provided on the upper part of the front door 12, and an image display device 63 is also provided. When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, the upper lamp 61 is controlled to emit light in a manner corresponding to the abnormality, and is also controlled to emit light in a manner corresponding to the winning result. Furthermore, the upper lamp 61 is controlled to emit light so that a light-emitting effect corresponding to the display effect on the image display device 63 is performed. The speakers 62 are provided as a pair on the left and right, and are controlled to output sound or audio corresponding to the abnormality when an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, and are also controlled to output sound or audio corresponding to the winning result. Furthermore, the speakers 62 are controlled to output sound so that a sound output effect corresponding to the display effect on the image display device 63 is performed.

The image display device 63 has a display surface and is configured as a liquid crystal display device equipped with a liquid crystal display, but is not limited to a liquid crystal display device and may be another display device having a display surface such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device or a CRT, or may be a dot matrix display device. When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, the display is controlled so that an image corresponding to the abnormality is displayed on the display surface. The image display device 63 is also controlled so that an image corresponding to the winning combination in the internal lottery and the winning result in each game is displayed on the display surface. In other words, the image display device 63 executes a display performance.

The gaming panel 20 of the front door 12 is provided with a credit display section 65 below the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R, which displays the number of virtual medals stored, a dual-purpose display section 66 which displays the number of gaming media to be awarded when a small winning combination is won, and also displays information corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R when notified by the image display device 63, and further displays information to notify the results of the management of the gaming history, and a section display section 67 which displays information indicating that the gaming section is the second section. The credit display section 65 is made up of a seven-segment display, and each segment uses a single-color LED such as green.

Figure 7(a) is a front view of a common display area 68 in which a combined display unit 66 and a section display unit 67 are provided. In the common display area 68, as shown in Figure 7(a), a combined display unit 66 in which two seven-segment displays 66a, 66b are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction, and a section display unit 67 consisting of one light-emitting element are integrated.

When any of the small prize winnings (1st to 9th compensation winnings, 1st bell winning, 2nd bell winning, 1st watermelon winning, 2nd watermelon winning, or cherry winning) corresponding to the award of game media is achieved, the number of game media awarded corresponding to the small prize winning is displayed on the dual-purpose display unit 66 at the end of the game in which the small prize winning is achieved. Specifically, when any of the 1st to 9th compensation winnings is achieved in the non-CB state, the left 7-segment display 66a is not displayed and the right 7-segment display 66b displays "1", thereby notifying that "1" game media has been awarded. When any of the 1st bell winning and the 2nd bell winning are achieved in the non-CB state, the left 7-segment display 66a displays "1" and the right 7-segment display 66b displays "5", thereby notifying that "15" game media have been awarded. In addition, when either the first watermelon winning or the second watermelon winning occurs in the non-CB state, the left 7-segment display 66a becomes non-displayable and the right 7-segment display 66b displays "5", thereby notifying that "5" gaming media have been awarded. In addition, when a cherry winning occurs in the non-CB state, the left 7-segment display 66a becomes non-displayable and the right 7-segment display 66b displays "2", thereby notifying that "2" gaming media have been awarded.

In the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the number of game media awarded in response to a small win is "1". Therefore, when a small win is achieved in the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the left 7-segment display 66a is hidden and the right 7-segment display 66b displays "1", thereby indicating that "1" game media has been awarded.

On the other hand, even if a winning event that does not award gaming media, such as any of the replay winnings or any of the CB winnings, occurs, no display corresponding to that winning event is made on the dual-purpose display unit 66, and in this case the seven-segment displays 66a, 66b remain in a hidden state. The display of the number of awarded gaming media on the dual-purpose display unit 66 ends when gaming media is bet on to start the game following the game for which the display was made, and at the time this bet is made the seven-segment displays 66a, 66b go into a hidden state.

When the image display device 63 notifies the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, information corresponding to the notified stop order is displayed on the combined display unit 66. FIG. 7(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the information corresponding to the stop order displayed on the combined display unit 66. As shown in FIG. 7(b), in this slot machine 10, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R notified on the image display device 63 includes a stop order in which the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the center reel 32M, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, a stop order in which the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the center reel 32M, a stop order in which the first stop is the center reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, and a stop order in which the first stop is the center reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. There are stopping sequences where the second stop is on the right reel 32R and the third stop is on the left reel 32L, where the first stop is on the right reel 32R, the second stop is on the left reel 32L and the third stop is on the center reel 32M, where the first stop is on the right reel 32R, the second stop is on the center reel 32M and the third stop is on the left reel 32L, where the first stop is on the left reel 32L and the rest is optional, where the first stop is on the center reel 32M and the rest is optional, and where the first stop is on the right reel 32R and the rest is optional.

The notification of the stop order on the image display device 63 may be executed when a role that includes the first bell winning data and any one of the first to sixth compensation winning data is won in the lottery process of the role in the non-CB state, or when a role that includes the second bell winning data and any one of the seventh to ninth compensation winning data is won. Specifically, when a role that includes the first bell winning data and any one of the first to sixth compensation winning data is won, the first bell winning is established if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the stopping order corresponding to the current winning role among the above stopping orders, and any one of the first to sixth compensation winnings may be established if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped in the stopping order corresponding to the current winning role. When the first bell winning is established, the game medium "15" is awarded to the player as already explained, and when any one of the first to sixth compensation winnings is established, the game medium "1" is awarded to the player as already explained.

When a player wins a combination that includes the second bell winning data and any one of the seventh to ninth compensation winning data, the second bell win occurs if reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop in the stopping order that corresponds to the current winning combination, and any one of the seventh to ninth compensation wins may occur if reels 32L, 32M, and 32R do not stop in the stopping order that corresponds to the current winning combination. If the second bell win occurs, the player is awarded "15" gaming media as explained above, and if any of the seventh to ninth compensation wins occurs, the player is awarded "1" gaming media as explained above.

When any of the above stop orders is notified by the image display device 63, the left 7-segment display 66a of the combined display unit 66 remains in a non-display state, while the right 7-segment display 66b displays the stop order of the order to be notified. This display content is as shown in FIG. 7(b), and the display content of the stop order of the combined display unit 66 is set in a one-to-one correspondence with the notification content of the stop order of the image display device 63. However, this is not limited to this, and a configuration in which multiple types of display content of the combined display unit 66 are set in correspondence with some or all of the notification content of the stop order of the image display device 63 may be used.

The display content of the stop order on the combined display unit 66 is different from the display content that is the subject of display when a display corresponding to the awarding of game media is made on the combined display unit 66. This makes it easier to distinguish whether the content displayed on the combined display unit 66 corresponds to the number of game media awarded or the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Figures 8(a) and 8(b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the relationship between the notification content of the stop order on the image display device 63 and the display content of the stop order on the combined display unit 66.

When the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is announced on image display device 63, as shown in Fig. 8(a), the same number of unit display images G1 to G3 as the number of stopping operations required to end the game are displayed on image display device 63, and an image corresponding to the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is displayed on each unit display image G1 to G3. Specifically, a left unit display image G1 corresponding to left reel 32L, a middle unit display image G2 corresponding to middle reel 32M, and a right unit display image G3 corresponding to right reel 32R are displayed. FIG. 8(a) shows the stop order being notified when the first stop is the center reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, so the left unit display image G1 displays an image of "2" corresponding to the stop order of the left reel 32L, the middle unit display image G2 displays an image of "1" corresponding to the stop order of the middle reel 32M, and the right unit display image G3 displays an image of "3" corresponding to the stop order of the right reel 32R.

In the image display device 63, an image is displayed that notifies the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R as described above, whereas in the combined display unit 66, as shown in FIG. 8(b), an "L" corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is displayed. In other words, in the image display device 63, unit display images G1 to G3 corresponding to the number of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are displayed, and an image corresponding to the stop order of the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is displayed in each unit display image G1 to G3, whereas in the combined display unit 66, a display unrelated to the number of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is displayed. As a result, even if the combined display unit 66 displays a display corresponding to the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the display content on the image display device 63.

The display range of the combined display unit 66 is narrower than that of the image display unit 63. This also makes it possible to reduce the player's attention to the combined display unit 66 compared to the image display unit 63. The combined display unit 66 is also located on the opposite side to the image display unit 63, across the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R that allow the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be viewed. This means that the combined display unit 66 is positioned away from the image display unit 63, which also makes it possible to reduce the player's attention to the combined display unit 66.

When the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified, the display corresponding to the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the combined display unit 66 and the display corresponding to the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the image display unit 63 are started after the lottery process for the winning combination is performed and before the stop operation of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is enabled. In this case, the display corresponding to the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the combined display unit 66 is started before the display corresponding to the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the image display unit 63, but these displays may be configured to start simultaneously or approximately simultaneously, or the display start order may be reversed. In addition, the display corresponding to the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the combined display unit 66 and image display device 63 ends when a stop command is issued for all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game for which the display is executed.

The dual-purpose display unit 66 is disposed in the center of the common display area 68, whereas the section display unit 67 is disposed in a corner of the common display area 68. The section display unit 67 is a display unit for notifying that the game section is the second section SC2 of the first section SC1 and the second section SC2 (see FIG. 19). The second section SC2 is a section in which a favorable game state (specifically, a pseudo bonus state ST4 and an AT state ST5) in which the expected value of game media in one game (the value obtained by subtracting the "number of game media bet in one game" from the "expected number of game media to be awarded in one game") can exceed "0" can be started by notifying the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the player to win advantageously when the winnings to be established are different depending on the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the advantageous game state can be continued. On the other hand, the first section SC1 is a section in which the advantageous game state does not start and does not continue.

The section display unit 67 is turned on when the player is in a favorable gaming state in which the expected value of the game medium to be acquired exceeds "0" by being notified of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, which allows the player to win a winning combination that is advantageous to the player when the player wins a winning combination that is advantageous to the player depending on the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, or when the player wins a winning combination that is advantageous to the player depending on the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In this case, the pseudo bonus state ST4 and the AT state ST5 correspond to the above-mentioned favorable gaming state, while the second section SC2, which is neither the pseudo bonus state ST4 nor the AT state ST5, does not correspond to the above-mentioned favorable gaming state. Therefore, when moving from the first section SC1 to the second section SC2, the section display unit 67 may or may not switch from the off state to the on state. If the section display unit 67 remains off when moving to the second section SC2, the section display unit 67 will change from an off state to an on state when the pseudo bonus state ST4 or AT state ST5 starts in the second section SC2. If the section display unit 67 becomes on, it will remain on until the second section SC2 ends, and will become off when the second section SC2 ends and the first section SC1 begins.

As described above, in a configuration in which the section display unit 67 is turned on once in the second section SC2 and the turned on state is maintained until the end of the second section SC2, the dual-purpose display unit 66, which is provided in a concentrated manner in the common display area 68, is turned on when a game medium is awarded and turned off when the next game starts, and is turned on when the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is displayed on the image display device 63 and turned off when the game ends. Therefore, in a configuration in which the section display unit 67 is arranged in the common display area 68 so as not to be too noticeable to the player, it is possible to actively create a situation in which only the section display unit 67 is turned on in the common display area 68 during the second section SC2, making it easier for the manager of the game parlor to check the section display unit 67.

In addition, instead of maintaining the section display unit 67 in the lit state during the second section SC2, the section display unit 67 may be configured to flash at a predetermined cycle during the second section SC2. Also, other displays such as liquid crystal display devices may be used as the combined display unit 66 and the section display unit 67.

The slot machine 10 is provided with various control devices. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, a main control device 70 is provided above the reel unit 31. The main control device 70 is attached to the back plate 11b that forms the back portion of the housing 11. The main control device 70 is configured by housing a main control board 71 in a board box 81. An MPU 72 is mounted on one of the board surfaces of the main control board 71, which is the element mounting surface. The board box 81 is formed transparent so that the MPU 72 housed in the board box 81 can be seen from the outside of the board box 81. Note that the board box 81 is formed colorless and transparent, but it may be formed colored and transparent as long as the MPU 72 housed in the board box 81 can be seen from the outside of the board box 81. The main control device 70 is mounted on the back plate 11b of the housing 11 so that the opposing wall portion 82 facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 71 in the board box 81 faces the front of the slot machine 10. Therefore, by opening the front door 12 toward the front of the slot machine 10 relative to the cabinet 11 and exposing the internal space of the cabinet 11, it becomes possible to visually observe the opposing wall portion 82 of the board box 81 and the MPU 72 through the opposing wall portion 82.

The board box 81 is formed by combining a number of case bodies in front and behind, and these case bodies are provided with joints 83 that prevent the separation of these case bodies and leave a trace when the case bodies are separated. The joints 83 are arranged in a row on one side of the board box 81, which is approximately a rectangular parallelepiped. As a result, even if some of the joints 83 are used to prevent the separation of the case bodies and the case bodies are separated by destroying the part of the joints 83, it is possible to prevent the separation of the case bodies again by connecting another joint 83 thereafter. In addition, since the joints 83 are destroyed when the case bodies are separated and a trace is left, it is possible to visually check the joints 83 to see whether the separation of the case bodies is being performed illegally. In addition, a seal seal 84 is attached to one side of the board box 81 other than the side on which the joints 83 are arranged in a row so as to straddle the boundary between the case bodies. When the seal seal 84 is peeled off, an adhesive layer remains on the case body. This makes it possible to leave a trace if the sealing seal 84 is peeled off when the case body is separated.

As shown in FIG. 2, the slot machine 10 is provided with a performance control device 90 in addition to the main control device 70. The performance control device 90 is arranged behind the image display device 63 and stacked on the front door 12. The performance control device 90 controls the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 based on commands received from the main control device 70. Note that the performance control device 90 is configured with a control board housed in a board box, similar to the main control device 70.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be explained based on the block diagram in FIG. 9.

As already explained, the main control board 71 of the main control device 70 is equipped with an MPU 72. The MPU 72 is provided with a ROM 73 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 72, a RAM 74 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 73, a random number circuit 75 that sequentially updates random numbers within a predetermined numerical range based on a clock signal output from a clock circuit, and a clock circuit that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency. In addition to this, the MPU 72 also has an interrupt circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like built in. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 73 and RAM 74 are integrated into a single chip for the MPU 72, and each may be integrated into a separate chip.

The MPU 72 is provided with an input port and an output port. On the input side of the MPU 72, various sensors are connected, such as the reel unit 31, the start detection sensor 41a that detects the operation of the start lever 41, the stop detection sensors 42a, 43a, 44a that individually detect the operation of each stop button 42, 43, 44, the inserted medal detection sensor 45a that detects medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45, the credit insertion detection sensors 47a, 48a that individually detect the operation of each credit insertion button 47, 48, the settlement detection sensor 51a that detects the operation of the settlement button 51, the payout detection sensor of the hopper device 53, the reset detection sensor that detects the operation of the reset button 56 provided on the power supply device 54, and the setting key detection sensor that detects the insertion of the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 57, and the like, and the signals from each of these sensors are input to the MPU 72.

The output side of the MPU 72 is connected to the reel unit 31, the selector drive unit 52a provided on the selector 52, the payout motor of the hopper device 53, the combined display unit 66, the section display unit 67, the performance control device 90, etc. In each game, the rotation drive control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R of the reel unit 31 is performed by the MPU 72. The selector 52 has a function of guiding a medal inserted from the medal insertion port 45 to the hopper device 53 after detecting it with the inserted medal detection sensor 45a when acceptance is permitted, and discharging it to the medal receiving tray 59 without detecting it with the inserted medal detection sensor 45a when acceptance is prohibited. The selector drive unit 52a has a function to switch the state of the selector 52 between an acceptance permitted state and an acceptance prohibited state, and specifically, it operates the path switching piece provided on the selector 52 between an acceptance permitted position and an acceptance prohibited position. The MPU 72 switches the state of the selector 52 between an acceptance permission state and an acceptance prohibition state by switching between the output state and the stop state of the drive signal to the selector drive unit 52a.

When a small winning combination is achieved and a medal is paid out, the MPU 72 executes drive control of the hopper device 53. When a game medium is awarded, the MPU 72 controls the display of the combined display unit 66 so that the number of game media that have been awarded is displayed. When the second section SC2 is reached and a notification start trigger occurs, the MPU 72 controls the display of the section display unit 67 so that a notification is given that the second section SC2 is reached. The MPU 72 also controls the display of the combined display unit 66 so that a display corresponding to the game management result is given. The MPU 72 also transmits commands to the performance control device 90 at each timing of each game, and when a command for notifying the image display device 63 of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is transmitted to the performance control device 90, the combined display unit 66 is controlled so that a display corresponding to the content to be notified is given. In this case, direct display control of the image display device 63 is performed by the performance control device 90, while direct display control of the combined display unit 66 is performed by the MPU 72. In other words, direct display control is performed in the performance control device 90 for the image display device 63, which is the subject of relatively complex display control, and direct display control is performed in the MPU 72 for the combined display unit 66, which is the subject of relatively simple display control. This makes it possible to perform both displays that emphasize increasing attention to the performance and displays that emphasize reliability, while reducing the processing load on the MPU 72.

A power failure monitoring circuit provided in the power supply 54 is connected to the input side of the MPU 72 (not shown). The power supply 54 is equipped with a power supply unit and a power failure monitoring circuit that supply drive power to the main control unit 70 and other electronic devices of the slot machine 10. The power failure monitoring circuit monitors the voltage applied to the power supply unit from an external power source, and outputs a power failure signal to the MPU 72 when the voltage falls below a reference voltage. The MPU 72 executes power failure processing by receiving the power failure signal, and enables the processing state before the power failure to be restored after power is restored. The power supply 54 is also provided with a power failure power supply unit for supplying backup power to the RAM 74 as power failure power when the supply of operating power from the external power source is cut off. As a result, even when the supply of operating power from the external power source is cut off, data is stored and retained in the RAM 74 when the power failure power supply unit can supply backup power (for example, for one or two days).

The performance control device 90 is equipped with a performance control board 91 for controlling the execution of various notifications and various performances. The performance control board 91 is equipped with an MPU 92. The MPU 92 has a built-in ROM 93 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 92, and a RAM 94 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when the control programs stored in the ROM 93 are executed. It also has built-in a clock circuit that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an interrupt circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a random number generating circuit.

It is not essential that the ROM 93 and RAM 94 are integrated into a single chip for the MPU 92, and each may be integrated into a separate chip. In addition, while backup power is not supplied to the RAM 94 from the power-off power supply unit of the power supply device 54 when the supply of operating power from the external power source is cut off, the RAM 94 may be configured to be supplied with backup power.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. As already explained, the MPU 72 of the main control device 70 is connected to the input side of the MPU 92, and various commands are received from the MPU 72. The upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92. Based on the commands received from the MPU 72 of the main control device 70, the MPU 92 controls the light emission of the upper lamp 61, the sound output of the speaker 62, and the display of the image display device 63, thereby enabling various notifications and various performances to be performed.

Although not shown, the performance control board 91 is equipped with a video display processor (VDP), character ROM, video RAM, etc. in addition to the MPU 92. The VDP is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver built into the image display device 63. The VDP is involved in reading and writing data from the video RAM, and reads image data to be stored in the video RAM from the character ROM at a predetermined timing and displays it on the image display device 63. The character ROM serves as an image data library for storing character data such as patterns to be displayed on the image display device 63. This character ROM holds bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table to be referenced when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, etc. The video RAM is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the image display device 63. When the MPU 92 determines the execution content of the performance based on a command received from the MPU 72 of the main control device 70, it outputs a drawing list to the VDP that indicates the content of the image corresponding to each update timing according to the determined execution content of the performance. The VDP reads image data from the character ROM according to the drawing list, and creates display data in the video RAM using the read image data. The VDP then outputs an image signal corresponding to the created display data to the image display device 63, causing the image display device 63 to display an image corresponding to the display data.

For ease of explanation, in the following explanation, the MPU 72, ROM 73, and RAM 74 of the main control device 70 are referred to as the main MPU 72, main ROM 73, and main RAM 74, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the performance control device 90 are referred to as the performance MPU 92, performance ROM 93, and performance RAM 94, respectively.

Next, the processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described. First, the main processing executed by the main MPU 72 when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 10.

In the main process, the initialization process is first performed (step S101). In the initialization process, an interrupt by the timer interrupt process is permitted, and various initial settings are made to the registers and I/O devices in the main MPU 72. Then, it is determined whether the power is turned on with the setting key inserted into the setting key insertion hole 57 and turned on (step S102). If the power is turned on with the setting key turned on (step S102: YES), and if the reset button 56 is not pressed when the power is turned on (step S103: NO), a partial clear process is performed (step S104), and then a setting value update process is performed (step S106). On the other hand, if the reset button 56 is pressed when the power is turned on (step S103: YES), then a full clear process is performed (step S105), and then a setting value update process is performed (step S106). In the partial clear process (step S104), some areas of the main RAM 74 are initialized, and in the full clear process (step S105), all areas of the main RAM 74 are initialized. In the partial clear process, areas in the main RAM 74 other than the area in which the second CB winning data is stored are cleared to "0" and initialized, and in the full clear process, all areas including the area in which the second CB winning data is stored are cleared to "0" and initialized.

In the setting value update process, the current setting value is read under the condition that the setting key is inserted and turned ON, and the current setting value is displayed on the credit display unit 65. When the setting value update process is executed, either the partial clear process (step S104) or the full clear process (step S105) has been executed before, so when the setting value update process starts, the credit display unit 65 displays the setting value as "1". In the setting value update process, the setting value is updated to "1" each time the reset button 56 is operated, and the updated setting value is displayed on the credit display unit 65. Note that if the reset button 56 is operated when the setting value is "6", the setting value is updated to "1". When the ON operation of the setting key is released after the start lever 41 is operated, the setting value selected at that time becomes the setting value set in the current setting value update process, and the setting value update process ends. In this case, the display of the setting value on the credit display unit 65 ends. After that, the process moves to normal processing (step S107). The normal processing will be described in detail later.

If the setting key is not turned on in the main process (step S102: NO), the power recovery process from step S108 onwards is executed. The power recovery process is a process for returning the state of the slot machine 10 to the state before the power was cut off. In the power recovery process, the main RAM 74 is checked to determine whether the setting value of the slot machine 10 is normal or not (step S108). Specifically, if the setting value is any of "1" to "6", it is determined to be normal, and if it is "0" or "7" or more, it is determined to be abnormal. If the setting value is normal, it is determined whether the power outage flag is set to "1" (step S109). The power outage flag is provided in the main RAM 74, and if the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped and a predetermined power outage process is normally executed, the power outage flag is set to "1". If the power outage flag is set to "1", it is confirmed whether the RAM determination value is normal or not (step S110). Specifically, the checksum value of the main RAM 74 is checked to confirm whether the value is normal or not.

If the answer is yes in all of steps S108 to S110, it means that the power failure processing at the time of the previous power failure was executed normally. In this case, the value of the stack pointer saved in the main RAM 74 is written to the stack pointer of the main MPU 72, and the data saved in the main RAM 74 is restored to the register of the main MPU 72, thereby restoring the state of the register of the main MPU 72 to the state before the power was cut off (step S111). In addition, the power failure flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S112). After that, a power recovery command is sent to the production MPU 92 to make it recognize that the power recovery processing has been executed (step S113), and then the address before the power failure is returned to (step S114).

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in any of steps S108 to S110, an operation prohibition process is executed. In the operation prohibition process, the execution of the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is prohibited (step S115), all output ports of the main MPU 72 are cleared to "0" to turn off all actuators connected to those output ports (step S116), and an error notification process is executed to notify the hall manager or the like of the occurrence of an error (step S117). This then becomes an infinite loop. The operation prohibition process is released by executing a partial clear process (step S104) or a full clear process (step S105).

Next, the timer interrupt process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 11. Note that the timer interrupt process is initiated, for example, every 1.49 milliseconds.

In the register save process (step S201), the values of all registers in the main MPU 72 that are used in the normal process described below are saved to the main RAM 74. In step S202, it is confirmed whether the power outage flag is set to "1", and if the power outage flag is set to "1", the process proceeds to step S203 and power outage processing is executed.

The power outage flag is set when a power outage signal from the power outage monitoring circuit of the power supply unit 54 is input to the main MPU 72. In the power outage processing, first it is determined whether the command transmission has been completed, and if the transmission has not been completed, this processing is terminated and the timer interrupt processing is returned to, and the command transmission is terminated. If the command transmission has been completed, the value of the stack pointer of the main MPU 72 is saved in the main RAM 74. Then, the output state of the output port of the main MPU 72 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, when the power outage is resolved, a judgment value for judging whether the data in the main RAM 74 is normal or not is calculated and saved in the main RAM 74, and further access to the RAM is prohibited. After the above processing is performed, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the power being completely cut off and processing being unable to be executed.

If the power outage flag is not set to "1" in step S202, various processes from step S204 onwards are carried out. In step S204, a watchdog timer clear process is carried out to initialize the value of a watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of malfunctions. In step S205, an interrupt end declaration process is carried out to enable the main MPU 72 itself to set the next timer interrupt. In step S206, a stepping motor control process is carried out to drive the stepping motors provided on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in order to spin these reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In step S207, the status of various sensors connected to the input ports is read, and a sensor monitoring process is performed to monitor whether the read results are normal. In step S208, a timer subtraction process is performed to subtract the values of each counter and timer. In step S209, a counter process is performed to output the results of counting the number of medals bet and the number of medals paid out to the outside. In step S210, a command output process is performed to send various commands to the performance side MPU 92. In step S211, a port output process is performed to output data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port. In step S212, the values of each register saved in the main side RAM 74 in the previous step S201 are restored to the corresponding register in the main side MPU 72.

In step S213, a management process is executed to manage the game history and to display the contents corresponding to the management results on the combined display unit 66. Specifically, the ratio of the total number of games in the second section SC2 described below to the total number of games is calculated, and the calculated ratio is displayed on the combined display unit 66. In this case, the calculation of the ratio of the total number of games in the second section SC2 to the total number of games may be configured to be performed for each set value. In this configuration, even if the set value is changed, the calculation may continue without initializing the information on the ratio performed for each set value. Thereafter, in step S214, an interrupt permission process is performed to permit the next timer interrupt, and this series of timer interrupt processes is terminated.

Next, the normal processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be explained based on the flowchart in Figure 12.

First, an interrupt permission process is performed to permit the next timer interrupt (step S301). After that, a start waiting process is performed (step S302). In the start waiting process, if any replay winning has been established in the previous game, a bet setting equal to the previous bet number is set in the bet number setting counter 74a (see FIG. 9) provided in the main RAM 74. The bet number setting counter 74a is a counter for specifying the number of bets for the game to be executed by the main MPU 72. If a replay winning has not been established in the previous game, if the current game state is not the second CB state ST3, the bet upper limit number for the current game is set to "3", and if the current game state is the second CB state ST3, the bet upper limit number for the current game is set to "2". On the condition that the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is not the current bet upper limit number, it is determined whether or not one or more virtual medals have been stored and a valid bet operation has been performed. The main RAM 74 is provided with a credit counter 74b (see FIG. 9) as an area for storing the number of virtual medals stored. When the value of the credit counter 74b is 1 or more and a valid bet operation is performed, a bet setting process is executed.

In the bet setting process, when the first credit insertion button 47 is operated, if the sum of the value of the bet number setting counter 74a and the value of the credit counter 74b is equal to or greater than the upper bet limit, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is set to the upper bet limit and the value of the number of virtual medals used in the setting is subtracted from the credit counter 74b, and if the sum of the value of the bet number setting counter 74a and the value of the credit counter 74b is less than the upper bet limit, the value of the credit counter 74b is added to the bet number setting counter 74a and then the value of the credit counter 74b is cleared to "0". Furthermore, in the bet number setting process, when the second credit insertion button 48 is operated, if the sum of the value of the bet number setting counter 74a and the value of the credit counter 74b is 2 or more, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is set to "2" and the value of the number of virtual medals used in the setting is subtracted from the credit counter 74b, and if the sum of the value of the bet number setting counter 74a and the value of the credit counter 74b is less than 2, the value of the credit counter 74b is added to the bet number setting counter 74a and then the value of the credit counter 74b is cleared to "0."

In the start waiting process, when a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 45 and one medal is detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, if the value of the bet number setting counter 74a in the main RAM 74 is less than the upper limit number of bets, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is incremented by 1, and if the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of bets, the value of the credit counter 74b in the main RAM 74 is incremented by 1. If the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of bets and the value of the credit counter 74b is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of accumulated memories (specifically, "50"), an acceptance prohibition process is executed. When the acceptance prohibition process is executed, even if a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 45, the medal is discharged into the medal tray 59 without being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a.

In the start waiting process, if the settlement button 51 is operated, the settlement process is executed. In the settlement process, if a replay win has not been achieved, the hopper device 53 is controlled and driven so that the number of medals corresponding to the sum of the value of the bet number setting counter 74a and the value of the credit counter 74b are discharged to the medal tray 59. In this case, the bet number setting counter 74a is cleared to "0" and the credit counter 74b is cleared to "0". On the other hand, if a replay win has been achieved, the hopper device 53 is controlled and driven so that the number of medals corresponding to the value of the credit counter 74b are discharged to the medal tray 59. In this case, the credit counter 74b is cleared to "0".

After executing the start waiting process in step S302, it is determined whether or not the bet setting for the number of bets required to start the game has been completed (step S303). If a negative determination is made in step S303, the process returns to step S302. If a positive determination is made in step S303, it is determined whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated (step S304). If the start lever 41 has not been operated, the process returns to step S302.

When the start lever 41 is operated (step S304: YES), the main line ML is activated and then the reception prohibition process is executed (step S305). By executing the reception prohibition process, even if a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 45, the medal is discharged into the medal tray 59 without being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a.

Then, in step S306, a start setting process is executed to set various settings when the game is started, in step S307, a role selection process is executed to select roles for the current game, and in step S308, a reel control process is executed to drive and control each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in a manner corresponding to the result of the current role selection process.

Then, the medium granting process is executed (step S309). In the medium granting process, if a small win has been achieved in the current game, a process is executed to grant the player a number of game media corresponding to the small win. Specifically, when granting virtual medals, a value corresponding to the current small win is added to the credit counter 74b of the main RAM 74, and if the value of the credit counter 74b has reached the upper limit of the number of stored memories, the hopper device 53 is driven and controlled so that the number of medals exceeding the upper limit of the number of stored memories is paid out to the medal tray 59. In addition, in the medium granting process, the display of the dual-purpose display unit 66 is controlled so that a display corresponding to the number of game media to be granted this time is displayed. The display corresponding to the number of game media on the dual-purpose display unit 66 continues until a new bet of game media is made.

After that, a response process is executed at the end of the game to enable the setting of the game state and game zone corresponding to the result of this game (step S310). In addition, an external output setting process is executed to output the state of the slot machine 10 to the management computer of the game hall (step S311). After that, an acceptance permission process is executed (step S312). As a result of the acceptance permission process being executed, the medal inserted from the medal insertion port 45 is detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a and then collected by the hopper device 53.

Next, the role selection process executed in step S307 of the normal process (FIG. 12) will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 13.

In step S401, a random number is obtained to be used when determining whether a winning combination has been achieved. In this slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the random number at that time is latched from the random number circuit 75. The random number circuit 75 generates random numbers between "0" and "65535", and when the main MPU 72 confirms the operation of the start lever 41, it stores the value latched in the random number circuit 75 in the main RAM 74. With this configuration, it is possible to quickly obtain a random number when the start lever 41 is operated, making it possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The random number circuit 75 is configured to latch the value of the free-running counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After obtaining the random number, the lottery table for determining whether the winning combination is a winning combination is read from the main ROM 73 (step S402). In this slot machine 10, six setting values from "1" to "6" are prepared in advance, and by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 57 and turning it ON and performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to set which setting value corresponds to which winning probability the lottery process for the winning combination is to be executed. The winning probability is more favorable for the player when the setting value is "n+1" than when it is "n". Specifically, since the winning probability of a predetermined combination is higher when the setting value is "n+1" than when it is "n", the winning probability is more favorable for the player when the setting value is "n+1" than when it is "n". In addition, even if the setting value is the same level, it is more favorable for the player when the number of gaming media bet is "3" than when it is "2". In addition, there are a first CB state ST2 and a second CB state ST3 as game states. In step S402, a lottery table is selected that corresponds to the combination of the current setting value, the current number of bets, and the current game state.

The lottery table in the non-CB state will be explained using the example where the setting value is "3". Figure 14 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the role lottery table when three coins are bet, which is selected when the number of bets is "3", and Figure 15 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the role lottery table when two coins are bet, which is selected when the number of bets is "2". Note that in the following explanation, the explanatory diagram in Figure 16 will be referred to as appropriate.

As shown in Figures 14 and 15, index values IV are set in the winning combination table for both three and two bets. Each index value IV is associated with winning data (i.e., winning combination) that will result in a win, and a point value PV is set. The point value PV determines the winning probability of the corresponding index value IV in relation to the maximum value ("65535") of the random number circuit 75. The number of index values IV is the same for three bets and two bets, and the type of winning data set for each index value IV is the same for three bets and two bets, except for index value IV=17.

Specifically, the first bell winning data is set to the index values IV = 1 to 6, and one of the first to sixth compensation winning data is set. When the index value IV = 1 is a winning, as shown in FIG. 16, if the first stop (the reel on which the stop command was first issued) is the left reel 32L, the second stop (the reel on which the stop command was second issued) is the center reel 32M, and the third stop (the reel on which the stop command was last issued) is the right reel 32R, the first bell winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and the first compensation winning may be established in other cases. When the index value IV = 2 is a winning, if the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the center reel 32M, the first bell winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and the fourth compensation winning may be established in other cases. In the case where the winning is made with an index value IV=3, if the first stop is the center reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, the first bell winning is surely made regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, and in other cases, the third supplementary winning may be made. In the case where the winning is made with an index value IV=4, if the first stop is the center reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, the first bell winning is surely made regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, and in other cases, the sixth supplementary winning may be made. In the case where the winning is made with an index value IV=5, if the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the center reel 32M, the first bell winning is surely made regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, and in other cases, the second supplementary winning may be made. When an index value IV=6 is reached and a win occurs, if the first stop is on the right reel 32R, the second stop is on the center reel 32M, and the third stop is on the left reel 32L, the first bell win will occur regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, and in all other cases the fifth supplementary win may occur.

As already explained, in the slot machine 10, when in the non-CB state, reel control that allows up to four symbols to slide after the stop buttons 42-44 are operated is performed on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In other words, reel control that stops each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R within a specified time (190 milliseconds) after the stop buttons 42-44 are operated is performed on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. By performing such reel control, it becomes easier to achieve a winning combination that corresponds to a winning role, and it becomes possible to prevent a winning combination that corresponds to a non-winning role from being achieved. However, because the amount of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that can be slid is limited as described above, if there are five or more symbols among the constituent symbols that make up the combination of symbols for establishing a win on one reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, the constituent symbols may not stop on the main line ML depending on the timing of the operation of the corresponding stop buttons 42 to 44 (this phenomenon is also called a "missed win"). The first bell win, the second bell win, and the various replay wins are winning modes that do not cause a miss if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the corresponding order, while the first to ninth compensation wins, the first watermelon win, the second watermelon win, the cherry win, the first CB win, and the second CB win are winning modes that may cause a miss depending on the timing of the stop operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 relative to the rotation position of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

The index values IV = 7 to 9 are set with the second bell winning data and with any of the seventh to ninth compensation winning data. When the index value IV = 7 is a winning combination, as shown in FIG. 16, if the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second bell winning combination is surely achieved regardless of the type of the second and third stop targets reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and otherwise the seventh compensation winning combination may be achieved. When the index value IV = 8 is a winning combination, if the first stop is the center reel 32M, the second bell winning combination is surely achieved regardless of the type of the second and third stop targets reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and otherwise the ninth compensation winning combination may be achieved. If the index value IV=9 is a win, and the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second bell win will be achieved regardless of the type of the second and third stop targets, reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the operation timing of each stop button 42-44; otherwise, the eighth supplementary win may be achieved.

As shown in Figures 14 and 15, the first bell winning data is set for index value IV = 10. If a win occurs with index value IV = 10, the first bell win is guaranteed to occur, regardless of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, as shown in Figure 16.

As shown in FIG. 14 and FIG. 15, only the first watermelon winning data is set for index value IV=11. When a win occurs with index value IV=11, as shown in FIG. 16, the first watermelon winning can be achieved regardless of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, the first watermelon winning may not be achieved. As shown in FIG. 14 and FIG. 15, only the second watermelon winning data is set for index value IV=12. When a win occurs with index value IV=12, as shown in FIG. 16, the second watermelon winning may be achieved regardless of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, the second watermelon winning may not be achieved.

As shown in Figures 14 and 15, only cherry winning data is set for index value IV=13. When a win occurs with index value IV=13, a cherry winning can occur regardless of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, as shown in Figure 16. However, depending on the operation timing of left stop button 42 relative to the spinning position of left reel 32L, a cherry winning may not occur.

As shown in FIG. 14 and FIG. 15, only the first chance replay winning data is set for index value IV=14. When a win occurs with index value IV=14, as shown in FIG. 16, the first chance replay winning is surely established regardless of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. Also, as shown in FIG. 14 and FIG. 15, only the second chance replay winning data is set for index value IV=15. When a win occurs with index value IV=15, as shown in FIG. 16, the second chance replay winning is surely established regardless of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. Also, as shown in FIG. 14 and FIG. 15, only the normal replay winning data is set for index value IV=16. If a win occurs with index value IV = 16, as shown in Figure 16, a normal replay win is guaranteed regardless of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44.

For the index value IV=17, only the first CB winning data is set as shown in FIG. 14 in the case of the role selection table when three coins are bet, and only the second CB winning data is set as shown in FIG. 15 in the case of the role selection table when two coins are bet. In other words, the first CB winning data is set as a winning role only when the number of bets on the game medium is "3", and the first CB winning can only be achieved when the number of bets on the game medium is "3". Also, the second CB winning data is set as a winning role only when the number of bets on the game medium is "2", and the second CB winning can only be achieved when the number of bets on the game medium is "2". When the first CB winning data is set, if the number of bets on the game medium is "3", the first CB winning can be achieved regardless of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, as shown in FIG. 16. However, there is a possibility that the first CB winning will not be achieved depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. When the second CB winning data is set, if the number of bets on the gaming medium is "2", the second CB winning can be achieved regardless of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, as shown in FIG. 16. However, the second CB winning may not be achieved depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44.

Here, winning data other than the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data is erased in the game in which the winning was made, regardless of whether or not the corresponding winning was made, and is not carried over to subsequent games following the game in which the winning was made. In contrast, the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data are stored and held until the corresponding winning is made, even in subsequent games following the game in which the winning was made, except when the clearing process of the main RAM 74 is performed (partial clearing process (step S104) or full clearing process (step S105) for the first CB winning data, and full clearing process (step S105) for the second CB winning data). In this case, in a game in which either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is carried over, the index value IV corresponding to the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data is excluded from the lottery.

In other words, if the first CB winning data is set in the main RAM 74 as a result of a game being played with the number of bets being "3", and the first CB winning data is carried over because the first CB winning data is not established, the index value IV corresponding to the first CB winning data is excluded from the lottery even if the game is played with the number of bets being "3", and the index value IV corresponding to the second CB winning data is excluded from the lottery even if the game is played with the number of bets being "2". Also, if the second CB winning data is set in the main RAM 74 as a result of a game being played with the number of bets being "2", and the second CB winning data is carried over because the second CB winning data is not established, the index value IV corresponding to the first CB winning data is excluded from the lottery even if the game is played with the number of bets being "3", and the index value IV corresponding to the second CB winning data is excluded from the lottery even if the game is played with the number of bets being "2". This makes it possible to prevent either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data from being newly stored even if either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data has already been stored, and makes it possible to prevent multiple CB winning data from being accumulated and stored.

When the role selection table for betting three coins in FIG. 14 is selected, the probability of winning when the index value IV=1, the probability of winning when the index value IV=2, the probability of winning when the index value IV=3, the probability of winning when the index value IV=4, the probability of winning when the index value IV=5, and the probability of winning when the index value IV=6 are each about 1/21.8. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=7, the probability of winning when the index value IV=8, and the probability of winning when the index value IV=9 are each about 1/21.8. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=10 is about 1/9.4. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=11 is about 1/164. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=12 is about 1/146. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=13 is about 1/423. Furthermore, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 14 is approximately 1/328. The probability of winning when the index value IV = 15 is approximately 1/164. The probability of winning when the index value IV = 16 is approximately 1/7.3. The probability of winning when the index value IV = 17 is approximately 1/3.3.

On the other hand, when the role selection table for two bets in FIG. 15 is selected, the probability of winning at each of the index values IV = 1 to 16 is lower than when the role selection table for three bets is selected. Specifically, when the role selection table for two bets is selected, the probability of winning at each of the index values IV = 1 to 16 is 2/3 or less than when the role selection table for three bets is selected. This makes it possible to increase the probability of a small role win accompanied by a gaming medium and a replay win that grants a replay in a game where a gaming medium "3" is bet, compared to a game where a gaming medium "2" is bet.

However, when the role selection table for betting two coins is selected, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 17 is approximately 1/2.2. In contrast, when the role selection table for betting three coins is selected as described above, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 17 is approximately 1/3.3. This makes it possible to make the probability that the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 in a game executed when "2" gaming media is bet higher than the probability that the first CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 in a game executed when "3" gaming media is bet.

In addition to the role selection table when 3 coins are bet and the role selection table when 2 coins are bet, the main ROM 73 also stores a CB selection table that is referenced in the role selection process (FIG. 13) in each of the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3. Only one index value IV is set in the CB selection table, and normal replay winning data is set in that one index value IV. The probability of winning with that index value IV is 3/10, and if the index value IV is won, a normal replay win is established regardless of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R if the left stop button 42 is operated at a specified timing. If the left stop button 42 is not operated at a specified timing, a normal replay win is not established even if normal replay winning data is stored. On the other hand, if the index value IV is won but the left stop button 42 is not operated at a specified timing, or if the index value IV is not won, a first bell win may be established.

Here, the winning probability is the same for index values IV of "1" to "6" other than index values IV=12 and 15. This applies whether the number of bets on gaming media is "3" or "2". In contrast, the winning probability of index values IV=12 and 15 differs between the setting values of "1" to "6". Specifically, the winning probability of an index value IV=12 is lowest when the setting value is "1", the winning probability increases as the setting value increases, and is highest when the setting value is "6". Also, the winning probability of an index value IV=15 is lowest when the setting value is "1", the winning probability increases as the setting value increases, and is highest when the setting value is "6". This makes it possible to set a difference in the degree of advantage between the setting values of "1" to "6".

Returning to the explanation of the lottery process for winning or losing a role (FIG. 13), after the lottery table is selected in step S402, the index value IV is set to "1" (step S403), and then the judgment value DV used when judging the winning or losing role is set (step S404). In this judgment value setting process, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the current judgment value DV to set a new judgment value DV. Note that in the initial judgment value setting process, the value of the random number acquired in step S401 is set as the current judgment value DV, and the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV (index value IV=1) is added to this random number value to set the new judgment value DV.

After that, a win/loss determination is made for the combination that corresponds to the index value IV (step S405). In determining whether the combination is a win/loss determination, a determination is made as to whether the determination value DV exceeds "65535". If it exceeds "65535" (step S405: YES), a winning data acquisition process is executed to set the winning data that corresponds to the index value IV at that time in the main RAM 74 (step S406).

If the judgment value DV does not exceed "65535" (step S405: NO), it means that the hand corresponding to the index value IV has not been obtained. In such a case, the index value IV is incremented by 1 (step S407), and then it is determined whether or not there is a hand corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a target for which a win/loss judgment should be made (step S408). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV incremented by 1 exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a target for which a win/loss judgment should be made, the process returns to step S404, and the judgment of the hand continues. At this time, in step S404, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the judgment value DV used to judge the win/loss of the previous hand (i.e., the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, and in step S405, the hand is judged to be a win/loss based on the judgment value DV.

When the processing of step S406 is executed, or when a negative judgment is made in step S408, it means that the judgment of the winning or losing combination has been completed. In this case, a first stop information setting process is executed to set stop information for reel stop control (step S409). After that, an advantageous lottery process at the start of the game is executed in step S410, and a first control process for the play area is executed in step S411. The processing contents of these steps S410 and S411 will be explained later.

Then, the stop order notification control process is executed (step S412). In the stop order notification control process, if the current game state is the pseudo bonus state ST4 or the AT state ST5 (see FIG. 19) described later, and if any of the index values IV = 1 to 6 has been won in the role selection process (FIG. 13), a display corresponding to the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first bell to be won is performed on the dual-purpose display unit 66, and a command is sent to the production side MPU 92 to notify the image display device 63 of the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first bell to be won, provided that the number of bets in the current game is "3". Furthermore, if the winning combination has an index value IV of 7 to 9 in the lottery process (FIG. 13), and the number of bets in the current game is "3", a display corresponding to the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that will result in the establishment of the second bell prize is displayed on the dual-purpose display unit 66, and a command is sent to the production-side MPU 92 to notify the image display device 63 of the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that will result in the establishment of the second bell prize. When the production-side MPU 92 receives a command corresponding to the notification of the stop order as described above, it controls the display of the image display device 63 so that the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that corresponds to the command is notified. Note that if the number of bets on the current game is "2", even if the index value IV = 1 to 9 is won in the role selection process (Figure 13) in the pseudo bonus state ST4 or AT state ST5, the image display device 63 and the combined display unit 66 will not notify the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, but the configuration may be such that the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified in the same way as when the number of bets is "3".

Then, the sending process of the game start command is executed (step S413). In this sending process, if any role is won in the current role lottery process (FIG. 13), information corresponding to the winning role, information corresponding to the current game state, and information corresponding to the processing results of steps S410 and S411 are set in the game start command, and the game start command is sent to the production side MPU 92. The game start command is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize that a new game has started, and is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize various information determined by the main side MPU 72. When the production side MPU 92 receives the game start command, it grasps various information in the current game from the game start command and determines the content of the performance in a manner according to the various information grasped. Then, the data table corresponding to the determined content of the performance is read from the production side ROM 93 to the production side RAM 94, and executes the light emission control of the upper lamp 61, the sound output control of the speaker 62, and the display control of the image display device 63 according to the read data table.

Next, the reel control process executed in step S308 of the normal process (FIG. 12) will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 17.

First, a rotation start process is performed to start the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R (step S501). In the rotation start process, it is confirmed whether a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R was started in the previous game, and if not, the process waits until the wait time has elapsed. If the wait time has elapsed, the process resets the wait time for the next game and sets the rotation start information in the motor control storage area provided in the main RAM 74. By performing this process, the stepping motor acceleration process is started in the stepping motor control process of step S206 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R starts to rotate. After that, the process waits until each reel 32L, 32M, 32R rotates at a constant speed at a predetermined rotation speed, and the rotation start process ends. In addition, when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R reaches a constant speed, the main MPU 72 lights up the lamps (not shown) of each stop button 42-44 to notify the player that it is possible to issue a stop command.

Then, it is determined whether any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated (step S502). If none of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated, the process of step S502 is repeated until any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated. If it is determined that any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated, it is determined whether or not the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that are spinning have been operated, that is, whether or not a stop command has been generated (step S503). If a stop command has not been generated, the process returns to step S502, and the process of step S502 is repeated until any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated. If a stop command has been generated, the stop command command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S504). The stop command command is a command for causing the production side MPU 92 to recognize which of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated to generate the stop command. If a stop command has been transmitted, the stop control process shown in steps S505 to S511 is performed to stop the reels that are spinning.

In the stop control process, the symbol number of the reaching symbol that has reached the base position (specifically, the lower row) at the time the stop buttons 42-44 are operated is confirmed (step S505). Specifically, the symbol number of the reaching symbol that has reached the base position is confirmed based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. After that, the number of slips of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that should be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the main RAM 74 (step S506).

In this slot machine 10, five stop patterns are prepared for stopping each reel 32L, 32M, 32R when the stop buttons 42-44 are operated: a stop pattern in which the reaching symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as is, a stop pattern in which the corresponding reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped after sliding for one symbol, a stop pattern in which the reel is stopped after sliding for two symbols, a stop pattern in which the reel is stopped after sliding for three symbols, and a stop pattern in which the reel is stopped after sliding for four symbols. Therefore, in step S506, one of the values "0" to "4" is calculated as the number of slips based on the stop information stored in the main RAM 74.

Then, the calculated slip count is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol, and the symbol number of the stopped symbol that will actually stop at the base position is determined (step S507). Then, it is determined whether the symbol number of the reached symbol of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that should be stopped this time is equal to the symbol number of the stopped symbol (step S508), and if so, a reel stop process is performed to stop the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R (step S509). Then, it is determined whether all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped (step S510). If all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have not stopped, a second stop information setting process is performed (step S511), and the process returns to step S502.

The stop information here refers to information for making the stop mode of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R correspond to the result of the lottery process for winning combinations (FIG. 13). By using this stop information, it is possible to calculate the number of slips (specifically, "0" to "4") for the reaching symbol that reaches the base position when each stop button 42 to 44 is stopped. As the stop information, slip number data showing the correspondence between each symbol and the number of slips is stored in advance in the main ROM 73 in correspondence with each lottery result and the stopping order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. However, this is not limited to this, and the slip number data corresponding to each lottery result and the stopping order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R may be derived during the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, etc.

The processes for setting the above stop information include a first stop information setting process executed in step S409 of the role selection process (FIG. 13) and a second stop information setting process executed in step S511 of the reel control process (FIG. 17). In the first stop information setting process, the stop information is set according to the result of the role selection process. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information stored in the main RAM 74 in the first stop information setting process or the previous second stop information setting process is changed after the reels have stopped. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed based on the set winning data, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the stop results of the stopped reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

When it is determined in step S510 that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, a winning determination process is executed in step S512. In the winning determination process, the type of symbols stopped on the main line ML on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is identified. Then, based on the contents of the winning data stored in the main RAM 74, it is determined whether or not the combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the main line ML on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is a combination of symbols corresponding to a winning role in the role selection process, and if it is a combination of symbols corresponding to a winning role, a winning role is established and a winning corresponding process is executed. In the winning corresponding process, if the winning is a small role winning, information on the number of game media to be awarded is set in the main RAM 74 so that game media can be awarded in the media awarding process. On the other hand, if the winning is a replay winning, a flag setting process is executed so that a replay setting process is executed in the next start waiting process.

After executing the winning determination process, a winning result command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S513). The winning result command contains data indicating whether or not a win has been achieved this time, and if a win has been achieved, contains data indicating the type of win.

Next, the response process at the end of play, which is executed in step S310 of the normal process (FIG. 12), will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 18. Note that since the process of step S310 in the normal process (FIG. 12) is executed after the reel control process (step S308), the response process at the end of play is executed after all of the rotations of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped in one game.

First, CB processing is executed to control the transition and progress of the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S601). In the CB processing, if the first CB winning is established in the current game, the first CB state flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" and the first CB winning data in the main RAM 74 is cleared. Then, a first CB winning command indicating that the game has transitioned to the first CB state ST2 is sent to the production side MPU 92. This changes the game state to the first CB state ST2. In the first CB state ST2, the game is executed only when "3" game media is bet. In the CB processing, if the second CB winning is established in the current game, the second CB state flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" and the second CB winning data in the main RAM 74 is cleared. Then, a second CB winning command indicating that the game has transitioned to the second CB state ST3 is sent to the production side MPU 92. As a result, the game state becomes the second CB state ST3. In the second CB state ST3, the game is executed only when "2" gaming media are bet. In the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, if the first bell is won in the current game, the value of the total award counter provided in the main RAM 74 is incremented by 1. The total award counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the total number of gaming media awarded in the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, and is cleared to "0" when the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 is started. If the value of the total award counter after incrementing by 1 becomes "30", which is the end reference number for the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the CB state flag corresponding to the current CB state ST2, ST3 is cleared to "0". Then, a CB end command indicating that the current CB state ST2, ST3 has ended is sent to the production side MPU 92.

In the corresponding process at the end of the game, after executing the CB process in step S601, if the game state is not the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S602: NO), jump to the process corresponding to the current game state (step S603). Specifically, if the game state is the normal game state ST1, execute the normal process (step S604), if the game state is the pseudo bonus state ST4, execute the pseudo bonus process (step S605), if the game state is the AT state ST5, execute the AT process (step S606), and if the game state is the end preparation state ST6, execute the second control process of the game section (step S607). In addition, if any of the normal process of step S604, the pseudo bonus process of step S605, and the AT process of step S606 is executed, execute the second control process of the game section (step S607). In addition, the second control process (step S607) for the game area is also executed when the game is in either the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3. The processing contents of steps S604 to S607 will be explained in detail later.

If the current game state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, a positive judgment is made in step S602, and the normal processing in step S604, the pseudo bonus processing in step S605, and the AT processing in step S606 are not executed. Therefore, if it is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the processing for progressing to the normal game state ST1, the processing for progressing to the pseudo bonus state ST4, and the processing for progressing to the AT state ST5 are not executed. On the other hand, even if the current game state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the second control processing of the game section in step S607 is executed. Therefore, even if it is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the processing for progressing to the second section SC2 is executed.

<About game status and game area>
Next, the game states and game intervals will be described. FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the game states and game intervals existing in the slot machine 10.

The slot machine 10 has four game states: a normal game state ST1, a first CB state ST2, a second CB state ST3, a pseudo bonus state ST4, an AT state ST5, and a preparation-for-ending state ST6. These game states ST1 to ST6 do not overlap with each other.

The normal game state ST1 is a game state in which the player remains by executing a partial clear process (step S104) or a full clear process (step S105) of the main RAM 74. In addition, when the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 that occurs in the normal game state ST1 ends, or when the end preparation state ST6 ends, the game state becomes the normal game state ST1. In the normal game state ST1, it is possible to play one game regardless of whether the number of bets on the gaming medium is "3" or "2".

In the normal game state ST1, whether three coins or two coins are bet, the expected net increase in game media in one game (the value obtained by subtracting the "number of game media bet in one game" from the "expected number of game media to be awarded in one game") is 0 or less. In addition, in the normal game state ST1, there are a non-internal state in which neither the first CB winning data nor the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, and an internal state in which either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74.

The first CB state ST2 is a game state to which the player enters when a first CB win occurs while the first CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74. In the first CB state ST2, one game can be played when the number of bets on gaming media is "3", but one game cannot be played when the number of bets on gaming media is "2". The second CB state ST3 is a game state to which the player enters when a second CB win occurs while the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74. In the second CB state ST3, one game can be played when the number of bets on gaming media is "2", but because the bet limit is set to "2", it is not possible to bet "3" gaming media.

The first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are game states that do not increase the number of game media owned by the player. Furthermore, both the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are game states that reduce the number of game media owned by the player at the end of the game state compared to the number of game media owned by the player at the start of the game state.

The pseudo bonus state ST4 is a game state that is entered when the conditions for entering the pseudo bonus state ST4 are met in the normal game state ST1. The pseudo bonus state ST4 ends when the number of remaining games to be continued in the pseudo bonus state ST4 becomes "0". When the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends and the conditions for entering the AT state ST5 are not met, the game transitions to the end preparation state ST6.

In the pseudo bonus state ST4, it is possible to play one game regardless of whether the number of bets on the gaming medium is "3" or "2." In the pseudo bonus state ST4, there exist a non-internal state in which neither the first CB winning data nor the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, and an internal state in which either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74.

In the pseudo bonus state ST4, if an index value IV of 1 to 6 is won, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first bell to be won is announced. Also, in the pseudo bonus state ST4, if an index value IV of 7 to 9 is won, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the second bell to be won is announced. If the first bell or the second bell is won, "15" game media is awarded. This makes it possible to increase the expected number of game media awarded in one game in the pseudo bonus state ST4. In the pseudo bonus state ST4, if three coins are bet, the expected net increase in game media in one game exceeds "0", and in the pseudo bonus state ST4, if two coins are bet, the expected net increase in game media in one game is 0 or less.

The AT state ST5 is a game state to which a transition is made when the transition condition to the AT state ST5 is met in the pseudo bonus state ST4. The AT state ST5 ends when the remaining number of game media awarded becomes "0" or when the ending condition of the second section SC2 is met. If the AT state ST5 ends without the ending condition of the second section SC2 described below being met, the game state transitions to the end preparation state ST6. Also, if the AT state ST5 ends when the ending condition of the second section SC2 described below is met, the game state transitions to the normal game state ST1.

In the AT state ST5, one game can be played regardless of whether the number of bets on the gaming medium is "3" or "2." In the AT state ST5, there are a non-internal state in which neither the first CB winning data nor the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, and an internal state in which either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74.

In the AT state ST5, if any of the index values IV = 1 to 6 is won, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first bell to be won is announced. Also, in the AT state ST5, if any of the index values IV = 7 to 9 is won, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the second bell to be won is announced. If the first bell or the second bell is won, "15" game media is awarded. This makes it possible to increase the expected number of game media awarded in one game in the AT state ST5. In the AT state ST5, if three coins are bet, the expected net increase in game media in one game exceeds "0", and in the AT state ST5, if two coins are bet, the expected net increase in game media in one game is 0 or less.

The end preparation state ST6 is a game state to which the player transitions when the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends without the transition condition to the AT state ST5 being met. The end preparation state ST6 is also a game state to which the player transitions when the AT state ST5 ends without the ending condition of the second section SC2, which will be described later, being met.

The end preparation state ST6 ends when one game has been played. When the end preparation state ST6 ends, the normal game state ST1 is entered. In the end preparation state ST6, one game can be played whether the number of gaming media bets is "3" or "2". The end preparation state ST6 is a game state in which the expected net increase in gaming media in one game is 0 or less whether three or two coins are bet. In addition, the end preparation state ST6 has a non-internal state in which neither the first CB winning data nor the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, and an internal state in which either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74.

In a configuration in which various game states ST1 to ST6 exist as described above, a game zone is set in addition to these game states ST1 to ST6. A first zone SC1 and a second zone SC2 are set as game zones. In other words, in this slot machine 10, the factors that determine the game situation are the number of game media bets of "2" and "3", the setting values of "1" to "6", various game states ST1 to ST6, and the game zones of the first zone SC1 and the second zone SC2.

The first section SC1 is a section in which an advantageous gaming state (pseudo bonus state ST4 and AT state ST5) is not initiated in which the expected net increase in gaming media in one game (the value obtained by subtracting the "number of gaming media bet in one game" from the "expected number of gaming media awarded in one game") may exceed "0" by notifying the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, which allows the player to win different winning combinations depending on the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the advantageous gaming state does not continue. When a partial clear process (step S104) or a full clear process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 is executed, the normal gaming state ST1 is entered as the first section SC1. In addition, when an initialization process of the second section SC2 is executed in the second section SC2, the first section SC1 is entered.

In the first section SC1, a transition opportunity to the second section SC2 occurs based on the lottery process (FIG. 13), and the first section SC1 transitions to the second section SC2. In this case, if a game with a bet number of "3" is executed in the first section SC1, a transition opportunity to the second section SC2 may occur, while even if a game with a bet number of "2" is executed in the first section SC1, a transition opportunity to the second section SC2 does not occur. Therefore, a player who expects a transition to the second section SC2 in the first section SC1 needs to execute a game with a bet number of "3" rather than executing a game with a bet number of "2". The second section SC2 is a section in which the advantageous gaming state can be started and in which the advantageous gaming state can be continued. The second section SC2 ends when the pseudo bonus state ST4, AT state ST5, or end preparation state ST6 ends and transitions to the normal gaming state ST1. When the second section SC2 ends, a transition to the first section SC1 occurs.

The ending condition for the second section SC2 is that either of the following conditions is met: the total number of games played by continuing the second section SC2 without transitioning to the first section SC1 reaches the upper limit number of games (specifically, 1500 games), or the limited total net increase in game media reaches the upper limit net increase (specifically, 2400) by continuing the second section SC2 without transitioning to the first section SC1. The limited total net increase in game media refers to the increase in the predetermined difference from the predetermined reference value, where the minimum of the predetermined difference is the predetermined reference value, and the value obtained by subtracting the total number of game media awarded by games played while the second section SC2 is continuing (0 when no game media is awarded) from the total number of game media consumed to play games while the second section SC2 is continuing (0 when no games are being played). If either of these ending conditions is met, even if the game is in the middle of the AT state ST5, the AT state ST5 ends in the game in which the ending condition is met, and the second section SC2 ends, transitioning to the first section SC1 and normal game state ST1. This makes it possible to prevent the second section SC2 from continuing excessively.

The normal game state ST1, the first CB state ST2, and the second CB state ST3 can occur in either the first section SC1 or the second section SC2. On the other hand, the pseudo bonus state ST4, the AT state ST5, and the end preparation state ST6 are never occurred in the first section SC1, but only in the second section SC2.

In the normal game state ST1 in the second section SC2, a lottery process for transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 may be executed based on the results of the lottery process (FIG. 13) for each game, but the lottery process for transition is executed in a game with a bet number of "3" but not in a game with a bet number of "2". In addition, in the normal game state ST1 in the second section SC2, the value of the release game number counter provided in the main RAM 74 is decremented by 1 each time a game is executed, and if the value of the release game number counter after the decrement is "0", the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 is confirmed, but the decrement of the release game number counter is executed in a game with a bet number of "3", but not in a game with a bet number of "2". Therefore, in the normal game state ST1 in the second section SC2, it is more advantageous for the player to execute a game with a bet number of "3" than to execute a game with a bet number of "2".

Even if it is advantageous to execute a game with a bet number of "3" in the normal game state ST1, pseudo bonus state ST4, and AT state ST5 in the second section SC2, the number of game media awarded in a game with a bet number of "2" in any of the normal game state ST1, pseudo bonus state ST4, and AT state ST5 in the second section SC2 is added as the limited total net increase in game media in the second section SC2, and a game with a bet number of "2" in any of the normal game state ST1, pseudo bonus state ST4, and AT state ST5 in the second section SC2 is added as the total number of games executed by continuing the second section SC2. In other words, even though a game with a bet number of "2" in any of the normal game state ST1, pseudo bonus state ST4, and AT state ST5 in the second section SC2 is disadvantageous to the player, the game contributes to the side that establishes the ending condition of the second section SC2. From this perspective, when the player is in the normal game state ST1, the pseudo bonus state ST4, or the AT state ST5 in the second section SC2, it is more advantageous for the player to have a game with a bet of "3" be played than to have a game with a bet of "2" be played.

In the second section SC2, the first CB winning may occur and the second CB winning may occur, similar to the first section SC1. If the first CB winning occurs in the second section SC2, the first CB state ST2 occurs in the second section SC2, and the second section SC2 is maintained even when the first CB state ST2 occurs and after the first CB state ST2 ends. Also, if the second CB winning occurs in the second section SC2, the second CB state ST3 occurs in the second section SC2, and the second section SC2 is maintained even when the second CB state ST3 occurs and after the second CB state ST3 ends. As already explained, the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are both game states in which the number of game media owned by the player at the end of the game state is less than the number of game media owned by the player at the start of the game state. In other words, the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are game states that are disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, games played in either the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 in the second section SC2 are added to the total number of games played as the second section SC2 continues. In other words, even though the games played in the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are disadvantageous to the player, those games end up contributing to the establishment of the ending condition of the second section SC2. Therefore, if the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 occurs in the second section SC2, it will be even more disadvantageous to the player.

<About the second section SC2>
Next, the second section SC2 will be described. First, the first control process of the game section executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 20. The first control process of the game section is executed in step S411, which is a process executed after the winning/losing judgment of the winning combination is completed in the winning combination lottery process (Fig. 13).

First, it is determined whether the second section flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S701). The second section flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to identify whether the play section is the second section SC2 or not; when the second section flag is set to "1", it is the second section SC2, and when the value of the second section flag is "0", it is the first section SC1. When the second section flag is set to "1" (step S701: YES), the processing from step S702 onwards is not executed. As a result, when it is the second section SC2, the direct hit lottery processing in step S706 and the lottery processing for the number of games to be released in step S710 are not executed.

If the second section flag is not set to "1" (step S701: NO), it is determined whether the current game state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S702). If the current game state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S702: YES), the processing from step S703 onwards is not executed. As a result, even if it is the first section SC1, if it is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the processing to set it to the second section SC2 in step S705, the direct hit lottery processing in step S706, and the lottery processing for the number of games to be released in step S710 are not executed.

If the current game state is neither the first CB state ST2 nor the second CB state ST3 (step S702: NO), the number of bets for the current game is determined to be "3" by determining whether the value of the bet number setting counter 74a in the main RAM 74 is "3" (step S703). If the number of bets for the current game is "2" (step S703: NO), the processing from step S704 onwards is not executed. As a result, in a game in which the number of bets is "2" even if it is the first section SC1, the processing for setting the number of bets to the second section SC2 in step S705, the direct hit lottery processing in step S706, and the lottery processing for the number of games to be released in step S710 are not executed.

If the number of bets for the current game is "3" (step S703: YES), it is determined whether any index value IV has been won in the current role selection process (FIG. 13) (step S704). If the current role selection process (FIG. 13) is a miss (step S704: NO), the processes from step S705 onwards are not executed. As a result, even if the first section is SC1, if the role selection process (FIG. 13) is a miss, the process to set it to the second section SC2 in step S705, the direct hit selection process in step S706 and the selection process for the number of games to be released in step S710 are not executed.

If any of the index values IV is selected in the current role selection process (FIG. 13) (step S704: YES), the second section flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1", and the number of continued games counter 74c (see FIG. 9) and the total number of wins counter 74d (see FIG. 9) provided in the main RAM 74 are both cleared to "0" (step S705). Setting the second section flag to "1" results in the second section SC2.

The continued game number counter 74c is a counter that allows the master MPU 72 to determine the number of games that have been played since the start of the second section SC2 when the second section SC2 is continued without the first section SC1 in between. When the value of the continued game number counter 74c in the second section SC2 reaches a value corresponding to the upper limit number of games (specifically, 1500 games), the second section SC2 ends at the game that has been reached, even if the AT state ST5 is in the middle of the state, and the state transitions to the first section SC1, which is the normal game state ST1.

The total acquisition counter 74d is a counter for the master MPU 72 to determine the limited total net increase in game media from the start of the second section SC2 when the second section SC2 is continued without the first section SC1 in between. As already explained, the limited total net increase in game media is the increase in the predetermined difference from the predetermined reference value, where the minimum value of the predetermined difference is the predetermined reference value, and the difference is the amount obtained by subtracting the total number of game media consumed to execute games when the second section SC2 is continuing (0 when no game media is being executed) from the total number of game media awarded by games executed when the second section SC2 is continuing (0 when no game media is being awarded). If the value of the total winnings counter 74d reaches a value corresponding to the upper limit of the net increase in number of coins (specifically, 2,400 coins) in the second section SC2, even if the game is in the middle of the AT state ST5, the second section SC2 ends in the game in which the value is reached, and the game transitions to the first section SC1, which is the normal game state ST1.

Then, a direct hit lottery process is executed (step S706). In the direct hit lottery process, a direct hit lottery table provided in the main ROM 73 and a lottery counter periodically updated in the main RAM 74 are used to determine whether or not a direct hit wins into the pseudo bonus state ST4. In the lottery process for the role in this game (FIG. 13), if the index value IV=11 is won, there is a 2% probability of a direct hit win into the pseudo bonus state ST4, if the index value IV=12 is won, there is a 1% probability of a direct hit win into the pseudo bonus state ST4, if the index value IV=13 is won, there is a 10% probability of a direct hit win into the pseudo bonus state ST4, if the index value IV=14 is won, there is a 5% probability of a direct hit win into the pseudo bonus state ST4, and if the index value IV=15 is won, there is a 2% probability of a direct hit win into the pseudo bonus state ST4. In this case, the lower the probability of winning in the role selection process (FIG. 13) for an index value IV, the higher the probability of a direct win in the pseudo bonus state ST4. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of winning an index value IV with a low winning probability in the role selection process (FIG. 13).

If the direct hit lottery process results in a direct hit win to pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S707: YES), the first transition confirmation flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S708). The first transition confirmation flag is a flag that the main MPU 72 uses to identify that a win to transition to pseudo bonus state ST4 has occurred in the direct hit lottery process (step S706) executed when transitioning to the second section SC2. If the first transition confirmation flag is set to "1", processing is executed to transition the game state to pseudo bonus state ST4 when the current game ends.

Then, the section display unit 67 is turned on (step S709). In the section display unit 67 turning on process, the section display unit 67 is switched from an off state to an on state. This causes the section display unit 67 to start announcing that it is the second section SC2.

If the direct hit lottery process does not result in a direct hit win in the pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S707: NO), a lottery process for the number of release games is executed (step S710). The number of release games is the number of games required until a transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 occurs. In the lottery process for the number of release games, a lottery table for the number of release games pre-stored in the main ROM 73 is first read out, and numerical information is obtained from a lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74. The number of release games is then selected by comparing the numerical information obtained from the lottery counter with the lottery table for the number of release games. In this case, any of 50 games, 100 games, 200 games, 300 games, 400 games, 500 games, 600 games, 700 games, and 800 games is selected as the number of release games. In addition, the probability of selecting each of these numbers of release games is the same. After the lottery process for the number of release games is executed, the number of release games selected in the lottery process for the number of release games is set in the release game number counter in the master RAM 74 (step S711). The release game number counter is a counter that is used by the master MPU 72 to determine the remaining number of release games.

Then, a lighting lottery process for the section display unit 67 is executed (step S712). In the lighting lottery process for the section display unit 67, a lighting lottery table provided in the main ROM 73 and a lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74 are used to determine by lottery whether the section display unit 67 should be turned on from the beginning when the second section SC2 is set this time (i.e., immediately turned on), or whether the section display unit 67 should be turned on when the pseudo bonus state ST4 is subsequently entered (i.e., waiting to be turned on). In the lottery process for the role in this game (FIG. 13), if the index value IV=1 to 10 is selected, there is a 50% probability that the immediate lighting will be selected and a 50% probability that the standby lighting will be selected; if the index value IV=11 is selected, there is a 65% probability that the immediate lighting will be selected and a 35% probability that the standby lighting will be selected; if the index value IV=12 is selected, there is a 62% probability that the immediate lighting will be selected and a 38% probability that the standby lighting will be selected; if the index value IV=13 is selected, there is an 80% probability that the immediate lighting will be selected and a 20% probability that the standby lighting will be selected; % probability of waiting for light to be selected, if index value IV=14 is selected, there is a 75% probability of selecting instant light and a 25% probability of waiting for light to be selected, if index value IV=15 is selected, there is a 70% probability of selecting instant light and a 30% probability of waiting for light to be selected, if index value IV=16 is selected, there is a 40% probability of selecting instant light and a 60% probability of waiting for light to be selected, and if index value IV=17 is selected, there is a 30% probability of selecting instant light and a 70% probability of waiting for light to be selected. In this case, the lower the probability of winning in the role selection process (FIG. 13) for an index value IV, the higher the probability of selecting instant light.

If immediate lighting is selected in the lighting lottery process (step S712) for the section display unit 67 (step S713: YES), lighting process for the section display unit 67 is executed (step S714). In the lighting process for the section display unit 67, the section display unit 67 is switched from an off state to a on state. This causes the section display unit 67 to start announcing that it is in the second section SC2.

On the other hand, if standby is selected in the lighting lottery process (step S712) for the section display unit 67 (step S713: NO), the standby flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S715). The standby flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to identify that the section display unit 67 is waiting to be switched from an off state to a on state in the second section SC2.

Next, the second control process of the play area executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 21. The second control process of the play area is executed in step S607 of the response process at the end of play (FIG. 18). As described above, the response process at the end of play is executed after all of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped spinning in one game, so the second control process of the play area is also executed after all of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped spinning in one game.

If the second section flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" and the current game section is the second section SC2 (step S801: YES), the state of the flag in the main RAM 74 is checked to determine whether the current game state is the end preparation state ST6 (step S802). If the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends without transitioning to the AT state 5, or if the AT state ST5 ends without the ending condition of the second section SC2 being met, the game transitions to the end preparation state ST6.

If the game is in the end preparation state ST6 (step S802: YES), it is determined whether the end preparation completion flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S803). The end preparation completion flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to determine whether one game has been played in the end preparation state ST6. In the pseudo bonus process (step S605) in the response process at the end of the game (FIG. 18), if it is determined that the remaining number of continued games in the pseudo bonus state ST4 is 0 games and that the game will transition to the normal game state ST1 after that, a flag is set to set the game to the end preparation state ST6 and the end preparation completion flag is cleared to "0". In addition, in the AT process (step S606) in the response process at the end of the game (FIG. 18), if it is determined that the remaining number of game media awarded in the AT state ST5 is "0" and that the game will transition to the normal game state ST1, a flag is set to set the game to the end preparation state ST6 and the end preparation completion flag is cleared to "0".

If the end preparation complete flag is not set to "1" (step S803: NO), the end preparation complete flag is set to "1" (step S804), and the processing from step S805 onwards is executed. If the end preparation complete flag is set to "1" (step S803: YES), this means that one game has been played in the end preparation state ST6. In this case, processing is executed to end the second section SC2.

Specifically, the initialization process of the second section SC2 is first executed (step S814). In the initialization process of the second section SC2, the second section flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". This makes the game section the first section SC1. In addition, in the initialization process of the second section SC2, even if the game is in the AT state ST5, the game state is shifted to the normal game state ST1 by clearing various data (including the AT state flag) indicating that the game is in the AT state ST5, including a counter for storing the remaining number of game media awarded in the AT state ST5. Note that even if the game is in the middle of the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the initialization process of the second section SC2 is executed, and the second section SC2 is terminated, but the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are not terminated and are continued as they are.

After that, if the section display unit 67 is in a lit state, the section display unit 67 is switched from a lit state to an off state (step S815). This ends the notification on the section display unit 67 that it is the second section SC2. Then, a second section initialization command indicating that the second section SC2 has been initialized is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S816). This causes the production side MPU 92 to execute a performance corresponding to the end of the second section SC2.

If the game is not in the end preparation state ST6 (step S802: NO), or if the processing of step S804 has been executed, the value of the continued game number counter 74c in the master RAM 74 is incremented by 1 (step S805). As already explained, the continued game number counter 74c is a counter that allows the master MPU 72 to determine the number of games that have been played since the start of the second section SC2 when the second section SC2 is continued without the first section SC1 in between.

After that, it is determined whether the value of the continued game number counter 74c after adding 1 is equal to or greater than 1500, which is the upper limit number of games (step S806). If the value of the continued game number counter 74c is equal to or greater than 1500, this means that the ending condition for the second section SC2 has been met. In this case, a positive determination is made in step S806, and processing is executed in steps S814 to S816 to end the second section SC2. The processing contents of steps S814 to S816 have already been explained. As a result, the second section SC2 ends and the first section SC1 is entered, and the AT state ST5 is forcibly ended and the normal game state ST1 is entered, even if the AT state ST5 is in the middle of the AT state ST5.

If the value of the continued game number counter 74c is less than 1500 (step S806: NO), it is determined whether any of the first chance replay win, second chance replay win, and normal replay win has been achieved in the current game (step S807). In this case, whether the number of bets in the current game is "2" or "3", it is subject to the determination in step S807, and also whether the current game is in any of the game states of normal game state ST1, first CB state ST2, second CB state ST3, pseudo bonus state ST4, and AT state ST5.

If no replay win has been achieved (step S807: NO), the number of bets for the current game (i.e., the value of the bet number setting counter 74a) is subtracted from the total win number counter 74d in the main RAM 74 (step S808). In this case, even if a replay win was achieved in the previous game and the current game is a game that corresponds to a replay due to the achievement of the replay win, the number of bets for the current game (i.e., the value of the bet number setting counter 74a) is subtracted from the total win number counter 74d.

As already explained, the total acquisition counter 74d is a counter for the master MPU 72 to determine the limited total net increase in game media from the start of the second section SC2 when the second section SC2 continues without the first section SC1 in between. As already explained, the limited total net increase in game media is the increase in the predetermined difference from the predetermined reference value, where the minimum value of the predetermined difference is the predetermined difference obtained by subtracting the total number of game media consumed to execute games while the second section SC2 is continuing (0 when no game media is being executed) from the total number of game media awarded by games executed while the second section SC2 is continuing (0 when no game media is being awarded).

Then, it is determined whether any of the minor winnings (1st to 9th compensation winnings, 1st bell winning, 2nd bell winning, 1st watermelon winning, 2nd watermelon winning, and cherry winning) that will result in the awarding of gaming media in the current game has been achieved (step S809). In this case, whether the number of bets in the current game is "2" or "3", it is subject to the determination in step S809, and also whether the current game is in any of the gaming states of the normal gaming state ST1, the 1st CB state ST2, the 2nd CB state ST3, the pseudo bonus state ST4, and the AT state ST5. If the determination in step S809 is positive, the number of gaming media awarded in the current game is added to the total winning number counter 74d of the main RAM 74 (step S810).

If a negative judgment is made in step S809, or if the processing of step S810 is executed, it is judged whether the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d in the main RAM 74 is equal to or greater than 0 (step S811). If the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d is less than 0 (step S811: NO), the total acquisition number counter 74d is cleared to "0" (step S812).

As described above, since the bet number for the current game is subtracted from the total winnings counter 74d in step S808, for example, if no small winnings are achieved in the game in the normal game state ST1 immediately after the transition to the second section SC2, the value of the total winnings counter 74d will be less than 0. In this case, by making a negative judgment in step S811, the total winnings counter 74d is cleared to "0" in step S812. As a result, when the value obtained by subtracting the "total number of game media consumed to execute games in a situation where the second section SC2 is continuing ("0" when games are not being executed)" from the "total number of game media awarded by games executed in a situation where the second section SC2 is continuing ("0" when no game media is awarded)" is set as the predetermined difference number, the minimum value of the predetermined difference number is set as the predetermined reference value, and the limited total net increase in game media, which is the increase in the above-mentioned predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value, can be measured using the total winnings counter 74d.

If a positive judgment is made in step S807, if a positive judgment is made in step S811, or if the processing of step S812 is executed, it is judged whether the value of the total winning number counter 74d exceeds the upper limit net increase number of "2400" (step S813). If the value of the total winning number counter 74d exceeds "2400", it means that the ending condition of the second section SC2 is established. In this case, a positive judgment is made in step S813, and the processing to end the second section SC2 in steps S814 to S816 is executed. The processing contents of steps S814 to S816 have already been explained. As a result, the second section SC2 ends and becomes the first section SC1, and even if the AT state ST5 is in the middle of the AT state ST5, the AT state ST5 is forcibly ended and becomes the normal game state ST1.

If any replay win is achieved, a positive determination is made in step S807, and the processing of steps S808 to S812 is not executed. In a game in which a replay win is achieved, the gaming media owned by the player at the start of the game are used to set the bet, but as a benefit from the replay win, the player can replay a new game with the same number of bets as the number of bets in the game in which the replay win was achieved. In other words, the number of gaming media owned by the player does not change in a game in which a replay win is achieved. In this case, by not executing the processing of steps S808 to S812 in a game in which a replay win is achieved, it is possible to omit the execution of the processing to change the value of the total winnings counter 74d in a game in which the number of gaming media owned by the player does not change, and it is possible to avoid the execution of unnecessary processing.

On the other hand, even in a game in which a replay win has been achieved, in step S813, it is determined whether the value of the total winnings counter 74d exceeds the upper limit net increase of "2400". As a result, even if the value of the total winnings counter 74d has already exceeded the upper limit net increase of "2400" in a game prior to the game in which a replay win has been achieved, but the initialization process for the second section SC2 has not been performed due to noise or other reasons, it is possible to determine that the value of the total winnings counter 74d exceeds the upper limit net increase of "2400" in the game in which a replay win has been achieved thereafter, and it is possible to perform the initialization process for the second section SC2.

If a negative judgment is made in step S813, an ending corresponding process is executed (step S817). In the ending corresponding process, it is judged whether the sum of the value of the continued game number counter 74c in the main RAM 74 and the value of the AT continuation counter 74e in the main RAM 74 divided by the expected acquisition value of the gaming medium in the AT state ST5 is equal to or greater than the upper limit game number of the second section SC2, provided that the first ending flag provided in the main RAM 74 is not set to "1". The AT continuation counter 74e is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the remaining number of awarded gaming media in the AT state ST5. The expected acquisition value of the gaming medium in one game in the AT state ST5 is about 5 pieces. As already explained, the upper limit game number of the second section SC2 is set to 1500 games. Note that the upper limit game number of the second section SC2 is not limited to 1500 games, and may be less than 1500 games or more than 1500 games.

If the value of the above sum is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of games in the second section SC2, the first ending flag in the master RAM 74 is set to "1". The first ending flag is a flag that allows the master MPU 72 to identify that the number of games played in the second section SC2, measured using the continued game counter 74c, is likely to reach the upper limit number of games. When the first ending flag is set to "1", no addition of the remaining number of points to be awarded occurs in the AT state ST5. This makes it possible to prevent further addition of the remaining number of points to be awarded in the AT state ST5 in a situation where the ending condition for the second section SC2 is met.

In addition, in this slot machine 10, the above sum value will not exceed the upper limit number of games in the second section SC2 during the pseudo bonus state ST4, but it may be configured so that it can exceed the upper limit number of games. In this case, it is preferable to set the first ending flag to "1" when the sum of the value of the continuing game number counter 74c in the main RAM 74, the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter provided in the main RAM 74, and the value obtained by dividing the value of the AT continuation counter 74e provided in the main RAM 74 by the expected acquisition value of the gaming medium in the AT state ST5 becomes equal to or exceeds the upper limit number of games in the second section SC2.

When the first ending flag is set to "1", the first ending command is sent to the production side MPU 92. When the production side MPU 92 receives the first ending command in a situation where the production has not yet started in an execution mode corresponding to the ending period, if the game state at that time is AT state ST5, the production side MPU 92 uses the reception of the first ending command as a trigger to change the execution mode of the production in the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 to the execution mode corresponding to the ending period. On the other hand, when the production side MPU 92 receives the first ending command in a situation where the production has not yet started in an execution mode corresponding to the ending period and the game state is not AT state ST5, when the game state transitions to AT state ST5, the production side MPU 92 changes the execution mode of the production in the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 to the execution mode corresponding to the ending period.

In the ending response process, on the condition that the second ending flag in the main RAM 74 is not set to "1", it is determined whether the sum of the value of the total acquisition counter 74d in the main RAM 74 and the value of the AT continuation counter 74e in the main RAM 74 is equal to or greater than the upper limit net increase in the second section SC2. As already explained, the upper limit net increase in the second section SC2 is set to 2400. Note that the upper limit net increase in the second section SC2 is not limited to 2400, and may be less than 2400 or more than 2400.

If the value of the above sum is equal to or greater than the upper limit net increase in the second section SC2, the second ending flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1". The second ending flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to identify that there is a high possibility that the limited total net increase in the number of gaming media measured using the total acquisition counter 74d will reach the upper limit net increase. When the second ending flag is set to "1", no addition of the remaining number of awards occurs in the AT state ST5. This makes it possible to prevent further addition of the remaining number of awards in the AT state ST5 in a situation where the ending condition for the second section SC2 is met.

In addition, in this slot machine 10, the above sum will never exceed the upper limit of net gain in the second section SC2 during the pseudo bonus state ST4, but it may be configured so that it can exceed the upper limit of net gain. In this case, the second ending flag may be set to "1" when the sum of the value of the total acquisition counter 74d in the main RAM 74, the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter in the main RAM 74 multiplied by the expected acquisition value of gaming media in the pseudo bonus state ST4, and the value of the AT continuation counter 74e in the main RAM 74, is equal to or greater than the upper limit of net gain in the second section SC2.

When the second ending flag is set to "1", a second ending command is sent to the production side MPU 92. When the production side MPU 92 receives the second ending command in a situation where the production has not yet started in an execution mode corresponding to the ending period, if the game state at that time is AT state ST5, the production side MPU 92 uses the reception of the second ending command as a trigger to change the execution mode of the production in the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 to an execution mode corresponding to the ending period. On the other hand, when the production side MPU 92 receives the second ending command in a situation where the production has not yet started in an execution mode corresponding to the ending period and the game state is not AT state ST5, when the game state transitions to AT state ST5, the production side MPU 92 changes the execution mode of the production in the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 to an execution mode corresponding to the ending period.

<Regarding normal gaming state ST1>
Next, the processing contents in the normal gaming state ST1 will be described.

In the normal game state ST1, in the advantageous lottery process (step S410) at the start of the game in the lottery process for the hand (FIG. 13), the second section flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1", the current game state is not the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, and the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main RAM 74 is "3". In the lottery process for the current hand (FIG. 13), it is determined whether or not the index value IV = 11 to 15 has been won, and if it has been won, the transition lottery process is executed. In the transition lottery process, a transition lottery table provided in the main ROM 73 and a lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74 are used to determine by lottery whether or not to transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4. In this case, the lower the probability of winning in the lottery process for the hand (FIG. 13), the higher the probability of winning the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4. If the transition lottery process results in a win to transition to pseudo bonus state ST4, the second transition confirmation flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1".

In the normal game state ST1, in the normal processing (step S604) in the corresponding processing at the end of the game (FIG. 18), if the first transition confirmation flag or the second transition confirmation flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1", a process is executed to transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4. As already explained, the first transition confirmation flag is set to "1" when a direct hit is won in the direct hit lottery processing (step S706) in the first control processing of the game area (FIG. 20), and the second transition confirmation flag is set to "1" when a transition is won in the transition lottery processing in the advantageous lottery processing at the start of the game (step S410), as already explained. If the first transition confirmation flag is set to "1", the pseudo bonus continuation counter of the main RAM 74 is set to "50", thereby setting the pseudo bonus state ST4 to continue until 50 games with the number of bets of "3" are executed. If the second transition confirmation flag is set to "1", the pseudo bonus continuation counter in the main RAM 74 is set to "20", thereby setting a pseudo bonus state ST4 that continues until 20 games with a bet amount of "3" have been played. In addition, a command indicating a transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 is sent to the presentation side MPU 92. By receiving this command, the presentation side MPU 92 causes the presentation corresponding to the pseudo bonus state ST4 to be executed on the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63.

In the normal process (step S604), if neither the first transition confirmation flag nor the second transition confirmation flag in the master RAM 74 is set to "1", the value of the release game number counter in the master RAM 74 is subtracted by 1 under the conditions that the second section flag in the master RAM 74 is set to "1", the current game state is not the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, and the value of the bet number setting counter 74a in the master RAM 74 is "3". If the value of the release game number counter after subtraction of 1 is "0", the pseudo bonus continuation counter in the master RAM 74 is set to "20", thereby setting the pseudo bonus state ST4 in which the game with the bet number of "3" is executed 20 times. In addition, a command indicating that the state has been changed to the pseudo bonus state ST4 is sent to the production side MPU 92. By receiving the command, the production side MPU 92 causes the production corresponding to the pseudo bonus state ST4 to be executed on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63.

In the normal processing (step S604), when processing for transitioning to the pseudo bonus state ST4 is executed and the lighting standby flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1", the section display unit 67 is switched from an off state to an on state. This causes the section display unit 67 to start announcing that it is the second section SC2.

<About the pseudo bonus state ST4>
Next, the processing contents in the pseudo bonus state ST4 will be described. Fig. 22 is a flow chart showing the processing for the advantageous state at the start of the game executed by the main MPU 72. The advantageous lottery processing at the start of the game is executed in step S410, which is a process executed after the winning/losing judgment of the role is completed in the role lottery processing (Fig. 13) and before the first control processing (step S411) of the play area. The advantageous state processing at the start of the game is executed when the advantageous lottery processing at the start of the game is executed in a situation in the pseudo bonus state ST4 or the AT state ST5.

First, it is determined whether the number of bets for the current game is "3" by determining whether the value of the bet number setting counter 74a in the main RAM 74 is "3" (step S901). If the number of bets for the current game is "2" (step S901: NO), the processing from step S902 onwards is not executed. As a result, in a game where the number of bets is "2", even if the game is in the pseudo bonus state ST4 or AT state ST5, the processing from step S902 onwards is not executed.

If the number of bets for the current game is "3" (step S901: YES), it is determined whether the current game state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S902). If the current game state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S902: YES), the processing from step S903 onwards is not executed. As a result, even if the pseudo bonus state flag or the AT state flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1", if the state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the processing from step S903 onwards is not executed.

If the current game state is not the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S902: NO), it is determined whether the pseudo bonus state flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" to determine whether the current game state is the pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S903). If the current game state is not the pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S903: NO), this means that the current game state is the AT state ST5, so AT state processing at the start of the game is executed (step S904). The AT state processing at the start of the game will be described later.

If the current game state is the pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S903: YES), it is determined whether the AT transition confirmation flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S905). The AT transition confirmation flag is a flag that the main MPU 72 uses to determine whether the transition conditions to the AT state ST5 have already been met in the pseudo bonus state ST4. If the AT transition confirmation flag has already been set to "1" (step S905: YES), this means that the transition conditions to the AT state ST5 have already been met in the current pseudo bonus state ST4, and therefore no processing is performed to determine whether to transition to the AT state ST5 in steps S906 and after.

If the AT transition confirmation flag is not set to "1" (step S905: NO), the AT transition lottery process is executed (step S907) on the condition that the index value IV = 11 to 15 is won in the lottery process for the role in the current game (Figure 13) (step S906: YES). In the AT transition lottery process, using the AT transition lottery table provided in the main ROM 73 and the lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74, it is determined by lottery whether or not to transition to the AT state ST5 after the end of the current pseudo bonus state ST4. In the lottery process for the role in this game (FIG. 13), if the index value IV=11 is selected, there is a 20% probability of winning the AT transition, if the index value IV=12 is selected, there is a 10% probability of winning the AT transition, if the index value IV=13 is selected, there is a 40% probability of winning the AT transition, if the index value IV=14 is selected, there is a 30% probability of winning the AT transition, and if the index value IV=15 is selected, there is a 20% probability of winning the AT transition. In this case, the lower the probability of winning the lottery process for the role (FIG. 13), the higher the probability of winning the AT transition. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of winning an index value IV with a low probability of winning in the lottery process for the role (FIG. 13).

If the AT transition is won (step S908: YES), the AT transition confirmation flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S909). After that, an AT transition winning command indicating that the AT transition has been won is sent to the performance side MPU 92 (step S910). When the performance side MPU 92 receives the AT transition winning command, it causes the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 to execute a performance indicating that the AT transition has been won.

Next, the pseudo bonus processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 23. The pseudo bonus processing is executed in step S605 of the response processing at the end of play (Figure 18). As described above, the response processing at the end of play is executed after all of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped spinning in one game, so the pseudo bonus processing is also executed after all of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped spinning in one game.

First, it is determined whether the number of bets for the current game is "3" by determining whether the value of the bet number setting counter 74a in the main RAM 74 is "3" (step S1001). If the number of bets for the current game is "2" (step S1001: NO), the processing from step S1002 onwards is not executed. As a result, even if a game with the number of bets of "2" is executed in the pseudo bonus state ST4, the number of remaining continued games in the pseudo bonus state ST4 is not subtracted.

Note that when in the CB state (first CB state ST2 or second CB state ST3), the pseudo bonus process (Figure 23) itself is not executed, so even if the CB state is started in the middle of the pseudo bonus state ST4, the number of games played in the CB state is not treated as the number of games played in the pseudo bonus state ST4. Therefore, even if the CB state is transitioned to in the middle of the pseudo bonus state ST4, after the CB state ends, the pseudo bonus state ST4 will resume from the state of the remaining number of continued games immediately before transitioning to the CB state.

If the number of bets on the current game is "3" (step S1001: YES), the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter in the main RAM 74 is decremented by 1 (step S1002). After that, it is determined whether the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter is "0" (step S1003). If the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter is "0" (step S1003: YES), it is determined whether the AT transition confirmation flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1004).

If the AT transition confirmation flag is set to "1" (step S1004: YES), it means that the transition condition to the AT state ST5 has been met in the current pseudo bonus state ST4. In this case, first, the pseudo bonus state flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1005). Then, information corresponding to "200", which is the initial number of awards in the AT state ST5, is set in the AT continuation counter 74e provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1006). In addition, the AT state flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1007). Then, an AT transition command indicating that a transition to the AT state ST5 will occur is sent to the performance side MPU 92 (step S1008). When the performance side MPU 92 receives the AT transition command, it causes the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 to perform a performance indicating that a transition to the AT state ST5 will occur.

On the other hand, if the AT transition confirmation flag is not set to "1" (step S1004: NO), a process for setting the end preparation state ST6 is executed (step S1009). In this setting process, the pseudo bonus state flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". In addition, in this setting process, the end preparation state flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1". The end preparation state flag is a flag that the main MPU 72 uses to identify that the game is in the end preparation state ST6, and setting the end preparation state flag to "1" changes the game state to the end preparation state ST6. In addition, the end preparation complete flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1010). As already explained, the end preparation complete flag is a flag that the main MPU 72 uses to identify whether or not one game has been played in the end preparation state ST6.

As already explained, in the end preparation state ST6, if a positive judgment is made in step S802 in the second control process for the game section (FIG. 21) and the end preparation complete flag is not set to "1" (step S803: NO), the end preparation complete flag is set to "1" and then processing is executed to determine whether the ending condition for the second section SC2 has been met, and the second control process for the game section in the current game (FIG. 21) is terminated. On the other hand, if the end preparation complete flag is set to "1" (step S803: YES), processing is executed to terminate the second section SC2 and transition to the first section SC1 (steps S814 to S816). As a result, the second section SC2 ends when the game following the game in which the pseudo bonus state ST4 ended ends.

After executing the processing of step S1010, a bonus end command indicating that the pseudo bonus state ST4 has ended is sent to the presentation side MPU 92 (step S1011). When the presentation side MPU 92 receives the bonus end command, it causes the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 to perform a presentation indicating that the pseudo bonus state ST4 has ended.

<About AT state ST5>
Next, the processing contents in the AT state ST5 will be described. Fig. 24 is a flowchart showing the processing for the AT state at the start of the game executed by the main MPU 72. As already explained, the processing for the AT state at the start of the game is executed in step S904 in the processing for the advantageous state at the start of the game (Fig. 22).

First, it is determined whether or not either the first ending flag or the second ending flag of the master RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1101). As already explained, the first ending flag is a flag for the master MPU 72 to identify that the number of games played in the second section SC2, which is measured using the continued game number counter 74c, is likely to reach the upper limit number of games. As already explained, the second ending flag is a flag for the master MPU 72 to identify that the limited total net increase in the number of game media, which is measured using the total acquisition number counter 74d, is likely to reach the upper limit net increase. If either the first ending flag or the second ending flag is set to "1" (step S1101: YES), the processing from step S1102 onwards is not executed. As a result, in a situation where the number of games played in the second section SC2 is likely to reach the upper limit number of games, or in a situation where the limited total net increase in the number of game media is likely to reach the upper limit net increase, the processing for adding the remaining number of awards in the AT state ST5 from step S1102 onwards is not executed.

If both the first ending flag and the second ending flag are not set to "1" (step S1101: NO), the lottery process for adding is executed (step S1103) on the condition that the lottery process for the hand in the current game (FIG. 13) has won one of the index values IV = 11 to 15. In the lottery process for adding, a lottery is used to determine whether or not to generate an addition that increases the remaining number of game media in the AT state ST5, using the lottery counter for adding provided in the main ROM 73 and the lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74. In this case, two types of modes are set for increasing the remaining number of game media in the AT state ST5 when an addition is won: a direct hit mode that increases the remaining number of game media immediately in the game, and a main premonition state mode that increases the remaining number of game media when the number of waiting games (specifically 10 games) corresponding to the premonition state is consumed from the game. In addition, in the lottery process for adding, even if an addition is not won, it may be a false premonition win. If a false premonition is won, the false premonition state will be generated from that game until the number of waiting games mentioned above (specifically, 10 games) has been played.

In both the main premonition state and the false premonition state, the content of the presentation is determined according to a table corresponding to the premonition state so that the presentation content of each game on the image display device 63 is more likely to be performed with a high expectation of an increase in the remaining number of game media awarded in the AT state ST5. In this case, in the main premonition state and the false premonition state, a more flashy presentation is performed on the final game side than on the starting game side. Specifically, in some consecutive games including the final game of the main premonition state and the false premonition state, a presentation in which the same character is displayed between multiple games or a presentation according to a series of stories may be performed. Also, the main premonition state is more likely to perform a presentation with a high expectation than the false premonition state. In the main premonition state, a presentation is displayed to make the player aware that an increase in the remaining number of awards will occur in the final game of the game with the above number of waiting games, and in the false premonition state, a presentation is displayed to make the player aware that an increase in the remaining number of awards will not occur in the final game of the game with the above number of waiting games.

Specifically, regarding the additional lottery process, when the index value IV=11 is selected, there is a 5% probability of a direct win with the number of grant targets being 30, a 5% probability of a real premonition state win with the number of grant targets being 30, a 5% probability of a direct win with the number of grant targets being 50, a 5% probability of a real premonition state win with the number of grant targets being 50, a 10% probability of a false premonition state win, and a 70% probability of a miss. When the index value IV=12 is selected, there is a 5% probability of a direct win with the number of grant targets being 20, a 5% probability of a real premonition state win with the number of grant targets being 20, a 5% probability of a direct win with the number of grant targets being 40, a 5% probability of a real premonition state win with the number of grant targets being 40, a 10% probability of a false premonition state win, and a 70% probability of a miss. If index value IV = 13 is won, there is a 10% chance that a direct win with 30 coins to be awarded will be selected, there is a 10% chance that a real premonition state win with 30 coins to be awarded will be selected, there is a 10% chance that a direct win with 50 coins to be awarded will be selected, there is a 10% chance that a real premonition state win with 50 coins to be awarded will be selected, there is a 10% chance that a direct win with 100 coins to be awarded will be selected, there is a 10% chance that a real premonition state win with 100 coins to be awarded will be selected, there is a 20% chance that a false premonition state win will be selected, and there is a 20% chance that it will be a miss. If index value IV = 14 is won, there is a 10% chance that a direct win with 20 coins to be awarded will be selected, there is a 10% chance that a real premonition state win with 20 coins to be awarded will be selected, there is a 10% chance that a direct win with 40 coins to be awarded will be selected, there is a 10% chance that a real premonition state win with 40 coins to be awarded will be selected, there is a 10% chance that a direct win with 90 coins to be awarded will be selected, there is a 10% chance that a real premonition state win with 90 coins to be awarded will be selected, there is a 20% chance that a false premonition state win will be selected, and there is a 20% chance that it will be a miss. If index value IV=15 is selected, there is a 5% chance that a direct win with 30 coins will be selected, a 5% chance that a real premonition win with 30 coins will be selected, a 5% chance that a direct win with 50 coins will be selected, a 5% chance that a real premonition win with 50 coins will be selected, a 10% chance that a false premonition win will be selected, and a 70% chance that it will be a miss.

As described above, the lower the index value IV is in the winning probability in the lottery process for the role (Figure 13), the higher the probability of an additional win. Also, the lower the index value IV is in the winning probability in the lottery process for the role (Figure 13), the higher the expected value of the additional award number. Also, the lower the index value IV is in the winning probability in the lottery process for the role (Figure 13), the higher the probability of a false premonition state win. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of winning an index value IV with a low winning probability in the lottery process for the role (Figure 13).

If a direct win is selected in the top-up lottery process (step S1103) (step S1104: YES), the value of the number of awards selected as a direct win in this top-up lottery process (step S1103) is added to the AT continuation counter 74e of the main RAM 74 (step S1105). After that, a direct win command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S1106). The direct win command is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize that a direct win has occurred in the top-up lottery process (step S1103) and the number of awards in that direct win. When the production side MPU 92 receives a direct win command, it causes the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 to display an indication that an addition has been made to the remaining number of awards of gaming media in the AT state ST5.

If the winning of this premonition state is selected in the additional lottery process (step S1103) (step S1107: YES), the value of the number of awards selected as the winning of this premonition state in this additional lottery process (step S1103) is added to the planned number counter 74f (see Figure 9) provided in the master RAM 74 (step S1108). The planned number counter 74f is a counter that allows the master MPU 72 to determine the number of awards to be added to the AT continuation counter 74e in the final game of the waiting game number in this premonition state.

Then, it is determined whether the real premonition flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1109). The real premonition flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to identify that the current state is a real premonition state. If the real premonition flag is not set to "1" (step S1109: NO), it is determined whether the false premonition flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1110). The false premonition flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to identify that the current state is a false premonition state. If the false premonition flag is not set to "1" (step S1110: NO), "10" is set in the standby counter 74g (see FIG. 9) provided in the main RAM 74 as a value corresponding to the number of standby games for which the real premonition state will continue (step S1111). The standby counter 74g is a counter for the main MPU 72 to identify the remaining number of standby games when the real premonition state or the false premonition state is in effect.

When the player is already in the premonition state and the role selection process (Fig. 13) selects one of the index values IV = 11 to 15, an additional selection process is executed. If the additional selection process results in a direct win, the number of awards selected as the direct win is added to the AT continuation counter 74e of the main RAM 74, even if the player is in the middle of the premonition state.

If the winning of the main premonition state is determined by the additional lottery process executed in a situation where the main premonition state is already in the main premonition state, the number of awards selected as the winning of the main premonition state is added to the scheduled number counter 74f of the main RAM 74, so that when the current main premonition state ends, the value of the scheduled number counter 74f after the addition is added to the AT continuation counter 74e. In other words, if the winning of the main premonition state occurs in the middle of the main premonition state, the number of awards added to the AT continuation counter 74e when the current main premonition state ends increases by the number of awards selected in the newly won main premonition state. However, even if the new main premonition state is won, if the main premonition flag of the main RAM 74 is already set to "1", a positive judgment is made in step S1109, and the number of waiting games is not set to the waiting counter 74g in step S1111. Therefore, even if the winning of the main premonition state is determined in the additional lottery process in the middle of the main premonition state, the number of waiting games in the main premonition state is not extended. This will make it possible to prevent this precursor state from continuing excessively.

If the real premonition state is won in the additional lottery process executed in a situation where the false premonition state is already in a false premonition state, the number of awards selected as the winning of the real premonition state is added to the scheduled number counter 74f of the main RAM 74, so that the false premonition state is promoted to the real premonition state in the middle. Then, when the real premonition state after the promotion ends, the value of the scheduled number counter 74f is added to the AT continuation counter 74e. However, even if the real premonition state is won in the middle of the false premonition state, if the false premonition flag of the main RAM 74 is already set to "1", a positive judgment is made in step S1110, and the number of waiting games is not set to the waiting counter 74g in step S1111. Therefore, even if the real premonition state is won in the additional lottery process in the middle of the false premonition state, the real premonition state after the promotion ends when the remaining waiting games of the false premonition state before the promotion are consumed. This makes it possible to prevent the false premonition state and the real premonition state from continuing excessively.

If a positive judgment is made in step S1109, if a positive judgment is made in step S1110, or if the processing of step S1111 is executed, a real premonition command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S1112). The real premonition command is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize that a real premonition state has been won in the additional lottery process (step S1103) and the number of awards for the real premonition state. When the production side MPU 92 receives the real premonition command, it causes the performance corresponding to the real premonition state to be executed by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63. After that, the real premonition flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1", and the false premonition flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1113).

If the winning of the false premonition state is selected in the additional lottery process (step S1103) (step S1114: YES), it is determined whether the value of the standby counter 74g of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S1115). If the value of the standby counter 74g is "0" (step S1115: NO), "10" is set to the standby counter 74g as a value corresponding to the number of standby games for which the false premonition state will continue (step S1116). Then, a false premonition command is sent to the performance side MPU 92 (step S1117). The false premonition command is a command for making the performance side MPU 92 recognize that the false premonition state has been won in the additional lottery process (step S1103). When the performance side MPU 92 receives the false premonition command, it causes the performance corresponding to the false premonition state to be executed on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. Then, the false sign flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1118).

On the other hand, even if the false premonition state is won, if the value of the standby counter 74g is 1 or more (step S1115: YES), the process to start the false premonition state in steps S1116 to S1118 is not executed. Therefore, even if the false premonition state is won in the additional lottery process (step S1103) when the real premonition state or false premonition state is already in effect, a new false premonition state is not set, and the number of standby games for the real premonition state or false premonition state that is currently in progress is not increased. This makes it possible to prevent the premonition state from continuing excessively.

Figure 25 is a flowchart showing the AT processing executed by the main MPU 72. The AT processing is executed in step S606 in the response processing at the end of play (Figure 18). As described above, the response processing at the end of play is executed after all of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped spinning in one game, so the AT processing is also executed after all of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped spinning in one game.

First, it is determined whether the number of bets for the current game is "3" by determining whether the value of the bet number setting counter 74a in the main RAM 74 is "3" (step S1201). If the number of bets for the current game is "2" (step S1201: NO), the processing from step S1202 onwards is not executed. As a result, even if a game with the number of bets of "2" is executed in the AT state ST5, the remaining number of awards in the AT state ST5 is not subtracted, and further, if a real premonition state or a false premonition state occurs in the AT state ST5, the number of waiting games for that premonition state is not subtracted.

Note that when in the CB state (first CB state ST2 or second CB state ST3), the AT processing (Figure 25) itself is not executed, so even if the CB state starts in the middle of the AT state ST5, the number of games played in the CB state is not treated as the number of games played in the AT state ST5. Therefore, even if the AT state transitions to the CB state in the middle of the AT state ST5, after the CB state ends, the AT state ST5 will resume from the state of the remaining number of awards immediately before the transition to the CB state.

If the number of bets in the current game is "3" (step S1201: YES), it is determined whether a small win has been achieved in the current game and a number of game media greater than the number of bets "3" has been awarded (step S1202). Specifically, it is determined whether any of the first bell win, the second bell win, the first watermelon win, and the second watermelon win has been awarded. If a positive determination is made in step S1202, a subtraction process is executed on the AT continuation counter 74e of the main RAM 74, provided that the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is 1 or more (step S1203: YES). In this subtraction process, the number of bets "3" is subtracted from the number of game media awarded in the current game, and the value after the subtraction is subtracted from the AT continuation counter 74e.

Note that, without being limited to the above configuration, when game media is awarded when the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is 1 or more, the number of awards itself may be subtracted from the value of the AT continuation counter 74e without subtracting the number of bets. In this case, the AT state ST5 ends when the total number of game media paid out is equal to or greater than the termination reference number. In addition, if the award of game media exceeding the number of bets or a replay win is not established, the number of game media of the player that was reduced by the execution of the game may be added to the AT continuation counter 74e. In this case, the AT state ST5 ends when the total net increase in the number of game media is equal to or greater than the termination reference number.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1202, if a negative judgment is made in step S1203, or if the processing of step S1204 is executed, and the value of the standby counter 74g in the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S1205: YES), the value of the standby counter 74g is decremented by 1 (step S1206). Then, if the value of the standby counter 74g after the decrement is "0" (step S1207: YES), it is determined whether the main sign flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1208).

If the present premonition flag is set to "1" (step S1208: YES), it means that the premonition state that is ending this time is the present premonition state. In this case, an addition process of the remaining number of awards is executed (step S1209). In this addition process, the value set in the planned number counter 74f of the main RAM 74 is added to the AT continuation counter 74e. As a result, when the final game of the present premonition state ends, the number of awards of gaming media that were the subject of award in the present premonition state is added to the remaining number of awards of gaming media in the AT state ST5.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1208 or if the processing of step S1209 is executed, the real precursor flag and the false precursor flag in the main RAM 74 are each cleared to "0" (step S1210). As a result, if the current state is a real precursor state, the real precursor state ends, and if the current state is a false precursor state, the false precursor state ends.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1205, if a negative judgment is made in step S1207, or if the processing of step S1210 is executed, it is determined whether the value of the AT continuation counter 74e in the main RAM 74 is "0" (step S1211). If the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is "0" (step S1211: YES), this means that the remaining number of game media awarded in the current AT state ST5 has become "0". In this case, it is determined whether the value of the standby counter 74g in the main RAM 74 is "0" or not to determine whether the current state is a real premonition state or a false premonition state (step S1212).

If the current state is neither a real premonition state nor a false premonition state, and the value of the standby counter 74g of the master RAM 74 is "0" (step S1212: YES), a process for setting the end preparation state ST6 is executed (step S1213). In this process, the AT state flag of the master RAM 74 is cleared to "0". In this process, the end preparation state flag of the master RAM 74 is set to "1". The end preparation state flag is a flag for the master MPU 72 to identify that the state is in the end preparation state ST6, and setting the end preparation state flag to "1" changes the game state to the end preparation state ST6. After that, the end preparation complete flag of the master RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1214). As already explained, the end preparation complete flag is a flag for the master MPU 72 to identify whether or not one game has been played in the end preparation state ST6.

As already explained, in the end preparation state ST6, if a positive judgment is made in step S802 in the second control process for the game section (FIG. 21) and the end preparation complete flag is not set to "1" (step S803: NO), the end preparation complete flag is set to "1" and then processing is executed to determine whether the ending condition for the second section SC2 is met, and the second control process for the game section in the current game (FIG. 21) is terminated. On the other hand, if the end preparation complete flag is set to "1" (step S803: YES), processing is executed to terminate the second section SC2 and transition to the first section SC1 (steps S814 to S816). As a result, the second section SC2 ends when the game following the game in which the AT state ST5 has ended ends.

Then, an AT end command is sent to the presentation side MPU 92 (step S1215). The AT end command is a command for making the presentation side MPU 92 recognize that the AT state ST5 has ended. When the presentation side MPU 92 receives the AT end command, it controls the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 so that a presentation indicating that the AT state ST5 has ended is executed, and then a presentation corresponding to the normal game state ST1 is started.

On the other hand, if the current state is the real premonition state or the false premonition state and the value of the standby counter 74g of the master RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S1212: NO), even if the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is "0" and the remaining number of game media awarded in the current AT state ST5 is "0", the process to end the AT state ST5 in steps S1213 to S1215 is not executed. As a result, even if the remaining number of game media awarded in the AT state ST5 becomes "0", if it is the real premonition state or the false premonition state, the AT state ST5 continues without ending. If it is the real premonition state, the value of the scheduled number counter 74f of the master RAM 74 is added to the AT continuation counter 74e in the final game of the real premonition state, so that the AT state ST5 continues even after the real premonition state ends. If the player is in a false premonition state, the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is not incremented in the final game of the false premonition state. However, if a direct win occurs in the additional lottery process (step S1103) during the false premonition state, the number of selected awards is incremented to the AT continuation counter 74e, so the AT state ST5 can continue even after the false premonition state ends.

Figure 26 is a flowchart showing the performance control process for AT executed by the performance side MPU 92. The performance control process for AT is repeatedly executed by the performance side MPU 92 at a relatively short cycle (e.g., 4 millisecond cycle).

If an AT transition command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1301: YES), the AT base table pre-stored in the performance side ROM 93 is read into the performance side RAM 94 (step S1302). The performance execution control is performed according to the AT base table, so that the upper lamp 61 produces a light emission performance corresponding to the base performance of the AT state ST5, the speaker 62 produces a sound output performance corresponding to the base performance of the AT state ST5, and the image display device 63 produces a display performance corresponding to the base performance of the AT state ST5.

Figure 27 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the base presentation of the AT state ST5 in the image display device 63. As shown in Figure 27 (a), in the base presentation for the AT state ST5, a moving image of the base image G11 is displayed by a base character image. In addition, a remaining number display image G12 is displayed to notify the remaining number of game media awarded in the AT state ST5, and an acquired number display image G13 is displayed to notify the number of game media acquired in the AT state ST5. The presentation side MPU 92 is capable of grasping the remaining number of game media awarded in the AT state ST5 and the number of game media acquired in the AT state ST5 based on commands received from the main side MPU 72, and appropriately updates the display contents of the remaining number display image G12 and the acquired number display image G13 according to the grasped information.

If a direct hit winning command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1303: YES), the number of awards in the current direct hit winning is determined from the information contained in the direct hit winning command (step S1304), and the direct hit winning table corresponding to the determined number of awards is read from the performance side ROM 93 to the performance side RAM 94 (step S1305). By controlling the execution of the performance according to the direct hit winning table, the upper lamp 61 performs a light emission performance corresponding to the direct hit winning, the speaker 62 performs a sound output performance corresponding to the direct hit winning in the AT state ST5, and the image display device 63 performs a display performance corresponding to the direct hit winning. In this case, the image display device 63 displays an image to notify the number of awards in the current direct hit winning, superimposed on a part of the base performance of the AT state ST5, and after the display, the number of awards is added to the number in the remaining award number display image G12. The remaining award number display image G12 displays the number resulting from adding the number of awards in the current direct hit winning to the remaining number of awards up to that point. This allows the player to understand that the remaining number of prizes has increased due to a direct hit.

Here, even if a direct win occurs during the actual premonition state or the false premonition state, in the game in which that direct win occurs, the image display device 63 displays an image superimposed on part of the presentation of the actual premonition state or the false premonition state to notify the player of the number of prizes awarded in this direct win, and after this display is made, a display is made in which the number of prizes awarded is added to the number in the remaining prize number display image G12. Therefore, the player can understand that the remaining number of prizes has increased due to the direct win, even if the player is in the middle of the actual premonition state or the false premonition state.

If a false premonition command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S1306: YES), the false premonition table is read from the performance side ROM 93 to the performance side RAM 94 (step S1307). The performance execution control is performed according to the false premonition table, so that the upper lamp 61 produces a light emission performance corresponding to the false premonition state, the speaker 62 produces a sound output performance corresponding to the false premonition state, and the image display device 63 produces a display performance corresponding to the false premonition state.

27(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a display effect corresponding to the false premonition state or the real premonition state in the image display device 63. As shown in FIG. 27(b), in the display effect corresponding to the false premonition state or the real premonition state, the remaining number of awarded items display image G12 and the number of acquired items display image G13 are displayed in the same manner as the base effect for the AT state ST5. In addition, in the display effect corresponding to the false premonition state or the real premonition state, a moving image of the premonition effect image G14 is displayed by the premonition effect character image. In the premonition effect image G14, an effect with a high expectation of an increase in the remaining number of awarded game media in the AT state ST5 is easily executed. In addition, a more flashy effect is executed on the final game side than on the starting game side of the false premonition state or the real premonition state. Specifically, in some consecutive games including the final game, an effect in which the same character is displayed between multiple games or an effect according to a series of stories may be executed. In addition, in the final game of the false premonition state, an image is displayed that allows the player to recognize that the remaining number of awarded game media in the AT state ST5 will not increase. In the situation shown in FIG. 27(b), the remaining number of gaming media awarded in the AT state ST5 is "0" in the middle of the false premonition state, so the remaining number of awards display image G12 shows "0 remaining," but since the false premonition state is in the middle of the state, the AT state ST5 continues without ending.

If the main premonition command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S1308: YES), the number of prizes selected due to the main premonition state winning that triggered the transmission of this main premonition command is determined from the information contained in the main premonition command, and the determined planned number is added to the planned prize number counter provided in the performance RAM 94 (step S1309). After that, it is determined whether the current performance is in progress for the main premonition state or the false premonition state (step S1310).

If the performance of the real premonition state or the false premonition state is not being executed (step S1310: NO), the real premonition table is read from the performance side ROM 93 to the performance side RAM 94 (step S1311). The performance execution control is performed according to the real premonition table, so that the upper lamp 61 performs a light emission performance corresponding to the real premonition state, the speaker 62 performs a sound output performance corresponding to the real premonition state, and the image display device 63 performs a display performance corresponding to the real premonition state. The content of the display performance of the image display device 63 corresponding to the real premonition state is the same as the content of the display performance corresponding to the false premonition state except for the final game, and the remaining award number display image G12, the acquisition number display image G13, and the premonition performance image G14 are displayed as a moving image as shown in FIG. 27 (b). In the final game of the real premonition state, an image for notifying the number of awards corresponding to the value of the planned award number counter in the performance side RAM 94 is displayed, and after the display, the number of awards is added to the number in the remaining award number display image G12. The remaining number of awards display image G12 shows the number of awards remaining up to that point plus the number of awards at the end of this premonition state. This allows the player to understand that the remaining number of awards has increased due to this premonition state.

If the performance of the real premonition state or the false premonition state is being executed (step S1310: YES), a correction process is executed (step S1312). In the correction process, if the current state is in the middle of the false premonition state, the data corresponding to the performance of the final game in the false premonition table read into the performance side RAM 94 is changed to data that enables the execution of a performance corresponding to an increase in the remaining number of awarded game media in the AT state ST5 and enables the notification of the number of awards corresponding to the value of the award constant counter in the performance side RAM 94. Also, if the current state is in the middle of the real premonition state, the data corresponding to the performance of the final game in the real premonition table read into the performance side RAM 94 is changed to data that enables the notification of the number of awards corresponding to the value of the award constant counter in the performance side RAM 94 after the addition in step S1309.

As already explained, even if the real premonition state is won during the false premonition state or the real premonition state, the value of the standby counter 74g of the master RAM 74 is not changed, so the number of remaining standby games in the current premonition state is not changed, and after the real premonition state is won, the remaining number of standby games is consumed and the real premonition state ends. Therefore, even if the real premonition state is won during the false premonition state or the real premonition state, the performance MPU 92 only modifies the data of the final game in the premonition table for executing the performance corresponding to the current premonition state, and does not perform processing to increase the number of games in which the performance corresponding to the premonition state is executed. This makes it possible for the master MPU 72 to notify the player of the number of awards to be added in a game in which the value of the scheduled number counter 74f of the master RAM 74 is added to the AT continuation counter 74e of the master RAM 74.

If an AT end command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1313: YES), the AT end table is read from the performance side ROM 93 to the performance side RAM 94 (step S1314). The performance execution control is performed according to the AT end table, so that the upper lamp 61 produces a light emission performance corresponding to the end of the AT state ST5, the speaker 62 produces a sound output performance corresponding to the end of the AT state ST5, and the image display device 63 produces a display performance corresponding to the end of the AT state ST5.

Figure 27 (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a display effect corresponding to the end of AT state ST5 on the image display device 63. As shown in Figure 27 (c), in the display effect corresponding to the end of AT state ST5, a moving image of an end image G15 using an end character image is displayed. In addition, a text image G16 saying "END" is displayed to clearly indicate that the AT state ST5 has ended, and a total number of game media image G17 is displayed to notify the total number of game media acquired in this AT state ST5.

In the AT presentation control process (Figure 26), in addition to the above processes, other processes are also executed (step S1315). In the other processes, data to be referenced in various tables is updated as the game progresses, and the presentation content is updated. In addition, when game media is awarded, a process is executed to update the display content of the remaining award number display image G12 and the acquisition number display image G13 accordingly. In addition, when a first ending command or a second ending command is received from the main MPU 72, a process is executed to perform an ending presentation.

Next, the progress of the presentation corresponding to the premonition state will be explained with reference to the time chart in Figure 28. Figure 28(a) shows the period in AT state ST5, Figure 28(b) shows the value of the AT continuation counter 74e in the main RAM 74, Figure 28(c) shows the value of the standby counter 74g in the main RAM 74, Figure 28(d) shows the timing of a direct win in the additional lottery process (step S1103), Figure 28(e) shows the period in the real premonition state, and Figure 28(f) shows the period in the false premonition state.

First, we will explain the case where the AT state ST5 ends when the value of the AT continuation counter 74e becomes "0" during the false precursor state and the false precursor state ends.

At timing t1, the AT state ST5 starts as shown in FIG. 28(a). In this case, the AT continuation counter 74e is set to "200", which is the initial number of awards in the AT state ST5, as shown in FIG. 28(b). In the AT state ST5, the game is repeatedly executed, and the number of game media awarded in the game exceeds the number of bets, so that the value of the AT continuation counter 74e gradually decreases as shown in FIG. 28(b).

After that, at the timing of t2, a direct win occurs in the additional lottery process (step S1103) as shown in FIG. 28(d). Therefore, at the timing of t2, the value of the AT continuation counter 74e increases as shown in FIG. 28(b).

After that, at timing t3, the main premonition state is won in the additional lottery process (step S1103), and the main premonition state begins as shown in FIG. 28(e), and the standby counter 74g is set to "10" corresponding to the number of standby games as shown in FIG. 28(c). Even in the main premonition state, a game is played and gaming media exceeding the number of bets is awarded, so that the value of the AT continuation counter 74e gradually decreases as shown in FIG. 28(b). Also, as the game is played in the main premonition state, the value of the standby counter 74g gradually decreases as shown in FIG. 28(c).

After that, at timing t4, the value of the standby counter 74g becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 28(c), and the premonition state ends as shown in FIG. 28(e). In this case, the number of grants set in the planned number counter 74f of the main RAM 74 when the premonition state starts is added to the AT continuation counter 74e, and the value of the AT continuation counter 74e increases as shown in FIG. 28(b).

After that, at the timing of t5, the false premonition state is won in the additional lottery process (step S1103), and the false premonition state starts as shown in FIG. 28(f), and the standby counter 74g is set to "10" corresponding to the number of standby games as shown in FIG. 28(c). Even in the false premonition state, the game is executed and the number of game media exceeding the number of bets is awarded, so that the value of the AT continuation counter 74e gradually decreases as shown in FIG. 28(b). Also, as the game is executed in the false premonition state, the value of the standby counter 74g gradually decreases as shown in FIG. 28(c). After that, at the timing of t6, the value of the standby counter 74g becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 28(c), and the false premonition state ends as shown in FIG. 28(f). In the false premonition state, the number of awards is not added, so the AT continuation counter 74e does not increase as shown in FIG. 28(b).

After that, at timing t7, the false premonition state is won in the additional lottery process (step S1103), and the false premonition state begins as shown in FIG. 28(f), and the standby counter 74g is set to "10" corresponding to the number of standby games as shown in FIG. 28(c). Even in the false premonition state, a game is played and gaming media exceeding the number of bets is awarded, so that the value of the AT continuation counter 74e gradually decreases as shown in FIG. 28(b). Also, as a game is played in the false premonition state, the value of the standby counter 74g gradually decreases as shown in FIG. 28(c).

After that, at the timing of t8 in the middle of the false premonition state, the value of the AT continuation counter 74e becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 28(b). However, at the timing of t8, the value of the standby counter 74g is 1 or more as shown in FIG. 28(c), and the false premonition state is in the middle, so even if the value of the AT continuation counter 74e becomes "0", the AT state ST5 continues without ending. After that, at the timing of t9, the value of the standby counter 74g becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 28(c), and the false premonition state ends as shown in FIG. 28(f). Since the number of additions does not occur in the false premonition state, the AT continuation counter 74e does not increase as shown in FIG. 28(b). Also, at the timing of t9, the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is already "0" as shown in FIG. 28(b). Therefore, at the timing of t9, the AT state ST5 ends as shown in FIG. 28(a).

Next, we will explain the case where the value of the AT continuation counter 74e becomes "0" in the middle of the false premonition state and a direct win occurs in the middle of the false premonition state.

As shown in FIG. 28(a), when the false premonition state is won in the additional lottery process (step S1103) at timing t10 in AT state ST5, the false premonition state begins as shown in FIG. 28(f), and the standby counter 74g is set to "10" corresponding to the number of standby games as shown in FIG. 28(c). Even in the false premonition state, a game is played and gaming media exceeding the number of bets is awarded, so that the value of the AT continuation counter 74e gradually decreases as shown in FIG. 28(b). Also, when a game is played in the false premonition state, the value of the standby counter 74g gradually decreases as shown in FIG. 28(c).

After that, at timing t11, which is in the middle of the false precursor state, the value of the AT continuation counter 74e becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 28(b). However, at timing t11, as shown in FIG. 28(c), the value of the standby counter 74g is 1 or more and the false precursor state is in the middle, so even if the value of the AT continuation counter 74e becomes "0", the AT state ST5 continues without ending.

After that, at timing t12 in the middle of the false premonition state, a direct win occurs in the additional lottery process (step S1103) as shown in FIG. 28(d). Therefore, at timing t12, as shown in FIG. 28(b), the number of awards selected in the direct win is added to the AT continuation counter 74e, and the value of the AT continuation counter 74e becomes 1 or more. When the value of the AT continuation counter 74e becomes 1 or more, a game is played in the false premonition state and gaming media is awarded in excess of the number of bets, and the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is decremented as shown in FIG. 28(b).

After that, the value of the standby counter 74g becomes "0" at the timing of t13 as shown in FIG. 28(c), and the false premonition state ends as shown in FIG. 28(f). In the false premonition state, the number of granted points is not added, so the AT continuation counter 74e does not increase as shown in FIG. 28(b). However, at the timing of t13, the number of granted points increased at the timing of t12 does not become "0" as shown in FIG. 28(b), so the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is 1 or more. Therefore, even if the false premonition state ends, the AT state ST5 continues. After that, the value of the AT continuation counter 74e becomes "0" at the timing of t14 as shown in FIG. 28(b), and the AT state ST5 ends as shown in FIG. 28(a).

Next, we will explain the case where the value of the AT continuation counter 74e becomes "0" in the middle of the false premonition state and the main premonition state is won in the middle of the false premonition state.

As shown in FIG. 28(a), when the false premonition state is won in the additional lottery process (step S1103) at timing t15 in AT state ST5, the false premonition state begins as shown in FIG. 28(f), and the standby counter 74g is set to "10" corresponding to the number of standby games as shown in FIG. 28(c). Even in the false premonition state, a game is played and gaming media exceeding the number of bets is awarded, so that the value of the AT continuation counter 74e gradually decreases as shown in FIG. 28(b). Furthermore, when a game is played in the false premonition state, the value of the standby counter 74g gradually decreases as shown in FIG. 28(c).

After that, at timing t16 in the middle of the false precursor state, the value of the AT continuation counter 74e becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 28(b). However, at timing t16, as shown in FIG. 28(c), the value of the standby counter 74g is 1 or more and the false precursor state is in the middle, so even if the value of the AT continuation counter 74e becomes "0", the AT state ST5 continues without ending.

After that, at timing t17, which is in the middle of the false premonition state, the additional lottery process (step S1103) results in a win to the real premonition state, and the false premonition state is promoted to the real premonition state, as shown in Figures 28(e) and 28(f). However, as shown in Figure 28(c), the number of waiting games is not reset in the waiting counter 74g, and the remaining number of waiting games is carried over as is.

At the timing of t18, the value of the standby counter 74g becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 28(c), and the premonition state ends as shown in FIG. 28(e). In this case, when the premonition state starts, the number of grants set in the planned number counter 74f of the main RAM 74 is added to the AT continuation counter 74e, and the value of the AT continuation counter 74e increases as shown in FIG. 28(b). Therefore, even if the premonition state ends, the AT state ST5 continues. After that, at the timing of t19, the value of the AT continuation counter 74e becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 28(b), and the AT state ST5 ends as shown in FIG. 28(a).

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

When the AT state ST5 is in a real premonition state or a false premonition state, the AT state ST5 continues without ending even if the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is "0", i.e., the number of remaining awarded game media in the AT state ST5 becomes "0". This makes it possible to create a situation in which the AT state ST5 can continue even if the number of remaining awarded game media in the AT state ST5 becomes "0". It also makes it possible to prevent the execution of the performance in the real premonition state or the false premonition state from ending midway due to the end of the AT state ST5.

In particular, in the case of a false premonition state that does not trigger an increase in the remaining number of granted gaming media in the AT state ST5, the AT state ST5 continues without terminating even if the remaining number of granted gaming media in the AT state ST5 becomes "0". This makes it possible to turn a false premonition state, which only serves as a presentation that does not affect the player's profits when the remaining number of granted gaming media is not "0", into a state for continuing the AT state ST5 when the remaining number of granted gaming media is "0", making it possible to increase the player's attention to the false premonition state.

If the AT state ST5 continues even if the remaining number of game media awarded in the AT state ST5 is "0" due to the false premonition state, the AT state ST5 will also end if the false premonition state ends with the remaining number remaining at "0". This makes it possible to prevent the AT state ST5 from continuing excessively.

If a direct win occurs in the additional lottery process in the AT state ST5, the remaining number of gaming media awarded in the AT state ST5 will increase, and the player will hope that a direct win will occur in the AT state ST5. In this case, if the AT state ST5 continues even if the remaining number of awards is "0" due to the false premonition state, the remaining number of awards will increase if a direct win occurs in this continued situation. This makes it possible for the player to hope for a direct win even in a situation in which the AT state ST5 continues due to the false premonition state.

Even if a real premonition or false premonition win occurs during a real premonition or false premonition state, the number of remaining games in the premonition state will remain the same and will not increase. This makes it possible to prevent the false premonition state from continuing excessively.

Second Embodiment
In this embodiment, the replay winning mode and the game content in the pseudo bonus state ST4 are different from those of the first embodiment. The following describes the configurations that are different from the first embodiment. Note that the description of the same configurations as the first embodiment will be omitted.

Figure 29 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the combinations of symbols that result in a normal replay win, a first special replay win, and a second special replay win.

As shown in FIG. 29, in this embodiment, if the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L is a "replay" pattern, the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "replay" pattern, and the stopping pattern on the right reel 32R is a "replay" pattern on the main line ML, if the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L is a "replay" pattern, the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "replay" pattern, and the stopping pattern on the right reel 32R is a "red 7" pattern on the main line ML, if the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L is a "replay" pattern, the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "red 7" pattern, and the stopping pattern on the right reel 32R is a "red 7" pattern on the main line ML, If the stopping pattern on the M is a "replay" pattern and the stopping pattern on the right reel 32R is a "red 7" pattern, if the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "replay" pattern, the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "replay" pattern and the stopping pattern on the right reel 32R is a "BAR" pattern, if the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "replay" pattern, the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "BAR" pattern and the stopping pattern on the right reel 32R is a "BAR" pattern, or if the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L is a "BAR" pattern, the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "replay" pattern and the stopping pattern on the right reel 32R is a "BAR" pattern, then a replay will usually be won.

In this embodiment, in addition to the normal replay win, the first chance replay win, and the second chance replay win, the first special replay win and the second special replay win are set as replay wins. If the stopped pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "red 7" pattern, the stopped pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "red 7" pattern, and the stopped pattern on the right reel 32R is a "red 7" pattern, the first special replay win is made. If the stopped pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "BAR" pattern, the stopped pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "BAR" pattern, and the stopped pattern on the right reel 32R is a "BAR" pattern, the second special replay win is made.

In this slot machine 10, as in the first embodiment, when the slot machine is in a non-CB state, reel control is performed on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, allowing the reels to slide up to four symbols after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated. In other words, reel control is performed on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, allowing the reels to stop within a specified time (190 milliseconds) after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated. By performing such reel control, it is possible to easily achieve a winning combination corresponding to a winning role, and it is possible to prevent a winning combination corresponding to a non-winning role from being achieved. However, since the amount of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that can be slid is limited as described above, if five or more symbols exist among the constituent symbols that constitute the combination of symbols for achieving a winning role on one reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, the constituent symbols may not stop on the main line ML depending on the timing of operation of the corresponding stop buttons 42 to 44. The first special replay win and the second special replay win are winning modes that may not be achieved depending on the timing of the stop operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 relative to the rotation positions of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Figure 30 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the role selection table when betting three coins in this embodiment, which is selected when the setting value is "3" and the number of bets is "3". Note that in the following explanation, the explanatory diagram in Figure 31 will be referred to as appropriate.

The index values IV=1 to 16 are set with the same winning data and point value PV as those in the role selection table (FIG. 14) when three coins are bet in the first embodiment described above. Also, the index value IV=19 is set with the same winning data and point value PV as those in the index value IV=17 in the role selection table (FIG. 14) when three coins are bet in the first embodiment described above.

Normal replay winning data and first special replay winning data are set for index value IV=17. When a win occurs with index value IV=17, as shown in FIG. 31, if the first stop is the left reel 32L or the center reel 32M, a normal replay winning is surely achieved regardless of the type of the second and third stop targets reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of the stop buttons 42-44. On the other hand, if the first stop is the right reel 32R, either the first special replay winning or the normal replay winning is surely achieved regardless of the type of the second and third stop targets reels 32L, 32M, 32R. In this case, if the operation timing of each stop button 42-44 relative to the rotational position of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is such that the first special replay win can be achieved, the first special replay win is prioritized, and if the operation timing is such that the first special replay win cannot be achieved, a regular replay win is achieved.

Index value IV=18 is set with normal replay winning data, first special replay winning data, and second special replay winning data. When index value IV=18 is won, as shown in FIG. 31, if the first stop is the left reel 32L or the center reel 32M, a normal replay winning is surely achieved regardless of the type of the second and third stop targets reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. On the other hand, if the first stop is the right reel 32R, any of the first special replay winning, second special replay winning, and normal replay winning is surely achieved regardless of the type of the second and third stop targets reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In this case, if the operation timing of each stop button 42-44 relative to the rotational position of reels 32L, 32M, 32R is such that a first special replay win can be achieved, the first special replay win is prioritized, if the operation timing is such that a second special replay win can be achieved, the second special replay win is prioritized, and if the operation timing is such that neither the first nor second special replay win can be achieved, a normal replay win is achieved.

Here, the symbol arrangement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R in this embodiment is the same as the symbol arrangement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R in the first embodiment shown in Figure 4. In the configuration in which the right reel 32R needs to be stopped as the first stop in order to establish the first special replay winning or the second special replay winning when the index value IV = 18 is won as described above, there are more symbols than four symbols, which is the number of symbols for the maximum number of slips, between the "red 7" symbol and the "BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R as shown in Figure 4. Therefore, when the right stop button 44 is operated to stop the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML of the right reel 32R in order to establish the first special replay winning when the index value IV = 18 is won, the "BAR" symbol will not stop on the main line ML, and the second special replay winning will not be established because the "BAR" symbol does not stop. Also, when the right stop button 44 is operated to stop the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML of the right reel 32R in order to establish the second special replay winning when the index value IV=18 is hit, the "red 7" symbol will not stop on the main line ML, and the first special replay winning will not be established because the "red 7" symbol will not stop. In other words, when the right reel 32R is stopped for the first time in the case of a win of the index value IV=18, in a configuration in which the stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed so that the first special replay winning and the second special replay winning are prioritized over the normal replay winning, the priority between the first special replay winning and the second special replay winning is not set in the stop control, and it is possible to select which of the first special replay winning and the second special replay winning will be established depending on the timing of the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 by the player.

As shown in FIG. 30, the point value PV for index value IV=17 is set to "600", and the point value PV for index value IV=18 is set to "200", so the probability of winning with index value IV=17 is approximately 1/109, and the probability of winning with index value IV=18 is approximately 1/328. In other words, the index value IV=18, which can result in both the first special replay win and the second special replay win, has a lower probability of winning than the index value IV=17, which can result in only the first special replay win of the first and second special replay wins.

In the pseudo bonus state ST4, if the index value IV = 17 is won in the lottery process (FIG. 13) of the role in the pseudo bonus state ST4, a notification is made on the main line ML to encourage the establishment of the first special replay prize. Also, in the pseudo bonus state ST4, if the index value IV = 18 is won in the lottery process (FIG. 13), if the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4 is in the state, a notification is made on the main line ML to encourage the establishment of the first special replay prize, and if the second half of the pseudo bonus state ST4 is in the state, a notification is made on the main line ML to encourage the establishment of the second special replay prize. These notifications will be explained with reference to the explanatory diagrams of FIG. 32(a) and FIG. 32(b). FIG. 32(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the state in which a notification is made on the main line ML to encourage the establishment of the first special replay prize, and FIG. 32(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the state in which a notification is made on the main line ML to encourage the establishment of the second special replay prize. The first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4 refers to the situation up until half of the initial number of continuing games (20 or 50 games) when the pseudo bonus state ST4 is started has been played, and the second half of the pseudo bonus state ST4 refers to the situation after half of the initial number of continuing games has been played.

In the pseudo bonus state ST4, when the index value IV = 17 is won in the lottery process for the role (Fig. 13), or when the index value IV = 18 is won in the lottery process for the role (Fig. 13) in the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, the image display device 63 displays a stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the second and third stop targets are of any type, as shown in Fig. 32 (a1), and displays a message indicating that the player should aim for the "red 7" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. In addition, the dual-use display unit 66 displays a stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the second and third stop targets are of any type, as shown in Fig. 32 (a2). Then, by stopping the rotation of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the order indicated by the notification and operating the stop buttons 42-44 on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to aim for the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol, and a combination of "red 7" symbols and "red 7" symbols are displayed stationary on the main line ML as shown in FIG. 32(a3).

In the pseudo bonus state ST4, if the index value IV = 17 is won, or in the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, if the index value IV = 18 is won, it is determined that the AT state ST5 will be entered after the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends. In this case, in such a situation, the right reel 32R is stopped first, and a notification is made on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to aim for the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML, and by stopping the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the order according to the notification, and by stopping the stop buttons 42 to 44 on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to aim for the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML, a combination of the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol, and the "red 7" symbol is displayed on the main line ML as shown in FIG. 32 (a3). This makes it possible to notify the player that a transition to AT state ST5 has been confirmed by using the stopping results of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In the pseudo bonus state ST4, even if the index value IV=16, in which only the normal replay winning data is set, wins in the lottery process (FIG. 13), the right reel 32R is stopped for the first time with a predetermined probability (e.g., 20%), and a notification is made to aim for the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In this case, even if the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped in the order according to the notification, and the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated to aim for the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the "red 7" symbol will stop on the main line ML for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R up to the second stop, but the "red 7" symbol will not stop on the main line ML for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R at the third stop. This makes it possible to use notifications such as those mentioned above that encourage players to aim for the "red 7" symbol to create an effect that creates anticipation of a transition to AT state ST5.

When the index value IV = 17 is won in the pseudo bonus state ST4 or when the index value IV = 18 is won in the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, and an announcement to aim for the "red 7" symbol occurs as described above, if the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is not stopped in the order according to the announcement, or if the stop buttons 42 to 44 are not operated at the timing when the "red 7" symbol stops on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the "red 7" symbol, the combination of the "red 7" symbol and the "red 7" symbol are not displayed on the main line ML, and a normal replay win is established. However, even in this case, the AT state ST5 is entered after the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends. This makes it possible to prevent the benefit of the transition to the AT state ST5 from being lost due to the player's stop operation mode.

In the latter half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, when the index value IV=18 is won in the lottery process (FIG. 13), the image display device 63 displays a stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the second and third stop targets are of any type, as shown in FIG. 32(b1), and displays a message indicating that the player should aim for the "BAR" symbol on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In addition, the dual-use display unit 66 displays a stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the second and third stop targets are of any type, as shown in FIG. 32(b2). Then, by stopping the rotation of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the order according to the notification and operating stop buttons 42-44 on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to aim for the "BAR" symbol, a combination of "BAR" symbols, "BAR" symbols, and "BAR" symbols are displayed stationary on the main line ML as shown in FIG. 32(b3).

If an index value IV = 18 is won in the latter half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, it is confirmed that the AT state ST5 will be entered after the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends, and the AT state ST5 will be entered, which is more advantageous than when an index value IV = 17 is won in the pseudo bonus state ST4 and when an index value IV = 18 is won in the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4. Specifically, the initial number of points awarded in the AT state ST5 will be greater than when the AT state ST5 is entered under other conditions. In this case, in such a situation, the right reel 32R is stopped first and a notification is given to aim for the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. By stopping the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the order according to the notification and operating the stop buttons 42 to 44 to aim for the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, a combination of the "BAR" symbol, "BAR" symbol, and "BAR" symbol is displayed on the main line ML as shown in FIG. 32(b3). This makes it possible to notify the player that a transition to the more advantageous AT state ST5 has been confirmed by utilizing the stopping results of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In the latter half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, even if the index value IV=16, in which only the normal replay winning data is set, wins in the lottery process (FIG. 13), the right reel 32R is stopped for the first time with a predetermined probability (for example, 10%), and a notification is made to aim for the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In this case, even if the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped in the order according to the notification, and the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated to aim for the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the "BAR" symbol will stop on the main line ML for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R up to the second stop, but the "BAR" symbol will not stop on the main line ML for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R at the third stop. This makes it possible to use notifications such as those mentioned above that encourage players to aim for the "BAR" symbol to create an effect that encourages players to look forward to a transition to the more favorable AT state ST5.

In the latter half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, when the index value IV=18 is won and a notification to aim for the "BAR" symbol is generated as described above, if the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is not stopped in the order according to the notification, or if the stop buttons 42-44 are not operated at the timing when the "BAR" symbol stops on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the "BAR" symbol, the "BAR" symbol, and the "BAR" symbol combination are not displayed on the main line ML, and a normal replay win is established. However, even in this case, the more advantageous AT state ST5 will be entered after the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends. This makes it possible to prevent the benefit of the transition to the more advantageous AT state ST5 from being lost due to the player's stop operation mode.

Here, the first special replay winning data is set at index value IV=17, and the first special replay winning data and the second special replay winning data are set at index value IV=18. In the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, if index value IV=17 or 18 is won, a notification is made to stop the combination of the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol, and the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML. On the other hand, in the second half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, if index value IV=18 is won, a notification is made to stop the combination of the "BAR" symbol, the "BAR" symbol, and the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML. This makes it possible to increase the probability that a combination of a "red 7" symbol, a "red 7" symbol and a "red 7" symbol will stop on the main line ML in the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4 by utilizing the index value IV=18 for stopping the combination of a "BAR" symbol, a "BAR" symbol and a "BAR" symbol on the main line ML in the second half of the pseudo bonus state ST4.

When index value IV = 17 is hit, if the right reel 32R is stopped first and the stop buttons 42-44 are operated to stop the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the "red 7" symbol, a combination of "red 7" symbols and "red 7" symbols will be displayed stationary on the main line ML even in a gaming state other than pseudo bonus state ST4. Even if the "red 7" symbol, a combination of "red 7" symbols and "red 7" symbols are displayed stationary on the main line ML in a gaming state other than pseudo bonus state ST4, the player will not be awarded any benefits other than the opportunity to play again. In this case, in a configuration in which the first special replay winning data is not set at index value IV=18, if one wishes to maintain the same probability of the "red 7" symbol, the combination of "red 7" symbols and "red 7" symbols being displayed stopped on the main line ML in the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, it becomes necessary to increase the winning probability of index value IV=17. However, if the winning probability of index value IV=17 is increased, then the probability that the "red 7" symbol, the combination of "red 7" symbols and "red 7" symbols are displayed stopped on the main line ML in a game state that is not pseudo bonus state ST4 will increase accordingly. In response to this, by setting not only the second special replay winning data but also the first special replay winning data to index value IV=18 as described above, and by making a notification to stop the combination of the "red 7" symbol, "red 7" symbol and "red 7" symbol on the main line ML when index value IV=18 is won in the first half of pseudo bonus state ST4, it is possible to set the probability that the combination of the "red 7" symbol, "red 7" symbol and "red 7" symbol will be stopped and displayed on the main line ML in the first half of pseudo bonus state ST4 to a predetermined probability while preventing the winning probability of index value IV=17 from becoming too high.

As already explained, there are more than four symbols between the "red 7" symbol and the "BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R, which is the maximum number of symbols that can be slipped. Therefore, when the index value IV=18 is won and the right stop button 44 is operated to stop the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML of the right reel 32R in order to win the first special replay, the "BAR" symbol will not stop on the main line ML, and the "BAR" symbol will not stop, resulting in the second special replay winning. Also, when the index value IV=18 is won and the right stop button 44 is operated to stop the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML of the right reel 32R in order to win the second special replay winning, the "red 7" symbol will not stop on the main line ML, and the "red 7" symbol will not stop, resulting in the first special replay winning. In other words, in a configuration in which, when index value IV = 18 is won and right reel 32R is stopped for the first time, the stopping control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed so that the first special replay winning and the second special replay winning are given priority over normal replay winning, no priority is set between the first special replay winning and the second special replay winning in this stopping control, and it is possible to select whether the first special replay winning or the second special replay winning will be achieved depending on the timing of the operation of stop buttons 42-44 by the player. As a result, when index value IV=18 is hit, a notification is made to stop the combination of the "red 7" symbol, "red 7" symbol and "red 7" symbol on the main line ML in the first half of pseudo bonus state ST4, and a notification is made to stop the combination of the "BAR" symbol, "BAR" symbol and "BAR" symbol on the main line ML in the second half of pseudo bonus state ST4, making it possible to stop a combination of symbols suitable for each situation on the main line ML in a configuration in which the first special replay winning data and the second special replay winning data are set to index value IV=18.

Figure 33 is a flowchart showing the stop order notification control process in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 72. The stop order notification control process is executed in step S412 in the role selection process (Figure 13).

First, it is determined whether the value of the bet number setting counter 74a in the main RAM 74 is "3" to determine whether the number of bets for the current game is "3" (step S1401). If the number of bets for the current game is "2" (step S1401: NO), the processing from step S1402 onwards is not executed. If the number of bets for the current game is "3" (step S1401: YES), and if the current game state is AT state ST5 (step S1402: YES), notification control processing for an advantageous state is executed (step S1403). In the notification control process for the advantageous state, if the index value IV = 1 to 6 is selected in the lottery process for the role (FIG. 13), a display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first bell win is displayed on the dual-purpose display unit 66, and a command is sent to the production side MPU 92 to display the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first bell win on the image display device 63. In the notification control process for the advantageous state, if the index value IV = 7 to 9 is selected in the lottery process for the role (FIG. 13), a display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the second bell win is displayed on the dual-purpose display unit 66, and a command is sent to the production side MPU 92 to display the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the second bell win on the image display device 63.

If the current game state is the pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S1404: YES), and if the index value IV = 17 is won in the role selection process (FIG. 13) (step S1405: YES), the display data setting process for the right first stop is executed (step S1406). As a result, a display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the second and third stop targets are of any type, reels 32L, 32M, 32R, is started on the dual-purpose display unit 66. This display is started before the stop operation of reels 32L, 32M, 32R is enabled, and is ended when a stop command is issued for all reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the game for which this display is executed.

Then, a red 7 notification command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S1407). FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the notification control process executed by the production side MPU 92. The notification control process is repeatedly executed by the production side MPU 92 at a relatively short period (for example, 4 milliseconds). When the production side MPU 92 receives the red 7 notification command (step S1501: YES), it reads the red 7 notification table from the production side ROM 93 to the production side RAM 94 (step S1502). As a result, the image display device 63 starts to display a display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the second and third stop targets are of any type for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and a display indicating that the "red 7" pattern should be aimed for on the main line ML on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. This display begins before the stop operation of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective, and ends when a stop command is issued to all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game for which this display is executed.

Returning to the explanation of the stop order notification control process (FIG. 33), if the current game state is the pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S1404: YES) and the index value IV=18 has been won in the role selection process (FIG. 13) (step S1408: YES), it is determined whether the current state is the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S1409). As already explained, the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4 refers to the state until half of the initial number of continuing games (20 or 50 games) when the pseudo bonus state ST4 is started has been played, and the second half of the pseudo bonus state ST4 refers to the state after half of the initial number of continuing games has been played.

If it is the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S1409: YES), a process for setting display data for the right first stop is executed (step S1410). As a result, a display corresponding to a stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the second and third stop targets are of any type, reels 32L, 32M, 32R, is started on the dual-purpose display unit 66. This display is started before the stop operation of reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes effective, and is ended when a stop command is issued for all reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the game for which this display is executed.

Then, a command for the red 7 notification is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S1411). As already explained, when the production side MPU 92 receives the command for the red 7 notification, it causes the image display device 63 to start a display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the second and third stop targets are of any type for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and a display indicating that the player should aim for the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. This display starts before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective, and ends when a stop command is issued for all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game for which this display is executed.

If it is the latter half of the pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S1409: NO), a process for setting display data for the right first stop is executed (step S1412). As a result, a display corresponding to a stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the second and third stop targets are of any type, reels 32L, 32M, 32R, is started on the dual-purpose display unit 66. This display is started before the stop operation of reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes effective, and is ended when a stop command is issued for all reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the game for which this display is executed.

Then, the production side MPU 92 transmits a BAR notification command (step S1413). When the production side MPU 92 receives a BAR notification command in the notification control process (FIG. 34) (step S1503: YES), it reads the BAR notification table from the production side ROM 93 to the production side RAM 94 (step S1504). As a result, a display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the second and third stop targets are of any type for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and a display indicating that the player should aim for the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are started on the image display device 63. The display starts before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is enabled, and ends when a stop command is issued for all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game for which the display is executed.

Returning to the explanation of the stop order notification control process (FIG. 33), if the current game state is the pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S1404: YES) and neither index value IV = 17 nor 18 is selected in the role selection process (FIG. 13) (step S1408: NO), other processing is executed (step S1414). In other processing, if any of index values IV = 1 to 6 is selected in the role selection process (FIG. 13), a display corresponding to the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first bell to be won is performed on the dual-purpose display unit 66, and a command is sent to the production side MPU 92 to notify the image display device 63 of the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first bell to be won. In other processes, if the index value IV = 7 to 9 is selected in the role selection process (Figure 13), a display corresponding to the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the second bell to be won is displayed on the dual-purpose display unit 66, and a command is sent to the production side MPU 92 to notify the image display device 63 of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the second bell to be won.

In other processes, when the index value IV=16, in which only the normal replay winning data is set, wins in the lottery process (FIG. 13), the notification lottery process is executed, and when the notification lottery process results in a "red 7" notification win (the winning probability is, for example, 20%), a red 7 notification command is sent to the production side MPU 92. When the production side MPU 92 receives the red 7 notification command, as already explained, the image display device 63 starts a display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the second and third stop targets are of any type, and a display indicating that the "red 7" symbol should be aimed for on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. The display starts before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is enabled, and ends when a stop command is issued for all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game in which the display is executed. In this case, the process of setting the display data for the right first stop is not executed, and the display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the second and third stop targets are any type of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is not performed on the combined display unit 66.

In the latter half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, if the index value IV=16, in which only normal replay winning data is set, is selected in the role selection process (FIG. 13), a notification selection process is executed, and if the notification selection process results in a "BAR" notification win (with a winning probability of, for example, 10%), a BAR notification command is sent to the production side MPU 92. As already explained, when the production side MPU 92 receives the BAR notification command, it starts the image display device 63 to display a display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the second and third stop targets are of any type for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and a display indicating that the player should aim for the "BAR" pattern on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. This display starts before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective, and ends when a stop command is issued for all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game for which this display is executed. In this case, the process of setting the display data for the right first stop is not executed, and the display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the second and third stop targets are of any type is not performed on the combined display unit 66.

Figure 35 is a flowchart showing the pseudo bonus processing in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 72. The pseudo bonus processing is executed in step S605 of the response processing at the end of the game (Figure 18).

First, it is determined whether the number of bets for the current game is "3" by determining whether the value of the bet number setting counter 74a in the main RAM 74 is "3" (step S1601). If the number of bets for the current game is "2" (step S1601: NO), the processing from step S1602 onwards is not executed. As a result, even if a game with the number of bets of "2" is executed in the pseudo bonus state ST4, the number of remaining continued games in the pseudo bonus state ST4 is not subtracted.

Note that when in the CB state (first CB state ST2 or second CB state ST3), the pseudo bonus process (Figure 35) itself is not executed, so even if the CB state is started in the middle of the pseudo bonus state ST4, the number of games played in the CB state is not treated as the number of games played in the pseudo bonus state ST4. Therefore, even if the CB state is transitioned to in the middle of the pseudo bonus state ST4, after the CB state ends, the pseudo bonus state ST4 will resume from the state of the remaining number of continued games immediately before transitioning to the CB state.

If the number of bets in the current game is "3" (step S1601: YES), the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter in the main RAM 74 is decremented by 1 (step S1602). Then, in the lottery process (FIG. 13) for the role in the current game, it is determined whether or not the index value IV = 17 is won (step S1603). If the index value IV = 17 is won (step S1603: YES), the value of the transition advantageous counter provided in the main RAM 74 is incremented by 1 (step S1604). The transition advantageous counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to determine whether or not to transition to the AT state ST5 after the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends, and, if transition to the AT state ST5, to specify the advantageous degree of the AT state ST5. The transition advantageous counter is cleared to "0" when transition is made to the pseudo bonus state ST4. In addition, in step S1604, the value of the transition advantageous counter is incremented by 1, and the larger the value of the transition advantageous counter, the larger the initial number of AT states ST5 that will be awarded after the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends. Therefore, the more times the index value IV=17 is won in the role selection process (FIG. 13) in the pseudo bonus state ST4, the more likely a favorable AT state ST5 will occur thereafter.

Then, a first advantageous generation command including information that the transition advantageous counter has been incremented by 1 and the value of the transition advantageous counter after the increment is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S1605). When the production side MPU 92 receives the first advantageous generation command in the production control process (FIG. 34), it reads a table corresponding to the information of the first advantageous generation command from the production side ROM 93 to the production side RAM 94 in other processes (step S1513). As a result, if the value of the transition advantageous counter becomes "1" after the increment of 1, a performance indicating that the transition to the AT state ST5 has been confirmed is executed by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63, and if the value of the transition advantageous counter becomes 2 or more after the increment of 1, a performance indicating that the AT state ST5, which has already been confirmed as a transition, has become more advantageous is executed by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63.

Returning to the explanation of the pseudo bonus process (FIG. 35), if the index value IV=18 is won in the lottery process for the role in this game (FIG. 13) (step S1606: YES), and if the current situation is the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S1607: NO), the value of the transition advantageous counter in the main RAM 74 is incremented by 1 (step S1608). If the transition advantageous counter value is "0" and 1 is incremented in step S1608, the transition to the AT state ST5 has been confirmed, and if the transition advantageous counter value is 1 or greater and 1 is incremented in step S1608, the AT state ST5, to which the transition has already been confirmed, has become even more advantageous.

Then, a first advantageous generation command including information that the transition advantageous counter has been incremented by 1 and the value of the transition advantageous counter after the increment is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S1609). When the production side MPU 92 receives the first advantageous generation command in the production control process (FIG. 34), it reads a table corresponding to the information of the first advantageous generation command from the production side ROM 93 to the production side RAM 94 in other processes (step S1513). As a result, if the value of the transition advantageous counter becomes "1" after the increment of 1, a performance indicating that the transition to the AT state ST5 has been confirmed is executed by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63, and if the value of the transition advantageous counter becomes 2 or more after the increment of 1, a performance indicating that the AT state ST5, which has already been confirmed, has become more advantageous is executed by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63.

Returning to the explanation of the pseudo bonus process (FIG. 35), if the index value IV=18 has been won in the lottery process for the role in the current game (FIG. 13) (step S1606: YES) and the current situation is the latter half of the pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S1607: YES), the value of the transition advantageous counter in the main RAM 74 is incremented by 2 (step S1610). If the transition advantageous counter value is "0" and 2 is incremented in step S1610, a transition to the advantageous AT state ST5 has been confirmed, and if the transition advantageous counter value is 1 or greater and 2 is incremented in step S1610, the AT state ST5 to which a transition has already been confirmed has become even more advantageous.

Then, a second advantageous generation command including information that the transition advantageous counter has been incremented by 2 and the value of the transition advantageous counter after the increment of 2 is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S1611). When the production side MPU 92 receives the second advantageous generation command in the production control process (FIG. 34), it reads a table corresponding to the information of the second advantageous generation command from the production side ROM 93 to the production side RAM 94 in other processes (step S1513). As a result, if the value of the transition advantageous counter becomes "2" after the increment of 2, a performance indicating that the transition to the advantageous AT state ST5 has been confirmed is executed by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63, and if the value of the transition advantageous counter becomes 3 or more after the increment of 2, a performance indicating that the AT state ST5, which has already been confirmed as a transition, has become even more advantageous is executed by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63.

When the processing of step S1605 is executed, when a negative judgment is made in step S1606, when the processing of step S1609 is executed, or when the processing of step S1611 is executed, it is determined whether the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter in the main RAM 74 is "0" (step S1612). When the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter is "0" (step S1612: YES), it is determined whether the value of the transition time advantageous counter in the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S1613).

If the value of the transition advantageous counter is 1 or more (step S1613: YES), it means that the transition condition to the AT state ST5 is satisfied in the current pseudo bonus state ST4. In this case, first, the pseudo bonus state flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1614). Then, a setting process is executed for the AT continuation counter 74e (step S1615). In the setting process, the initial grant number corresponding to the value of the transition advantageous counter in the main RAM 74 is selected, and the selected initial grant number is set in the AT continuation counter 74e in the main RAM 74. Specifically, if the value of the transition advantageous counter is "1", "200" is selected as the initial grant number, if the value of the transition advantageous counter is "2", "300" is selected as the initial grant number, if the value of the transition advantageous counter is "3", "400" is selected as the initial grant number, and so on. With "200" as the minimum value of the initial grant number, the initial grant number is increased by "100" each time the value of the transition advantageous counter increases by 1. As a result, the higher the value of the transition advantageous counter, the more advantageous the AT state ST5 that will occur.

Then, the AT state flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1616). Then, an AT transition command indicating that a transition to AT state ST5 will occur is sent to the performance side MPU 92 (step S1617). When the performance side MPU 92 receives the AT transition command, it causes the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 to execute a performance indicating that a transition to AT state ST5 will occur.

On the other hand, if the value of the transition advantageous counter in the main RAM 74 is "0" (step S1613: NO), the setting process of the end preparation state ST6 is executed (step S1618). In this setting process, the pseudo bonus state flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". In addition, in this setting process, the end preparation state flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1". The end preparation state flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to identify that the end preparation state ST6 is in progress, and the game state becomes the end preparation state ST6 when the end preparation state flag is set to "1". In addition, the end preparation completion flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1619). In addition, a bonus end command indicating that the pseudo bonus state ST4 has ended is sent to the performance side MPU 92 (step S1620). When the performance side MPU 92 receives the bonus end command, it causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 to perform a performance indicating that the pseudo bonus state ST4 has ended.

Figure 36 is a flowchart showing the winning determination process in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 72. The winning determination process is executed in step S512 of the reel control process (Figure 17).

If the first special replay win (a combination of the "red 7" symbol, "red 7" symbol and "red 7" symbol stopped on the main line ML) is achieved in this game (step S1701: YES), and if the current state is pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S1702: YES), a first special win command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S1703). If the production side MPU 92 receives the first special win command in the production control process (FIG. 34) (step S1505: YES), it reads the first special win table from the production side ROM 93 to the production side RAM 94 (step S1506). As a result, a performance indicating that the first special replay win has been achieved, that is, a combination of the "red 7" symbol, "red 7" symbol and "red 7" symbol stopped and displayed on the main line ML, is executed by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62 and image display device 63.

As already explained, when index value IV = 17 is won in pseudo bonus state ST4, regardless of the stopping result of reels 32L, 32M, 32R, after the rotation of reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped, a first advantageous generation command is sent from the main MPU 72 to the presentation side MPU 92 in step S1605 of the pseudo bonus processing (Figure 35), and based on that, if the value of the transition-time advantageous counter becomes "1" after adding 1, a presentation indicating that the transition to AT state ST5 has been confirmed is executed by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62 and image display device 63, and if the value of the transition-time advantageous counter becomes 2 or more after adding 1, a presentation indicating that the AT state ST5, which has already been confirmed as a transition, has become even more advantageous is executed by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62 and image display device 63. In addition, when the index value IV = 18 is won in the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, regardless of the stopping result of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, after the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped, a first advantageous generation command is sent from the main side MPU 72 to the performance side MPU 92 in step S1609 of the pseudo bonus processing (Figure 35), and based on that, if the value of the transition-time advantageous counter becomes "1" after adding 1, a performance indicating that the transition to the AT state ST5 has been confirmed is executed by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63, and if the value of the transition-time advantageous counter becomes 2 or more after adding 1, a performance indicating that the AT state ST5, which has already been confirmed as a transition, has become even more advantageous is executed by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63. In addition, if the index value IV=18 is hit in the latter half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, regardless of the stopping result of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, a second advantageous generation command is sent from the main MPU 72 to the performance side MPU 92 in step S1611 of the pseudo bonus process (FIG. 35) after the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped spinning. Based on this, if the value of the advantageous counter at the time of transition becomes "2" after adding 2, a performance indicating that the transition to the advantageous AT state ST5 has been confirmed is executed by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63, and if the value of the advantageous counter at the time of transition becomes 3 or more after adding 2, a performance indicating that the AT state ST5, which has already been confirmed as a transition, has become even more advantageous is executed by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63.

In contrast, when the first special replay win is achieved in the pseudo bonus state ST4 as described above, a red 7 display indicating that a combination of a "red 7" symbol and a "red 7" symbol is stopped and displayed on the main line ML is executed by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63. In this case, the red 7 display is executed before a display indicating that the transition to the AT state ST5 has been confirmed or a display indicating that the AT state ST5 has become more favorable. After the red 7 display is executed for a predetermined period (e.g., 5 seconds), a display indicating that the transition to the AT state ST5 has been confirmed or a display indicating that the AT state ST5 has become more favorable is executed for a specific period (e.g., 10 seconds).

In addition, if index value IV = 17 is won in pseudo bonus state ST4 and the first stop is on the right reel 32R and a notification is issued on each of reels 32L, 32M, 32R indicating that the player should aim for the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML, but the first special replay winning is not achieved, then a presentation indicating that the "red 7" symbol or a combination of the "red 7" symbol and the "red 7" symbol were not stopped and displayed on the main line ML is displayed for a predetermined period of time (e.g. 5 seconds), and then a presentation indicating that a transition to the AT state ST5 has been confirmed or a presentation indicating that the AT state ST5 has become more favorable is displayed for a specific period of time (e.g. 10 seconds). In addition, if the index value IV=18 is hit in the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, and the first stop is on the right reel 32R, and a notification is issued on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R indicating that the "red 7" symbol should be aimed for on the main line ML, but the first special replay is not won, then a presentation indicating that the "red 7" symbol or a combination of the "red 7" symbol and the "red 7" symbol was not stopped and displayed on the main line ML is presented for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 5 seconds), and then a presentation indicating that the transition to the AT state ST5 has been confirmed or that the AT state ST5 has become more favorable is presented for a specific period of time (e.g., 10 seconds).

Returning to the explanation of the winning judgment process (Figure 36), if a second special replay winning (a combination of "BAR" symbols, "BAR" symbols and "BAR" symbols stopped on the main line ML) is achieved in this game (step S1705: YES), and if the current situation is the latter half of the pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S1706: YES, step S1708: YES), a second special winning command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S1709). If the production side MPU 92 receives the second special winning command in the production control process (Figure 34) (step S1507: YES), it reads the second special winning table from the production side ROM 93 to the production side RAM 94 (step S1508). As a result, the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 display an effect indicating that the second special replay has been achieved, i.e., that the "BAR" symbol, the "BAR" symbol, and a combination of "BAR" symbols are displayed stopped on the main line ML.

As already explained, when the index value IV = 18 is won in the latter half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, regardless of the stopping result of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, after the reels 32L, 32M, 32R stop spinning, a second advantageous generation command is sent from the main MPU 72 to the presentation side MPU 92 in step S1611 of the pseudo bonus processing (Figure 35), and based on that, if the value of the advantageous counter at the time of transition becomes "2" after adding 2, a presentation indicating that the transition to the advantageous AT state ST5 has been confirmed is executed by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63, and if the value of the advantageous counter at the time of transition becomes 3 or more after adding 2, a presentation indicating that the AT state ST5, which has already been confirmed as a transition, has become even more advantageous is executed by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63.

In contrast, when the second special replay win is established in the pseudo bonus state ST4 as described above, a BAR establishment effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63, indicating that the "BAR" symbol and a combination of "BAR" symbols are stopped and displayed on the main line ML. In this case, the BAR establishment effect is executed before the effect indicating that the transition to the favorable AT state ST5 has been confirmed or the effect indicating that the AT state ST5 has become more favorable. After the BAR establishment effect is executed for a predetermined period (e.g., 5 seconds), the effect indicating that the transition to the favorable AT state ST5 has been confirmed or the effect indicating that the AT state ST5 has become more favorable is executed for a specific period (e.g., 10 seconds).

In addition, if the index value IV=18 is hit in the latter half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, and the first stop is on the right reel 32R, and a notification is issued on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R indicating that the player should aim for the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML, but the second special replay is not won, a presentation indicating that the "BAR" symbol or a combination of "BAR" and "BAR" symbols is not displayed on the main line ML is displayed for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 5 seconds), and then a presentation indicating that the transition to the favorable AT state ST5 has been confirmed or a presentation indicating that the AT state ST5 has become even more favorable is displayed for a specific period of time (e.g., 10 seconds).

Returning to the explanation of the winning judgment process (FIG. 36), if the first special replay winning is established in the current game (step S1701: YES) and the current state is not the pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S1702: NO), the first irregular command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S1704). Also, if the second special replay winning is established in the current game (step S1705: YES) and the current state is not the pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S1706: NO), the first irregular command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S1707). If the production side MPU 92 receives the first irregular command in the production control process (FIG. 34) (step S1509: YES), it reads the first irregular table from the production side ROM 93 to the production side RAM 94 (step S1510). When the first irregular table is read, the speaker 62 outputs a first irregular notification sound that allows the player to recognize that a replay win has been achieved. The content of the notification sound is arbitrary as long as it allows the player to recognize that a replay win has been achieved, but for example, a voice saying "It's a replay" is output.

Even if a "red 7" symbol, a combination of "red 7" symbols and "red 7" symbols are displayed on the main line ML in a game state other than the pseudo bonus state ST4, the replay privilege is granted but no other benefits are granted other than the replay privilege. In this case, by outputting a first irregular notification sound when a "red 7" symbol, a combination of "red 7" symbols and "red 7" symbols are displayed on the main line ML in a game state other than the pseudo bonus state ST4, it becomes possible to make the player aware that although a "red 7" symbol, a combination of "red 7" symbols and "red 7" symbols are displayed on the main line ML, no other benefits are granted other than the replay privilege.

When the first irregular table is read, the first irregular notification sound is output from the speaker 62, but the upper lamp 61 and the image display device 63 do not issue a notification corresponding to the "red 7" symbol or a combination of "red 7" and "red 7" symbols being stopped and displayed on the main line ML in a game state other than the pseudo bonus state ST4. This makes it possible to prevent the notification corresponding to the "red 7" symbol or a combination of "red 7" and "red 7" symbols being stopped and displayed on the main line ML in a game state other than the pseudo bonus state ST4 from being too conspicuous.

Returning to the explanation of the winning judgment process (FIG. 36), if the second special replay winning is established in this game (step S1705: YES) and the current situation is the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S1706: YES, step S1708: NO), a second irregular command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S1710). If the production side MPU 92 receives the second irregular command in the production control process (FIG. 34) (step S1511: YES), it reads the second irregular table from the production side ROM 93 to the production side RAM 94 (step S1512). When the second irregular table is read, a second irregular notification sound is output from the speaker 62 as a notification sound that allows the player to recognize that the same benefit has been awarded as when the combination of the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol, and the "red 7" symbol is stopped and displayed on the main line ML. The content of the notification sound can be arbitrary as long as the player can recognize that the same benefit has been awarded as when a "red 7" symbol or a combination of "red 7" and "red 7" symbols are displayed stopped on the main line ML, but for example, a sound saying "It's the same as when a red 7 is formed" is output.

Even if the "BAR" symbol, "BAR" symbol, and "BAR" symbol combination are displayed on the main line ML in the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, the replay privilege is granted and the value of the transition advantageous counter in the main RAM 74 is incremented by 1, but the value of the transition advantageous counter is not incremented by 2. In this case, by outputting the second irregular notification sound when the "BAR" symbol, "BAR" symbol, and "BAR" symbol combination are displayed on the main line ML in the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, it is possible to make the player recognize that although the "BAR" symbol, "BAR" symbol, and "BAR" symbol combination are displayed on the main line ML, only the same benefit as when the "red 7" symbol, "red 7" symbol, and "red 7" symbol combination are displayed on the main line ML is granted.

When the second irregular table is read, the speaker 62 outputs the second irregular notification sound, but the upper lamp 61 and the image display device 63 do not issue a notification corresponding to the combination of the "BAR" symbol, the "BAR" symbol, and the "BAR" symbol being stopped and displayed on the main line ML in the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4. This makes it possible to prevent the notification corresponding to the combination of the "BAR" symbol, the "BAR" symbol, and the "BAR" symbol being stopped and displayed on the main line ML in the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4 from being too conspicuous.

In addition to the various processes described above, the winning determination process (Figure 36) also executes other processes (step S1711). In these other processes, processes other than steps S1701 to S1710 that correspond to the winning result in the current game are executed.

Next, the operation contents when the first special replay winning or the second special replay winning is realized in each game state will be explained with reference to the time chart of Figure 37. Figure 37 (a) shows the execution period of one game, Figure 37 (b) shows the period in the pseudo bonus state ST4, Figure 37 (c) shows the period in the latter half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, Figure 37 (d) shows the timing when the index value IV = 17 is won in the lottery process for the role (Figure 13), Figure 37 (e) shows the timing when the index value IV = 18 is won in the lottery process for the role (Figure 13), Figure 37 (f) shows the period when the first stop is the right reel 32R and a notification (hereinafter referred to as the red 7 notification) indicating that the "red 7" symbol should be aimed for on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is being made on the image display device 63, and Figure 37 (g) shows the period when the first stop is the right reel 32R. 37 shows a period during which the image display device 63 issues a notification (hereinafter referred to as BAR notification) indicating that the player should aim for the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, FIG. 37(h) shows the timing when the "red 7" symbol and a combination of "red 7" and "red 7" symbols are displayed stationary on the main line ML, FIG. 37(i) shows the timing when the "BAR" symbol and a combination of "BAR" and "BAR" symbols are displayed stationary on the main line ML, FIG. 37(j) shows a period during which the first irregular notification sound is output from the speaker 62, and FIG. 37(k) shows a period during which the second irregular notification sound is output from the speaker 62.

First, we will explain the first half of pseudo bonus state ST4.

In the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4 as shown in FIG. 37(b) and FIG. 37(c), a new game is started at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. 37(a). In this case, as shown in FIG. 37(d), the index value IV=17 is won in the lottery process (FIG. 13), so that the red 7 notification is started at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. 37(f). Then, in accordance with the red 7 notification, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped so as to make the right reel 32R the first stop, and the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated to stop the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML, so that the first special replay win is established at the timing of t2 as shown in FIG. 37(h). That is, the combination of the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol, and the "red 7" symbol is stopped and displayed on the main line ML. This allows the player to recognize that the AT state ST5 will be entered after the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends.

After that, at the timing of t3, a new game is started as shown in FIG. 37(a). In this case, the index value IV=18 is won in the lottery process (FIG. 13) as shown in FIG. 37(e). Since the current situation is the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, the red 7 notification is started at the timing of t3 as shown in FIG. 37(f). Then, in response to the red 7 notification, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped so as to make the right reel 32R the first stop, and the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated to stop the right reel 32R on the main line ML, thereby establishing the first special replay win as shown in FIG. 37(h) at the timing of t4. That is, the combination of the red 7, the red 7, and the red 7 is stopped and displayed on the main line ML. This allows the player to recognize that the AT state ST5, which has already been confirmed to have been transitioned to, has become more favorable.

After that, at the timing of t5, a new game is started as shown in FIG. 37(a). In this case, as shown in FIG. 37(e), the index value IV=18 is won in the lottery process (FIG. 13). Since the current situation is the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, the red 7 notification is started at the timing of t5 as shown in FIG. 37(f). However, without following the red 7 notification, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped so that the right reel 32R is stopped first, but the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated to stop the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML, and the second special replay is won at the timing of t6 as shown in FIG. 37(i). That is, the combination of the "BAR" symbol, the "BAR" symbol, and the "BAR" symbol is displayed stopped on the main line ML. In this case, as shown in FIG. 37(k), from timing t6 to timing t7, the speaker 62 outputs a sound saying "It's the same as getting a red 7." as the second irregular notification sound. This allows the player to recognize that although the "BAR" symbol, the combination of "BAR" and "BAR" symbols are stopped and displayed on the main line ML, only the same benefit will be awarded as if the "red 7" symbol, the combination of "red 7" and "red 7" symbols were stopped and displayed on the main line ML.

Next, we will explain the latter half of the pseudo bonus state ST4.

In the latter half of the pseudo bonus state ST4 as shown in FIG. 37(b) and FIG. 37(c), a new game is started at the timing of t8 as shown in FIG. 37(a). In this case, the index value IV=18 is won in the lottery process (FIG. 13) as shown in FIG. 37(e). Since the current situation is the latter half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, the BAR notification is started at the timing of t8 as shown in FIG. 37(g). Then, in accordance with the BAR notification, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped so as to make the right reel 32R the first stop, and the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated to stop the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML, thereby establishing the second special replay winning as shown in FIG. 37(i) at the timing of t9. That is, the combination of the "BAR" symbol, the "BAR" symbol, and the "BAR" symbol is stopped and displayed on the main line ML. This allows the player to recognize that the more advantageous AT state ST5 will occur.

Next, we will explain what happens when the game is not in pseudo bonus state ST4.

In a situation that is not in the pseudo bonus state ST4 as shown in FIG. 37(b), a new game is started at the timing of t10 as shown in FIG. 37(a). In this case, the index value IV=17 is won in the lottery process (FIG. 13) as shown in FIG. 37(d). However, since the situation is not in the pseudo bonus state ST4, the red 7 notification is not started as shown in FIG. 37(f). Although the red 7 notification is not being executed, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped so as to make the right reel 32R the first stop, and the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated to stop the right reel 32R on the main line ML, thereby establishing the first special replay winning as shown in FIG. 37(h) at the timing of t11. That is, the combination of the red 7 symbol, the red 7 symbol, and the red 7 symbol is stopped and displayed on the main line ML. In this case, as shown in FIG. 37(j), from timing t11 to timing t12, the speaker 62 outputs the first irregular notification sound "It's a replay." This allows the player to recognize that although the "red 7" symbol or a combination of "red 7" symbols and "red 7" symbols are stopped and displayed on the main line ML, no benefits other than the replay privilege will be awarded.

After that, in a situation that is not in the pseudo bonus state ST4 as shown in FIG. 37(b), a new game is started at the timing of t13 as shown in FIG. 37(a). In this case, the index value IV=18 is won in the lottery process (FIG. 13) as shown in FIG. 37(e). However, since it is not in the pseudo bonus state ST4, the red 7 notification is not started as shown in FIG. 37(f), and the BAR notification is not started as shown in FIG. 37(g). Although the BAR notification is not being executed, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped so as to make the right reel 32R the first stop, and the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated to stop the right reel 32R on the main line ML, thereby establishing the second special replay winning at the timing of t14 as shown in FIG. 37(i). That is, the combination of the "BAR" symbol, the "BAR" symbol, and the "BAR" symbol is stopped and displayed on the main line ML. In this case, as shown in FIG. 37(j), from timing t14 to timing t15, the speaker 62 outputs the first irregular notification sound "It's a replay." This allows the player to recognize that although the "BAR" symbol, the "BAR" symbol, and the combination of "BAR" symbols are displayed statically on the main line ML, no benefits other than the replay privilege will be awarded.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

The first special replay winning data is set at index value IV = 17, and the first special replay winning data and the second special replay winning data are set at index value IV = 18. In the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, if index value IV = 17 or 18 is won, a notification is made to stop the combination of the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML. On the other hand, in the second half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, if index value IV = 18 is won, a notification is made to stop the combination of the "BAR" symbol, the "BAR" symbol and the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML. This makes it possible to increase the probability that the combination of the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "red 7" symbol will stop on the main line ML in the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4 by utilizing the index value IV=18 for stopping the "BAR" symbol and the combination of the "BAR" symbol and the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML in the second half of the pseudo bonus state ST4.

When index value IV = 17 is hit, if the right reel 32R is stopped first and the stop buttons 42-44 are operated to stop the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the "red 7" symbol, a combination of "red 7" symbols and "red 7" symbols will be displayed on the main line ML even in a gaming state other than pseudo bonus state ST4. Even if the "red 7" symbol, a combination of "red 7" symbols and "red 7" symbols are displayed on the main line ML in a gaming state other than pseudo bonus state ST4, the player will not be awarded any benefits other than the opportunity to play again. In this case, if one wishes to maintain the same probability that the "red 7" symbol, the combination of "red 7" symbols and "red 7" symbols will be displayed stopped on the main line ML in the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4 in a situation where the first special replay winning data is not set at index value IV=18, it becomes necessary to increase the winning probability of index value IV=17. However, if the winning probability of index value IV=17 is increased, the probability that the "red 7" symbol, the combination of "red 7" symbols and "red 7" symbols will be displayed stopped on the main line ML in a game state that is not pseudo bonus state ST4 will increase accordingly. In response to this, by setting not only the second special replay winning data but also the first special replay winning data to index value IV=18 as described above, and by making a notification to stop the combination of the "red 7" symbol, "red 7" symbol and "red 7" symbol on the main line ML when index value IV=18 is won in the first half of pseudo bonus state ST4, it is possible to set the probability that the combination of the "red 7" symbol, "red 7" symbol and "red 7" symbol will be stopped and displayed on the main line ML in the first half of pseudo bonus state ST4 to a predetermined probability while preventing the winning probability of index value IV=17 from becoming too high.

On the right reel 32R, there are more than four symbols between the "red 7" symbol and the "BAR" symbol, which is the maximum number of symbols for the number of slips. Therefore, if the right stop button 44 is operated to stop the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML of the right reel 32R in order to establish the first special replay prize when the index value IV = 18 is won, the "BAR" symbol will not stop on the main line ML, and the "BAR" symbol will not stop, resulting in the second special replay prize. Also, if the right stop button 44 is operated to stop the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML of the right reel 32R in order to establish the second special replay prize when the index value IV = 18 is won, the "red 7" symbol will not stop on the main line ML, and the "red 7" symbol will not stop, resulting in the first special replay prize. In other words, in a configuration in which, when index value IV = 18 is won and right reel 32R is stopped for the first time, the stopping control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed so that the first special replay winning and the second special replay winning are given priority over normal replay winning, no priority is set between the first special replay winning and the second special replay winning in this stopping control, and it is possible to select whether the first special replay winning or the second special replay winning will be achieved depending on the timing of the operation of stop buttons 42-44 by the player. As a result, when index value IV=18 is hit, a notification is made to stop the combination of the "red 7" symbol, "red 7" symbol and "red 7" symbol on the main line ML in the first half of pseudo bonus state ST4, and a notification is made to stop the combination of the "BAR" symbol, "BAR" symbol and "BAR" symbol on the main line ML in the second half of pseudo bonus state ST4, making it possible to stop a combination of symbols suitable for each situation on the main line ML in a configuration in which the first special replay winning data and the second special replay winning data are set to index value IV=18.

Even if the index value IV = 17 or 18 is hit in a game state other than the pseudo bonus state ST4 and a "red 7" symbol, a combination of "red 7" symbols and "red 7" symbols, or a "BAR" symbol, "BAR" symbols and "BAR" symbols are statically displayed on the main line ML, the re-play privilege will be granted but no other benefits will be granted other than the re-play privilege. In this case, by outputting the first irregular notification sound when a "red 7" symbol, a combination of "red 7" and "red 7" symbols, or a "BAR" symbol, "BAR" and "BAR" symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the main line ML in a game state other than the pseudo bonus state ST4, it becomes possible to make the player aware that although a "red 7" symbol, a combination of "red 7" and "red 7" symbols, or a "BAR" symbol, "BAR" and "BAR" symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the main line ML, no benefits other than the privilege of replay will be awarded.

In particular, the first irregular notification sound outputs the sound "It's a replay," indicating that a replay privilege has been granted. This allows the player to recognize that only the replay privilege has been granted, even if the index value IV = 17 or 18 is won in a game state other than the pseudo bonus state ST4, and a "red 7" symbol, a combination of "red 7" symbols and "red 7" symbols, or a "BAR" symbol, a combination of "BAR" symbols and "BAR" symbols are displayed stationary on the main line ML.

When the right reel 32R is stopped for the first time when the index value IV = 17 or 18 is hit in a game state other than the pseudo bonus state ST4, if the "red 7" symbol, a combination of "red 7" symbols and "red 7" symbols, or a "BAR" symbol, a combination of "BAR" symbols and "BAR" symbols is not stopped and displayed on the main line ML, the first irregular notification sound is not output. This makes it possible to prevent the first irregular notification sound from being output excessively.

When the first irregular table is read out, the speaker 62 outputs the first irregular notification sound, but the upper lamp 61 and the image display device 63 do not execute a notification corresponding to the "red 7" symbol, a combination of "red 7" symbols and "red 7" symbols, or a "BAR" symbol, "BAR" symbol and "BAR" symbol being displayed stationary on the main line ML in a game state other than the pseudo bonus state ST4. This makes it possible to prevent the notification corresponding to the "red 7" symbol, a combination of "red 7" symbols and "red 7" symbols, or a combination of "BAR" symbols, "BAR" symbols and "BAR" symbols being displayed stationary on the main line ML in a game state other than the pseudo bonus state ST4 from being too conspicuous.

When the second special replay win is established in the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, the speaker 62 outputs a second irregular notification sound that allows the player to recognize that the same benefit has been awarded as when the "red 7" symbol, the combination of the "red 7" symbol and the "red 7" symbol are displayed on the main line ML. The content of the notification sound is arbitrary as long as the player can recognize that the same benefit has been awarded as when the "red 7" symbol, the combination of the "red 7" symbol and the "red 7" symbol are displayed on the main line ML, but for example, a voice saying "It's the same as when the red 7 is established" is output. Even if the "BAR" symbol, the "BAR" symbol and the combination of the "BAR" symbol are displayed on the main line ML in the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, the replay privilege is awarded and the value of the transition advantageous counter in the main RAM 74 is only incremented by 1, but the value of the transition advantageous counter is not incremented by 2. In this case, by outputting the second irregular notification sound when the "BAR" symbol or a combination of "BAR" and "BAR" symbols are displayed stationary on the main line ML in the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, it becomes possible to make the player recognize that although the "BAR" symbol, the "BAR" symbol, and a combination of "BAR" symbols are displayed stationary on the main line ML, only the same benefit will be awarded as if the "red 7" symbol or a combination of "red 7" and "red 7" symbols were displayed stationary on the main line ML.

When the second irregular table is read, the speaker 62 outputs the second irregular notification sound, but the upper lamp 61 and the image display device 63 do not issue a notification corresponding to the combination of the "BAR" symbol, the "BAR" symbol, and the "BAR" symbol being stopped and displayed on the main line ML in the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4. This makes it possible to prevent the notification corresponding to the combination of the "BAR" symbol, the "BAR" symbol, and the "BAR" symbol being stopped and displayed on the main line ML in the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4 from being too conspicuous.

Third Embodiment
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the winning determination process is different from that of the second embodiment. The following describes the configuration that is different from the second embodiment. Note that the description of the same configuration as the second embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 38 is a flowchart showing the winning determination process in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 72.

When the second special replay win is established (step S1807: YES), the processing contents of steps S1808 to S1812 and the processing contents of other processing of step S1813 are the same as steps S1706 to S1711 of the winning determination process (Figure 36) in the second embodiment. Also, when the first special replay win is established in a situation other than the pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S1801: YES, step S1802: NO), the processing contents of step S1803 are the same as step S1704 of the winning determination process (Figure 36) in the second embodiment.

If the first special replay win (a combination of "red 7" and "red 7" symbols stopped on the main line ML) is achieved in the pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S1801: YES, step S1802: YES), it is determined whether the current situation is the latter half of the pseudo bonus state ST4 and whether the index value IV = 18 has been won in the lottery process for the role in this game (Figure 13) (step S1804). If the current situation is the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4 or the index value IV = 17 has been won in the lottery process for the role in this game (Figure 13) (step S1804: NO), a first special win command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S1805). When the presentation side MPU 92 receives the first special establishment command in the presentation control process (FIG. 34) (step S1505: YES), it reads the first special establishment table from the presentation side ROM 93 to the presentation side RAM 94 (step S1506). As a result, a presentation indicating that the first special replay winning has been established, that is, that the "red 7" symbol and the combination of "red 7" symbols and "red 7" symbols are stopped and displayed on the main line ML, is executed by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63.

If the current situation is the latter half of the pseudo bonus state ST4 and the lottery process for the current game (FIG. 13) has resulted in the index value IV=18 (step S1804: YES), the first stop is on the right reel 32R, and even though a BAR notification is being made on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R indicating that the player should aim for the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML, the right reel 32R is brought to a first stop and the stop buttons 42-44 are operated to aim for the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, meaning that the first special replay win has been achieved, that is, the combination of the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol, and the "red 7" symbol is stopped and displayed on the main line ML. In this case, a third irregular command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S1806).

When the presentation side MPU 92 receives the third irregular command, it reads out the third irregular table from the presentation side ROM 93 to the presentation side RAM 94. When the third irregular table is read out, the speaker 62 outputs a third irregular notification sound, which allows the player to recognize that the same benefit has been awarded as when a combination of a "BAR" symbol, a "BAR" symbol and a "BAR" symbol are stopped and displayed on the main line ML. The content of the notification sound is arbitrary as long as it allows the player to recognize that the same benefit has been awarded as when a combination of a "BAR" symbol, a "BAR" symbol and a "BAR" symbol are stopped and displayed on the main line ML, but for example, a voice saying "It's the same as when BAR is established" is output.

According to the above configuration, in the latter half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, even though the index value IV = 18 is won in the role selection process (Figure 13) and a BAR notification is made, if the right reel 32R is stopped for the first time and the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated to stop each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R aiming for the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML, thereby achieving the first special replay winning, i.e., if the "red 7" symbol, the combination of "red 7" symbols and "red 7" symbols are displayed stationary on the main line ML, a third irregular notification sound is output to enable the player to recognize that the same benefit has been awarded as if the combination of "BAR" symbols, "BAR" symbols and "BAR" symbols were displayed stationary on the main line ML. This allows the player to recognize that although the "red 7" symbol and the combination of "red 7" and "red 7" symbols are displayed stationary on the main line ML, the player will be awarded the same benefit as if the "BAR" symbol, the "BAR" symbol, and the combination of "BAR" symbols were displayed stationary on the main line ML.

When the third irregular table is read out, the speaker 62 outputs the third irregular notification sound, but the upper lamp 61 and the image display device 63 do not issue a notification corresponding to the "red 7" symbol, the combination of "red 7" symbols and "red 7" symbols being stopped and displayed on the main line ML, despite the index value IV=18 being won in the latter half of the pseudo bonus state ST4. This makes it possible to prevent the notification corresponding to the "red 7" symbol, the combination of "red 7" symbols and "red 7" symbols being stopped and displayed on the main line ML, despite the index value IV=18 being won in the latter half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, from being too conspicuous.

Fourth Embodiment
In this embodiment, the game content of the AT state ST5 is different from that of the first embodiment. Below, the configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

Figure 39 is a flowchart showing the processing for the AT state at the start of the game in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 72. As already explained, the processing for the AT state at the start of the game is executed in step S904 in the processing for the advantageous state at the start of the game (Figure 22).

On the condition that neither the first ending flag nor the second ending flag in the master RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1901: NO), the master MPU 72 determines whether the current state is in the add-on period by determining whether the value of the add-on period counter in the master RAM 74 is 1 or greater (step S1902). The add-on period is a period during which the remaining number of awarded game media in the AT state ST5 is more likely to increase than in a situation that is not in the add-on period in the AT state ST5. The add-on period counter is a counter that allows the master MPU 72 to determine whether the current state is in the add-on period and, if it is, the remaining number of continuing games in the add-on period.

If the value of the add-on period counter is "0" and it is not the add-on period (step S1902: NO), on the condition that one of index values IV = 11 to 15 has been won in the lottery process for the role in this game (Figure 13) (step S1903: YES), a lottery process for transition to the add-on period is executed (step S1904). In the lottery process for transition to the add-on period, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to transition to the add-on period using a lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74 and an add-on transition lottery table provided in the main ROM 73.

There are a first add-on period and a second add-on period. The second add-on period has a higher expected value for increasing the remaining number of gaming media awarded in the AT state ST5 than the first add-on period. Therefore, both the first add-on period and the second add-on period are more advantageous to the player than a situation in the AT state ST5 that is not a add-on period, but the second add-on period is even more advantageous to the player than the first add-on period.

Specifically, regarding the lottery process for transition to the add-on period, if the index value IV=11 is selected, there is an 8% probability of being selected to transition to the first add-on period, a 2% probability of being selected to transition to the second add-on period, and a 90% probability of being a miss. If the index value IV=12 is selected, there is a 4% probability of being selected to transition to the first add-on period, a 1% probability of being selected to transition to the second add-on period, and a 95% probability of being a miss. If the index value IV=13 is selected, there is a 30% probability of being selected to transition to the first add-on period, a 10% probability of being selected to transition to the second add-on period, and a 60% probability of being a miss. If the index value IV=14 is selected, there is a 25% probability of being selected to transition to the first add-on period, a 5% probability of being selected to transition to the second add-on period, and a 70% probability of being a miss. If the index value IV = 15 is reached, there is an 8% chance of winning the transition to the first added-on period, a 2% chance of winning the transition to the second added-on period, and a 90% chance of losing.

If the lottery process for transition to the first added-on period results in a win for the transition to the first added-on period (step S1905: YES), the first added-on winning flag stored in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1906). The first added-on winning flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to identify that a win for the transition to the first added-on period has occurred. In addition, a winning command for the first added-on period is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S1907). When the production side MPU 92 receives a winning command for the first added-on period, it causes a performance indicating that a win for the transition to the first added-on period has occurred to be executed on the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63.

If the lottery process for transition to the second added-on period results in a win for the transition to the second added-on period (step S1905: NO, step S1908: YES), the second added-on winning flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1909). The second added-on winning flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to identify that a win for the transition to the second added-on period has occurred. In addition, a winning command for the second added-on period is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S1910). When the production side MPU 92 receives a winning command for the second added-on period, it causes a performance indicating that a win for the transition to the second added-on period has occurred to be executed on the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63.

If the lottery process for transition to the added-on period is unsuccessful (step S1905: NO, step S1908: NO), other processing is executed (step S1911). In the other processing, processing corresponding to steps S1103 to S1118 of the AT state processing at the start of the game in the first embodiment (FIG. 24) is executed.

Figure 40 is a flowchart showing the AT processing in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 72. The AT processing is executed in step S606 of the response processing at the end of play (Figure 18). As described above, the response processing at the end of play is executed after all of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped spinning in one game, so the AT processing is also executed after all of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped spinning in one game.

If the value of the bet number setting counter in the main RAM 74 is "3" (step S2001: YES), it is determined whether the value of the add-on period counter in the main RAM 74 is "0" or not, thereby determining whether the current period is the first add-on period or the second add-on period (step S2002). If the value of the add-on period counter is "0" and it is neither the first add-on period nor the second add-on period (step S2002: YES), it is determined whether either the first add-on winning flag or the second add-on winning flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2003).

If either the first or second added-on winning flag is set to "1" (step S2003: YES), the added-on period counter in the main RAM 74 is set to "10" (step S2004). This starts the added-on period. Also, a start command for the added-on period is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S2005). In this case, if the first added-on winning flag is set to "1", information indicating that it is the first added-on period is included in the start command for the added-on period, and if the second added-on winning flag is set to "1", information indicating that it is the second added-on period is included in the start command for the added-on period. When the performance side MPU 92 receives a start command for an added-on period that includes information about the first added-on period, the performance corresponding to the first added-on period is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63, and when the performance side MPU 92 receives a start command for an added-on period that includes information about the second added-on period, the performance corresponding to the second added-on period is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63.

If the value of the top-up period counter in the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S2002: NO), the value of the top-up period counter is decremented by 1 (step S2006). Then, if the value of the top-up period counter after decrementing by 1 is "0" (step S2007: YES), the first top-up winning flag and the second top-up winning flag in the main RAM 74 are each cleared to "0" (step S2008). In addition, a command to end the top-up period is sent to the performance side MPU 92 (step S2009). When the performance side MPU 92 receives the command to end the top-up period, it causes the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 to execute a performance corresponding to the end of the top-up period.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2003, if the processing of step S2005 is executed, if a negative judgment is made in step S2007, or if the processing of step S2009 is executed, other processing is executed (step S2010). In other processing, processing corresponding to steps S1202 to S1215 of the AT processing (FIG. 25) in the first embodiment is executed. In this case, if the value of the top-up period counter in the main RAM 74 is 1 or more, i.e., if it is the first top-up period or the second top-up period, the subtraction processing of the AT continuation counter 74e in step S1204 is not executed. As a result, the remaining number of awarded game media in the AT state ST5 is not reduced during the first top-up period or the second top-up period.

Returning to the explanation of the AT state processing at the start of the game (FIG. 39), if the value of the added-on period counter in the main RAM 74 is 1 or greater, i.e., if it is the first added-on period or the second added-on period (step S1902: YES), the added-on period processing is executed (step S1912). FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the added-on period processing.

If the second add-on winning flag in the main RAM 74 is not set to "1" (step S2101: NO), this means that the current add-on period is the first add-on period, so the lottery table for the first add-on period is read from the main ROM 73 (step S2102). On the other hand, if the second add-on winning flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2101: YES), this means that the current add-on period is the second add-on period, so the lottery table for the second add-on period is read from the main ROM 73 to the main RAM 74 (step S2103).

When the processing of step S2102 or step S2103 is executed, an add-on lottery process for the add-on period is executed (step S2104). In this add-on lottery process, lottery numerical information is obtained from a lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74, and the obtained lottery numerical information is compared against the lottery table read into the main RAM 74 in step S2102 or step S2103. In the add-on lottery process for the add-on period, there is no loss, and a number of 10 or more coins is selected.

Then, the number of points selected in the add-on lottery process for the add-on period (step S2104) is added to the AT continuation counter 74e in the main RAM 74 (step S2105). In addition, a command for the add-on period including information on the added number of points is sent to the presentation side MPU 92 (step S2106). When the presentation side MPU 92 receives a command during the add-on period, it causes the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 to execute a presentation that allows the player to recognize the newly added number of points.

Figure 42 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the selection manner of the number of points to be awarded when the add-on lottery process for the add-on period (step S2104) is executed with reference to the lottery table for the first add-on period, and the selection manner of the number of points to be awarded when the add-on lottery process for the add-on period (step S2104) is executed with reference to the lottery table for the second add-on period.

As shown in FIG. 42, in each game during the first add-on period, there is a 25% probability that 10 coins will be awarded, a 25% probability that 20 coins will be awarded, a 10% probability that 30 coins will be awarded, a 10% probability that 40 coins will be awarded, a 10% probability that 50 coins will be awarded, a 10% probability that 60 coins will be awarded, a 5% probability that 80 coins will be awarded, and a 5% probability that 100 coins will be awarded. In this case, the lottery table for the first add-on period is set so that a larger number of coins will be selected for a game that has won an index value IV with a low winning probability in the role lottery process (FIG. 13). During the first add-on period, all of the selectable numbers of coins are multiples of "2".

As shown in FIG. 42, in each game during the second add-on period, 60 coins are selected with a 20% probability, 80 coins are selected with a 20% probability, 100 coins are selected with a 10% probability, 120 coins are selected with a 10% probability, 140 coins are selected with a 10% probability, 160 coins are selected with a 10% probability, 180 coins are selected with a 10% probability, and 200 coins are selected with a 10% probability. In this case, the lottery table for the second add-on period is set so that a larger number of coins is more likely to be selected in a game in which an index value IV with a low winning probability is selected in the lottery process for the winning combination (FIG. 13). In the second add-on period, all of the numbers of coins that can be selected are multiples of "4". In addition, the expected value of the number of coins selected in each game and the expected value of the number of coins awarded throughout the add-on period are higher in the second add-on period than in the first add-on period.

Next, we will explain the execution content of the performance executed by the image display device 63 during the first and second added periods.

Figures 43(a) to 43(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the execution content of the performance executed by the image display device 63 during the first added-on period.

During the first top-up period, the display surface of the image display device 63 is divided into two parts, left and right, as shown in Figures 43(a) to 43(c). The two divided left and right areas A1 and A2 have approximately the same shape and size. In the left and right areas A1 and A2, animation displays G21 and G22 for performance and the number of award notification display G23 are displayed, respectively, but the contents of these animation displays G21 and G22 for performance and the number of award notification display G23 are the same in the left and right areas A1 and A2. Specifically, in Figure 43(a), animation displays G21 for performance are displayed in the left and right areas A1 and A2, respectively, but the contents of these animation displays G21 for performance are the same in the left and right areas A1 and A2. Also, in Figure 43(b), animation displays G22 for performance are displayed in the left and right areas A1 and A2, respectively, but the contents of these animation displays G22 for performance are the same in the left and right areas A1 and A2. In addition, in FIG. 43(c), the number of points awarded notification display G23 is displayed in both the left area A1 and the right area A2, but the content of these number of points awarded notification displays G23 is the same in the left area A1 and the right area A2.

In detail, the image of "+40 coins" is displayed as the award number notification display G23 in both the left area A1 and the right area A2 as the award number notification display G23 in FIG. 43(c). This indicates that 80 coins were awarded in the game during the first add-on period. As already explained, all award numbers that can be selected during the first add-on period are multiples of "2". Therefore, regardless of the award number selected during the first add-on period, it is possible to display the award number notification display G23 corresponding to the quotient of the award number divided by "2" in both the left area A1 and the right area A2.

During the first top-up period, the display surface of the image display device 63 is divided into two areas, the left area A1 and the right area A2, in which the same animation display G21, G22 and the number of award notification display G23 for the same effects are displayed, and various information displays G31 to G35 that are not images displayed with the same content are displayed in each of the left area A1 and the right area A2. Specifically, as shown in Figures 43(a) to 43(c), the remaining number of games to be continued image G31 for notifying the remaining number of games to be continued in the first top-up period is displayed only in the left area A1. In addition, the number of acquisitions display image G32 for notifying the number of game media acquired in the AT state ST5 and the remaining number of awards display image G33 for notifying the remaining number of awards of game media in the AT state ST5 are displayed only in the right area A2.

In the AT state ST5, if the index value IV = 1 to 9 is selected in the lottery process (FIG. 13), the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R for establishing the first bell win or the second bell win is notified, and as shown in FIG. 43(a), the stop order notification image G34 for notifying the stop order is displayed across the boundary between the left area A1 and the right area A2 regardless of the division of the left area A1 and the right area A2. In addition, the performance operation device 121 (see FIG. 45) may be operated to generate an opportunity to change, add, or advance the contents of the video display on the image display device 63, and as shown in FIG. 43(b), the operation notification image G35 for prompting the operation of the performance operation device 121 is displayed across the boundary between the left area A1 and the right area A2 regardless of the division of the left area A1 and the right area A2. The performance operation device 121 is provided on the front part of the slot machine 10. As shown in FIG. 43(b), the operation notification image G35 is displayed during a valid operation period during which operation of the performance operation device 121 is valid. When the performance operation device 121 is operated during the valid operation period, this triggers the display of the number of points awarded notification G23 in the left area A1 and the right area A2, as shown in FIG. 43(c).

Figures 44(a) to 44(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the execution content of the performance executed by the image display device 63 during the second added-on period.

During the second top-up period, the display surface of the image display device 63 is divided into four parts, top to bottom, left to right, as shown in Figures 44(a) to 44(c). These four parts, the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14, have approximately the same shape and size. In the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14, animation displays G41 and G42 for performance and an award number notification display G43 are displayed, respectively, and the contents of these animation displays G41 and G42 for performance and the award number notification display G43 are the same in the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14. Specifically, in Fig. 44(a), animation display G41 for effect is performed in each of the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14, but the contents of these animation displays G41 for effect are the same in the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14. Also, in Fig. 44(b), animation display G42 for effect is performed in each of the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14, but the contents of these animation displays G42 for effect are the same in the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14. In addition, in FIG. 44(c), the awarded number notification display G43 is displayed in each of the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14, but the content of these awarded number notification displays G43 is the same in the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14.

In detail, the image of "+50 coins" is displayed as the award number notification display G43 in each of the upper left area A11, upper right area A12, lower left area A13, and lower right area A14 as the award number notification display G43 in each of the upper left area A11, upper right area A12, lower left area A13, and lower right area A14. This indicates that 200 coins were awarded in the game during the second add-on period. As already explained, all of the award numbers that can be selected during the second add-on period are multiples of "4". Therefore, regardless of the award number selected during the second add-on period, it is possible to display the award number notification display G43 corresponding to the quotient of the award number divided by "4" in each of the upper left area A11, upper right area A12, lower left area A13, and lower right area A14.

During the second top-up period, the display surface of the image display device 63 is divided into four areas, the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14, in which the same animation display G41, G42 and the number of awards notification display G43 for the purpose of presentation are displayed in each of these four areas. In this configuration, various information displays G31 to G35 that are not images displayed with the same content are displayed in each of the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14. Specifically, as shown in Figures 44(a) to 44(c), the remaining number of games to be continued image G31 for notifying the remaining number of games to be continued during the second top-up period is displayed only in the upper left area A11. In addition, the number of acquisitions display image G32 for notifying the number of game media acquired in the AT state ST5 and the remaining number of awards display image G33 for notifying the remaining number of awards of game media in the AT state ST5 are displayed only in the upper right area A12.

In the AT state ST5, if the role selection process (Figure 13) results in one of the index values IV = 1 to 9, the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to achieve the first bell winning or the second bell winning will be announced, and as shown in Figure 44 (a), the stopping order announcement image G34 for announcing the stopping order is displayed across the boundaries of the lower left area A13 and lower right area A14, regardless of the division of the upper left area A11, upper right area A12, lower left area A13, and lower right area A14. In addition, the performance operation device 121 (see FIG. 45) may be operated to generate an opportunity to change, add, or advance the contents of the moving image display on the image display device 63, and as shown in FIG. 44(b), an operation notification image G35 for prompting the operation of the performance operation device 121 is displayed across the boundaries of the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14, regardless of the division of the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14. The performance operation device 121 is provided on the front part of the slot machine 10. As shown in FIG. 44(b), the operation notification image G35 is displayed during a valid operation period during which operation of the performance operation device 121 is valid. When the performance operation device 121 is operated during the valid operation period, this triggers a number of points awarded notification display G43 to be displayed in the upper left area A11, upper right area A12, lower left area A13, and lower right area A14, as shown in FIG. 44(c).

The electrical configuration for enabling image display during the first and second added periods as described above will be explained with reference to the block diagram in Figure 45.

As shown in FIG. 45, the performance control board 91 of the performance control device 90 is equipped with a memory module 101, a VRAM 102, and a video display processor (VDP) 103 in addition to the performance side MPU 92.

The performance side MPU 92 functions as the main control unit in the performance control device 90, and reads, interprets, and executes control programs, etc. In detail, the performance side MPU 92 is connected via a bus to an input port 104 mounted on the performance control board 91, and various commands sent from the main side MPU 72 are input to the performance side MPU 92 through the input port 104. Note that receiving commands from the main side MPU 72 in the performance side MPU 92 is not limited to a configuration in which commands are received directly from the main side MPU 72, but also includes a configuration in which commands are received relayed to a relay board.

The production side MPU 92 is connected to the VDP 103 via a bus, and issues drawing instructions to the image display device 63 to output an image signal based on commands received from the main side MPU 72. The VDP 103 is an image generation device that reads image data stored in the memory module 101 into the VRAM 102 based on drawing instructions from the production side MPU 92, and uses the read image data, specifically by processing it, to draw on the image display device 63, and is a type of drawing circuit that operates the image processing device 63b built in to drive and control the liquid crystal display unit 63a in the image display device 63. The VDP 103 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is made into an IC chip, and its actual form can be described as a microcomputer chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing.

The memory module 101 prestores various image data including sprite data for designs and characters to be displayed on the image display device 63, background data, and moving image data. The memory module 101 has a non-volatile semiconductor memory that does not require an external power supply to retain the data. The memory module 101 is also used as a read-only memory (ROM) when the slot machine 10 is in use.

Here, each sprite data contains at least a combination of bitmap data that defines the character's shape and pattern, and a color palette table that is referenced when determining the display color for each pixel of the bitmap image. The background data is stored as JPEG format data in which still image data has been compressed. The video data is stored as MPEG format data in which multiple still image data have been compressed.

The VRAM 102 is a storage means for temporarily storing various data necessary for outputting images to the image display device 63. The VRAM 102 has a volatile semiconductor memory that requires an external power supply to retain memory, and more specifically, an SDRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. The storage capacity is 2 Gbits, but this storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the performance control device 90 is executed satisfactorily. The VRAM 102 is used for both reading and writing when the slot machine 10 is in use.

The VRAM 102 includes a development buffer 105. Image data is transferred from the memory module 101 to the development buffer 105 based on a data transfer instruction from the VDP 103 to the memory module 101. The VRAM 102 also includes a frame buffer 106 in which drawing data is created by the VDP 103. The VRAM 102 may be built into the VDP 103.

The VDP 103 will be described in detail. The VDP 103 comprises a control unit 111, a register 112, a video decoder 113, and a display circuit 114. These circuits are connected to each other via a bus, and are also connected to an I/F 115 for the production side MPU 92 and an I/F 116 for the VRAM 102.

The VDP 103 stores the drawing list as drawing instruction information transmitted from the production side MPU 92 in the register 112. By storing the drawing list in the register 112, the control unit 111 starts a program according to the drawing list and executes predetermined processing. Note that all of the control programs for the control unit 111 to operate may be provided by the drawing list, or a memory in which the control programs are pre-stored may be built into the control unit 111, and the control unit 111 executes predetermined processing based on the control programs and the contents of the drawing list. Also, the control programs may be read out in advance from the memory module 101.

As part of the above process, the control unit 111 reads out image data stored in the memory module 101 into the expansion buffer 105 of the VRAM 102. The control unit 111 also creates one frame's worth of drawing data in the frame buffer 106 using (or processing) the image data read out into the expansion buffer 105. One frame's worth of drawing data refers to data necessary to display an image at one update timing in a configuration in which the image on the display surface of the image display device 63 is updated at a predetermined update timing.

The frame buffer 106 is provided with a plurality of frame areas 106a and 106b. Specifically, a first frame area 106a and a second frame area 106b are provided. Each of these frame areas 106a and 106b is set to a capacity capable of storing one frame's worth of drawing data. Specifically, each of the frame areas 106a and 106b includes a number of unit areas that correspond to the dots (pixels) of the liquid crystal display unit 63a (i.e., the display surface) at a predetermined magnification. Each unit area has a storage capacity capable of storing data for specifying which color is to be displayed. More specifically, a full-color method is adopted, and 256 colors can be set for each of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) in each dot. Correspondingly, in each unit area, one byte (8 bits) is assigned to each of the RGB colors. In other words, each unit area has a storage capacity of at least 3 bytes.

By providing the frame buffer 106 with a first frame area 106a and a second frame area 106b, while rendering is being performed on the image display device 63 using rendering data created in one frame area, rendering data to be used in the future is created for the other frame area. In other words, a double buffer system is adopted for the frame buffer 106.

In the display circuit 114, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the liquid crystal display unit 63a is generated based on the drawing data created in the first frame area 106a or the second frame area 106b, and the image signal is output to the image display device 63 via the output port 107 connected to the display circuit 114. In detail, drawing data is transferred from the frame areas 106a and 106b to be output to the display circuit 114. The transferred drawing data is converted into gradation data by a scaler (not shown) and resolution adjustment is performed so that the transferred drawing data corresponds to the resolution of the image display device 63. Then, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the image display device 63 is generated and output based on the gradation data. In addition, the video decoder 113 decodes the video data transferred to the expansion buffer 105 of the VRAM 102.

Next, we will explain the processing configuration for enabling image display during the first and second added periods. Figure 46 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing executed by the production side MPU 92. The timer interrupt processing is repeatedly executed by the production side MPU 92 at a relatively short period (e.g., 4 milliseconds).

First, a performance setting process is executed to set data used to execute the light emission control of the upper lamp 61, the sound output control of the speaker 62, and the display control of the image display device 63 (step S2201). Then, a display control process is executed to output a drawing list to the VDP 103 based on the data set in the performance setting process (step S2202), a light emission control process is executed to control the light emission of the upper lamp 61 based on the data set in the performance setting process (step S2203), and a sound output control process is executed to control the sound output of the speaker 62 based on the data set in the performance setting process (step S2204). In addition, a pointer update process is executed (step S2205). In the pointer update process, the pointer information of the table read into the performance side RAM 94 in the performance setting process is updated to the pointer information of the next order.

Figure 47 is a flowchart showing the effect setting process for the added-on period, which is used to perform processing related to the added-on period in the effect setting process of step S2201 in the timer interrupt process (Figure 46).

If a winning command for the first added-on period has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S2301: YES), the first winning correspondence table is read from the presentation side ROM 93 to the presentation side RAM 94 (step S2302). The presentation is controlled according to the first winning correspondence table, so that the upper lamp 61 produces a light-emitting effect corresponding to a winning during the first added-on period, the speaker 62 produces a sound output effect corresponding to a winning during the first added-on period, and the image display device 63 produces a display effect corresponding to a winning during the first added-on period. Then, the first added-on performance flag provided in the presentation side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2303). The first added-on performance flag is a flag that allows the presentation side MPU 92 to identify that a winning has occurred during the first added-on period.

If a winning command for the second added-on period has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S2304: YES), the second winning correspondence table is read from the presentation side ROM 93 to the presentation side RAM 94 (step S2305). The presentation is controlled according to the second winning correspondence table, so that the upper lamp 61 produces a light-emitting effect corresponding to a winning during the second added-on period, the speaker 62 produces a sound output effect corresponding to a winning during the second added-on period, and the image display device 63 produces a display effect corresponding to a winning during the second added-on period. Then, the second added-on performance flag provided in the presentation side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2306). The second added-on performance flag is a flag that allows the presentation side MPU 92 to identify that a winning has occurred during the second added-on period.

If a start command for the added-on period is received from the main MPU 72 (step S2307: YES), the period start table is read from the performance side ROM 93 to the performance side RAM 94 (step S2308). In this case, if the first added-on period is newly started, the period start table corresponding to the first added-on period is read, and if the second added-on period is newly started, the period start table corresponding to the second added-on period is read. By controlling the execution of the performance according to the period start table, the upper lamp 61 performs a light emission performance corresponding to the first added-on period or the second added-on period, the speaker 62 performs a sound output performance corresponding to the first added-on period or the second added-on period, and the image display device 63 performs a display performance corresponding to the first added-on period or the second added-on period. After that, the added-on period flag provided in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2309). The added-on period flag is a flag for the performance side MPU 92 to identify that a performance corresponding to the first added-on period or the second added-on period is being executed.

If a command is received from the main MPU 72 during the add-on period (step S2310: YES), the number of awards selected this time is determined from the information included in the command during the add-on period (step S2311). After that, if the first add-on performance flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2312: YES), a read process of the first add-on performance table is executed (step S2313). The performance side ROM 93 pre-stores multiple types of first add-on performance tables for each of the award numbers that can be selected during the first add-on period (see FIG. 42). In the read process of the first add-on performance table, the first add-on performance table to be used this time is determined by lottery from the first add-on performance table group corresponding to the award number determined in step S2311. Then, the determined type of first add-on performance table is read from the performance side ROM 93 to the performance side RAM 94. By controlling the execution of the effects according to the first added-on effect table, the upper lamp 61 produces a light-emitting effect for one game during the first added-on period, the speaker 62 produces a sound output effect for one game during the first added-on period, and the image display device 63 produces a display effect for one game during the first added-on period. In this case, when the image display device 63 produces a display effect for one game during the first added-on period, the image display device 63 produces images as shown in Figures 43(a) to 43(c).

On the other hand, if the first added-on performance flag in the performance side RAM 94 is not set to "1", i.e., if the second added-on performance flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2312: NO), a process of reading out the second added-on performance table is executed (step S2314). In the performance side ROM 93, multiple types of second added-on performance tables are pre-stored for each of the award numbers (see FIG. 42) that can be selected during the second added-on period. In the process of reading out the second added-on performance table, the second added-on performance table to be used this time is determined by lottery from the group of second added-on performance tables corresponding to the award number grasped in step S2311. Then, the determined type of second added-on performance table is read out from the performance side ROM 93 to the performance side RAM 94. By controlling the execution of the effects according to the second added-on effect table, the upper lamp 61 produces a light-emitting effect for one game during the second added-on period, the speaker 62 produces a sound output effect for one game during the second added-on period, and the image display device 63 produces a display effect for one game during the second added-on period. In this case, when the image display device 63 produces a display effect for one game during the second added-on period, the image display device 63 produces images as shown in Figures 44(a) to 44(c).

When the add-on period flag in the presentation side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2315: YES) and the presentation operation device 121 is in an effective operation period (step S2316: YES), it is determined whether the presentation operation device 121 has been operated (step S2317). The effective operation period of the presentation operation device 121 is set as a period midway through one game in the first add-on period or the second add-on period. During the effective operation period, an operation notification image G35 such as that shown in FIG. 43(b) or FIG. 44(b) is displayed on the image display device 63.

If the performance operation device 121 is being operated (step S2317: YES), an operation response process is executed (step S2318). In the operation exercise process, the location to be referenced in the first add-on performance table or the second add-on performance table read into the performance side RAM 94 is changed to the location that corresponds to the operation of the performance operation device 121. As a result, the number of awards notification displays G23, G43 as shown in Figure 43 (c) or Figure 44 (c) are displayed on the image display device 63.

If an end command for the top-up period has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S2319: YES), the period end table is read from the performance side ROM 93 to the performance side RAM 94 (step S2320). The performance is controlled according to the period end table, so that the upper lamp 61 produces a light-emitting effect corresponding to the end of the first or second top-up period, the speaker 62 produces a sound output effect corresponding to the end of the first or second top-up period, and the image display device 63 produces a display effect corresponding to the end of the first or second top-up period. Then, a flag clear process is executed (step S2321). In the flag clear process, the top-up period flag, the first top-up performance flag, and the second top-up performance flag in the performance side RAM 94 are cleared to "0".

Figure 48 is a flowchart showing the display control process for the added-on period, which is part of the display control process in step S2202 in the timer interrupt process (Figure 46), and is used to perform processing related to the added-on period.

If the first added performance flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2401: YES), the two-split designation information is stored in a register of the performance side MPU 92 (step S2402), and from the data to be referenced in the current processing round in the period start table and the first added performance table read into the performance side RAM 94, the split side image data required to display the performance video display G21, G22 or the award number notification display G23 in the left area A1 and right area A2 of the image display device 63 is determined (step S2403), and the parameters to be applied to the split side image data are determined (step S2404). These parameters include information such as the coordinates, magnification, and α value to be applied to the split side image data.

When the game is not currently being executed, the period start table is the table to be referenced, and when the game is currently being executed, the first added performance table is the table to be referenced. In addition, the period start table and the first added performance table do not have the image data of the divided side corresponding to the left area A1 and the right area A2 set individually, but only the image data of the divided side corresponding to the left area A1 is set, and in step S2403, the image data of the divided side is grasped. The information of the grasped image data of the divided side is set in a drawing list and sent to VDP103. VDP103 reads the image data of the divided side from the memory module 101 to the expansion buffer 105 of VRAM102 based on the drawing list, and creates drawing data for performing the animation display G21, G22 or the awarded number notification display G23 for the left area A1 using the read image data of the divided side, and further copies the drawing data as the drawing data of the right area A2 side. This eliminates the need to set the divided side image data information corresponding to the left area A1 and the right area A2 individually in the period start table and the first added-on performance table, making it possible to reduce the data capacity of these period start table and the first added-on performance table. Also, since VDP 103 does not need to create drawing data separately for each of the left area A1 and the right area A2, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the drawing process.

As described above, in the first added-on performance table, the divided side image data information required to display the number of awards notification display G23 is set only for the left side area A1. In contrast, in the performance setting process for the added-on period (FIG. 47), when a command is received during the added-on period, the number of awards selected in the added-on lottery process for the current added-on period (step S2104) is determined. This number of awards is the sum of the number of awards notified in the number of awards notification display G23 in the left side area A1 and the number of awards notified in the number of awards notification display G23 in the right side area A2. Therefore, the divided side image data information required to display the number of awards notification display G23 set in the first added-on performance table is image data information indicating the quotient value obtained by dividing the number of awards set in the command during the added-on period, i.e., the number of awards determined in step S2311, by "2".

If the first overlay performance flag in the performance side RAM 94 is not set to "1" (step S2401: NO), the four-division designation information is stored in a register of the performance side MPU 92 (step S2405), and from the data to be referenced in the current processing round in the period start table and the second overlay performance table read into the performance side RAM 94, the divided side image data required to display the performance video display G41, G42 or the award number notification display G43 in the upper left area A11, upper right area A12, lower left area A13, and lower right area A14 of the image display device 63 is determined (step S2406), and the parameters to be applied to the divided side image data are determined (step S2407). These parameters include information such as coordinates, magnification, and α value to be applied to the divided side image data.

When the game is not currently being played, the period start table is the table to be referenced, and when the game is currently being played, the second added-on performance table is the table to be referenced. Furthermore, the period start table and the second added-on performance table do not have the divided side image data corresponding to the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14 set individually, but only the divided side image data corresponding to the upper left area A11 is set, and in step S2406, the divided side image data is grasped. The information of the grasped divided side image data is set in a drawing list and sent to VDP103. Based on the drawing list, the VDP 103 reads the image data of the divided side from the memory module 101 to the expansion buffer 105 of the VRAM 102, and creates drawing data for displaying the animation G41, G42 or the number of awards notification display G43 for the upper left area A11 using the read image data of the divided side, and further copies the drawing data as drawing data for the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14. This makes it possible to reduce the data capacity of the period start table and the second added-on performance table, since it is not necessary to set the information of the divided side image data corresponding to the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14 individually in the period start table and the second added-on performance table. In addition, since the VDP 103 does not need to create drawing data individually for each of the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the drawing process.

As described above, in the second add-on performance table, the information on the divided side image data required to display the number of bonuses notification display G43 is set only for the upper left area A11. In contrast, in the performance setting process for the add-on period (FIG. 47), when a command is received during the add-on period, the number of bonuses selected in the add-on lottery process for the current add-on period (step S2104) is determined. This number of bonuses is the sum of the number of bonuses notified in the number of bonuses notification display G43 in the upper left area A11, the number of bonuses notified in the number of bonuses notification display G43 in the upper right area A12, the number of bonuses notified in the number of bonuses notification display G43 in the lower left area A13, and the number of bonuses notified in the number of bonuses notification display G43 in the lower right area A14. Therefore, the image data information on the split side required to perform the award number notification display G43 set in the second added-on performance table is image data information showing the quotient value obtained by dividing the award number set in the command during the added-on period, i.e., the award number grasped in step S2311, by "4".

When the processing of step S2404 or step S2407 is executed, the historical image data corresponding to the game history is grasped (step S2408). The historical image data includes image data for displaying the remaining number of continued games image G31, image data for displaying the number of acquisitions display image G32, and image data for displaying the remaining number of awards display image G33. Based on various commands received from the main side MPU 72, the production side MPU 92 is capable of identifying the remaining number of continued games in the first addition period or the second addition period, the number of game media acquired in the AT state ST5, and the remaining number of game media awarded in the AT state ST5, and grasps the historical image data corresponding to the various identified information in step S2408. In addition, the parameters to be applied to the grasped historical image data are grasped (step S2409). The parameters include information such as coordinates, magnification, and α value to be applied to the historical image data, and are fixed information. This fixed information is preset in the production side ROM 93.

After that, if the situation is such that the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R should be notified (step S2410: YES), the stop order image data for displaying the stop order notification image G34 to be displayed this time is grasped (step S2411). Based on various commands received from the main side MPU 72, the production side MPU 92 can specify whether the situation is such that the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R should be notified, and if the stop order is to be notified, the type of the stop order. In step S2411, the stop order image data is grasped according to the various information specified. In addition, the parameters to be applied to the grasped stop order image data are grasped (step S2412). The parameters include information such as coordinates, magnification, and α value to be applied to the stop order image data, and are fixed information. This fixed information is set in advance in the production side ROM 93.

When a negative judgment is made in step S2410 or when the processing of step S2412 is executed, it is judged whether or not the operation device 121 for performance is operated during the operation effective period of the operation device 121 (step S2413). Whether or not the operation device 121 for performance is in the operation effective period is identified from the first added performance table or the second added performance table read into the performance side RAM 94. When the operation device 121 for performance is operated during the operation effective period (step S2413: YES), the operation performance image data for displaying the operation notification image G35 is grasped from the data to be referred to in the current processing in the first added performance table or the second added performance table read into the performance side RAM 94 (step S2414), and the parameters to be applied to the operation performance image data are grasped (step S2415). The parameters include information such as coordinates, magnification, and α value to be applied to the operation performance image data, and are fixed information.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2413 or if the processing of step S2415 is executed, a drawing list output process is executed (step S2416). In the drawing list output process, the information of the various image data grasped in steps S2401 to S2415, the parameters to be applied to the various image data, and other information are set in the drawing list, and the drawing list after the settings is sent to the VDP 103. In this case, if two-split designation information is stored in the register of the production side MPU 92 in step S2402, the two-split designation information is set in the drawing list, and if four-split designation information is stored in the register of the production side MPU 92 in step S2405, the four-split designation information is set in the drawing list.

The VDP 103 reads image data from the memory module 101 to the expansion buffer 105 of the VRAM 102 according to the received drawing list, and sets the read image data in the frame areas 106a and 106b of the frame buffer 106 for which drawing data is to be created after applying parameters and various processing. As a result, drawing data corresponding to the drawing list is created in the frame areas 106a and 106b, and the created drawing data is set in the image processing device 63b of the image display device 63, causing an image corresponding to the drawing data to be displayed on the image display device 63.

Figure 49 is a flowchart showing the drawing process of a divided image executed by VDP 103 during the first or second added-on period. Figures 50(a) to 50(d) are explanatory diagrams for explaining how drawing data is created in the frame areas 106a and 106b of the frame buffer 106 that are the drawing targets by executing the drawing process of the divided image.

If the received drawing list has two-division designation information set (step S2501: YES), the divided side image data set in the drawing list is read from the memory module 101 to the expansion buffer 105 of the VRAM 102 (step S2502), and the parameters to be applied to the divided side image data are obtained from the drawing list (step S2503). Then, with the parameters obtained in step S2503 applied, the divided side image data read to the expansion buffer 105 in step S2502 is drawn in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn among the first and second frame areas 106a and 106b in the frame buffer 106 (step S2504). In this case, the parameters obtained in step S2503 are set with coordinates and magnification for drawing the divided side image data obtained in step S2502 in the left area A1 of the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn. Therefore, as shown in Figure 50 (a), the divided side image data D1 is drawn in the first section area DA1 when divided into two, which corresponds to the left area A1 of the display surface of the image display device 63, of the frame areas 106a, 106b to be drawn. The divided side image data D1 is data for displaying the animation display G22 for presentation, but the same is true for the animation display G21 for presentation and the award number notification display G23.

Then, the divided side image data D1 drawn in the first section area DA1 when divided into two is copied to the second section area DA2 when divided into two, which corresponds to the right area A2 of the display surface of the image display device 63, in the frame areas 106a, 106b to be drawn (step S2505). As a result, as shown in FIG. 50(b), the same divided side image data D1 is drawn in each of the first section area DA1 when divided into two and the second section area DA2 when divided into two in the frame areas 106a, 106b to be drawn.

After that, the history image data set in the drawing list is read from the memory module 101 to the expansion buffer 105 of the VRAM 102 (step S2506). Then, the parameters to be applied to the history image data are read from the drawing list, and the history image data read in step S2506 is drawn in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn with the read parameters applied (step S2507). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 50(c), the image data D2 corresponding to the remaining number of games to continue image G31, the image data D3 corresponding to the number of acquisitions display image G32, and the image data D4 corresponding to the remaining number of awards display image G33 are drawn in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn. In this case, the image data D2 to D4 are overwritten with an opaque alpha value applied to the divided image data D1 in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn, so that the remaining number of games to continue image G31, the number of acquisitions display image G32, and the remaining number of awards display image G33 are displayed in front of the animation displays G21, G22 for effects, and the award number notification display G23. However, it may also be configured so that they are blended with a semi-transparent alpha value applied.

After that, if the stop order image data is set in the drawing list (step S2508: YES), the stop order image data set in the drawing list is read from the memory module 101 to the expansion buffer 105 of the VRAM 102 (step S2509). Then, the parameters to be applied to the stop order image data are read from the drawing list, and the stop order image data read in step S2509 is drawn in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn with the read parameters applied (step S2510). Therefore, the image data corresponding to the stop order notification image G34 is drawn in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn. In this case, the image data corresponding to the stop order notification image G34 is overwritten in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn with an opaque α value applied to the divided image data D1 so that the stop order notification image G34 is displayed in front of the animation displays G21 and G22 for performance and the award number notification display G23. However, it may also be configured so that the blending occurs with a semi-transparent alpha value applied.

After that, if the operation performance image data is set in the drawing list (step S2511: YES), the operation performance image data set in the drawing list is read from the memory module 101 to the expansion buffer 105 of the VRAM 102 (step S2512). Then, the parameters to be applied to the operation performance image data are read from the drawing list, and the operation performance image data read in step S2512 is drawn in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn with the read parameters applied (step S2513). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 50(d), the image data D5 corresponding to the operation notification image G35 is drawn in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn. In this case, the image data D5 corresponding to the operation notification image G35 is overwritten in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn with an opaque α value applied to the divided image data D1 so that the operation notification image G35 is displayed in front of the animation displays G21 and G22 for performance and the number of awards notification display G23. However, it may also be configured so that the blending occurs with a semi-transparent alpha value applied.

If the two-division designation information is not set in the received drawing list (step S2501: NO), that is, if the four-division designation information is set, the divided side image data set in the drawing list is read from the memory module 101 to the expansion buffer 105 of the VRAM 102 (step S2514), and the parameters to be applied to the divided side image data are grasped from the drawing list (step S2515). Then, with the parameters grasped in step S2515 applied, the divided side image data read to the expansion buffer 105 in step S2514 is drawn in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn among the first and second frame areas 106a and 106b in the frame buffer 106 (step S2516). In this case, the parameters grasped in step S2515 are set with coordinates and magnification for drawing the divided side image data grasped in step S2514 in the upper left area A11 of the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn. Therefore, the image data of the divided side is drawn in the first section area of the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn, which corresponds to the upper left area A11 of the display surface of the image display device 63 when divided into four sections.

Then, the divided side image data drawn in the first section area when divided into four is copied to the second divided area when divided into four corresponding to the upper right area A12 of the display surface of the image display device 63, the third divided area when divided into four corresponding to the lower left area A13, and the fourth divided area when divided into four corresponding to the lower right area A14 of the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn (step S2517). This results in the same divided side image data being drawn in the first divided area when divided into four, the second divided area when divided into four, the third divided area when divided into four, and the fourth divided area when divided into four in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn.

After that, the history image data set in the drawing list is read from the memory module 101 to the expansion buffer 105 of the VRAM 102 (step S2506). Then, the parameters to be applied to the history image data are read from the drawing list, and the history image data read in step S2506 is drawn in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn with the read parameters applied (step S2507). Therefore, the image data corresponding to the remaining number of games to be continued image G31, the image data corresponding to the number of acquisitions display image G32, and the image data corresponding to the remaining number of awards display image G33 are drawn in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn. In this case, these image data are overwritten in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn with an opaque alpha value applied to the image data on the divided side so that the remaining number of games to be continued image G31, the number of acquisitions display image G32, and the remaining number of awards display image G33 are displayed in front of the animation displays G41 and G42 for performance and the award number notification display G43. However, it may also be configured so that the blending occurs with a semi-transparent alpha value applied.

After that, if the stop order image data is set in the drawing list (step S2508: YES), the stop order image data set in the drawing list is read from the memory module 101 to the expansion buffer 105 of the VRAM 102 (step S2509). Then, the parameters to be applied to the stop order image data are read from the drawing list, and the stop order image data read in step S2509 is drawn in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn with the read parameters applied (step S2510). Therefore, the image data corresponding to the stop order notification image G34 is drawn in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn. In this case, the image data corresponding to the stop order notification image G34 is overwritten in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn with an opaque alpha value applied to the image data on the divided side so that the stop order notification image G34 is displayed in front of the animation displays G41 and G42 for performance and the award number notification display G43. However, it may also be configured so that the blending occurs with a semi-transparent alpha value applied.

After that, if the operation performance image data is set in the drawing list (step S2511: YES), the operation performance image data set in the drawing list is read from the memory module 101 to the expansion buffer 105 of the VRAM 102 (step S2512). Then, the parameters to be applied to the operation performance image data are read from the drawing list, and the operation performance image data read in step S2512 is drawn in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn with the read parameters applied (step S2513). Therefore, the image data corresponding to the operation notification image G35 is drawn in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn. In this case, the image data corresponding to the operation notification image G35 is overwritten in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn with an opaque α value applied to the image data on the divided side so that the operation notification image G35 is displayed in front of the animation displays G41 and G42 for performance and the number of awards notification display G43. However, it may be configured to be blended with a semi-transparent α value applied.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

By setting the image data D1 at the time of division in each of the first divided area DA1 when divided into two and the second divided area DA2 when divided into two in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn, the animation displays G21 and G22 for performance and the award number notification display G23 are displayed in each of the left area A1 and right area A2 on the display surface of the image display device 63. As a result, when displaying the animation displays G21 and G22 for performance and the award number notification display G23 in each of the left area A1 and right area A2 on the display surface of the image display device 63, it is only necessary to set the same image data D1 at the time of division in each of the first divided area DA1 when divided into two and the second divided area DA2 when divided into two using the same image data. Therefore, it is possible to perform the display on the image display device 63 in an optimal manner.

The image data D1 at the time of division, which is drawn using image data in the first divided area DA1 at the time of division, is copied to the second divided area DA2 at the time of division, and the image data D1 at the time of division is set in the second divided area DA2 at the time of division. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load compared to a configuration in which the image data D1 at the time of division is drawn using image data for each of the first divided area DA1 at the time of division and the second divided area DA2 at the time of division. It is also possible to set the image data D1 at the time of division in the second divided area DA2 at the time of division using the image data D1 at the time of division drawn in the first divided area DA1 at the time of division.

In a state where the same animation displays G21, G22 and the number of awards notification display G23 for presentation are displayed in each of the partitioned left and right areas A1 and A2 on the display surface of the image display device 63, the remaining number of games to be continued image G31, the number of acquisitions display image G32, the remaining number of awards display image G33, the stop order notification image G34, and the operation notification image G35, which are not images displayed with the same content, are displayed in each of the left and right areas A1 and A2. This makes it possible to provide display contents other than the animation displays G21, G22, and the number of awards notification display G23 for presentation by the remaining number of games to be continued image G31, the number of acquisitions display image G32, the remaining number of awards display image G33, the stop order notification image G34, and the operation notification image G35, which are displayed independently of the left and right areas A1 and A2, while drawing attention to the animation displays G21, G22, and the number of awards notification display G23 for presentation displayed in the left and right areas A1 and A2, respectively. This allows the image display device 63 to display optimally.

In a configuration in which the left side area A1 and the right side area A2 respectively display animation displays G21, G22 and the number of awards notification display G23 for presentation, and the remaining number of games to continue image G31, the number of acquisitions display image G32, the remaining number of awards display image G33, the stop order notification image G34 and the operation notification image G35 are displayed, the remaining number of games to continue image G31, the number of acquisitions display image G32, the remaining number of awards display image G33, the stop order notification image G34 and the operation notification image G35 are displayed as if they are in front of the left side area A1 and the right side area A2, making the remaining number of games to continue image G31, the number of acquisitions display image G32, the remaining number of awards display image G33, the stop order notification image G34 and the operation notification image G35 stand out.

The animation displays G21, G22 and the number of awards notification display G23 for presentation purposes are displayed within the respective ranges of the left area A1 and the right area A2, while the stop order notification image G34 and the operation notification image G35 are displayed across the boundaries between the left area A1 and the right area A2. This makes it possible to display the stop order notification image G34 and the operation notification image G35 in a size larger than the animation displays G21, G22 and the number of awards notification display G23 for presentation purposes.

During the first add-on period, the display surface of the image display device 63 is divided into two, a left area A1 and a right area A2, whereas during the second add-on period, the display surface of the image display device 63 is divided into four, an upper left area A11, an upper right area A12, a lower left area A13 and a lower right area A14. This makes it possible to diversify the display content when using multiple display areas to display the animation displays G21, G22, G41, G42 for performance and the award number notification displays G23, G43.

Fifth embodiment
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the drawing process of the divided images is different from that of the fourth embodiment. The configuration different from the fourth embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as the fourth embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 51 is a flowchart showing the divided image drawing process in this embodiment executed by VDP103.

If two-split designation information is set in the received drawing list (step S2601: YES), the split side image data set in the drawing list is read from the memory module 101 to the expansion buffer 105 of the VRAM 102 (step S2602), and the parameters to be applied to the split side image data are obtained from the drawing list (step S2603). Then, with the parameters obtained in step S2603 applied, the split side image data read to the expansion buffer 105 in step S2602 is drawn in the expansion buffer 105 of the VRAM 102 (step S2604).

Then, the magnification setting process for the two-division is executed (step S2605). In the magnification setting process for the two-division, the size of the drawing data drawn in the expansion buffer 105 in step S2604 is changed so that it is the same as the size of the first section area DA1 when divided into two, which corresponds to the left area A1 of the display surface of the image display device 63, among the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn. Then, the drawing data after the size change is copied to the first section area DA1 when divided into two, which corresponds to the left area A1 of the display surface of the image display device 63, among the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn, and the second section area DA2 when divided into two, which corresponds to the right area A2 of the display surface of the image display device 63 (step S2606). As a result, as shown in FIG. 50(b), the image data D1 of the same division side is drawn in each of the first section area DA1 when divided into two and the second section area DA2 when divided into two in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn.

Then, the process of steps S2607 to S2614 is executed. The process of steps S2607 to S2614 is the same as the process of steps S2506 to S2513 in the drawing process of the divided images in the fourth embodiment (Figure 49).

If two-division designation information is not set in the received drawing list (step S2601: NO), i.e., if four-division designation information is set, the image data of the divided side set in the drawing list is read from the memory module 101 to the expansion buffer 105 of the VRAM 102 (step S2615), and the parameters to be applied to the image data of the divided side are determined from the drawing list (step S2616). Then, with the parameters determined in step S2616 applied, the image data of the divided side read to the expansion buffer 105 in step S2615 is drawn in the expansion buffer 105 of the VRAM 102 (step S2617).

Then, a magnification setting process for dividing into four is executed (step S2618). In the magnification setting process for dividing into four, the size of the drawing data drawn in the expansion buffer 105 in step S2617 is changed so that the size of the drawing data is the same as the size of the first section area when divided into four corresponding to the upper left area A11 of the display surface of the image display device 63 among the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn. Then, the drawing data after the size change is copied to each of the first section area when divided into four corresponding to the upper left area A11 of the display surface of the image display device 63 among the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn, the second section area when divided into four corresponding to the upper right area A12 of the display surface of the image display device 63, the third section area when divided into four corresponding to the lower left area A13 of the display surface of the image display device 63, and the fourth section area when divided into four corresponding to the lower right area A14 of the display surface of the image display device 63 (step S2619). This results in image data for the same division being drawn in the first section area when divided into four, the second section area when divided into four, the third section area when divided into four, and the fourth section area when divided into four in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn.

Then, the process of steps S2607 to S2614 is executed. The process of steps S2607 to S2614 is the same as the process of steps S2506 to S2513 in the drawing process of the divided images in the fourth embodiment (Figure 49).

According to the above configuration, the image data of the split side is first drawn in the expansion buffer 105 of the VRAM 102, and the drawn image data of the split side is copied to the first section area when divided into two and the second section area when divided into two in the frame areas 106a, 106b to be drawn in the case of a two-split display, and copied to the first section area when divided into four, the second section area when divided into four, the third section area when divided into four and the fourth section area when divided into four in the frame areas 106a, 106b to be drawn in the case of a four-split display. This allows the data drawn in a portion of the frame area 106a, 106b to be drawn on to be displayed without being drawn in other areas of the frame area 106a, 106b. In the case of a two-split display, the same animation displays G21, G22 and the award number notification display G23 can be displayed in the left area A1 and the right area A2 of the image display device 63, respectively. In the case of a four-split display, the same animation displays G41, G42 and the award number notification display G43 can be displayed in the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14 of the image display device 63, respectively.

Sixth embodiment
In this embodiment, the display contents of the image display device 63 when the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends and the display contents of the image display device 63 when the AT state ST5 ends are different from those of the first embodiment. Below, the configurations different from the first embodiment will be described. Note that the description of the same configurations as the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figures 52(a) to 52(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display contents of the image display device 63 when the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends without transition to the AT state ST5.

When the rotation stop operation is performed on all reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the final game of the pseudo bonus state ST4 that does not involve a transition to the AT state ST5, and the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped, the image display device 63 starts displaying a bonus end image G51 (specifically, a text image of "BONUS END") as a bonus end indication, as shown in FIG. 52(a). The content of the bonus end indication is arbitrary as long as the player can recognize that the pseudo bonus state ST4 has ended and that a transition to the AT state ST5 will not occur, and may be a text image with content different from the text image of "BONUS END", or may be configured to display a text image indicating that the pseudo bonus state ST4 has ended in accordance with the background image or character image.

When a predetermined period of time (specifically, one second) has elapsed since the bonus end display started, as shown in FIG. 52(b), while the bonus end image G51 is being displayed, the image display device 63 starts displaying a warning image G52 (specifically, a text image saying "Play in moderation") as a warning display. The warning display is a display to warn the player against becoming addicted to the game in order to prevent the player from becoming addicted to the game (an "addiction prevention display"). In this slot machine 10, a text image saying "Play in moderation" is displayed as the warning image G52, but the specific display content is arbitrary as long as it is possible to encourage players to prevent addiction, and text images with different content may be used, or a configuration may be used in which text images encouraging players to prevent addiction are displayed in accordance with the background image or character image.

The warning display is maintained for a predetermined display duration (specifically, 3 seconds). In this case, when the final game of the pseudo bonus state ST4 without a transition to the AT state ST5 ends and a bet is set for the gaming medium to start the next game, as shown in FIG. 52(c), the bonus end display that had been displayed up until then on the image display device 63 ends, and the display of the image G53 of the normal gaming state ST1 begins. However, if the predetermined display duration has not elapsed since the display of the warning image G52 began at this point, the display of the warning image G52 is maintained in a situation where the image G53 of the normal gaming state ST1 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 52(c). The display of this warning image G52 ends when the predetermined display duration has elapsed since the display of the warning image G52 began, even if a newly started game of the normal gaming state ST1 is in progress.

On the other hand, if no new bet is set between the start of the display of the warning image G52 and the end of a specified display duration in the final game of the pseudo bonus state ST4 that does not involve a transition to the AT state ST5, the display of the warning image G52 ends while the display of the bonus end image G51 continues. In this case, the display content of the image display device 63 becomes the display content shown in FIG. 52(a).

Figure 53 is a flow chart showing the pseudo bonus processing in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 72. Note that the pseudo bonus processing is executed in step S605 of the response processing at the end of play (Figure 18) as in the first embodiment described above, and since the response processing at the end of play is executed after all of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped spinning in one game, the pseudo bonus processing is also executed after all of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped spinning in one game.

If the value of the bet number setting counter 74a in the master RAM 74 is "3" (step S2701: YES), the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter in the master RAM 74 is decremented by 1 (step S2702). After that, by determining whether the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter after decrementing by 1 is "0", it is determined whether the game to be ended this time is the final game of the pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S2703). If the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter is not "0" (step S2703: NO), this pseudo bonus process is terminated without executing the process for terminating the pseudo bonus state ST4 from step S2704 onwards. If the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter is "0" (step S2703: YES), the process for terminating the pseudo bonus state ST4 from step S2704 onwards is executed.

In the process for terminating the pseudo bonus state ST4, first, by determining whether the AT transition confirmation flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1", it is determined whether the transition condition to the AT state ST5 is satisfied in the current pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S2704). If the AT transition confirmation flag is set to "1" (step S2704: YES), it means that the transition condition to the AT state ST5 is satisfied in the current pseudo bonus state ST4. In this case, first, the pseudo bonus state flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S2705). Then, information corresponding to "200", which is the initial number of awards in the AT state ST5, is set in the AT continuation counter 74e in the main RAM 74 (step S2706). In addition, the AT state flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2707). Then, an AT transition command indicating that a transition to the AT state ST5 will occur is sent to the performance side MPU 92 (step S2708). When the performance side MPU 92 receives an AT transition command, it causes the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 to perform a performance indicating that a transition to AT state ST5 is occurring.

On the other hand, if the AT transition confirmation flag is not set to "1" (step S2704: NO), this means that the transition condition to the AT state ST5 has not been met in the current pseudo bonus state ST4. In this case, processing is executed to end the pseudo bonus state ST4 and the second section SC2.

Specifically, first, the initialization process of the second section SC2 is executed (step S2709). In the initialization process of the second section SC2, the second section flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". As a result, the game section becomes the first section SC1. In addition, in the initialization process of the second section SC2, the pseudo bonus state flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". In addition, in the initialization process of the second section SC2, the AT continuation counter 74e and the AT state flag of the main RAM 74 are cleared to "0". As a result, the game state becomes the normal game state ST1. Note that even if the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are in the middle of the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the initialization process of the second section SC2 is executed, and the second section SC2 is terminated, but the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are not terminated and continue as they are.

Then, the section display unit 67 is switched from a lit state to an off state (step S2710). This ends the notification on the section display unit 67 that it is the second section SC2. Then, a bonus end command is sent to the presentation side MPU 92 (step S2711), indicating that the pseudo bonus state ST4 has ended without a transition to the AT state ST5. When the presentation side MPU 92 receives the bonus end command, it causes the upper lamp 61, speaker 62 and image display device 63 to display a presentation indicating that the pseudo bonus state ST4 has ended.

Figure 54 (a) is a flowchart showing the pseudo bonus presentation control process executed by the presentation side MPU 92. The pseudo bonus presentation control process is repeatedly executed by the presentation side MPU 92 at a relatively short cycle (e.g., 4 milliseconds cycle).

If an AT transition command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S2801: YES), an AT transition display setting process is executed (step S2802). In the AT transition display setting process, data is set so that a presentation indicating that the pseudo bonus state ST4 has ended and the AT state ST5 has begun is executed by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63. Note that when the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends and transitions to the AT state ST5 occurs, a warning display is not executed.

If a bonus end command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S2803: YES), a bonus end display setting process is executed (step S2804). In the bonus end display setting process, data is set so that a presentation indicating that the pseudo bonus state ST4 has ended without a transition to the AT state ST5 is executed by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63. In this case, data enabling the execution of the bonus end display is set in the presentation side RAM 94 as data for display control of the image display device 63. This causes the image display device 63 to start displaying a bonus end image G51 as shown in FIG. 52(a).

After that, a setting process for the warning display start timer counter 131 is executed (step S2805). As shown in FIG. 54(b), which is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data configuration of the presentation side RAM 94, the warning display start timer counter 131 is provided in the presentation side RAM 94. The warning display start timer counter 131 is a counter used by the presentation side MPU 92 to measure a predetermined period from when the bonus end display starts to when the warning display starts. In step S2805, information corresponding to a value for measuring one second as the predetermined period is set in the warning display start timer counter 131.

If the processing of step S2802 is executed, if a negative judgment is made in step S2803, or if the processing of step S2805 is executed, other processing is executed (step S2806). In other processing, processing is executed to execute an effect different from the various effects described above in the pseudo bonus state ST4.

Figure 55 is a flowchart showing the control process for various end displays executed by the production side MPU 92. The control process for various end displays is repeatedly executed by the production side MPU 92 at relatively short intervals (e.g., every 4 milliseconds).

If the image display device 63 is displaying the end of the bonus or the end of the AT (described later) (step S2901: YES), it is determined whether a bet on gaming media has been set to start a new game (step S2902). When a bet on gaming media has been set by inserting medals into the medal insertion slot 45 or by operating the credit insertion buttons 47, 48 in a situation in which it is possible to start a new game, the main MPU 72 transmits a corresponding command to the production MPU 92. This command is transmitted each time one or more gaming media are bet, but it may also be configured to be transmitted when the number of gaming media bets required to start a game has been completed. If the production MPU 92 has received this command, it determines that a bet on gaming media has been set to start a new game, and makes a positive determination in step S2902.

If a positive judgment is made in step S2902, a process for ending the end display being executed is executed (step S2903). In this process, if the bonus end display is being executed, data for executing the bonus end display is erased, and data setting is performed to start displaying image G53 (see FIG. 52(c)) in normal gaming state ST1. As a result, the state in which the bonus end display is being executed on the image display device 63 in the final game of the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends when a bet is set to start a new game, and display of image G53 in normal gaming state ST1 starts. Note that even if the process for ending is executed in a situation in which a warning display is being executed on the image display device 63, the warning display continues without being terminated. Also, if the process for ending is executed in a situation in which an AT end display is being executed, the AT end display ends, but the details of this will be explained later.

Figure 56 is a flowchart showing the control process for warning display executed by the production side MPU 92. The control process for warning display is repeatedly executed by the production side MPU 92 at a relatively short cycle (e.g., every 4 milliseconds).

If the value of the start timer counter 131 of the warning display is 1 or more (step S3001: YES), the value of the start timer counter 131 of the warning display is decremented by 1 (step S3002). Then, if the value of the start timer counter 131 of the warning display after decrementing by 1 is "0" (step S3003: YES), a setting process of the warning display is executed (step S3004). In the setting process of the warning display, data setting is performed so that a warning display to prevent the player from becoming addicted to the game is executed on the image display device 63. As a result, the display of the warning image G52 is started in a situation where the bonus end image G51 is displayed on the image display device 63 as shown in FIG. 52 (b). On the other hand, in the setting process of the warning display, data setting for controlling the upper lamp 61 and the speaker 62 is not performed. As a result, it is possible to start the display of the warning image G52 in a situation where the bonus end image G51 is displayed on the image display device 63 while the upper lamp 61 and the speaker 62 continue the performance indicating that the pseudo bonus state ST4 has ended. However, this is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that when the display of the warning image G52 starts, the upper lamp 61 emits light accordingly, and when the display of the warning image G52 starts, a corresponding sound is output from the speaker 62.

After that, a setting process for the warning display duration timer counter 132 is executed (step S3005). As shown in FIG. 54(b), the warning display duration timer counter 132 is provided in the production side RAM 94. The warning display duration timer counter 132 is a counter used by the production side MPU 92 to measure a predetermined display duration from when the warning display starts to when it ends. In step S3005, information corresponding to a value for measuring 3 seconds as the predetermined display duration is set in the warning display duration timer counter 132. The value set in the warning display duration timer counter 132 is decremented by 1 each time the production side MPU 92 executes a timer update process that is executed periodically (for example, every 4 milliseconds).

In the control process of the warning display, if the value of the warning display continuation timer counter 132 is 1 or more (step S3006: YES), the value of the warning display continuation timer counter 132 is decremented by 1 (step S3007). Then, if the value of the warning display continuation timer counter 132 after decrementing by 1 is "0" (step S3008: YES), an end process of the warning display is executed (step S3009). In this end process, data for executing the warning display is erased. As a result, the state in which the warning display is executed on the image display device 63 in the final game of the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends when a predetermined display duration has elapsed since the start of the warning display, regardless of whether a bet setting of a gaming medium has been executed to start a new game.

Figure 57 is a time chart showing how the bonus end display and the warning display are executed when the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends without transition to the AT state ST5. Figure 57(a) shows the period during which the game is being executed, Figure 57(b) shows the timing when the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has stopped, Figure 57(c) shows the timing when the bet setting for the gaming media has been performed, Figure 57(d) shows the period during which the interval display unit 67 is lit, Figure 57(e) shows the period during which the bonus end display is being executed, and Figure 57(f) shows the period during which the warning display is being executed.

First, we will explain what happens when the warning display ends before the next game starts for the final game of the pseudo bonus state ST4.

At timing t1, as shown in FIG. 57(a), the final game of pseudo bonus state ST4 begins without transition to AT state ST5. Then, at timing t2, as shown in FIG. 57(b), the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, 32R in that game stops. At timing t2, as shown in FIG. 57(d), the section display unit 67 changes from a lit state to an unlit state. This ends the notification on the section display unit 67 that it is the second section SC2. Also, at timing t2, as shown in FIG. 57(e), the bonus end display begins on the image display device 63.

After that, at the timing t3, which is a predetermined period of time (specifically, one second) after the timing t2, a warning display is started on the image display device 63 as shown in FIG. 57(f). In this case, the warning display is started on the image display device 63 when the bonus end display is being executed. Note that the timing t3 is a situation in which the final game of the pseudo bonus state ST4 has ended and a new game can be started. However, this is not limited to the configuration, and the warning display may be started before the final game of the pseudo bonus state ST4 has ended, that is, before it becomes possible to start a new game after the final game.

After that, at time t4, a predetermined display duration (specifically, 3 seconds) has elapsed since time t3, and the warning display on the image display device 63 ends as shown in FIG. 57(f). In this case, because a bet has not yet been set to start a new game, the bonus end display on the image display device 63 continues as shown in FIG. 57(e).

After that, at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 57(c), a bet is set for the gaming medium. The bet may be a bet of "1" gaming medium by inserting one medal into the medal insertion slot 45, a bet of "3" gaming medium by operating the first credit insertion button 47 in a situation where three or more virtual medals are stored, or a bet of "2" gaming medium by operating the second credit insertion button 48 in a situation where two or more virtual medals are stored. At the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 57(e), the bonus end display on the image display device 63 ends. In this case, the image display device 63 starts displaying the image G53 of the normal game state ST1. After that, as shown in FIG. 57(a), the start lever 41 is operated at the timing of t6, and a new game starts.

Next, we will explain the case where the warning display continues even after the next game has started following the final game of the pseudo bonus state ST4.

At timing t7, as shown in FIG. 57(a), the final game of pseudo bonus state ST4 begins without transition to AT state ST5. Then, at timing t8, as shown in FIG. 57(b), the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, 32R in that game stops. At timing t8, as shown in FIG. 57(d), the section display unit 67 changes from a lit state to an unlit state. This ends the notification on the section display unit 67 that it is the second section SC2. Also, at timing t8, as shown in FIG. 57(e), a bonus end display begins on the image display device 63.

After that, at the timing of t9, which is a predetermined period of time (specifically, one second) after the timing of t8, a warning display is started on the image display device 63 as shown in FIG. 57(f). In this case, the warning display is started on the image display device 63 when the bonus end display is being executed. Note that the timing of t9 is a situation in which the final game of the pseudo bonus state ST4 has ended and a new game can be started. However, this is not limited to the configuration, and the warning display may be started before the final game of the pseudo bonus state ST4 has ended, that is, before it becomes possible to start a new game after the final game.

After that, at the timing of t10, which is the timing before the lapse of a predetermined display duration (specifically, 3 seconds) from the timing of t9, a bet setting of the gaming medium is performed as shown in FIG. 57(c). The bet setting may be a bet setting of "1" gaming medium by inserting one medal into the medal insertion slot 45, a bet setting of "3" gaming medium by operating the first credit insertion button 47 in a situation where three or more virtual medals are stored, or a bet setting of "2" gaming medium by operating the second credit insertion button 48 in a situation where two or more virtual medals are stored. At the timing of t10, the bonus end display on the image display device 63 ends as shown in FIG. 57(e). In this case, the image display device 63 starts displaying the image G53 of the normal gaming state ST1. However, since the predetermined display duration has not yet elapsed, the warning display on the image display device 63 continues as shown in FIG. 57(f). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 52(c), the image display device 63 starts displaying image G53 in normal game state ST1 while the warning image G52 continues to be displayed.

Then, at the timing t11, the start lever 41 is operated to start a new game as shown in FIG. 57(a). Even in this case, the predetermined display duration has not yet elapsed, so the warning display continues on the image display device 63 as shown in FIG. 57(f). Then, at the timing t12, which is midway through the game that started at the timing t11, the predetermined display duration has elapsed since the timing t9, and the warning display on the image display device 63 ends as shown in FIG. 57(f).

With the above configuration, when the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends without transitioning to the AT state ST5, a warning display is executed on the image display device 63, making it possible to warn the player not to become absorbed in the game. In this case, the warning display continues for a predetermined display duration (specifically, 3 seconds) regardless of whether the final game of the pseudo bonus state ST4 has ended and a new game has started. This makes it possible to guarantee that the player has an opportunity to check the warning display.

The warning display is started when the bonus end display is being executed on the image display device 63. This makes it possible to start the warning display after making the player aware that the pseudo bonus state ST4, which does not involve a transition to the AT state ST5, is ending.

Even if the bonus end display continues on the image display device 63, the warning display ends when a specified display duration has elapsed. This makes it possible to prevent the warning display from continuing for an unnecessarily long period of time.

Figures 58(a) and 58(b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display contents of the image display device 63 when AT state ST5 ends.

When the rotation stop operation is performed on all reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the final game of the AT state ST5 and the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped, the image display device 63 starts displaying the AT end as shown in FIG. 58(a), an end indication image G61 (specifically, a text image of "RUSH END") to enable the player to recognize that the AT state ST5 is ending, a total number of games image G62 (specifically, a text image of "680G") indicating the total number of games played in the current AT state ST5, and a total number of acquisitions image G63 (specifically, a text image of "TOTAL 1800") indicating the total number of game media granted to the player in the current AT state ST5. The content of the AT end indication is arbitrary as long as the player can recognize that the AT state ST5 is ending. For example, the end indication image G61 may be displayed, but at least one of the total number of games image G62 and the total number of acquisitions image G63 may not be displayed.

When the AT state ST5 is started, as already explained, information corresponding to the initial number of awards in the AT state ST5, "200", is set in the AT continuation counter 74e of the main RAM 74, and when the number of awards is added, the number of awards that is the subject of the addition is added to the value of the AT continuation counter 74e. As in the first embodiment, when a game with a bet number of "3" is executed and four or more game media are awarded, the number exceeding the bet number of "3" is subtracted from the value of the AT continuation counter 74e, and when the value of the AT continuation counter 74e after the subtraction becomes "0", the AT state ST5 ends. In this case, in the AT state ST5, a number corresponding to the remaining number of awards stored in the AT continuation counter 74e is displayed on the image display device 63. In addition, in the AT state ST5, the total number of games consumed in the AT state ST5 and the total number of game media awarded to the player in the AT state ST5 are displayed on the image display device 63. The total number of games displayed is incremented by one each time a game with a bet of "3" is played, but if a game with a bet of "2" is played, no increment is performed. The total number of gaming media displayed is incremented by the amount exceeding the bet if gaming media are awarded in excess of the bet.

When a predetermined period (specifically, one second) has elapsed since the AT end display started, as shown in FIG. 58(b), in a situation where the end indicating image G61, the total number of games image G62, and the total number of acquisitions image G63 are displayed, the image display device 63 starts displaying a warning image G52 (specifically, a text image of "Play in moderation") as a warning display. This warning image G52 is the same as the warning image G52 displayed on the image display device 63 in the final game of the pseudo bonus state ST4 without a transition to the AT state ST5. More specifically, the performance side ROM 93 stores warning image data used to display the warning image G52 in advance, and the same warning image data is used in both cases of displaying the warning image G52 in the final game of the pseudo bonus state ST4 without a transition to the AT state ST5 and displaying the warning image G52 in the final game of the AT state ST5. This makes it possible to suppress the increase in storage capacity compared to a configuration in which warning image data corresponding to each situation is prepared. In addition, the position and size at which the warning image G52 is displayed on the image display device 63 are the same whether the warning image G52 is displayed in the final game of the pseudo bonus state ST4 that does not involve a transition to the AT state ST5, or the warning image G52 is displayed in the final game of the AT state ST5. This makes it possible to standardize the processing configuration for displaying the warning image G52.

However, without being limited to this, different data for the warning image may be used when displaying the warning image G52 in the final game of the pseudo bonus state ST4 without transition to the AT state ST5, and when displaying the warning image G52 in the final game of the AT state ST5. In this case, it is possible to display the warning image G52 with contents corresponding to each situation. In addition, although the same data for the warning image is used when displaying the warning image G52 in the final game of the pseudo bonus state ST4 without transition to the AT state ST5, and when displaying the warning image G52 in the final game of the AT state ST5, at least one of the position and size at which the warning image G52 is displayed on the image display device 63 may be different. In this case, it is possible to display the warning image G52 in a position or size suitable for each situation.

As already explained, the warning display is a display ("addiction prevention display") that warns the player against becoming addicted to the game in order to prevent the player from becoming addicted to the game. In this slot machine 10, a text image saying "Play in moderation" is displayed as the warning image G52, but the specific display content is arbitrary as long as it is possible to encourage players to prevent addiction, and a text image with different content may be used, or a configuration may be adopted in which a text image encouraging players to prevent addiction is displayed in accordance with the background image or character image.

The warning display that is started to be displayed in the final game of the AT state ST5 is maintained for a predetermined display duration (specifically, 3 seconds), just as when the warning display is started in the final game of the pseudo bonus state ST4 that does not involve a transition to the AT state ST5. In this case, in the final game of the AT state ST5, after the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, 32R stops, a freeze period (specifically, 5 seconds) occurs that prevents the start of a new game. Then, the warning display is started in this freeze period, and since a predetermined display duration has elapsed since the warning display was started while the freeze period is continuing, the warning display ends while the freeze period is continuing. Therefore, the warning display is sure to end before the next game is started for the final game of the AT state ST5.

On the other hand, the AT end display ends when the final game of the AT state ST5 ends and a bet is set on the gaming media to start the next game. Therefore, in the final game of the AT state ST5, the display content of the image display device 63 is changed so that the situation changes from the situation in which the AT end display is displayed but no warning display is displayed as shown in FIG. 58(a) to the situation in which both the AT end display and the warning display are displayed as shown in FIG. 58(b) to the situation in which the AT end display is displayed but no warning display is displayed as shown in FIG. 58(a).

Figure 59 is a flowchart showing the AT processing in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 72. Note that the AT processing is executed in step S606 in the response processing at the end of play (Figure 18) as in the first embodiment described above, and since the response processing at the end of play is executed after all of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped spinning in one game, the AT processing is also executed after all of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped spinning in one game.

First, it is determined whether the number of bets for the current game is "3" by determining whether the value of the bet number setting counter 74a in the main RAM 74 is "3" (step S3101). If the number of bets for the current game is "2" (step S3101: NO), the processing from step S3202 onwards is not executed. As a result, even if a game with the number of bets of "2" is executed in the AT state ST5, the remaining number of awards in the AT state ST5 is not subtracted, and further, if a real premonition state or a false premonition state occurs in the AT state ST5, the number of waiting games for that premonition state is not subtracted.

Note that when in the CB state (first CB state ST2 or second CB state ST3), the AT processing (Figure 59) itself is not executed as in the first embodiment described above, so even if the CB state starts in the middle of the AT state ST5, the games executed in the CB state are not treated as games completed in the AT state ST5. Therefore, even if the CB state is transitioned to in the middle of the AT state ST5, after the end of the CB state, the AT state ST5 will be resumed from the state of the remaining number of awards immediately before transitioning to the CB state.

If the number of bets in the current game is "3" (step S3101: YES), an addition process of the number of games in the AT is executed (step S3102), and an update process of the net increase in the AT is executed (step S3103). In the addition process of the number of games in the AT, the value of the number of games in the AT counter provided in the main RAM 74 is added by 1. The number of games in the AT counter is a counter for measuring the total number of games executed in the AT state ST5, and is cleared to "0" when the AT state ST5 ends. In the update process of the net increase in the AT, if neither a replay win nor a small role win corresponding to the grant of game media is established in the current game, "3" is subtracted from the value of the net increase in the AT counter provided in the main RAM 74, if a replay win is established in the current game, the value of the net increase in the AT counter is maintained, and if a small role win is established in the current game, the result of subtracting "3" from the number of game media granted in the current game is added to the value of the net increase in the AT counter. The AT net increase counter is a counter for measuring the increase or decrease in gaming media owned by the player in the AT state ST5, and is cleared to "0" when the AT state ST5 ends. A command including the value of the AT game number counter and the value of the AT net increase counter is sent from the main MPU 72 to the presentation side MPU 92 each time a game is executed. Based on receiving the command, the presentation side MPU 92 updates the display of the total number of games and the total number of gaming media displayed on the image display device 63 in the AT state ST5.

After that, it is determined whether or not a small prize has been won in the current game and a number of game media greater than the bet number "3" has been awarded (step S3104). Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the first bell prize, the second bell prize, the first watermelon prize, the second watermelon prize, and the cherry prize has been awarded. If a positive determination is made in step S3104, a subtraction process is executed for the AT continuation counter 74e of the main RAM 74, provided that the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is 1 or more (step S3105: YES). In the subtraction process, the bet number "3" is subtracted from the number of game media awarded in the current game, and the value after the subtraction is subtracted from the AT continuation counter 74e. In step S3106, if the value after the subtraction falls below "0" and the borrow flag is set to "1", the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is cleared to "0".

Note that, without being limited to the above configuration, when game media is awarded when the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is 1 or more, the number of awards itself may be subtracted from the value of the AT continuation counter 74e without subtracting the number of bets. In this case, the AT state ST5 ends when the total number of game media paid out is equal to or greater than the termination reference number. In addition, if the award of game media exceeding the number of bets or a replay win is not established, the number of game media of the player that was reduced by the execution of the game may be added to the AT continuation counter 74e. In this case, the AT state ST5 ends when the total net increase in the number of game media is equal to or greater than the termination reference number.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3104, if a negative judgment is made in step S3105, or if the processing of step S3106 is executed, and the value of the standby counter 74g in the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S3107: YES), the value of the standby counter 74g is decremented by 1 (step S3108). Then, if the value of the standby counter 74g after the decrement is "0" (step S3109: YES), it is determined whether the main sign flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S3110).

If the present premonition flag is set to "1" (step S3110: YES), it means that the premonition state that is ending this time is the present premonition state. In this case, an addition process of the remaining number of awards is executed (step S3111). In this addition process, the value set in the planned number counter 74f of the main RAM 74 is added to the AT continuation counter 74e. As a result, when the final game of the present premonition state ends, the number of awards of gaming media that were the subject of award in the present premonition state is added to the remaining number of awards of gaming media in the AT state ST5.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3110 or if the processing of step S3111 is executed, the real precursor flag and the false precursor flag in the main RAM 74 are each cleared to "0" (step S3112). As a result, if the current state is a real precursor state, the real precursor state ends, and if the current state is a false precursor state, the false precursor state ends.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3107, if a negative judgment is made in step S3109, or if the processing of step S3112 is executed, it is determined whether the value of the AT continuation counter 74e in the main RAM 74 is "0" (step S3113). If the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is "0" (step S3113: YES), this means that the remaining number of game media awarded in the current AT state ST5 has become "0". In this case, it is determined whether the value of the standby counter 74g in the main RAM 74 is "0" or not to determine whether the current state is a real premonition state or a false premonition state (step S3114).

If the current state is neither a real premonition state nor a false premonition state, and the value of the standby counter 74g of the master RAM 74 is "0" (step S3114: YES), a process is executed to end the AT state ST5 and the second section SC2. Specifically, an AT end command is first sent to the presentation side MPU 92 (step S3115). The AT end command includes the value of the AT game number counter and the value of the AT net increase counter of the master RAM 74. When the presentation side MPU 92 receives the AT end command, it executes a process to start an AT end display on the image display device 63.

Then, a setting process is executed for the freeze counter (step S3116). In this setting process, information corresponding to the freeze period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the freeze counter provided in the main RAM 74. The value set in the freeze counter is decremented by the timer decrement process (step S208) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is executed.

Then, it is determined whether the value of the freeze counter in the main RAM 74 is 1 or greater (step S3117). If the value of the freeze counter is 1 or greater (step S3117: YES), the process waits as is. As a result, the progress of the AT processing (Figure 59) is put on hold until the freeze period has elapsed, and the progress of the AT processing (Figure 59) is put on hold, which means that the progress of the normal processing (Figure 12) is put on hold.

If the value of the freeze counter is "0" (step S3117: NO), the initialization process of the second section SC2 is executed (step S3118). The processing contents of the initialization process of the second section SC2 are the same as the initialization process of the second section SC2 in the first embodiment (step S814). Specifically, the second section flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". As a result, the game section becomes the first section SC1. In addition, in the initialization process of the second section SC2, even if the player is in the AT state ST5, the game state is shifted to the normal game state ST1 by clearing various data (including the AT state flag) indicating that the game state is the AT state ST5, including the counter for storing the remaining number of game media awarded in the AT state ST5. Note that even if the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are in the middle of the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the initialization process of the second section SC2 is executed, and the second section SC2 is terminated, but the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are not terminated and are continued as they are.

After that, if the section display unit 67 is in a lit state, the section display unit 67 is switched from a lit state to an off state (step S3119). This ends the notification on the section display unit 67 that it is the second section SC2. Then, a second section initialization command indicating that the second section SC2 has been initialized is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S3120). This allows the production side MPU 92 to know that the second section SC2 has ended.

Figure 60 is a flow chart showing the second control process of the play area in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 72. Note that the second control process of the play area is executed in step S607 of the response process at the end of play (Figure 18) as in the first embodiment described above, and since the response process at the end of play is executed after all of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped spinning in one game, the second control process of the play area is also executed after all of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped spinning in one game.

If the second section flag in the master RAM 74 is set to "1" and the current play section is the second section SC2 (step S3201: YES), the value of the continued game number counter 74c in the master RAM 74 is incremented by 1 (step S3202). As in the first embodiment, the continued game number counter 74c is a counter that allows the master MPU 72 to determine the number of games that have been played since the start of the second section SC2 when the second section SC2 is continued without the first section SC1 in between.

Then, it is determined whether the value of the continued game number counter 74c after adding 1 is equal to or greater than 1500, which is the upper limit number of games (step S3203). If the value of the continued game number counter 74c is equal to or greater than 1500, this means that the ending condition for the second section SC2 has been met. In this case, a positive determination is made in step S3203, and processing is executed in steps S3211 to S3216 to end the second section SC2.

If the value of the continued game number counter 74c is less than 1500 (step S3203: NO), it is determined whether any of the first chance replay win, second chance replay win, and normal replay win has been achieved in the current game (step S3204). In this case, whether the number of bets in the current game is "2" or "3", it is subject to the determination in step S3204, and also whether the current game is in any of the game states of normal game state ST1, first CB state ST2, second CB state ST3, pseudo bonus state ST4, and AT state ST5.

If no replay win has been achieved (step S3204: NO), the number of bets for the current game (i.e., the value of the bet number setting counter 74a) is subtracted from the total win number counter 74d in the main RAM 74 (step S3205). In this case, even if a replay win was achieved in the previous game and the current game is a game that corresponds to a replay due to the achievement of the replay win, the number of bets for the current game (i.e., the value of the bet number setting counter 74a) is subtracted from the total win number counter 74d.

The total acquisition counter 74d is a counter for the master MPU 72 to determine the limited total net increase in game media from the start of the second section SC2 when the second section SC2 is continued without the first section SC1 in between, as in the first embodiment. The limited total net increase in game media is the increase in the predetermined difference from the predetermined reference value, where the minimum value of the predetermined difference is the predetermined reference value, and the value obtained by subtracting the total number of game media consumed to execute games while the second section SC2 is continuing (0 when no game media is being executed) from the total number of game media awarded by games executed while the second section SC2 is continuing (0 when no game media is being awarded), as in the first embodiment.

Then, it is determined whether any of the minor winnings (1st to 9th compensation winnings, 1st bell winning, 2nd bell winning, 1st watermelon winning, 2nd watermelon winning, and cherry winning) that will result in the awarding of gaming media in the current game has been achieved (step S3206). In this case, whether the number of bets in the current game is "2" or "3", it is subject to the determination in step S3206, and also whether the current game is in any of the gaming states of the normal gaming state ST1, the 1st CB state ST2, the 2nd CB state ST3, the pseudo bonus state ST4, and the AT state ST5. If a positive determination is made in step S3206, the number of gaming media awarded in the current game is added to the total winning number counter 74d of the main RAM 74 (step S3207).

If a negative judgment is made in step S3206, or if the processing of step S3207 is executed, it is judged whether the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d in the main RAM 74 is equal to or greater than 0 (step S3208). If the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d is less than 0 (step S3208: NO), the total acquisition number counter 74d is cleared to "0" (step S3209).

As described above, the bet number for the current game is subtracted from the total winnings counter 74d in step S3205. For example, if no small wins are achieved in the game in the normal game state ST1 immediately after the transition to the second section SC2, the value of the total winnings counter 74d will be less than 0. In this case, by making a negative judgment in step S3208, the total winnings counter 74d is cleared to "0" in step S3209. As a result, when the value obtained by subtracting the "total number of game media consumed to execute games in the situation in which the second section SC2 is continuing ("0" when games are not being executed)" from the "total number of game media awarded by games executed in the situation in which the second section SC2 is continuing ("0" when no game media is awarded)" is set as the predetermined difference number, the minimum value of the predetermined difference number is set as the predetermined reference value, and the limited total net increase in game media, which is the increase in the above-mentioned predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value, can be measured using the total winnings counter 74d.

When a positive judgment is made in step S3204, when a positive judgment is made in step S3208, or when the processing of step S3209 is executed, it is judged whether the value of the total winning number counter 74d exceeds the upper limit net increase number of "2400" (step S3210). When the value of the total winning number counter 74d does not exceed "2400" (step S3210: NO), the ending corresponding processing is executed (step S3217). The processing content of the ending corresponding processing is the same as the ending corresponding processing (step S817) of the second control processing (FIG. 21) of the game section in the first embodiment. When the value of the total winning number counter 74d exceeds "2400", it means that the ending condition of the second section SC2 is established. In this case, a positive judgment is made in step S3210, and the processing to end the second section SC2 in steps S3211 to S3216 is executed.

Here, if any replay win is established, a positive judgment is made in step S3204, and the processing of steps S3205 to S3209 is not executed. In a game in which a replay win is established, the game media owned by the player at the start of the game are used to set the bet, but as a profit from the establishment of a replay win, the player can replay a new game with the same number of bets as the number of bets in the game in which the replay win was established. In other words, the number of game media owned by the player does not change in a game in which a replay win is established. In this case, by not executing the processing of steps S3205 to S3209 in a game in which a replay win is established, it is possible to omit the execution of the processing for changing the value of the total winnings counter 74d in a game in which the number of game media owned by the player does not change, and it is possible to eliminate the execution of unnecessary processing.

On the other hand, even in a game in which a replay win has been achieved, in step S3210, it is determined whether the value of the total winnings counter 74d exceeds the upper limit net increase of "2400". As a result, even if the value of the total winnings counter 74d has already exceeded the upper limit net increase of "2400" in a game prior to the game in which a replay win has been achieved, but the initialization process for the second section SC2 has not been performed due to noise or other reasons, it is possible to determine that the value of the total winnings counter 74d exceeds the upper limit net increase of "2400" in the game in which a replay win has been achieved thereafter, and it is possible to perform the initialization process for the second section SC2.

Regarding the process for ending the second section SC2 in steps S3211 to S3216 in detail, first, an AT end command is sent to the presentation side MPU 92 (step S3211). The AT end command includes the value of the AT game number counter and the value of the AT net increase counter in the main RAM 74. When the presentation side MPU 92 receives the AT end command, it executes a process for starting the AT end display on the image display device 63.

Then, a setting process is executed for the freeze counter (step S3212). In this setting process, information corresponding to the freeze period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the freeze counter provided in the main RAM 74. The value set in the freeze counter is decremented by the timer decrement process (step S208) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is executed.

Then, it is determined whether the value of the freeze counter in the main RAM 74 is 1 or greater (step S3213). If the value of the freeze counter is 1 or greater (step S3213: YES), the process waits as is. As a result, the progress of the second control process (Figure 60) of the play area is put on hold until the freeze period has elapsed, and the progress of the second control process (Figure 60) of the play area is put on hold, which puts the progress of the normal process (Figure 12) on hold.

If the value of the freeze counter is "0" (step S3213: NO), the initialization process of the second section SC2 is executed (step S3214). The process contents of the initialization process of the second section SC2 are the same as the initialization process of the second section SC2 in the first embodiment (step S814). Specifically, the second section flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". As a result, the game section becomes the first section SC1. In addition, in the initialization process of the second section SC2, even if the player is in the AT state ST5, the game state is shifted to the normal game state ST1 by clearing various data (including the AT state flag) indicating that the game state is the AT state ST5, including the counter for storing the remaining number of game media awarded in the AT state ST5. Note that even if the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are in the middle of the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the initialization process of the second section SC2 is executed, and the second section SC2 is terminated, but the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are not terminated and are continued as they are.

After that, if the section display unit 67 is in a lit state, the section display unit 67 is switched from a lit state to an off state (step S3215). This ends the notification on the section display unit 67 that it is the second section SC2. Then, a second section initialization command indicating that the second section SC2 has been initialized is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S3216). This allows the production side MPU 92 to know that the second section SC2 has ended.

The process for terminating the second section SC2 in steps S3211 to S3216 above is the same as the process for terminating the AT state ST5 in steps S3115 to S3120 of the AT process (FIG. 59). Therefore, whether the AT state ST5 is terminated because the remaining number of imparted points in the AT state ST5 becomes "0", or the AT state ST5 is terminated because the ending condition for the second section SC2 is satisfied in the AT state ST5, the same content is set for the freeze period, the AT end display and the warning display are displayed on the image display device 63 during the freeze period, and the section display unit 67 is turned off when the freeze period is completed.

Figure 61 is a flowchart showing the performance control process for AT executed by the performance side MPU 92. The performance control process for AT is repeatedly executed by the performance side MPU 92 at a relatively short cycle (e.g., 4 millisecond cycle).

In step S3301, it is determined whether or not a false premonition command has been received from the master MPU 72. As in the first embodiment, the false premonition command is sent in step S1117 when the value of the standby counter 74g is "0" in the AT state processing (FIG. 24) at the start of the game in the master MPU 72 and a false premonition is won (step S1114: YES, step S1115: NO). If a false premonition command has been received from the master MPU 72 (step S3301: YES), a false premonition table is read from the performance side ROM 93 to the performance side RAM 94 (step S3302). The performance execution control is performed according to the false premonition table, so that the upper lamp 61 produces a light-emitting performance corresponding to the false premonition state, the speaker 62 produces a sound output performance corresponding to the false premonition state, and the image display device 63 produces a display performance corresponding to the false premonition state.

In step S3303, it is determined whether or not a real premonition command has been received from the master MPU 72. As in the first embodiment described above, this premonition command is transmitted in step S1112 when a real premonition is won in the AT state processing (FIG. 24) at the start of the game in the master MPU 72 (step S1107: YES). If a real premonition command has been received from the master MPU 72 (step S3303: YES), the number of awards selected due to the real premonition state winning that triggered the transmission of this real premonition command is determined from the information contained in the real premonition command, and the determined planned number is added to the planned award number counter provided in the presentation RAM 94 (step S3304). It is then determined whether or not the current presentation is in progress for a false premonition state (step S3305).

If the false premonition state effect is not being executed (step S3305: NO), the real premonition table corresponding to the remaining number of games of the premonition effect is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94 (step S3306). Specifically, if neither the false premonition state effect nor the real premonition state effect is being executed, the real premonition table is read so that the real premonition state effect is executed over 10 games, which is the initial number of games of the premonition effect. On the other hand, if the real premonition state effect is being executed, the real premonition table is read so that the real premonition state effect corresponding to the expected number of awards added by the execution of the process of step S3304 is executed over the remaining number of games of the premonition effect at that time. By controlling the execution of the effect according to the real premonition table, the upper lamp 61 performs a light-emitting effect corresponding to the real premonition state, the speaker 62 performs a sound output effect corresponding to the real premonition state, and the image display device 63 performs a display effect corresponding to the real premonition state. In the final game of this premonition state, an image is displayed to notify the number of awards corresponding to the value of the planned award number counter in the presentation side RAM 94, and after this display, a display is made in which this number is added to the number in the remaining award number display image G12. The remaining award number display image G12 shows a number resulting from adding the number of awards at the end of this premonition state to the number of remaining awards up to that point. This allows the player to understand that the remaining number of awards has increased due to the premonition state.

If the false premonition state presentation is being executed (step S3305: YES), a process is executed to read the real premonition change table from presentation side ROM 93 to presentation side RAM 94 (step S3307). Specifically, the real premonition change table is read so that the real premonition state presentation corresponding to the planned award number added by executing the process of step S3304 is executed for the remaining number of games in the false premonition state presentation up to that point. By controlling the execution of the presentation according to the real premonition change table, a light emission presentation corresponding to the real premonition change is performed on the upper lamp 61, a sound output presentation corresponding to the real premonition change is performed on the speaker 62, and a display presentation corresponding to the real premonition change is performed on the image display device 63.

In this case, in the final game of the real premonition state corresponding to the real premonition change, a performance is initially executed to indicate that the current premonition state was a false premonition state, and then a performance is executed to indicate that the current premonition state was actually the real premonition state. In detail, the display performance of the image display device 63 in the final game of the real premonition state corresponding to the real premonition change is a confrontation performance between an ally character and an enemy character until the final game of the premonition state, and initially, in the final game, a display performance is performed in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character as a performance indicating that the current premonition state was a false premonition state, and then a display performance is performed in which the ally character revives and defeats the enemy character as a performance indicating that the current premonition state was actually the real premonition state. Then, when a performance indicating that the real premonition state was executed, an image for notifying the number of grants corresponding to the value of the planned grant number counter in the performance side RAM 94 is displayed, and after the display, a display is performed in which the number of grants is added to the number in the remaining grant number display image G12. In the remaining grant number display image G12, a number is displayed that is the result of adding the number of grants at the end of the current real premonition state to the remaining grant number up to that point. This allows the player to understand that the remaining number of awards has increased due to this premonition state.

Here, in a situation where the execution control of the premonition effect is being performed according to this premonition change table, if the value of the AT continuation counter 74e in the master RAM 74 is "0" in the final game of the premonition effect, a revival-compatible effect is executed as an effect different from the case where the value of the AT continuation counter 74e in the master RAM 74 is 1 or more in the final game. The revival-compatible effect will be explained with reference to Figure 58(c) in addition to Figures 58(a) and 58(b). Figure 58(c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the revival effect.

In a situation where the execution control of the premonition effect is performed using this premonition change table, if the value of the AT continuation counter 74e of the master RAM 74 is "0" in the final game of the premonition effect, a revival effect is executed in which a revival effect is executed to make the player recognize that the AT state ST5 will continue after executing an effect that makes the player recognize that the AT state ST5 will end in a situation where the AT state ST5 actually continues in the final game. Specifically, in a game in which the revival effect is executed, when a rotation stop operation is performed on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped, the image display device 63 starts displaying the AT end display as shown in FIG. 58(a). Also, when a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second) has elapsed since the AT end display started, the image display device 63 starts displaying a warning in a situation where the AT end display is being performed as shown in FIG. 58(b). Thereafter, when the timing for executing the revival performance arrives or when a bet is set to start the next game, the AT end display and the caution display are ended as shown in FIG. 58(c), and a revival image G64 (specifically, a text image of "Not yet") is displayed on the image display device 63 as a revival display in the revival performance. The image content of the revival image G64 is arbitrary as long as the player can recognize that the AT state ST5 will continue. This makes it possible to give a sense of surprise to a player who thought that the AT state ST5 would end that the AT state ST5 will continue, and makes it possible to increase the interest of the game. In addition, even if the revival performance is executed, by displaying not only the AT end display but also a caution display in the stage before the revival performance, it becomes easier to make the player think that the AT state ST5 will end in the stage before the revival performance is executed.

In step S3308 in the AT presentation control process (Figure 61), it is determined whether or not an AT end command has been received from the main MPU 72. As already explained, the AT end command is sent in step S3115 in the AT process (Figure 59) or in step S3211 in the second control process of the play area (Figure 60). In other words, after the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, 32R has stopped in the final game of the AT state ST5 and before the freeze period is set, the AT end command is sent from the main MPU 72 to the presentation MPU 92.

If an AT end command has been received (step S3308: YES), the AT end display setting process is executed (step S3309). In the AT end display setting process, data is set so that a presentation indicating that the AT state ST5 has ended is executed by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63. In this case, data enabling the execution of the AT end display is set in the presentation side RAM 94 as data for display control of the image display device 63. As a result, the display of the end indication image G61, total number of games played image G62, and total number of wins image G63 as shown in FIG. 58(a) is started on the image display device 63.

When the AT end display is being executed, the control process for various end displays (FIG. 55) makes a positive judgment in step S2901 and judges whether a bet on gaming media has been set to start a new game (step S2902). When a bet on gaming media has been set by inserting a medal into the medal insertion slot 45 or by operating the credit insertion buttons 47, 48 in a situation in which it is possible to start a new game, the main MPU 72 transmits a corresponding command to the production side MPU 92. This command is transmitted each time one or more gaming media are bet, but it may also be configured to be transmitted when the number of gaming media bets that allow a game to be started is completed. When the production side MPU 92 receives this command, it judges that a bet on gaming media has been set to start a new game and makes a positive judgment in step S2902.

If a positive judgment is made in step S2902, data for executing the AT end display is erased in the end processing of the ongoing end display (step S2903), and data setting is performed to start displaying image G53 (see FIG. 52(c)) of normal gaming state ST1. As a result, the state in which the AT end display is being executed on the image display device 63 in the final game of the AT state ST5 ends when a bet is set to start a new game, and display of image G53 of normal gaming state ST1 starts.

In the AT presentation control process (FIG. 61), after executing the process of step S3309, a setting process of the warning display start timer counter 131 is executed (step S3310). The processing content of this setting process is the same as that of step S2805 in the pseudo bonus presentation control process (FIG. 54). Specifically, information corresponding to a value for measuring a predetermined period (specifically, one second) from the start of the AT end display to the start of the warning display is set in the warning display start timer counter 131 in the presentation side RAM 94.

When the value of the start timer counter 131 of the warning display is 1 or more, as already explained, a positive judgment is made in step S3001 in the control process of the warning display (FIG. 56), thereby subtracting 1 from the value of the start timer counter 131 of the warning display (step S3002), and if the value of the start timer counter 131 of the warning display after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S3003: YES), the setting process of the warning display is executed (step S3004). As a result, the display of the warning image G52 is started in a situation where the end indicating image G61, the total number of games image G62, and the total number of acquisitions image G63 are displayed on the image display device 63 as shown in FIG. 58 (b). As already explained, in the setting process of the warning display, the setting of data for controlling the upper lamp 61 and the speaker 62 is not performed. After that, information corresponding to a value for measuring 3 seconds as a predetermined display duration is set in the duration timer counter 132 of the warning display (step S3005).

If the value of the warning display continuation timer counter 132 is 1 or more, as already explained, a positive judgment is made in step S3006 in the warning display control process (FIG. 56) to subtract 1 from the value of the warning display continuation timer counter 132 (step S3007), and if the value of the warning display continuation timer counter 132 after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S3008: YES), a termination process of the warning display is executed (step S3009). In this termination process, data for executing the warning display is erased. As a result, the state in which the warning display is executed on the image display device 63 in the final game of the AT state ST5 ends when a predetermined display duration has elapsed since the start of the warning display, regardless of whether a bet setting for a gaming medium has been executed to start a new game.

In the AT performance control process (Figure 61), if the premonition change table is used to control the execution of the performance (step S3311: YES), the revival response performance process is executed (step S3312). Figure 62 is a flowchart showing the revival response performance process.

First, it is determined whether the current game is the final game of the premonition presentation corresponding to this premonition change table, and whether the value of the AT continuation counter 74e in the master RAM 74 is "0" (step S3401). When starting a new game, the master MPU 72 sends a game start command to the presentation MPU 92 with information corresponding to the value of the AT continuation counter 74e set, so that the presentation MPU 92 can determine from the command whether the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is "0".

If a positive determination is made in step S3401, it is determined whether or not a stop command corresponding to the third stop command has been received from the main MPU 72 in the current game (step S3402). The stop command corresponding to the third stop command is a command sent from the main MPU 72 when the stop button 42-44 corresponding to the last reel 32L, 32M, 32R that was spinning is operated, and a stop command is issued for that reel 32L, 32M, 32R.

If a positive judgment is made in step S3402, the AT end display setting process is executed (step S3403). The processing content of the AT end display setting process is the same as the AT end display setting process executed in step S3309 when an AT end command is received in the AT presentation control process (FIG. 61). As a result, the image display device 63 starts displaying the end indication image G61, total number of games played image G62, and total number of wins image G63 as shown in FIG. 58(a).

After that, a setting process for the warning display start timer counter 131 is executed (step S3404). The processing content of this setting process is the same as the setting process for the warning display start timer counter 131 executed in step S3310 in the AT performance control process (FIG. 61). As a result, information corresponding to a value for measuring a predetermined period (specifically, one second) from the start of the AT end display to the start of the warning display is set in the warning display start timer counter 131 in the performance side RAM 94.

If the value of the start timer counter 131 of the warning display is 1 or more, as already explained, a positive judgment is made in step S3001 in the control process of the warning display (FIG. 56), thereby subtracting 1 from the value of the start timer counter 131 of the warning display (step S3002), and if the value of the start timer counter 131 of the warning display after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S3003: YES), the setting process of the warning display is executed (step S3004). As a result, the display of the warning image G52 is started in a situation where the end indicating image G61, the total number of games image G62, and the total number of acquisitions image G63 are displayed on the image display device 63 as shown in FIG. 58 (b). Note that, as already explained, in the setting process of the warning display, the setting of data for controlling the upper lamp 61 and the speaker 62 is not performed. After that, information corresponding to a value for measuring 3 seconds as a predetermined display duration is set in the duration timer counter 132 of the warning display (step S3005).

If the value of the warning display continuation timer counter 132 is 1 or more, as already explained, a positive judgment is made in step S3006 in the warning display control process (FIG. 56) to subtract 1 from the value of the warning display continuation timer counter 132 (step S3007), and if the value of the warning display continuation timer counter 132 after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S3008: YES), a termination process of the warning display is executed (step S3009). In this termination process, data for executing the warning display is erased. As a result, the state in which the warning display is executed on the image display device 63 in the final game of the AT state ST5 ends when a predetermined display duration has elapsed since the start of the warning display, regardless of whether a bet setting for a gaming medium has been executed to start a new game.

In the revival response performance process (Figure 62), if a positive judgment is made in step S3401 and a negative judgment is made in step S3402, it is determined whether the current data to be referenced that is set in this premonition change table corresponds to the timing of the revival performance occurrence, or whether a bet has been set on gaming media to start a new game (step S3405).

As already explained, in a situation where the execution control of the premonition effect is performed according to the premonition change table, if the value of the AT continuation counter 74e of the master RAM 74 is "0" in the final game of the premonition effect, a revival effect is executed in which a revival effect is executed to make the player recognize that the AT state ST5 will continue after executing an effect that makes the player recognize that the AT state ST5 will end in a situation where the AT state ST5 actually continues. Specifically, in a game in which the revival effect is executed, when the rotation stop operation is performed on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped, the image display device 63 starts displaying the AT end display as shown in FIG. 58(a). Also, when a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second) has elapsed since the AT end display started, the image display device 63 starts displaying a warning in a situation where the AT end display is being performed as shown in FIG. 58(b). In this case, the timing of occurrence of the revival effect is the timing when a predetermined pre-revival period (specifically, 4.5 seconds) has elapsed since the AT end display began. The pre-revival period is set as a period longer than the period from the start of the AT end display to the end of the caution display (i.e., a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second) + a predetermined display duration (specifically, 3 seconds)) and shorter than the freeze period (specifically, 5 seconds) that occurs in the final game of the AT state ST5. As a result, unless a new bet is set in a game in which a revival-compatible effect is executed, the AT end display and caution display will be executed in the same manner as in a situation in which a freeze period is set in the final game of the AT state ST5.

In addition, when a bet on gaming media is set by inserting a medal into the medal slot 45 or by operating the credit insertion buttons 47, 48 in a situation in which it is possible to start a new game, the main MPU 72 transmits a corresponding command to the production MPU 92. This command is transmitted each time one or more gaming media are bet, but it may also be configured to be transmitted when the number of gaming media bets required to start a game has been completed. When the production MPU 92 receives this command, it determines that a bet on gaming media has been set to start a new game, and makes a positive determination in step S3405.

If a positive judgment is made in step S3405, the data to be referenced in this premonition change table is set as the revival performance data (step S3406). In addition, in step S3407, the data for executing the AT end display is erased by executing the AT end display end process, and in step S3408, the data for executing the caution display is erased by executing the caution display end process. As a result, the AT end display and caution display are ended as shown in FIG. 58(c), and a revival image G64 (specifically, a text image of "Not yet") is displayed on the image display device 63 as a revival display. This display is ended when a new game is started in response to the operation of the start lever 41.

Then, a counter clear process is executed (step S3409). In this clear process, if the value of the start timer counter 131 of the warning display is 1 or more, the start timer counter 131 of the warning display is cleared to "0", and if the value of the duration timer counter 132 of the warning display is 1 or more, the duration timer counter 132 of the warning display is cleared to "0".

In the AT presentation control process (Figure 61), in addition to the above processes, other processes are also executed (step S3313). In the other processes, a process is executed to update the data to be referenced in various tables as the game progresses, and to update the presentation content. In addition, when game media is awarded, a process is executed to update the display content of the remaining award number display image G12 and the acquisition number display image G13 accordingly. In addition, when a first ending command or a second ending command is received from the main MPU 72, a process is executed to perform an ending presentation.

Figure 63 is a time chart showing how the AT end display and the caution display are executed in the AT state ST5. Figure 63(a) shows the period during which the game is being executed, Figure 63(b) shows the timing when the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has stopped, Figure 63(c) shows the timing when the bet setting for the gaming media is performed, Figure 63(d) shows the period during which a freeze period occurs, Figure 63(e) shows the period during which the interval display unit 67 is in an lit state, Figure 63(f) shows the period during which the AT end display is being executed, Figure 63(g) shows the period during which the caution display is being executed, and Figure 63(h) shows the period during which the revival display is being executed.

First, we will explain the case where the AT end display and warning display are executed in the final game of AT state ST5.

At the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 63(a), the final game of the AT state ST5 starts. After that, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 63(b), the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game stops. At the timing of t2, a freeze period is set as shown in FIG. 63(d), and the AT end display starts on the image display device 63 as shown in FIG. 63(f). Here, in the final game of the pseudo bonus state ST4 that does not involve a transition to the AT state ST5, the interval display unit 67 is switched from the lit state to the unlit state when the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stops, but in the final game of the AT state ST5, the interval display unit 67 is maintained in the lit state when the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stops as shown in FIG. 63(e).

After that, at the timing t3, which is a predetermined period (specifically, one second) after the timing t2, a warning display is started on the image display device 63 as shown in FIG. 63(g). In this case, the warning display is started on the image display device 63 while the AT end display is being executed. Since the freeze period is still set at the timing t3 as shown in FIG. 63(d), in the normal processing (FIG. 12), the acceptance permission processing (step S312) is not executed, and even if a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 45, the medal is ejected without being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, and the operation of the first credit insertion button 47 and the second credit insertion button 48 is disabled. In other words, a new bet cannot be set.

After that, at the timing of t4, a predetermined display duration (specifically, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the timing of t3, and the warning display on the image display device 63 ends as shown in FIG. 63(g). In this case, since a bet setting for starting a new game has not yet been made, the AT end display on the image display device 63 continues as shown in FIG. 63(e). Since the freeze period is still set at the timing of t4 as shown in FIG. 63(d), in the normal process (FIG. 12), the acceptance permission process (step S312) is not executed, and even if a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 45, the medal is ejected without being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, and the operation of the first credit insertion button 47 and the second credit insertion button 48 is disabled. In other words, a new bet setting cannot be made.

After that, at the timing of t5, the freeze period elapses as shown in FIG. 63(d). As a result, in the normal processing (FIG. 12), the acceptance permission processing (step S312) is executed, so that the medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 45 is detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, and the operation of the first credit insertion button 47 and the second credit insertion button 48 is also validated. Also, at the timing of t5, the section display unit 67 changes from a lit state to an unlit state as shown in FIG. 63(e). As a result, the notification in the section display unit 67 that it is the second section SC2 ends. In other words, in the final game of the AT state ST5, the notification in the section display unit 67 that it is the second section SC2 ends at the timing when the freeze period has elapsed, which is the timing after the timing when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped spinning.

After that, at the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 63(c), a bet is set for the gaming medium. The bet may be a bet of "1" gaming medium by inserting one medal into the medal insertion slot 45, a bet of "3" gaming medium by operating the first credit insertion button 47 in a situation where three or more virtual medals are stored, or a bet of "2" gaming medium by operating the second credit insertion button 48 in a situation where two or more virtual medals are stored. At the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 63(f), the AT end display on the image display device 63 ends. In this case, the image display device 63 starts displaying the image G53 of the normal gaming state ST1.

Next, we will explain the case where the revival display is performed during the AT state ST5 and the revival display is started based on a new bet setting being made after the caution display has ended.

At timing t7, as shown in FIG. 63(a), in the AT state ST5, with the value of the AT continuation counter 74e in the main RAM 74 at "0", the final game of the premonition effect using this premonition change table is started. Then, at timing t8, as shown in FIG. 63(b), the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, 32R in that game stops. Since that game is not the final game in the AT state ST5, a freeze period is not set, as shown in FIG. 63(d). Meanwhile, at timing t8, an AT end display is started on the image display device 63, as shown in FIG. 63(f).

After that, at the timing of t9, which is a predetermined period (specifically, one second) after the timing of t8, the image display device 63 starts to display a warning as shown in FIG. 63(g). In this case, the image display device 63 starts to display a warning while the AT end display is being executed.

After that, at timing t10, a predetermined display duration (specifically, 3 seconds) has elapsed since timing t9, and the warning display on the image display device 63 ends as shown in FIG. 63(g). In this case, the AT end display on the image display device 63 continues as shown in FIG. 63(f).

After that, at the timing of t11, the pre-revival period (specifically, 4.5 seconds) has elapsed from the timing of t8, which is the timing for the revival effect to occur. In this case, at the timing of t11, the AT end display on the image display device 63 ends as shown in FIG. 63(f), and the revival display on the image display device 63 begins as shown in FIG. 63(h). The revival display ends when a new game begins in response to the operation of the start lever 41.

Next, we will explain the case where the revival display is performed during the AT state ST5 and the revival display is started based on a new bet being set before the caution display ends.

At timing t12, as shown in FIG. 63(a), in the AT state ST5, when the value of the AT continuation counter 74e in the main RAM 74 is "0", the final game of the premonition effect using this premonition change table is started. After that, at timing t13, as shown in FIG. 63(b), the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, 32R in that game stops. Since that game is not the final game in the AT state ST5, a freeze period is not set, as shown in FIG. 63(d). Meanwhile, at timing t13, an AT end display is started on the image display device 63, as shown in FIG. 63(f).

After that, at the timing of t14, which is a predetermined period (specifically, one second) after the timing of t13, the image display device 63 starts to display a warning as shown in FIG. 63(g). In this case, the image display device 63 starts to display a warning while the AT end display is being executed.

After that, at the timing of t15, which is a timing before the timing when a predetermined display duration (specifically, 3 seconds) has elapsed from the timing of t14, a bet setting of the gaming medium is performed as shown in FIG. 63(c). The bet setting may be a bet setting of "1" gaming medium by inserting one medal into the medal insertion slot 45, a bet setting of "3" gaming medium by operating the first credit insertion button 47 in a situation where three or more virtual medals are stored, or a bet setting of "2" gaming medium by operating the second credit insertion button 48 in a situation where two or more virtual medals are stored. At the timing of t15, the AT end display on the image display device 63 ends as shown in FIG. 63(f), the warning display on the image display device 63 ends as shown in FIG. 63(g), and the revival display on the image display device 63 starts as shown in FIG. 63(h). The revival display ends when a new game is started in response to the operation of the start lever 41.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

When the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends without transitioning to the AT state ST5, a warning display is executed on the image display device 63, making it possible to warn the player not to become absorbed in the game. In this case, this warning display can be continued even when the next game is started following the final game of the pseudo bonus state ST4. This makes it possible to create a situation in which the execution of the warning display continues without being terminated when a new game is played, making it possible to ensure an opportunity for the player to recognize the warning display.

The warning display that starts to be displayed in the final game of the pseudo bonus state ST4 that does not involve a transition to the AT state ST5 may end before the next game starts. This makes it possible to generate a situation in which the warning display is ended before the next game starts for the final game of the pseudo bonus state ST4, as well as a situation in which the warning display is continued in the next game for the final game of the pseudo bonus state ST4. This makes it possible to diversify the relationship between the execution of the warning display and the game.

The warning display continues for a specified display duration (specifically, 3 seconds) regardless of whether the final game of the pseudo bonus state ST4 has ended and a new game has started. This makes it possible to reliably guarantee that the player has a period of time during which the warning display can be confirmed for the specified display duration, and also makes it possible to reduce the processing load for identifying the trigger for ending the warning display.

The warning display is started when the bonus end display is being executed on the image display device 63. This makes it possible to start the warning display after making the player aware that the pseudo bonus state ST4, which does not involve a transition to the AT state ST5, is ending.

Even if the bonus end display continues on the image display device 63, the warning display ends when a specified display duration has elapsed. This makes it possible to prevent the warning display from continuing for an unnecessarily long period of time.

When the AT state ST5 ends, a warning display is executed on the image display device 63, making it possible to warn the player not to become absorbed in the game. In this case, in the final game of the AT state ST5, when the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stops, a freeze period occurs that prevents the start of a new game, and the warning display is executed during this freeze period. This makes it possible to draw the player's attention to the warning display.

The warning display starts after the freeze period has started. This makes it possible to start the warning display during the freeze period when the player is paying attention to the image display device 63, and to draw the player's attention to the warning display.

The warning will end before the freeze period ends. This will prevent a new game from starting while the warning is still on.

As in the final game of pseudo bonus state ST4, even in the final game of AT state ST5, the warning display continues for a specified display duration (specifically, 3 seconds). This makes it possible to reliably guarantee that the player has a period during which the warning display can be confirmed for the specified display duration, and also makes it possible to reduce the processing load for identifying the timing for ending the warning display.

In the final game of the AT state ST5, an AT end display is executed on the image display device 63, so it is possible to make the player clearly aware that the AT state ST5 is ending. In this case, since the warning display is started while the AT end display is being executed, it is possible to make the warning display start after making the player aware that the AT state ST5 is ending.

While the warning display ends within the freeze period, the AT end display can continue even after the freeze period has ended. This makes it possible to ensure a long period during which the AT end display continues, allowing the player to clearly recognize that the AT state ST5 has ended.

Even in a game in which a revival-responsive effect occurs in which a revival effect that allows the player to recognize that the AT state ST5 will actually continue is executed after an effect that allows the player to recognize that the AT state ST5 will end is executed, a warning display is executed on the image display device 63. This makes it possible to execute the warning display even in games other than games in which the AT state ST5 ends, and makes it possible to increase the frequency with which the warning display is executed. Also, in a configuration in which a warning display is executed in a game in which the AT state ST5 ends, by executing the warning display even in a game in which a revival-responsive effect is executed, it becomes possible to make a player who has confirmed that a revival-responsive effect has started think that there is a possibility that the AT state ST5 will end in that game.

In a game in which the AT state ST5 ends, the warning display ends when a specified display duration has elapsed, whereas in a game in which a revival-compatible performance occurs in the AT state ST5, the warning display ends when a bet is set on the gaming medium. This results in different conditions for ending the warning display between a game in which the AT state ST5 ends and a game in which a revival-compatible performance occurs, making it possible to make the conditions for ending the warning display appropriate for each game.

In a game in which a revival-compatible performance occurs in the AT state ST5, the warning display ends not only when a bet is set on the gaming medium, but also when a specified display duration period has elapsed. This makes it possible for the warning display in a game in which a revival-compatible performance occurs to end at the same trigger as the warning display in a game in which the AT state ST5 ends, but also to end at a different trigger.

In a game where the AT state ST5 ends, the warning display is executed during the freeze period, whereas in a game where a revival-compatible performance occurs, the warning display is executed in a situation that is not a freeze period. This makes it possible to start a new game even while a warning display corresponding to a revival-compatible performance is being executed.

When the second section SC2 is in the pseudo bonus state ST4 or the AT state ST5, the section display unit 67 is lit, so it is possible to know whether the second section SC2 is in the pseudo bonus state ST4 or the AT state ST5 by checking the section display unit 67. In this case, the trigger for terminating the lit state of the section display unit 67 among the various triggers that occur in the game differs between the case where the second section SC2 ends as a result of the end of the pseudo bonus state ST4 that does not involve a transition to the AT state ST5 and the case where the second section SC2 ends as a result of the end of the AT state ST5. This makes it possible to set the timing for terminating the lit state of the section display unit 67 to an appropriate timing that corresponds to the type of trigger for the end of the second section SC2.

In a configuration in which the timing at which the illuminated state of the section display unit 67 ends with the end of the second section SC2 differs between when the second section SC2 ends with the end of the pseudo bonus state ST4 and when the second section SC2 ends with the end of the AT state ST5, the illuminated state of the section display unit 67 ends at a timing after the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in either case. This makes it possible to prevent the illuminated state of the section display unit 67 from ending while the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating, even in a configuration in which the timing at which the illuminated state of the section display unit 67 ends differs depending on the respective triggers.

When the second section SC2 ends due to the end of the AT state ST5, the illuminated state of the section display unit 67 ends based on the occurrence of a trigger that occurs later within one game than when the second section SC2 ends due to the end of the pseudo bonus state ST4. This makes it possible to vary the period during which the illuminated state of the section display unit 67 continues in the game in which the illuminated state ends, depending on the type of trigger that ends the second section SC2. It also makes it possible to ensure that the period during which the section display unit 67 is maintained in the illuminated state is longer in the AT state ST5, which is relatively more advantageous, than in the pseudo bonus state ST4, which is relatively less advantageous.

In the final game of the AT state ST5, after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped spinning, a freeze period occurs that prevents the start of a new game, but when the freeze period is released, the illuminated state of the interval display unit 67 ends. This makes it possible to reliably secure the period during which the interval display unit 67 remains illuminated in the final game of the AT state ST5.

In a game in which a revival-compatible performance occurs in the AT state ST5, the timing at which the revival display starts after the AT end display is executed on the image display device 63 is a timing before the timing at which the illuminated state of the interval display unit 67 ends in the final game of the AT state ST5. This makes it possible to prevent a player from distinguishing whether the AT end display is being executed in the final game of the AT state ST5 or is being executed in connection with the revival-compatible performance, even if the player checks the interval display unit 67 in a situation in which the AT end display is being executed in a game in which a revival-compatible performance occurs in the AT state ST5. This makes it possible to make a player expect that a revival display will occur after the AT end display is executed, making the game more interesting.

In a game in which the AT state ST5 ends, a freeze period occurs when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop spinning, and the illuminated state of the interval display unit 67 ends when the freeze period has elapsed. In this case, in a game in which a revival-compatible performance occurs, the revival display begins before the period equivalent to the freeze period has elapsed since all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop spinning. This makes it possible to prevent a player from distinguishing whether the AT end display is being executed in the final game of the AT state ST5 or is being executed in connection with the revival-compatible performance, even if the player checks the interval display unit 67 in a situation in which the AT end display is being executed in a game in which a revival-compatible performance occurs in the AT state ST5.

In games where a revival-compatible effect occurs in the AT state ST5, the revival display will start if a bet is set on gaming media even before the pre-revival period has elapsed since all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped spinning. This makes it possible to diversify the triggers for starting the revival display.

<Alternative to the sixth embodiment>
The present invention is not limited to a configuration in which the bonus end display is started when the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped, and may be configured so that the bonus end display is started when the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the last reels 32L, 32M, and 32R during rotation are operated and a stop command is generated. Also, the present invention is not limited to a configuration in which the AT end display is started when the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped, and may be configured so that the AT end display is started when the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the last reels 32L, 32M, and 32R during rotation are operated and a stop command is generated.

- If the display of the warning image G52 is started on the image display device 63 in the final game of the pseudo bonus state ST4 that does not involve a transition to the AT state ST5, the display of the warning image G52 may continue until a specified display duration has elapsed even if a new game is started, and if a new game is not started, the display of the warning image G52 may continue until a bet on gaming media is set or until a new game is started even if the specified display duration has elapsed. In this case, in a situation where the final game of the pseudo bonus state ST4 that does not involve a transition to the AT state ST5 has ended and is left alone without a new game being started, it is possible to continue displaying the warning image G52, which makes it possible to increase the opportunities for the player to check the warning image G52.

- When the display of the warning image G52 is started on the image display device 63 in the final game of the pseudo bonus state ST4 that does not involve a transition to the AT state ST5, instead of continuing to display the warning image G52 until a predetermined display duration period has elapsed, the warning image G52 may be continued to be displayed until a bet is set on the gaming medium, or until a new game is started, or until the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the new game is completed, or until the first stop occurs in the new game, or until the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the new game is stopped, or until the new game is completed.

- In the final game of the pseudo bonus state ST4 that does not involve a transition to the AT state ST5, the display of the warning image G52 may be started before the bonus end display is started on the image display device 63, or the display of the warning image G52 may be started when the bonus end display is started. Also, the display of the warning image G52 may be ended when the bonus end display ends, or the display of the warning image G52 may be ended after the bonus end display has ended. If the display of the warning image G52 is started when the bonus end display is started and the display of the warning image G52 is ended when the bonus end display ends, the entire display period of the warning image G52 will coincide with the display period of the bonus end display.

- When the display of the warning image G52 is started on the image display device 63 in the final game of the AT state ST5, instead of the configuration in which the display of the warning image G52 continues until a predetermined display duration period has elapsed, the display of the warning image G52 may be continued until a bet is set for the gaming medium, or until a new game is started, or until the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the new game is completed, or until the first stop occurs in the new game, or until the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the new game is stopped, or until the display of the warning image G52 is completed.

- In the final game of the AT state ST5, the display of the warning image G52 may be started before the AT end display is started on the image display device 63, or the display of the warning image G52 may be started when the AT end display is started, or the display of the warning image G52 may be started before the freeze period is started, or the display of the warning image G52 may be started when the freeze period is started. Also, the display of the warning image G52 may be ended when the AT end display is ended, or the display of the warning image G52 may be ended after the AT end display is ended, or the display of the warning image G52 may be ended when the freeze period is ended. If the display of the warning image G52 is started when the AT end display is started and the display of the warning image G52 is ended when the AT end display is ended, the entire display period of the warning image G52 will coincide with the display period of the AT end display. Also, if the display of the warning image G52 is started when the freeze period is started and the display of the warning image G52 is ended when the freeze period is ended, the entire display period of the warning image G52 will coincide with the freeze period.

- When the display of the warning image G52 starts on the image display device 63 in the final game of the AT state ST5, the warning image G52 may be configured to continue to be displayed until a bet is set on the gaming medium or until a new game is started, even after the freeze period has elapsed. This makes it possible to keep the display of the warning image G52 for a long time.

- In a game in which a revival-responsive performance is executed in the AT state ST5, the timing of the occurrence of the revival performance may be set to a period longer than the specified period (specifically, 1 second) from when the AT end display begins to when the warning display begins, but less than the period from when the AT end display begins to when the warning display ends (i.e. the specified period (specifically, 1 second) + the specified display duration (specifically, 3 seconds)). As a result, in a game in which a revival-responsive performance is executed, the revival performance is executed after the warning display begins and before the specified display duration of the warning display has elapsed.

- In addition to or instead of a configuration in which an image is displayed as the warning image G52 to warn the player against becoming addicted to the game, an image may be displayed to warn the player against leaving a storage medium capable of storing and holding the amount of money or the number of gaming media that the player can use in the coin loan device installed next to the slot machine 10, or an image may be displayed to warn the player not to commit fraudulent acts on the slot machine 10.

- In a game in which a revival-compatible effect is executed in the AT state ST5, the period required from when the AT end display starts until when the warning display starts may be less than the period required from when the AT end display starts until when a new game can be started. In this case, since a new bet can be set after the AT end display and the warning display start, the warning display will be executed reliably in a game in which a revival-compatible effect is executed.

- In games where a revival-compatible effect is executed in the AT state ST5, the revival display is configured to start when a predetermined period of time has passed since the AT end display started, but the revival display may not be set to start when the period has passed. In this case, the revival display will start when a new bet is set in the game.

- Even in a game in which a revival-compatible performance is executed in the AT state ST5, a freeze period that prevents the start of a new game may be set in the same manner as in the final game of the AT state ST5. In this case, it is possible to have a similar appearance to the final game of the AT state ST5 in a game in which a revival-compatible performance is executed, including not only the display manner of the AT end display and the warning display, but also the manner in which a new game is prevented from starting.

In addition, in this configuration, the revival display may be started when the freeze period is released in a game in which the revival-responsive performance is executed. In the final game of the AT state ST5, the illuminated state of the interval display unit 67 ends when the freeze period is released, so in a game in which the revival-responsive performance is executed, the revival display will start at the timing when the illuminated state of the interval display unit 67 ends in the final game of the AT state ST5.

- When the second section SC2 ends in response to the end of the pseudo bonus state ST4, the illuminated state of the section display unit 67 ends when all reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped spinning, and when the second section SC2 ends in response to the end of the AT state ST5, the illuminated state of the section display unit 67 ends when the freeze period ends, but this is not limited to the above.

For example, in a configuration in which a freeze period occurs even in the final game of the pseudo bonus state ST4, the lighting state of the interval display unit 67 may be ended when the freeze period begins in one of the cases where the second interval SC2 ends in response to the end of the pseudo bonus state ST4 and where the second interval SC2 ends in response to the end of the AT state ST5, and the lighting state of the interval display unit 67 may be ended when the freeze period ends in the other case. Also, the lighting state of the interval display unit 67 may be ended when the freeze period begins in one of the cases where the second interval SC2 ends in response to the end of the pseudo bonus state ST4 and where the second interval SC2 ends in response to the end of the AT state ST5, and the lighting state of the interval display unit 67 may be ended in the middle of the freeze period in the other case. In addition, the lighting state of the section display unit 67 may be terminated in the middle of the freeze period when the second section SC2 ends in response to the end of the pseudo bonus state ST4 or when the second section SC2 ends in response to the end of the AT state ST5, and when the freeze period ends, the lighting state of the section display unit 67 may be terminated. In addition, the lighting state of the section display unit 67 may be terminated when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop spinning when the second section SC2 ends in response to the end of the pseudo bonus state ST4 or when the second section SC2 ends in response to the end of the AT state ST5, and when the bet setting of the gaming medium is performed or a new game is started after the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stops.

- The end timing of the illuminated state of the section display unit 67 is not limited to the same when the second section SC2 ends in response to the end condition of the AT state ST5 being satisfied and when the second section SC2 ends in response to the ending condition being satisfied, and these end timings may be different.

For example, the lighting state of the section display unit 67 may be terminated when the freeze period starts in one of the cases where the second section SC2 ends in response to the end condition of the AT state ST5 being satisfied and where the second section SC2 ends in response to the end condition being satisfied, and the lighting state of the section display unit 67 may be terminated when the freeze period ends in the other case. Also, the lighting state of the section display unit 67 may be terminated when the freeze period starts in one of the cases where the second section SC2 ends in response to the end condition of the AT state ST5 being satisfied and where the second section SC2 ends in response to the end condition being satisfied, and the lighting state of the section display unit 67 may be terminated in the middle of the freeze period in the other case. Also, the lighting state of the section display unit 67 may be terminated in the middle of the freeze period in one of the cases where the second section SC2 ends in response to the end condition of the AT state ST5 being satisfied and where the second section SC2 ends in response to the end condition being satisfied, and the lighting state of the section display unit 67 may be terminated when the freeze period ends in the other case. In addition, when the second section SC2 ends in response to the end condition of the AT state ST5 being satisfied, or when the second section SC2 ends in response to the ending condition being satisfied, the illuminated state of the section display unit 67 may be terminated when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped spinning, or when a bet on gaming media has been set or a new game has started after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped spinning.

- Although the section display unit 67 may be turned off in the second section SC2 when the situation is neither pseudo bonus state ST4 nor AT state ST5, this is not limited to the above, and the section display unit 67 may be turned on when the second section SC2 is neither pseudo bonus state ST4 nor AT state ST5, and may also be turned on when the situation is neither pseudo bonus state ST4 nor AT state ST5.

- The light-emitting element provided in the section display unit 67 is not limited to a single-color light-emitting type, and may be a multi-color light-emitting type. In this case, the section display unit 67 is lit in the second section SC2, but the light color may be different depending on the situation. For example, the section display unit 67 is lit green in the second section SC2 when the situation is neither the pseudo bonus state ST4 nor the AT state ST5, the section display unit 67 is lit blue in the second section SC2 when the situation is the pseudo bonus state ST4, and the section display unit 67 is lit red in the second section SC2 when the situation is the AT state ST5. In this way, by checking the section display unit 67, it is possible to identify not only whether the situation is the second section SC2, but also which situation in the second section SC2 is in.

- In addition to or instead of a configuration in which a warning image G52 is displayed on the image display device 63 to warn the player against becoming addicted to the game, a configuration may be adopted in which sounds or voices are output from the speaker 62 to warn the player against becoming addicted to the game.

- In the final game of AT state ST5, a freeze period may occur when one reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops spinning but two reels 32L, 32M, 32R continue spinning, or a freeze period may occur when two reels 32L, 32M, 32R stop spinning but one reel 32L, 32M, 32R continues spinning. In this case, a warning display may be displayed on the image display device 63 during the freeze period.

Seventh embodiment
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the revival-compatible performance process executed by the performance-side MPU 92 is different from that of the sixth embodiment. The configuration that differs from the sixth embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as the sixth embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 64 is a flowchart showing the revival-compatible performance processing in this embodiment, which is executed by the performance side MPU 92.

Steps S3501 to S3504 are the same as steps S3401 to S3404 of the revival effect processing (FIG. 62) in the sixth embodiment. If a positive judgment is made in step S3501 and a negative judgment is made in step S3502, it is determined whether the current data to be referenced that is set in this premonition change table corresponds to the timing of the revival effect occurrence, or whether a bet has been set on gaming media to start a new game (step S3505). The details of the timing of the revival effect occurrence are the same as in the sixth embodiment, and the details of the bet setting on gaming media to start a new game are also the same as in the sixth embodiment.

If a positive judgment is made in step S3505, the data to be referenced in this premonition change table is set as the revival performance data (step S3506), and the end process of the AT end display is executed (step S3507). After that, if the value of the start timer counter 131 of the warning display is 1 or more, the start timer counter 131 of the warning display is cleared to "0" (step S3508). However, in step S3508, the duration timer counter 132 of the warning display is not cleared to "0".

Figures 65(a) to 65(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the execution of the revival effect when a bet is set on gaming media to start a new game before the timing for the revival effect to occur.

In a game in which the revival-responsive performance is executed, when the rotation stop operation is performed on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped by performing a rotation stop operation on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the image display device 63 starts displaying the AT end display as shown in FIG. 65(a). In addition, when a predetermined period (specifically, one second) has elapsed since the AT end display started, the image display device 63 starts displaying a warning display in a situation in which the AT end display is being performed as shown in FIG. 65(b). After that, when a bet is set to start the next game before the timing of the revival performance execution and before a predetermined display duration period has elapsed since the warning display started, as already explained, in the revival-responsive performance processing (FIG. 64), the processing for setting the revival performance data (step S3506) and the processing for ending the AT end display (step S3507) are executed, but the processing for clearing the continuation timer counter 132 of the warning display to "0" is not executed. In addition, the processing for ending the warning display is not executed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 65(c), the AT end display is terminated and a revival image G64 (specifically, a text image of "Not yet") is displayed as a revival display on the image display device 63, but the warning image G52, which is displayed as a warning display, continues to be displayed.

The display of the warning image G52 continues until the warning display control process (FIG. 56) determines that a predetermined display duration (specifically, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the display of the warning image G52 and the value of the warning display duration timer counter 132 has become "0", and the warning display end process is executed in step S3009. Therefore, if the start timing of the next game is after the timing at which the predetermined display duration has elapsed, the warning display ends in a situation where the revival display is being performed. Also, if the start timing of the next game is before the timing at which the predetermined display duration has elapsed, the warning display continues even in a situation where the revival display has ended and the display of the normal image of the AT state ST5 has started.

According to the above configuration, even if a warning display is executed as a revival-responsive performance, when the warning display is executed, the warning display continues until a predetermined display duration period has elapsed from the start of the warning display, regardless of whether the revival display starts midway or ends. This makes it possible to ensure that the warning display continues for the predetermined display duration period when the warning display is started, and while limiting the opportunities for the warning display to some extent, it is possible to guarantee a period during which the player can check the warning display when the warning display is executed.

Note that in a game in which a revival response performance occurs in the AT state ST5, if a bet is set on gaming media to start the next game of the game before the display of the warning image G52 is started, the value of the warning display start timer counter 131 is cleared to "0" in step S3508 in the revival response performance process (FIG. 64), and the revival display is started without starting the display of the warning image G52. However, this is not limited to this, and by not setting the processing of step S3508 in the revival response performance process, the display of the warning image G52 may be started in a game in which a revival response performance occurs regardless of the timing of the bet on gaming media to start the next game of the game. This makes it possible to increase the opportunities for the warning image G52 to be displayed.

In addition, in a game in which a revival-compatible performance occurs in the AT state ST5, the warning image G52 starts to be displayed after the AT end display starts, but this is not limited to this, and the warning image G52 may start to be displayed when the AT end display starts.

Eighth embodiment
In this embodiment, the display contents of the image display device 63 in the AT state ST5 are different from those in the sixth embodiment, and the timing for ending the AT state ST5 is different from that in the sixth embodiment. The following describes the configurations that are different from those in the sixth embodiment. Note that the description of the same configurations as those in the sixth embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 66 (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the image display device 63 when the stopping operation of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed according to the stopping order notified by the image display device 63, and Figure 66 (B) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the image display device 63 when the stopping operation of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed in a stopping order different from the stopping order notified by the image display device 63.

First, with reference to FIG. 66(A), we will explain the display contents of the image display device 63 when the stopping operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed according to the stopping order notified on the image display device 63.

As shown in FIG. 66 (a1), in the AT state ST5, the image display device 63 displays a remaining number display image G12 indicating the remaining number of gaming media awarded in the current AT state ST5, and also displays an acquired number display image G13 indicating the total number of gaming media acquired in the current AT state ST5.

The value of the remaining award number display image G12 is the same as the value of the AT continuation counter 74e in the main RAM 74, and when the value of the AT continuation counter 74e changes based on the execution of a game, the value displayed in the remaining award number display image G12 also changes accordingly. Note that the value of the AT continuation counter 74e does not change even if a game with a bet number of "2" or a game in CB state ST2 or ST3 is executed in AT state ST5, so the display content of the remaining award number display image G12 does not change even if a game with a bet number of "2" or a game in CB state ST2 or ST3 is executed in AT state ST5.

When more game media than the number of bets for one game are awarded in the AT state ST5, the acquisition number display image G13 is updated so that the value exceeding the number of bets for one game is added to the value previously displayed in the acquisition number display image G13. Also, when the number of bets for one game is greater than the number of game media awarded in the AT state ST5, the acquisition number display image G13 is updated so that the value of the bets exceeding the number of game media that were awarded is subtracted from the value previously displayed in the acquisition number display image G13. Also, when a replay win is established in the AT state ST5, the acquisition number display image G13 maintains the value previously displayed. Also, when neither a small win nor a replay win is established in the AT state ST5, the acquisition number display image G13 is updated so that the value of the number of bets for that game is subtracted from the value previously displayed in the acquisition number display image G13.

In the AT state ST5, as in the first embodiment described above, if the index value IV = 1 to 9 is won in the role selection process (Figure 13) in a game where the bet amount is "3", the image display device 63 will notify the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that will enable the establishment of a bell win (first bell win or second bell win). Figure 66 (a1) shows the state in which the stop order image G65 is displayed on the image display device 63 to notify that the index value IV = 4 is won in the role selection process (Figure 13) and the first stop is the center reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. By stopping the rotation of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R according to the stopping order indicated in the stopping order image G65, the first bell win is achieved on the main line ML as shown in FIG. 66(a2), regardless of the operation timing of stop buttons 42-44 relative to the rotational positions of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

When the first bell wins, the player is awarded "15" gaming media, which is a number greater than the bet number "3". Therefore, the value displayed in the remaining awarded number display image G12 is "88" by subtracting "12" from "100" that was displayed when the current game started. Also, the value displayed in the acquisition number display image G13 is "812" by adding "12" to "800" that was displayed when the current game started. In this case, the values of the remaining awarded number display image G12 and the acquisition number display image G13 are not updated all at once, but are gradually updated from the pre-update value at the start of the game to the updated value that reflects the game result. Specifically, the remaining awarded number display image G12 is updated so that its value decreases by 1 every time a predetermined update period (specifically, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, and the acquisition number display image G13 is updated so that its value increases by 1 every time a predetermined update period (specifically, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed. FIG. 66(a3) shows an image displayed on the image display device 63 when the first bell win is established and a predetermined update period has passed, where the value of the remaining award number display image G12 is "99" by subtracting 1 from "100" at the start of the game, and the value of the acquisition number display image G13 is "801" by adding 1 to "800" at the start of the game. After that, the value of the remaining award number display image G12 is subtracted by 1 and the value of the acquisition number display image G13 is added by 1 every time a predetermined update period passes, so that at the timing shown in FIG. 66(a4), the value of the remaining award number display image G12 becomes "94" and the value of the acquisition number display image G13 becomes "806", and finally, as shown in FIG. 66(a5), the value of the remaining award number display image G12 becomes "88" and the value of the acquisition number display image G13 becomes "812". This allows the player to clearly understand that the number of game media acquired has increased, but the remaining award number in the AT state ST5 has decreased.

As described above, the values of the remaining award number display image G12 and the number of acquisitions display image G13 are updated every time a specified update period elapses in response to a small win, in the case where the first bell win is achieved by winning any of index values IV = 1 to 3, 5, 6, or 10, the second bell win is achieved by winning any of index values IV = 7 to 9, the first watermelon win is achieved by winning index value IV = 11, the second watermelon win is achieved by winning index value IV = 12, and the cherry win is achieved by winning index value IV = 13. In addition, when a game with a bet of "2" is played, the values of neither the remaining award number display image G12 nor the number of acquisitions display image G13 are updated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 66(B), we will explain the display contents of the image display device 63 when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in a stopping order different from the stopping order notified by the image display device 63.

As shown in FIG. 66(b1), even if the stop order image G65 for notifying that the first stop is the center reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L is displayed on the image display device 63, if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop in a stop order different from the stop order notified in the stop order image G65, the visibility reducing effect G66 will be displayed on the entire image display device 63 at the timing when it is determined that the stop order is different from the notified stop order. Specifically, the entire image display device 63 will be displayed darker than before. However, even if the visibility reducing effect G66 is displayed, the remaining award number display image G12 and the acquisition number display image G13 will continue to be displayed, although their visibility will be reduced, and the player will be able to grasp the values displayed in each of the remaining award number display image G12 and the acquisition number display image G13, although it is not clear.

When the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop spinning in a different stop order from the stop order indicated in the stop order image G65, the 6th supplementary win is achieved on the main line ML as shown in FIG. 66(b2). Note that depending on the operation timing of the stop buttons 42-44 relative to the rotational positions of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, no wins, including the 6th supplementary win, may be achieved.

When the sixth compensation win is made, the player is awarded "1" gaming medium, which is less than the bet amount of "3". Therefore, the value displayed in the number of wins display image G13 is "798", which is the value displayed when the current game started, minus "2" from "800".

In contrast, in the AT state ST5, if an index value IV corresponding to a small prize win is won in the role lottery process (FIG. 13), regardless of whether a prize corresponding to the award of the maximum number of game media set in that index value IV is won, the value obtained by subtracting the bet number "3" from that maximum number of game media is subtracted from the value of the AT continuation counter 74e in the main RAM 74, and a similar subtraction is also performed on the value displayed in the remaining award number display image G12. Specifically, in a game in which an index value IV = 1 to 6, 10 is won, regardless of whether a first bell win is won, the value obtained by subtracting the bet number "3" from the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is subtracted from the value displayed in the remaining award number display image G12. In addition, in the case of a game in which the index value IV=7 to 9 is won, regardless of whether or not the second bell win is established, the value obtained by subtracting the bet number "3" from the "15" corresponding to the second bell win is subtracted from the value of the AT continuation counter 74e and is subtracted from the value displayed in the remaining award number display image G12. In addition, in the case of a game in which the index value IV=11 or 12 is won, regardless of whether or not the first watermelon win or the second watermelon win is established, the value obtained by subtracting the bet number "3" from the "5" corresponding to the first watermelon win and the second watermelon win is subtracted from the value of the AT continuation counter 74e and is subtracted from the value displayed in the remaining award number display image G12. In addition, in the case of a game in which the index value IV=13 is won, regardless of whether or not the cherry win is established, the value obtained by subtracting the bet number "3" from the "4" corresponding to the cherry win is subtracted from the value of the AT continuation counter 74e and is subtracted from the value displayed in the remaining award number display image G12. In addition, if an index value IV=11 or 12 is won but the corresponding watermelon prize is not awarded, or if an index value IV=13 is won but the corresponding cherry prize is not awarded, the visibility reducing effect G66 is not displayed. If an index value IV=4 is won in the role selection process (FIG. 13) this time and the sixth compensation prize is awarded, the value displayed in the remaining award number display image G12 will be "88", subtracting "12" from the "100" displayed when this game started.

In the case where the index value IV=4 is won but the 6th compensation prize is won, the value of the remaining number of points display image G12 is updated from "100" to "88" and the value of the number of points acquired display image G13 is updated from "800" to "798" as described above, but these updates are made in a shorter period than when the 1st bell prize is won. Specifically, in one predetermined update period (specifically 0.5 seconds), the value before the update at the start of the game is updated to the updated value reflecting the game result. In this case, as shown in FIG. 66(b1), the value displayed in the remaining number of points display image G12 is "100" and the value displayed in the number of points acquired display image G13 is "800", and in one predetermined update period, the value displayed in the remaining number of points display image G12 is "88" and the value displayed in the number of points acquired display image G13 is "798", as shown in FIG. 66(b3). This makes it possible to make it less noticeable to the player that the remaining number of awards in the AT state ST5 has been subtracted in the same way as when the first bell wins, even though the first bell win was not achieved due to an incorrect stopping operation. Also, the above update is performed in a situation where the visibility reducing effect G66 is displayed on the entire image display device 63. From this point of view, it makes it less noticeable to the player that the remaining number of awards in the AT state ST5 has been subtracted in the same way as when the first bell wins, even though the first bell win was not achieved due to an incorrect stopping operation.

After the update of the value displayed in the remaining awarded number display image G12 and the value displayed in the acquired number display image G13 is completed, the display of the visibility reducing effect G66 is terminated as shown in FIG. 66 (b4). Note that the fact that the values of the remaining awarded number display image G12 and the acquired number display image G13 change from the pre-update value at the start of the game to the updated value reflecting the game result in one predetermined update period due to an erroneous stop operation as described above also applies when the first bell prize is not awarded because any of index values IV = 1 to 3, 5, or 6 is won, when the second bell prize is not awarded because any of index values IV = 7 to 9 is won, when the first watermelon prize is not awarded because index value IV = 11 is won, when the second watermelon prize is not awarded because index value IV = 12 is won, and when the cherry prize is not awarded because index value IV = 13 is won.

Figure 67 is a flowchart showing the stop order monitoring process executed by the production side MPU 92. The stop order monitoring process is repeatedly executed by the production side MPU 92 at relatively short intervals (e.g., every 4 milliseconds).

In step S3601, the main MPU 72 determines whether or not a stop order command has been received from the main MPU 72. As in the first embodiment, in the stop order notification control process in step S412 in the lottery process (FIG. 13), if the current game state is the pseudo bonus state ST4 or the AT state ST5, and if any of the index values IV = 1 to 6 has been won in the lottery process (FIG. 13), the main MPU 72 transmits a stop order command to the production MPU 92 so that, on the condition that the number of bets in this game is "3", a display corresponding to the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first bell to be won is displayed on the dual-purpose display unit 66, and the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first bell to be won is notified on the image display device 63. In addition, if the winning combination results in an index value IV of 7 to 9, and the number of bets on the current game is "3", a display corresponding to the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that will result in the second bell winning is displayed on the dual-purpose display unit 66, and a stopping order command is sent to the production side MPU 92 so that the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that will result in the second bell winning is notified on the image display device 63.

If a stop order command has been received (step S3601: YES), a stop order data storage process is executed (step S3602). In the stop order data storage process, the stop order data corresponding to the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R set in the currently received stop order command is stored in the performance side RAM 94. In addition, a stop order display data setting process is executed (step S3603). In the stop order display data setting process, the image display device 63 is controlled to display a stop order image G65 for notifying the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the currently received stop order command. Note that if the number of bets on the current game is "2", even if the index value IV = 1 to 9 is won in the role selection process (Figure 13) in the pseudo bonus state ST4 or AT state ST5, the image display device 63 and the combined display unit 66 will not notify the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, but the configuration may be such that the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified in the same way as when the number of bets is "3".

In step S3604, it is determined whether a stop command has been received from the master MPU 72. As in the first embodiment, when a valid stop command is generated by operating the stop buttons 42-44 corresponding to the spinning reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the master MPU 72 transmits a stop command to the performance MPU 92 in step S504 of the reel control process (FIG. 17) that contains information corresponding to the type of reel 32L, 32M, 32R that is the target of the stop command, and information indicating whether the current stop command corresponds to the first stop, second stop, or third stop in the current game.

If a stop command has been received (step S3604: YES), and stop order data corresponding to the current game is stored in the presentation RAM 94 (step S3605: YES), it is determined whether the information corresponding to the type of reels 32L, 32M, 32R targeted by the stop command set in the currently received stop command and the information indicating whether the current stop command corresponds to the first stop, second stop, or third stop matches the stop order data stored in the presentation RAM 94 (step S3606). For example, if index value IV=4 has been won in the current game, the stop order data corresponding to the first stop being the center reel 32M, the second stop being the right reel 32R, and the third stop being the left reel 32L is stored in the presentation RAM 94. In this case, if the currently received stop command contains information indicating that the target of the stop command is the center reel 32M and the first stop, and if the currently received stop command contains information indicating that the target of the stop command is the right reel 32R and the second stop, then in step S3606 it is determined that the stop orders match. On the other hand, if the currently received stop command contains information indicating that the target of the stop command is the left reel 32L or the right reel 32R and the first stop, or if the currently received stop command contains information indicating that the target of the stop command is the left reel 32L or the center reel 32M and the second stop, then in step S3606 it is determined that the stop orders do not match.

If it is determined that the stop orders match, a positive determination is made in step S3606, and this stop order monitoring process is terminated without executing the process of step S3607. If it is determined that the stop orders do not match, a negative determination is made in step S3606, and the process of setting the inconsistency display data is executed in step S3607. In the process of setting the inconsistency display data, inconsistency display data is set in the performance side RAM 94 so that the visibility reducing effect G66 is displayed on the entire image display device 63. As a result, the visibility reducing effect G66 is displayed on the entire image display device 63. Specifically, the entire image display device 63 is displayed darker than before. Therefore, the visibility of the values displayed in each of the remaining awarded number display image G12 and the acquired number display image G13 displayed on the image display device 63 is reduced.

The mismatch display data is erased from the presentation side RAM 94 when a bet is set to start a new game, and the display of the visibility reducing effect G66 on the image display device 63 is terminated by erasing the mismatch display data from the presentation side RAM 94. The bet setting is either a bet setting of "1" gaming medium by inserting one medal into the medal insertion slot 45, a bet setting of one or more gaming media by operating the first credit insertion button 47 when one or more virtual medals are stored, or a bet setting of one or more gaming media by operating the second credit insertion button 48 when one or more virtual medals are stored.

Figure 68 is a flowchart showing the medium attachment process in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 72. Note that the medium attachment process is executed in step S309 in the normal process (Figure 12).

When a game with the bet number of "3" is executed in the AT state ST5 (step S3701: YES), it is determined whether or not any of the index values IV = 1 to 10 has been won in this game (step S3702). When any of the index values IV = 1 to 10 has been won in this game (step S3702: YES), if the first bell win or the second bell win is achieved (step S3703: YES), a match command at the time of the bell win is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S3704), and if the first bell win or the second bell win is not achieved (step S3703: NO), a mismatch command at the time of the bell win is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S3705). The mismatch command at the time of the bell win is set with information indicating whether or not any of the first to ninth compensation wins has been achieved.

When a game with a bet number of "3" is executed in the AT state ST5 (step S3701: YES), it is determined whether or not any of the index values IV = 11 to 13 has been won in the current game (step S3706). When any of the index values IV = 11 to 13 has been won in the current game (step S3706: YES), if a winning combination corresponding to the winning index value IV among the first watermelon winning, the second watermelon winning, and the cherry winning is achieved (step S3707: YES), a winning command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S3708), and if a winning combination corresponding to the winning index value IV among the first watermelon winning, the second watermelon winning, and the cherry winning is not achieved (step S3707: NO), a non-winning command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S3709). In both the winning command and the non-winning command, not only information that can identify the command type itself but also information corresponding to the currently won index value IV is set.

In the media granting process, other processes are executed in addition to the above various processes (step S3710). In the other processes, when a small win is established in the current game, a process is executed to grant the player a number of game media corresponding to the small win. Specifically, when a virtual medal is granted, a value corresponding to the current small win is added to the credit counter 74b of the main RAM 74, and when the value of the credit counter 74b reaches the upper limit of the stored memory number, the hopper device 53 is driven and controlled so that the number of medals exceeding the upper limit of the stored memory number is paid out to the medal tray 59. In this case, when the first bell win or the second bell win is established, "15" game media is granted, when the first watermelon win or the second watermelon win is established, "5" game media is granted, and when the cherry win is established, "4" game media is granted. In addition, in the media granting process, the display of the dual-purpose display unit 66 is controlled so that a display corresponding to the number of game media to be granted this time is performed. The display corresponding to the number of gaming media in this dual-purpose display section 66 will continue until a new gaming media bet is made.

Figure 69 (a) is a flowchart showing the display information update process executed by the production side MPU 92. The display information update process is repeatedly executed by the production side MPU 92 at a relatively short cycle (e.g., every 4 milliseconds).

If a match command is received from the master MPU 72 when a bell is won (step S3801: YES), a process for setting sequential update data when a bell is won is executed (step S3802). In this setting process, data is set to gradually update the value of the remaining number of awards display image G12 and the value of the number of acquisitions display image G13 on the image display device 63 from the pre-update value at the start of the game to the post-update value that reflects the game result.

Figure 69 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the storage area of the presentation side RAM 94. As shown in Figure 69 (b), the presentation side RAM 94 is provided with an AT remaining award number counter 135 and a presentation side AT net increase number counter 136. The AT remaining award number counter 135 is a counter for measuring the remaining number of gaming media awarded in the current AT state ST5, and its value will match the value of the AT continuation counter 74e in the main side RAM 74. The presentation side AT net increase number counter 136 is a counter for measuring the increase or decrease in the gaming media owned by the player in the AT state ST5, and its value will match the value of the AT net increase number counter provided in the main side RAM 74.

In the setting process of step S3802, display data is set in the presentation side RAM 94 so that the value of the remaining awards display image G12 is changed from the value of the AT remaining awards counter 135 at that time to the value of the increase in the number of gaming media owned by the player at the time of winning the bell (the value obtained by subtracting the number of bets "3" from the number of media awarded at the time of winning the bell) subtracted from the value of the AT remaining awards counter 135 at that time, by "1" every time a predetermined update period (specifically, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed. In addition, after setting the display data, the increase in the number of gaming media owned by the player at the time of winning the bell (the value obtained by subtracting the number of bets "3" from the number of media awarded at the time of winning the bell) is subtracted from the value of the AT remaining awards counter 135 at that time.

In the setting process of step S3802, display data is set in the presentation side RAM 94 so that the value of the acquisition number display image G13 is changed from the value of the presentation side net increase in AT counter 136 at that time to the value of the presentation side net increase in AT counter 136 at that time, which is the increase in the number of game media owned by the player at the time of winning the bell (the value obtained by subtracting the number of bets "3" from the number of media awarded at the time of winning the bell) added to the value of the presentation side net increase in AT counter 136 at that time. After setting the display data, the increase in the number of game media owned by the player at the time of winning the bell (the value obtained by subtracting the number of bets "3" from the number of media awarded at the time of winning the bell) is added to the value of the presentation side net increase in AT counter 136 at that time.

If a mismatch command is received from the main MPU 72 when a bell is won (step S3803: YES), a process for setting the batch update data when a bell is won is executed (step S3804). In this setting process, data is set to update the value of the remaining number of awards display image G12 and the value of the number of acquisitions display image G13 on the image display device 63 from the pre-update value at the start of the game to the updated value that reflects the game result in one specified update period (specifically, 0.5 seconds).

Specifically, in the setting process of step S3804, display data is set in the presentation side RAM 94 so that the value of the remaining awards display image G12 is updated in a predetermined update period (specifically, 0.5 seconds) from the value of the remaining awards counter 135 during the AT at that time, to the value obtained by subtracting the increase in the number of gaming media owned by the player at the time of winning the bell (the value obtained by subtracting the number of bets "3" from the number of media awarded at the time of winning the bell from "15", the number of media awarded at the time of winning the bell) from the value of the remaining awards counter 135 during the AT at that time. Also, after setting the display data, the increase in the number of gaming media owned by the player at the time of winning the bell (the value obtained by subtracting the number of bets "3" from the number of media awarded at the time of winning the bell) is subtracted from the value of the remaining awards counter 135 during the AT at that time.

In addition, in the setting process of step S3804, display data is set in the presentation side RAM 94 so that the value of the winning number display image G13 is updated at a specified update period (specifically, 0.5 seconds) from the value of the presentation side's net increase in AT counter 136 at that time to the value displayed by subtracting the number of gaming media owned by the player in the current game (if any compensatory win is made, this is the number of bets ``3'' minus the number of media awarded at the time of the compensatory win ``1'', and if no compensatory win is made, the number of bets ``3'') from the value of the presentation side's net increase in AT counter 136 at that time. In addition, after the display data is set, the number of game media owned by the player that has been reduced in the current game (if any of the compensatory wins are achieved, this is the number of bets "3" minus the number of media awarded at the time of the compensatory win, "1"; if no compensatory win is achieved, this is the number of bets "3") is subtracted from the value of the production side's AT net increase counter 136 at that time.

If a winning command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S3805: YES), a process for setting sequential update data when a missed prize is won is executed (step S3806). In this setting process, data is set to gradually update the value of the remaining prize number display image G12 and the value of the acquisition number display image G13 on the image display device 63 from the pre-update value at the start of the game to the updated value that reflects the game result.

In the setting process of step S3806, display data is set in the presentation side RAM 94 so that the value of the remaining award number display image G12 is changed from the value of the remaining award number counter 135 during the AT at that time to the value obtained by subtracting the increase in the number of gaming media owned by the player at the time of the current winning (in the case of a watermelon winning, the value obtained by subtracting the number of media awarded at the time of the watermelon winning from the number of bets "5" minus the number of bets "3"; in the case of a cherry winning, the value obtained by subtracting the number of media awarded at the time of the cherry winning from the number of bets "4" minus the number of bets "3") from the value of the remaining award number counter 135 during the AT at that time) by "1" every time a specified update period (specifically, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed. In addition, after setting the display data, the increase in the number of gaming media owned by the player at the time of this winning (if a watermelon wins, the value obtained by subtracting the number of media awarded at the time of the watermelon win, "5", from the number of bets, "3"; if a cherry wins, the value obtained by subtracting the number of media awarded at the time of the cherry win, "4", from the number of bets, "3") is subtracted from the value of the remaining number of awarded media during the AT counter 135 at that time.

In addition, in the setting process of step S3806, display data is set in the presentation side RAM 94 so that the value of the winning number display image G13 is changed from the value of the presentation side's net increase in AT counter 136 at that time to the value obtained by adding the increase in the number of gaming media owned by the player at the time of this winning (in the case of a watermelon winning, the value obtained by subtracting the number of media awarded at the time of a watermelon winning from the number of bets, "5", and in the case of a cherry winning, the value obtained by subtracting the number of media awarded at the time of a cherry winning from the number of bets, "4"), to the value of the presentation side's net increase in AT counter 136 at that time, by "1" every time a specified update period (specifically, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed. In addition, after the display data has been set, the increase in the number of gaming media owned by the player at the time of this winning (if a watermelon wins, the value obtained by subtracting the number of media awarded at the time of the watermelon win, "5", from the number of bets, "3"; if a cherry wins, the value obtained by subtracting the number of media awarded at the time of the cherry win, "4", from the number of bets, "3") is added to the value of the production side's AT net increase counter 136 at that time.

If a non-win command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S3807: YES), a process for setting the batch update data when a missed prize is won is executed (step S3808). In this setting process, data is set to update the value of the remaining prize display image G12 and the value of the acquisition number display image G13 on the image display device 63 from the pre-update value at the start of the game to the updated value that reflects the game result in one predetermined update period (specifically, 0.5 seconds).

Specifically, in the setting process of step S3808, display data is set in the presentation side RAM 94 so that the value of the remaining awards display image G12 is updated every specified update period (specifically, 0.5 seconds) from the value of the remaining awards during AT counter 135 at that time to the value displayed by subtracting the increase in the number of gaming media owned by the player in the event of the current winning role (first watermelon role, second watermelon role, or cherry role) from the value of the remaining awards during AT counter 135 at that time (if the first watermelon role or second watermelon role is won, the value obtained by subtracting the number of bets "3" from the number of media awarded when a watermelon wins "5", and if the cherry role is won, the value obtained by subtracting the number of bets "3" from the number of media awarded when a cherry wins "4"). In addition, after setting the display data, the increase in the number of gaming media owned by the player when the current winning combination (first watermelon combination, second watermelon combination, or cherry combination) is won (if it is the first watermelon combination or second watermelon combination, the value obtained by subtracting the number of bets "3" from the number of media awarded when a watermelon is won, which is "5"; if it is a cherry combination, the value obtained by subtracting the number of bets "3" from the number of media awarded when a cherry is won, which is "4") is subtracted from the value of the remaining number of awards during AT counter 135 at that time.

In addition, in the setting process of step S3808, display data is set in the presentation side RAM 94 so that the value of the acquisition number display image G13 is updated in a predetermined update period (specifically, 0.5 seconds) from the value of the presentation side's AT net increase counter 136 at that time to the value obtained by subtracting the number of gaming media owned by the player in the current game (the number of bets, "3") from the value of the presentation side's AT net increase counter 136 at that time. After setting the display data, the number of gaming media owned by the player in the current game that has been reduced (the number of bets, "3") is subtracted from the value of the presentation side's AT net increase counter 136 at that time.

In addition to the above various processes, the display information update process (FIG. 69(a)) also executes other processes (step S3809). In other processes, when a game with a bet number of "3" is executed in the AT state ST5 and the result is a miss in the lottery process (FIG. 13), the display data for updating the acquisition number display image G13 in a predetermined update period (specifically, 0.5 seconds) is set in the RAM 94 on the production side to a state in which the value of the net increase in the AT counter 136 on the production side at that time is displayed as the value of the net increase in the AT counter 136 on the production side at that time is displayed as the value of the decrease in the number of game media owned by the player in the current game (the bet number "3") subtracted from the value of the net increase in the AT counter 136 on the production side at that time. In addition, after setting the display data, the decrease in the number of game media owned by the player in the current game (the bet number "3") is subtracted from the value of the net increase in the AT counter 136 on the production side at that time. On the other hand, the display content of the remaining award number display image G12 is maintained without change, and the value of the remaining award number counter 135 during the AT is not updated.

When a game with a bet of "3" is executed in the AT state ST5 and a replay win is established, the display contents of the remaining award number display image G12 and the acquisition number display image G13 are maintained without change, and the values of the remaining award number counter 135 during the AT and the performance side's net increase number counter 136 are also maintained without change. When a game with a bet of "2" is executed in the AT state ST5, the display contents of the remaining award number display image G12 and the acquisition number display image G13 are maintained without change, regardless of the winning result of that game, and the values of the remaining award number counter 135 during the AT and the performance side's net increase number counter 136 are also maintained without change.

Figure 70 is a flowchart showing the AT processing in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 72.

First, it is determined whether the number of bets for the current game is "3" by determining whether the value of the bet number setting counter 74a in the main RAM 74 is "3" (step S3901). If the number of bets for the current game is "2" (step S3901: NO), the processing from step S3902 onwards is not executed. As a result, even if a game with the number of bets of "2" is executed in the AT state ST5, the remaining number of awards in the AT state ST5 is not subtracted, and the remaining one game is not subtracted when the remaining number of awards in the AT state ST5 becomes "0".

Note that when in the CB state (first CB state ST2 or second CB state ST3), the AT processing (Figure 59) itself is not executed as in the first embodiment described above, so even if the CB state starts in the middle of the AT state ST5, the games executed in the CB state are not treated as games completed in the AT state ST5. Therefore, even if the AT state transitions to the CB state in the middle of the AT state ST5, after the CB state ends, the AT state ST5 will resume from the state of the remaining number of awards immediately before the transition to the CB state.

If the number of bets on the current game is "3" (step S3901: YES), it is determined whether the value of the AT continuation counter 74e in the main RAM 74 is "0" (step S3902). If the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is 1 or more (step S3902: NO), an addition process for the number of games during the AT is executed (step S3903), and an update process for the net increase in the number of games during the AT is executed (step S3904). In the addition process for the number of games during the AT, the value of the AT game number counter provided in the main RAM 74 is added by 1. The AT game number counter is a counter for measuring the total number of games executed in the AT state ST5, and is cleared to "0" when the AT state ST5 ends. In the process of updating the net increase during the AT, if neither a replay win nor a small win corresponding to the awarding of game media has been achieved in the current game, "3" is subtracted from the value of the net increase during the AT counter provided in the main RAM 74, if a replay win has been achieved in the current game, the value of the net increase during the AT counter is maintained, and if a small win has been achieved in the current game, the value obtained by subtracting "3" from the number of game media awarded in the current game is added to the value of the net increase during the AT counter. The net increase during the AT counter is a counter for measuring the increase or decrease in game media owned by the player in the AT state ST5, and is cleared to "0" when the AT state ST5 ends.

After that, it is determined whether or not an index value IV that allows for the award of a number of gaming media exceeding the bet number "3" in the current game has been won (step S3905). Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of index values IV = 1 to 13 has been won. If a positive determination is made in step S3905, a subtraction process is executed on the AT continuation counter 74e (step S3906). In this subtraction process, a value obtained by subtracting the bet number "3" from the number of awarded gaming media that is the maximum number of awarded gaming media when winning for the currently won index value IV, regardless of the winning result of the current game, is subtracted from the value of the AT continuation counter 74e.

Specifically, in a game in which an index value IV=1-6, 10 is won, the value obtained by subtracting the bet number "3" from the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is subtracted regardless of whether the first bell win is achieved, from the value of the AT continuation counter 74e. In addition, in a game in which an index value IV=7-9 is won, the value obtained by subtracting the bet number "3" from the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is subtracted regardless of whether the second bell win is achieved, from the value of the AT continuation counter 74e. In addition, in a game in which an index value IV=11 or 12 is won, the value obtained by subtracting the bet number "3" from the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is subtracted regardless of whether the first watermelon win or the second watermelon win is achieved, from the value of the AT continuation counter 74e. In addition, in the case of a game in which the index value IV=13 is won, regardless of whether or not a cherry win is achieved, the value obtained by subtracting the bet number "3" from the "4" corresponding to the cherry win is subtracted from the value of the AT continuation counter 74e. In addition, in step S3905, if the value after subtraction falls below "0" and the borrow flag is set to "1", the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is cleared to "0".

When the subtraction process of the AT continuation counter 74e is executed in step S3906, it is determined whether the value of the AT continuation counter 74e after the subtraction is "0" (step S3907). When the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is "0" (step S3907: YES), an AT end command is sent to the presentation side MPU 92 (step S3908). The AT end command includes the value of the AT game number counter and the value of the AT net increase counter in the main RAM 74. When the presentation side MPU 92 receives the AT end command, it executes processing to start the AT end display on the image display device 63.

Then, the end waiting counter provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S3909). In this embodiment, the AT state ST5 ends when the end waiting number of games has been consumed since the game in which the remaining awarded number of game media in the AT state ST5 became "0". In this embodiment, the end waiting number of games is set to 1 game, but a predetermined number of games, such as 2 games, 3 games, or 4 games or more, may be set. The end waiting counter is a counter that the main MPU 72 uses to measure whether the end waiting number of games has been consumed since the game in which the remaining awarded number of game media in the AT state ST5 became "0".

When a game with the number of bets "3" is executed in the AT state ST5 (step S3901: YES) and the value of the AT continuation counter 74e of the master RAM 74 is "0" (step S3902: YES), this means that the remaining number of awards in the AT state ST5 in the previous game was "0" and the current game is the game to be waited for termination. In this case, the value of the end waiting counter in the master RAM 74 is decremented by 1 (step S3910). Note that even if the remaining number of awards in the AT state ST5 in the previous game was "0", if a game with the number of bets "2" is executed in the next game, the processing of step S3910 is not executed due to a negative judgment in step S3901, so that the AT state ST5 will continue even after the game is executed.

When the value of the end waiting counter in the main RAM 74 is decremented by 1 in step S3910, the process for ending the AT state ST5 and the second section SC2 is executed on the condition that the value of the end waiting counter is "0" (step S3911: YES). Specifically, the initialization process of the second section SC2 is executed first (step S3912). The processing contents of the initialization process of the second section SC2 are the same as the initialization process of the second section SC2 in the first embodiment (step S814). Specifically, the second section flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". As a result, the game section becomes the first section SC1. In addition, in the initialization process of the second section SC2, even if the player is in the AT state ST5, the game state is shifted to the normal game state ST1 by clearing various data (including the AT state flag) indicating that the game state is the AT state ST5, including the counter for storing the remaining number of game media awarded in the AT state ST5. Note that even if the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are in the middle of the second section SC2, the initialization process for the second section SC2 is executed, and the second section SC2 is terminated, but the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are not terminated and continue as is. After that, if the section display unit 67 is in a lit state, the section display unit 67 is switched from a lit state to an unlit state (step S3913). This ends the notification on the section display unit 67 that it is the second section SC2. After that, a second section initialization command indicating that the second section SC2 has been initialized is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S3914). This allows the production side MPU 92 to know that the second section SC2 has ended.

Figure 71 is a flowchart showing the AT state processing at the start of a game in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 72.

If both the first ending flag and the second ending flag in the main RAM 74 are not set to "1" (step S4001: NO) and the lottery process for the role in the current game (FIG. 13) results in an index value IV of 11 to 15 (step S4002: YES), it is determined whether the value of the end waiting counter in the main RAM 74 is "0". If the value of the end waiting counter is 1 or more (step S4003: NO), the process for adding to the remaining number of awarded game media in the AT state ST5 from step S4004 onwards is not executed.

In other words, the AT state ST5 ends when the number of games waiting to end has been played since the game in which the remaining number of game media awarded in that AT state ST5 became "0." However, even if one of the index values IV = 11 to 15 is won in that waiting-to-end game, no opportunity to increase the remaining number of game media awarded in the AT state ST5 occurs. This makes it possible to prevent the AT state ST5 from continuing excessively.

If the value of the end waiting counter is "0" (step S4003: YES), an add-on lottery process is executed (step S4004). In the add-on lottery process, a lottery is used to determine whether or not to generate an add-on that will increase the remaining number of game media awarded in the AT state ST5, using an add-on lottery table provided in the main ROM 73 and a lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74. Specifically, if the index value IV = 11 is selected, there is a 10% probability that an add-on win with the number of award targets being 30 is selected, there is a 10% probability that an add-on win with the number of award targets being 50 is selected, and there is an 80% probability that it will be a miss. If the index value IV = 12 is selected, there is a 10% probability that an add-on win with the number of award targets being 20 is selected, there is a 10% probability that an add-on win with the number of award targets being 40 is selected, and there is an 80% probability that it will be a miss. When the index value IV=13 is selected, there is a 20% probability that an additional win with 30 coins will be selected, a 20% probability that an additional win with 50 coins will be selected, a 20% probability that an additional win with 100 coins will be selected, and a 40% probability that the result is a miss. When the index value IV=14 is selected, there is a 20% probability that an additional win with 20 coins will be selected, a 20% probability that an additional win with 40 coins will be selected, a 20% probability that an additional win with 90 coins will be selected, and a 40% probability that the result is a miss. When the index value IV=15 is selected, there is a 10% probability that an additional win with 30 coins will be selected, a 10% probability that an additional win with 50 coins will be selected, and a 80% probability that the result is a miss.

If an additional win occurs in the additional lottery process (step S4004) (step S4005: YES), the value of the number of awards selected in this additional lottery process (step S4004) is added to the AT continuation counter 74e of the main RAM 74 (step S4006). After that, an additional command is sent to the presentation side MPU 92 (step S4007). The additional command is a command for making the presentation side MPU 92 recognize that an additional win occurred in the additional lottery process (step S4004) and the number of awards selected as the additional win. When the presentation side MPU 92 receives the additional command, it causes the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 to display an indication that an additional addition has occurred to the remaining number of awards of gaming media in the AT state ST5.

Figure 72 is a flowchart showing the performance control process for AT in this embodiment, which is executed by the performance side MPU 92.

In step S4101, it is determined whether an AT end command has been received from the master MPU 72. The AT end command is transmitted in step S3908 in the AT processing (FIG. 70) as already described. That is, in the AT state ST5, a game with the bet number of "3" is executed, one of the index values IV = 1 to 13 is won, and the AT end command is transmitted when the value of the AT continuation counter 74e in the master RAM 74 becomes "0" by executing the subtraction processing of the AT continuation counter 74e. Also, the AT end command is transmitted in step S3211 in the second control processing (FIG. 60) of the game section as in the sixth embodiment. That is, when the AT state ST5 ends by the establishment of the ending condition of the second section SC2, the AT state ST5 ends without the consumption of the end waiting number of games, but in this case, the AT end command is transmitted at a stage before the freeze period occurs.

When an AT end command is received (step S4101: YES), the setting process for the AT end display is executed (step S4102), and the setting process for the warning display is executed (step S4103). In the setting process for the AT end display, data is set so that the performance indicating that the AT state ST5 has ended is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. In this case, data enabling the execution of the AT end display is set in the performance side RAM 94 as data for display control of the image display device 63. In addition, in the setting process for the warning display, data is set so that the warning display to prevent the player from becoming absorbed in the game is executed by the image display device 63. As a result, the display of the end indication image G61, the total number of games image G62, the total number of acquisitions image G63, and the warning image G52 as shown in FIG. 58 (b) is started on the image display device 63.

In other words, the AT state ST5 ends when the number of games waiting to end has been consumed from the game in which the remaining number of game media awarded in the AT state ST5 has become "0". When the game in which the remaining number of game media awarded becomes "0" ends, that is, before the game waiting to end begins, the AT end display and warning display are started on the image display device 63. Also, when the AT state ST5 ends due to the ending condition of the second section SC2 being met, the AT end command is sent before the freeze period occurs in the game in which the ending condition is met, but in this case, the AT end display and warning display are started on the image display device 63 before the freeze period occurs.

Here, the AT end command includes the value of the AT game number counter and the value of the AT net increase counter in the master RAM 74, but the AT game number addition process (step S3903), which is a process for updating the value of the AT game number counter, and the AT net increase update process (step S3904), which is a process for updating the value of the AT net increase counter, are executed in a game executed in a situation where the value of the AT continuation counter 74e in the master RAM 74 is 1 or more, but are not executed in a game waiting to end in which the value of the AT continuation counter 74e has become "0". Furthermore, the AT end command set with information that determines the display content of the AT end display is sent to the production side MPU 92 in a game in which the value of the AT continuation counter 74e has become "0", but is not sent in a game waiting to end. Therefore, the number of games displayed in the total game number image G62 in the AT end display is the total number of games consumed until the remaining number of game media awarded in the AT state ST5 becomes "0", and does not include the number of games executed as a game waiting to end. In addition, the number of game media displayed in the total acquisition number image G63 in the AT end display is the total number of game media acquired in the games consumed until the remaining number of game media awarded in the AT state ST5 becomes "0", and does not include the number of game media acquired in the game waiting to end.

In step S4104, it is determined whether or not a second interval initialization command has been received from the main MPU 72. The second interval initialization command is transmitted in step S3914 in the AT processing (FIG. 70) as already described. That is, when the remaining number of game media awarded in the AT state ST5 becomes "0" and the number of games waiting for the end is played, the second interval initialization command is transmitted. Also, the second interval initialization command is transmitted in step S3216 in the second control processing (FIG. 60) of the game interval, as in the sixth embodiment. That is, when the AT state ST5 ends due to the ending condition of the second interval SC2 being satisfied, the AT state ST5 ends without playing the number of games waiting for the end, but in this case, the second interval initialization command is transmitted when the freeze period has elapsed.

If the second section initialization command has been received (step S4104: YES), the initialization command received flag in the production side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S4105). The initialization command received flag is a flag that allows the production side MPU 92 to identify that the second section initialization command has already been received in the AT state ST5.

If the initialization command received flag is set to "1" (step S4106: YES), it is determined whether a bet has been set for gaming media to start a new game (step S4107). When a bet on gaming media has been set by inserting medals into the medal slot 45 or by operating the credit insertion buttons 47, 48 in a situation in which it is possible to start a new game, the main MPU 72 transmits a corresponding command to the production MPU 92. This command is transmitted each time one or more gaming media are bet, but it may also be configured to be transmitted when the number of gaming media bets required to start a game has been completed. If the production MPU 92 has received this command, it determines that a bet on gaming media has been set to start a new game, and makes a positive determination in step S4107.

If a positive judgment is made in step S4107, the AT end display end process is executed (step S4108), and the warning display end process is executed (step S4109). In the AT end display end process, data for executing the AT end display is erased, and data setting is made to start displaying image G53 (see FIG. 52(c)) of normal gaming state ST1, and in the warning display end process, data for executing the warning display is erased. As a result, the state in which the AT end display and warning display are executed on the image display device 63 in the final game of the AT state ST5 ends when a bet setting is made to start a new game, and the display of image G53 of normal gaming state ST1 is started. Note that if a positive judgment is made in step S4107, the initialization command received flag is cleared to "0".

In the AT presentation control process (Figure 72), in addition to the above processes, other processes are also executed (step S4110). In the other processes, data to be referenced in various tables is updated as the game progresses, and the presentation content is updated. In addition, when a first ending command or a second ending command is received from the main MPU 72, a process is executed to perform an ending presentation.

Figure 73 is a time chart showing how the AT end display and the warning display are executed in the AT state ST5. Figure 73(a) shows the period during which the game is being executed, Figure 73(b) shows the situation of the end waiting period, which is the period from when the remaining number of game media awarded in the AT state ST5 becomes "0" to when the end waiting number of games is executed and the AT state ST5 ends, Figure 73(c) shows the timing when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped spinning, Figure 74(d) shows the timing when the ending condition of the second section SC2 is established, Figure 74(e) shows the timing when the bet setting of the game media is performed, Figure 74(f) shows the period during which the freeze period occurs, Figure 74(g) shows the period during which the section display unit 67 is in the lit state, Figure 74(h) shows the period during which the AT end display is being executed, and Figure 74(i) shows the period during which the warning display is being executed.

First, we will explain the case where the AT state ST5 ends without the ending condition of the second section SC2 being met.

At time t1, as shown in FIG. 73(a), a new game is started in AT state ST5. Then, at time t2, as shown in FIG. 73(c), the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game stops. In the current game, one of index values IV = 1 to 13 is won, and regardless of whether a win is achieved or not, the maximum number of game media awarded at that winning index value IV is subtracted from the value of the AT continuation counter 74e, and the value of the AT continuation counter 74e becomes "0". Therefore, at time t2, the AT end display and warning display are started on the image display device 63 as shown in FIG. 73(h) and FIG. 73(i).

Then, at timing t3, the current game ends as shown in FIG. 73(a). This causes an end waiting period in which the end of the AT state ST5 is awaited until the end waiting number of games (specifically, one game) has been executed as shown in FIG. 73(b).

After that, a new bet is set at time t4 as shown in FIG. 73(e), and then the start lever 41 is operated at time t5, starting a new game in the AT state ST5 at time t5 as shown in FIG. 73(a). Then, at time t6 as shown in FIG. 63(b), the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, 32R in that game stops. Processing to end the AT state ST5 is executed at time t6, switching the interval display unit 67 from a lit state to an unlit state as shown in FIG. 73(g).

After that, at the timing of t7, the current game ends as shown in FIG. 73(a) and the end waiting period ends as shown in FIG. 73(b). In this case, in the normal process (FIG. 12), the acceptance permission process (step S312) is executed, so that the medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 45 is detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, and the operation of the first credit insertion button 47 and the second credit insertion button 48 is also enabled. Then, at the timing of t8, a bet setting of the game medium is performed as shown in FIG. 73(e). The bet setting may be a bet setting of "1" game medium by inserting one medal into the medal insertion slot 45, a bet setting of "3" game medium by operating the first credit insertion button 47 in a situation where three or more virtual medals are stored and stored, or a bet setting of "2" game medium by operating the second credit insertion button 48 in a situation where two or more virtual medals are stored and stored. At the timing of t8, as shown in Figures 73(h) and 73(i), the AT end display and the warning display on the image display device 63 end. In this case, the image display device 63 starts displaying the image G53 of the normal game state ST1.

Next, we will explain the case where the AT state ST5 ends when the ending condition of the second section SC2 is met.

At timing t9, as shown in FIG. 73(a), a new game begins in AT state ST5. Then, at timing t10, as shown in FIG. 63(b), the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, 32R in that game stops. In this game, as shown in FIG. 73(d), the ending condition of the second section SC2 is met. Therefore, at timing t10, a freeze period is set as shown in FIG. 73(f). Also, at timing t10, an AT end display and a warning display are started on the image display device 63 as shown in FIG. 73(h) and FIG. 73(i).

After that, at the timing of t11, a freeze period elapses as shown in FIG. 73(f). This ends the current game as shown in FIG. 73(a), and in the normal processing (FIG. 12), the acceptance permission processing (step S312) is executed, so that the medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 45 is detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, and the operation of the first credit insertion button 47 and the second credit insertion button 48 is also validated. Also, at the timing of t11, the section display unit 67 changes from a lit state to an unlit state as shown in FIG. 73(g). This ends the notification in the section display unit 67 that it is the second section SC2.

After that, at the timing of t12, as shown in FIG. 73(e), a bet is set for the gaming medium. The bet may be a bet of "1" gaming medium by inserting one medal into the medal insertion slot 45, a bet of "3" gaming medium by operating the first credit insertion button 47 in a situation where three or more virtual medals are stored, or a bet of "2" gaming medium by operating the second credit insertion button 48 in a situation where two or more virtual medals are stored. At the timing of t12, as shown in FIG. 73(h) and FIG. 73(i), the AT end display and the warning display on the image display device 63 end. In this case, the image display device 63 starts displaying the image G53 of the normal gaming state ST1.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

When the remaining number of awards becomes "0" in the AT state ST5, the AT state ST5 does not end, but enters a waiting period for completion and one game is played in that AT state ST5. In other words, in the AT state ST5, the player focuses on the number of gaming media awarded in each game until the remaining number of awards becomes "0", and when the remaining number of awards becomes "0", the player focuses on the fact that one game has been played. Therefore, the object of attention in order to identify the end trigger in the AT state ST5 is changed midway, making it possible to increase the player's attention to the AT state ST5.

The waiting period will end after one game, not continue across multiple games. This will prevent the waiting period from continuing for an excessive amount of time.

In a game in which the remaining number of awards in the AT state ST5 becomes "0", an AT end display is started to indicate that the AT state ST5 is ending. This allows the player more opportunities to confirm the AT end display compared to a configuration in which the AT end display is started when one game of the end waiting period is played.

Since the AT end display includes the total number of games played image G62 and the total number of wins image G63, a player who checks the AT end display can understand not only that the AT state ST5 has ended, but also the results of each game played in that AT state ST5. In this case, the result of one game during the end waiting period is not reflected in the contents of the total number of games played image G62 and the total number of wins image G63 in the AT end display. This makes it possible to prevent the contents of the total number of games played image G62 and the total number of wins image G63 that have started to be displayed from being changed midway in a configuration that ensures a long display period for the AT end display that includes the total number of games played image G62 and the total number of wins image G63.

When the AT state ST5 ends as the ending condition is met and the second section SC2 ends, the AT state ST5 ends without playing one game in the end waiting period even if the remaining number of awards in the AT state ST5 is not "0". This makes it possible to prevent the AT state ST5 from continuing even though the second section SC2 has ended, in a configuration in which the end of the AT state ST5 marks the end waiting period of one game.

In AT state ST5, if a number of gaming media is awarded that exceeds the number of bets, the excess value is subtracted from the remaining number of awards measured in the AT continuation counter 74e of the main RAM 74, and when the remaining number of awards becomes "0", a waiting period for the end is entered in which only one game is played, and when that one game has been played, the AT state ST5 ends. In this case, if the index value IV = 1 to 9 is selected in the role selection process (Figure 13), when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the correct stopping order, "15" game media, which is more than the bet number "3", is awarded, whereas when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in a stopping order different from the correct stopping order, no game media is awarded in excess of the bet number "3". In this configuration, when the index value IV = 1 to 9 is selected, when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the correct stopping order or when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in a stopping order different from the correct stopping order, "12", which is the result of subtracting the bet number "3" from "15", is subtracted from the remaining number to be awarded. As a result, if any of the index values IV = 1 to 9 is won, regardless of whether or not "15" gaming media have been awarded, "12" will be subtracted from the remaining number of awards, making it possible to prevent the end of the AT state ST5 from being delayed depending on the stopping operation mode of the player.

In the AT state ST5, the image display device 63 displays the remaining number of awards display image G12 corresponding to the remaining number of awards, so the player can predict when the AT state ST5 will end by checking the remaining number of awards display image G12. In this case, if the player wins any of the index values IV = 1 to 9 and the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped in the correct stopping order, the remaining number of awards display image G12 is updated sequentially according to the subtraction of the remaining number of awards, whereas if the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped in a stopping order different from the correct stopping order, the remaining number of awards display image G12 is updated all at once according to the subtraction of the remaining number of awards. This allows the remaining number of awards to be subtracted by "12" when an index value IV of 1 to 9 is won, regardless of whether "15" gaming media have been awarded, and the value of the remaining number of awards display image G12 is updated accordingly, regardless of whether "15" gaming media have been awarded, while making the display mode of the update display an appropriate display mode corresponding to whether "15" gaming media have been awarded.

When an index value IV = 1 to 9 is won and reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in a stopping order that differs from the correct stopping order, the display mode of the updated value of the remaining award number display image G12 is a display mode that is more difficult for the player to recognize than the display mode of the updated value of the remaining award number display image G12 when reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the correct stopping order. This makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the remaining award number has been decremented by "12" even though "15" gaming media were not awarded despite the fact that an index value IV = 1 to 9 was won.

When an index value IV = 1 to 9 is won and reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in a stopping order that differs from the correct stopping order, the period required to update and display the value of the remaining number of awards display image G12 is shorter than the period required to update and display the value of the remaining number of awards display image G12 when reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the correct stopping order. This makes it possible to reduce the likelihood that the player will notice that the remaining number of awards has been deducted by "12" even though "15" gaming media were not awarded despite winning an index value IV = 1 to 9.

When an index value IV = 1 to 9 is won and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop spinning in a stop order that differs from the correct stop order, a visibility-reducing effect G66 is applied to the image display device 63, causing the visibility of the content displayed on the image display device 63 to become lower than before. Then, when the visibility-reducing effect G66 is applied, the value of the remaining award number display image G12 is updated. This makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the remaining award number has been reduced by "12" even though "15" gaming media were not awarded despite the fact that an index value IV = 1 to 9 was won.

When the index value IV = 1 to 9 is selected and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in a stop order that is different from the correct stop order, a visibility reduction effect G66 is applied if it is determined that the stop order is different from the correct stop order even if all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have not stopped spinning. In this situation, when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped spinning, the value of the remaining award number display image G12 is updated. This makes it possible to update the value of the remaining award number display image G12 in a situation where the visibility of the image display device 63 is reduced due to the visibility reduction effect G66 being applied.

<Alternative to the eighth embodiment>
When the AT state ST5 is started, an initial number of awards is set in the AT continuation counter 74e of the main RAM 74, and when gaming media are awarded in excess of the bet number of "3", the value exceeding the bet number is subtracted from the remaining number of awards in the AT continuation counter 74e, and when the remaining number of awards becomes "0", an end waiting period lasting for one game occurs, and when one game is played and the end waiting period ends, the AT state ST5 ends, but this is not limited to the configuration. For example, when the AT state ST5 is started, the initial number of games is set in the AT continuation counter 74e, and each time a game with a bet number of "3" is executed, "1" is subtracted from the remaining number of games in the AT continuation counter 74e, and when the remaining number of games becomes "0", the end waiting period is started by setting the number of awards for end waiting in the AT continuation counter 74e, and when the number of game media exceeding the number of bets "3" is awarded during the end waiting period, the value exceeding the number of bets is subtracted from the remaining number of awards in the AT continuation counter 74e, and when the remaining number of awards becomes "0", the end waiting period ends, and the AT state ST5 ends. The number of awards for end waiting may be less than the expected number of net increases in game media in one game of the AT state ST5 (the value obtained by subtracting "3" from the expected number of awards). In this case, the end waiting period basically ends in one game, and may continue over multiple games depending on the situation. In addition, the number of awards for the end waiting may be a value that exceeds the expected net increase in game media in one game in the AT state ST5 (a value obtained by subtracting "3" from the expected number of awards). In this case, the end waiting period will continue over multiple games.

In addition, when the AT state ST5 is started, an initial number of occurrences is set in the AT continuation counter 74e, and "1" is subtracted from the remaining number of occurrences in the AT continuation counter 74e each time the first bell or second bell is won in a game with a bet number of "3", and when the remaining number of occurrences becomes "0", a termination waiting period that continues for a predetermined number of games occurs, and when the termination waiting period ends after the predetermined number of games have been played, the AT state ST5 ends. The above-mentioned predetermined number of games may be one game, or multiple games such as two, three, or four or more games.

In a configuration in which the initial number of wins is set in this manner, if any of the index values IV = 1 to 9 is won in the role selection process (Figure 13), then "1" may be subtracted from the remaining number of wins in the AT continuation counter 74e, regardless of whether the stopping sequence of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is the correct stopping sequence corresponding to the formation of a bell win or is a stopping sequence different from the correct stopping sequence. In this case, the remaining number of times the winning combination is achieved is displayed in the remaining number of winning combinations display image G12 on the image display device 63, but if the index value IV = 1 to 9 is selected in the lottery process for the winning combination (Figure 13) and the rotation of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped in a stopping order that results in a bell winning combination, the value of the remaining number of winning combinations display image G12 is subtracted in a display manner that is easy for the player to recognize, such as the sequential update mode in the above embodiment, and if the index value IV = 1 to 9 is selected in the lottery process for the winning combination (Figure 13) and the rotation of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped in a stopping order that does not result in a bell winning combination, the value of the remaining number of winning combinations display image G12 is subtracted in a display manner that is difficult for the player to recognize, such as the batch update mode in the above embodiment.

In addition, in a configuration in which the initial number of wins is set as described above at the beginning of the AT state ST5, the number of awards for the end wait is set in the AT continuation counter 74e during the end wait period, and if game media are awarded in excess of the number of bets "3" during the end wait period, the value exceeding the number of bets is subtracted from the remaining number of awards in the AT continuation counter 74e, and the AT state ST5 ends when the remaining number of awards becomes "0" and the end wait period ends. The number of awards for the end wait may be less than the expected number of net increases in game media in one game of the AT state ST5 (the value obtained by subtracting "3" from the expected number of awards), or may be a value that exceeds the expected number of net increases in game media in one game of the AT state ST5 (the value obtained by subtracting "3" from the expected number of awards).

In addition, in a configuration in which an initial award number or an initial game number is set at the beginning of the AT state ST5, the number of times the end waiting is established is set in the AT continuation counter 74e during the end waiting period, and "1" is subtracted from the remaining number of times the AT continuation counter 74e is established each time the first bell or the second bell is established in a game with a bet number of "3" during the end waiting period, and the AT state ST5 ends when the remaining number of times becomes "0". The number of times the end waiting is established may be one, or multiple times such as two, three, or four or more.

- In the case where a number of gaming media exceeding the bet number "3" is awarded in the AT state ST5, the value obtained by subtracting the bet number "3" from the awarded number of gaming media is subtracted from the value of the AT continuation counter 74e in the main RAM 74, but this is not limited to the above, and the configuration may also be such that in the case where a gaming medium is awarded in the AT state ST5, the awarded number of gaming media is subtracted from the value of the AT continuation counter 74e.

- The end waiting period after the remaining number of awards in the AT state ST5 becomes "0" is not limited to a configuration in which it ends with the execution of one game, but may be a configuration in which the end waiting period ends with the execution of two, three, or four or more end waiting games. In this case, the AT state ST5 will continue for multiple games after the remaining number of awards becomes "0".

- Regardless of the game result during the end waiting period of the AT state ST5, the remaining number of awards will not become 1 or more again. However, the remaining number of awards may be made 1 or more again depending on the game result during the end waiting period. For example, if the result of the lottery process for the role during the end waiting period (FIG. 13) is a specified result or a specified winning result, an additional lottery process is executed, and if an award number of 1 or more is selected in the additional lottery process, the selected award number is added to the AT continuation counter 74e, so that the remaining number of awards becomes 1 or more again. In this case, the AT state ST5 continues until the remaining number of awards becomes "0", and if the remaining number of awards becomes "0", the end waiting period may be configured to occur again, or the end waiting period may not occur again.

- In the AT state ST5, if the lottery process (Figure 13) selects one of the index values IV = 1 to 9, the value of the remaining number of awards display image G12 on the image display device 63 may be decremented in the same display mode regardless of whether a bell win is achieved or not.

- When a game with a bet number of "2" is executed in the AT state ST5, the value of the AT continuation counter 74e in the main RAM 74 is maintained without being subtracted, and the value of the remaining number of awards display image G12 is also maintained without being subtracted, but this is not limited to the above. Even when a game with a bet number of "2" is executed in the AT state ST5, if a number of gaming media is awarded that exceeds the number of bets, the excess number may be subtracted from the remaining number of awards in the AT continuation counter 74e and from the value of the remaining number of awards display image G12.

- The AT state ST5 may be configured so that there is no waiting period for the end. In this case, the AT state ST5 ends in a game in which the remaining number of awards becomes "0". Even in this configuration, if the index value IV = 1 to 9 is won in the role selection process (Figure 13) in the AT state ST5, regardless of whether a bell win is achieved or not, it is preferable to subtract the value obtained by subtracting the bet number "3" from the number of game media awarded due to the bell win from the remaining number of awards in the AT continuation counter 74e, and to subtract it from the value of the remaining number of awards display image G12. In addition, it is preferable that the display mode when subtracting the value of the remaining number of awards display image G12 be the display mode described in the above embodiment.

- In the AT state ST5, if the index value IV = 1 to 9 is selected in the role selection process (Figure 13) and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in a stopping order that is different from the stopping order that allows for the establishment of a bell win, the configuration may be such that only one of the remaining award number display images G12 are displayed all at once and the visibility reduction effect G66 is applied to the image display device 63.

Ninth embodiment
In this embodiment, the type of games reflected in the total number of games image G62 and the total number of acquisitions image G63 of the AT end display is different from that of the eighth embodiment. The following describes the configuration different from the eighth embodiment. Note that the description of the same configuration as the eighth embodiment is basically omitted.

Figure 74 is a flowchart showing the AT processing in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 72.

If the number of bets in the current game is "3" (step S4201: YES), regardless of the value of the AT continuation counter 74e, the process of adding the number of games in the AT is executed (step S4202), and the process of updating the net increase in the AT is executed (step S4203). The process of adding the number of games in the AT is the same as step S3903 of the AT processing (FIG. 70) in the above eighth embodiment, and the process of updating the net increase in the AT is the same as step S3904 of the AT processing (FIG. 70) in the above eighth embodiment. As a result, not only the game started when the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is 1 or more, but also the game started when the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is "0", that is, the content of the game waiting for completion, is reflected in the values of the AT game number counter and the AT net increase counter of the main RAM 74. In other words, when the game waiting for completion is executed, the value of the AT game number counter is added by 1, and the value of the AT net increase counter is updated according to the winning result in the game waiting for completion.

Then, it is determined whether the value of the AT continuation counter 74e in the master RAM 74 is "0" (step S4204). If the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is 1 or greater (step S4204: NO), the processing of steps S4205 to S4209 is executed. The processing contents of steps S4205 to S4209 are the same as steps S3905 to S3909 in the AT processing (FIG. 70) in the eighth embodiment. In this case, in step S4208, an AT end command is sent to the performance side MPU 92, but the AT end command does not include the value of the AT game number counter and the AT net increase counter in the master RAM 74.

If the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is "0" (step S4204: YES), this means that the remaining number of awards in the AT state ST5 in the previous game was "0" and the current game is the game that is subject to end waiting. In this case, the value of the end waiting counter in the main RAM 74 is decremented by 1 (step S4210). Note that even if the remaining number of awards in the AT state ST5 in the previous game was "0", if a game with a bet amount of "2" is played in the next game, the processing of step S4210 is not executed due to a negative judgment in step S4201, and therefore the AT state ST5 will continue even after the game is played.

When the value of the end waiting counter in the main RAM 74 is decremented by 1 in step S4210, the process for ending the AT state ST5 and the second section SC2 is executed on the condition that the value of the end waiting counter is "0" (step S4211: YES). Specifically, the initialization process of the second section SC2 is executed first (step S4212). The processing content of the initialization process of the second section SC2 is the same as the initialization process of the second section SC2 in the first embodiment (step S814). Specifically, the second section flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". As a result, the game section becomes the first section SC1. In addition, in the initialization process of the second section SC2, even if the player is in the AT state ST5, the game state is shifted to the normal game state ST1 by clearing various data (including the AT state flag) indicating that the game state is the AT state ST5, including the counter for storing the remaining number of game media awarded in the AT state ST5. Even if the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are in the middle of the second section SC2, the initialization process for the second section SC2 is executed, and the second section SC2 is terminated, but the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are not terminated and continue as they are. After that, if the section display unit 67 is in a lit state, the section display unit 67 is switched from a lit state to an unlit state (step S4213). This terminates the notification on the section display unit 67 that it is in the second section SC2.

Then, a second section initialization command indicating that the second section SC2 has been initialized is sent to the presentation side MPU92 (step S4214). The second section initialization command includes the value of the AT game count counter and the value of the AT net increase counter in the main RAM 74. Note that in this embodiment, as in the sixth embodiment, a second section initialization command is sent in step S3216 in the second control process (FIG. 60) for the game section, but the second section initialization command also includes the value of the AT game count counter and the value of the AT net increase counter in the main RAM 74.

Figure 75 is a flowchart showing the performance control process for AT in this embodiment, which is executed by the performance side MPU 92.

In step S4301, it is determined whether an AT end command has been received from the master MPU 72. The AT end command is transmitted in step S4208 in the AT processing (FIG. 74) as already described. That is, in the AT state ST5, a game with the bet number of "3" is executed, one of the index values IV = 1 to 13 is won, and the AT continuation counter 74e in the master RAM 74 is decremented, so that the value of the AT continuation counter 74e becomes "0", and the AT end command is transmitted. In addition, the AT end command is transmitted in step S3211 in the second control processing (FIG. 60) of the game section, as in the sixth embodiment. That is, when the AT state ST5 ends due to the ending condition of the second section SC2 being satisfied, the AT state ST5 ends without the end waiting number of games being consumed, but in this case, the AT end command is transmitted before the freeze period occurs.

If an AT end command is received (step S4301: YES), the setting process for the end indication display is executed (step S4302). In the setting process for the end indication display, data is set so that the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 can be used to execute an effect that allows the player to recognize that the AT state ST5 has ended. In this case, as data for controlling the display of the image display device 63, data that enables the display of an end indication image G61 (specifically, a text image of "RUSH END") to allow the player to recognize that the AT state ST5 has ended is set in the effect side RAM 94. On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the AT end command is received, data is not set so that the total number of games image G62, the total number of wins image G63, and the warning image G52 can be displayed on the image display device 63.

Figure 76 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the image display device 63 when the setting process for the end indication display is executed. As shown in Figure 76 (a), the end indication image G61 (specifically, the text image "RUSH END") is displayed on the image display device 63, while the total number of games image G62, the total number of wins image G63, and the warning image G52 are not displayed.

In step S4303, it is determined whether or not a second interval initialization command has been received from the main MPU 72. The second interval initialization command is transmitted in step S4214 in the AT processing (FIG. 74) as already described. That is, when the remaining number of game media awarded in the AT state ST5 becomes "0" and the number of games waiting for the end is played, the second interval initialization command is transmitted. Also, the second interval initialization command is transmitted in step S3216 in the second control processing (FIG. 60) of the game interval, as in the sixth embodiment. That is, when the AT state ST5 ends due to the ending condition of the second interval SC2 being satisfied, the AT state ST5 ends without playing the number of games waiting for the end, but in this case, the second interval initialization command is transmitted when the freeze period has elapsed.

If the second interval initialization command is received (step S4303: YES), the result display setting process is executed (step S4304), and the warning display setting process is executed (step S4305). In the result display setting process, the value of the AT game number counter of the master RAM 74 set in the second interval initialization command is grasped, and the data of the total number of games played image G62 corresponding to the grasped value is set in the presentation RAM 94. In addition, in the result display setting process, the value of the AT net increase counter of the master RAM 74 set in the second interval initialization command is grasped, and the data of the total acquisition number image G63 corresponding to the grasped value is set in the presentation RAM 94. In addition, in the warning display setting process, data is set in the presentation RAM 94 so that a warning display to prevent the player from becoming addicted to the game is executed on the image display device 63.

Figure 76 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the image display device 63 when the result display setting process (step S4304) and the warning display setting process (step S4305) are executed in response to the receipt of the second interval initialization command after the end indication setting process has been executed. As shown in Figure 76 (b), in addition to the end indication image G61 (specifically, the text image "RUSH END"), the image display device 63 displays a total number of games played image G62, a total number of wins image G63, and a warning image G52.

In other words, the AT state ST5 ends when the number of games waiting to end has been played since the game in which the remaining number of game media awarded in the AT state ST5 became "0". However, when the games waiting to end have been played, not the game in which the remaining number of game media awarded becomes "0", the result display and warning display start on the image display device 63. Also, when the AT state ST5 ends due to the ending condition of the second section SC2 being met, the second section initialization command is sent after the freeze period has elapsed in the game in which the ending condition was met. In this case, when the freeze period has elapsed, the result display and warning display start on the image display device 63.

Here, the second interval initialization command includes the value of the AT game number counter and the value of the AT net increase counter in the main RAM 74, but the AT game number addition process (step S4202), which is a process for updating the value of the AT game number counter, and the AT net increase update process (step S4203), which is a process for updating the value of the AT net increase counter, are executed not only in a game executed in a situation where the value of the AT continuation counter 74e in the main RAM 74 is 1 or more, but also in a game waiting for completion in which the value of the AT continuation counter 74e becomes "0". Then, the second interval initialization command is transmitted with the value of the AT game number counter and the value of the AT net increase counter that reflect the content of the game waiting for completion set. Therefore, the number of games displayed in the total game number image G62 in the result display is the total number of games consumed until the remaining number of game media given in the AT state ST5 becomes "0" and the game consumed as a waiting period for completion. In addition, the number of gaming media displayed in the total acquisition number image G63 in the result display is the total number of gaming media acquired in the games that have been played until the remaining number of gaming media awarded in the AT state ST5 reaches "0", and the number of gaming media acquired in the games that have been played during the end waiting period.

After executing the processes of steps S4304 and S4305, the initialization command received flag provided in the production side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S4306). The initialization command received flag is a flag that allows the production side MPU 92 to identify that the second section initialization command has already been received in the AT state ST5.

If the initialization command received flag is set to "1" (step S4307: YES), it is determined whether a bet has been set for gaming media to start a new game (step S4308). When a bet on gaming media has been set by inserting a medal into the medal insertion slot 45 or by operating the credit insertion buttons 47, 48 in a situation in which it is possible to start a new game, the main MPU 72 transmits a corresponding command to the production MPU 92. This command is transmitted each time one or more gaming media are bet, but it may also be configured to be transmitted when the number of gaming media bets required to start a game has been completed. If the production MPU 92 has received this command, it determines that a bet on gaming media has been set to start a new game, and makes a positive determination in step S4308.

If a positive judgment is made in step S4308, the end indication display end process (step S4309), the result display end process (step S4310), and the warning display end process (step S4311) are executed. In the end indication display end process, data for executing the end indication display is erased, and data setting is performed so that the display of the image G53 (see FIG. 52(c)) of the normal game state ST1 is started. In addition, in the result display end process, data for executing the result display is erased, and in the warning display end process, data for executing the warning display is erased. As a result, in the final game of the AT state ST5, the state in which the end indication image G61, the total number of games image G62, the total number of acquisitions image G63, and the warning image G52 are displayed on the image display device 63 ends when a bet setting is made to start a new game, and the display of the image G53 of the normal game state ST1 is started. In addition, if a positive judgment is made in step S4308, the initialization command received flag is cleared to "0".

In the AT performance control process (Figure 75), in addition to the above processes, other processes are also executed (step S4312). In the other processes, data to be referenced in various tables is updated as the game progresses, and the performance content is updated. In addition, when a first ending command or a second ending command is received from the main MPU 72, a process is executed to perform an ending performance.

According to the above configuration, when the remaining number of awards becomes "0" in the AT state ST5, the image display device 63 starts displaying the end indicating image G61, but does not start displaying the total number of games played image G62 and the total number of wins image G63. Then, when one game of the end waiting period is played, the display of the total number of games played image G62 and the total number of wins image G63 starts, including the result of that one game. This makes it possible to display the total number of games played image G62 and the total number of wins image G63 corresponding to the overall result of the AT state ST5 in a configuration that ensures a long display period for the end indicating image G61.

When all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped spinning during one game in the end waiting period, the display of the total number of games played image G62 and the total number of wins image G63 begins. This makes it possible to start displaying the total number of games played image G62 and the total number of wins image G63 in a state that takes into account the results of that one game.

In addition, when all reels 32L, 32M, 32R stop spinning in one game of the end waiting period, the image display device 63 starts displaying the total game count image G62 and the total win number image G63 and also starts displaying the warning image G52. However, this is not limited to this, and the warning image G52 may start displaying after the total game count image G62 and the total win number image G63 start displaying, or the warning image G52 may start displaying before the total game count image G62 and the total win number image G63 start displaying.

Tenth embodiment
In the slot machine 10 of this embodiment, the control of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is different from that of the first embodiment. The different configuration will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 77 is an assembled perspective view of the left reel 32L. Note that the center reel 32M and right reel 32R have the same structure as the left reel 32L.

The left reel 32L comprises a cylindrical skeleton member 141 forming a cylindrical basket, and a band-shaped belt (not shown in FIG. 77) wound endlessly around its outer periphery. To maintain the wound state, the belt is attached to the cylindrical skeleton member 141 via a pair of seals formed along both long sides of the belt. A large number of patterns serving as identification information are printed at equal intervals on the outer periphery of the band-shaped belt. The center of the cylindrical skeleton member 141 is attached to the drive shaft of a stepping motor 142. Therefore, when the drive shaft of the stepping motor 142 rotates, the cylindrical skeleton member 141 rotates around the drive shaft, causing the left reel 32L to rotate.

The stepping motor 142 is screwed to the side of the motor plate 143 that is arranged in an upright position in the reel unit 31. A reel index sensor 144 is installed on the motor plate 143, in which a light-emitting element 144a and a light-receiving element 144b are held at a predetermined interval. On the other hand, a sensor cut band 145 extending in the radial direction is screwed to the cylindrical frame member 141. The tip 145a of this sensor cut band 145 is bent at a substantially right angle and aligned so that it can pass between the elements 144a and 144b of the reel index sensor 144. Then, the reel index sensor 144 detects the passage of the tip 145a of the sensor cut band 145 every time the left reel 32L rotates, and a detection signal is output to the main MPU 72 each time. Therefore, the main MPU 72 can check and correct the angular position of the left reel 32L every rotation based on this detection signal.

The stepping motor 142 is set to rotate once by advancing 504 steps by applying an excitation signal of, for example, 504 pulses, and this number of steps controls the rotational position of the stepping motor 142, i.e., the rotational position of the left reel 32L. On each belt of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, multiple patterns, specifically 21 patterns, are drawn in the long side direction (circumference direction). Therefore, 24 pulses (= 504 pulses ÷ 21 patterns) are required to switch from one pattern to the next pattern at a specified position. Then, depending on the number of pulses from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor 144 is output, it is possible to recognize which pattern is visible from the display window 21L, or to control the state of making any pattern visible from the display window 21L.

<Operation principle of stepping motor 142>
78(a) is a connection diagram showing the drive system of the stepping motor 142, and FIG. 78(b) is a diagram showing the drive characteristics of the stepping motor 142.

A hybrid (HB) type two-phase stepping motor is used as the stepping motor 142. Note that the stepping motor 142 is not limited to the hybrid type, and various types of stepping motors can be used.

As shown in FIG. 78(a), the hybrid stepping motor 142 has a rotor 151 arranged in the center and a stator 152 arranged around the rotor 151 and having first to fourth poles 153 to 156. The rotor 151 is composed of a front rotor 151a magnetized to an N pole and a rear rotor 151b magnetized to an S pole, and is attached to the rotating shaft in a state where the teeth around the rear rotor 151b are relatively shifted by 1/2 pitch so that they are positioned between the teeth around the front rotor 151a. A cylindrical magnet (not shown) is attached between the front rotor 151a and the rear rotor 151b.

As shown in FIG. 78(b), excitation coils L0 and L2 are bifilar-wound on the first pole 153 and third pole 155, and the end of excitation coil L0 is connected to the beginning of excitation coil L2, to which a predetermined DC power supply +B (e.g., +24 volts) is applied. Similarly, excitation coils L1 and L3 are bifilar-wound on the second pole 154 and fourth pole 156, and the end of excitation coil L1 is connected to the beginning of excitation coil L3, to which the DC power supply +B is applied.

The phase in which an excitation signal is applied to the excitation coil L0 of the first pole 153 to excite the first pole 153 to the south pole and the third pole 155 to the north pole is called the A phase, and the phase in which an excitation signal is applied to the excitation coil L2 of the third pole 155 to excite the first pole 153 to the north pole and the third pole 155 to the south pole is called the inverse A phase. Similarly, the phase in which an excitation signal is applied to the excitation coil L1 of the second pole 154 to excite the second pole 154 to the south pole and the fourth pole 156 to the north pole is called the B phase, and the phase in which an excitation signal is applied to the excitation coil L3 of the fourth pole 156 to excite the second pole 154 to the north pole and the fourth pole 156 to the south pole is called the inverse B phase.

The excitation signal for the stepping motor 142 is given as excitation data to the motor driver 157 shown in FIG. 78(b). This excitation data is stored in the main RAM 74, and appropriate excitation data is output by timer interrupt processing. The excitation phase for the stepping motor 142 is determined by this excitation data, and an excitation signal (current) is applied to that excitation phase.

When the stepping motor 142 is of the one-phase excitation drive type, the rotor 151 can be rotated clockwise or counterclockwise by sequentially applying excitation signals to phase A, phase B, reverse phase A, and reverse phase B. That is, for example, when current is first applied to phase A, the protrusion of the first pole 153, which has become an S pole, and the teeth of the front rotor 151a, and the protrusion of the third pole 155, which has become an N pole, and the teeth of the rear rotor 151b face each other due to attraction, and then when current is applied to phase B, the protrusion of the second pole 154, which has become an S pole, and the teeth of the front rotor 151a, and the protrusion of the fourth pole 156, which has become an N pole, and the teeth of the rear rotor 151b face each other due to attraction. When current is applied to the reverse A phase, the protrusion of the first pole 153, which has become an N pole, faces the tooth of the rear rotor 151b, and the protrusion of the third pole 155, which has become an S pole, faces the tooth of the front rotor 151a, due to their respective attractive forces. When current is applied to the reverse B phase, the protrusion of the second pole 154, which has become an N pole, faces the tooth of the rear rotor 151b, and the protrusion of the fourth pole 156, which has become an S pole, faces the tooth of the front rotor 151a, due to their respective attractive forces. By exciting in this order, the rotor 151 rotates clockwise in FIG. 78(a).

In this slot machine 10, 1-2 phase excitation drive is used, which alternates between 1-phase excitation and 2-phase excitation, during the acceleration period from when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate at a constant speed, and during the constant speed period for maintaining the constant speed rotation. An excitation sequence table exists as a table referenced by the main MPU 72 to perform 1-2 phase excitation drive during these acceleration and constant speed periods. The excitation sequence table is stored in advance in the main ROM 73 during the manufacturing stage of the slot machine 10. Figure 79 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the excitation sequence table.

As shown in FIG. 79, the excitation order table has excitation order pointers "0" to "7" set, and each excitation order pointer is set to a type of excitation phase. The "0" excitation order pointer is set to one-phase excitation that energizes phase A, the "1" excitation order pointer is set to two-phase excitation that energizes both phase A and phase B, the "2" excitation order pointer is set to one-phase excitation that energizes phase B, the "3" excitation order pointer is set to two-phase excitation that energizes both phase B and reverse A, the "4" excitation order pointer is set to one-phase excitation that energizes reverse A, the "5" excitation order pointer is set to two-phase excitation that energizes both phase A and phase B, the "6" excitation order pointer is set to one-phase excitation that energizes reverse B, and the "7" excitation order pointer is set to two-phase excitation that energizes both phase B and phase A. If the acceleration period or constant speed period of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R continues while the excitation order pointer is "7", the excitation order pointer to be controlled returns to "0", and drive control is performed using the excitation order pointer of "0". Note that in the slot machine 10 of this embodiment, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate once with a 504-pulse excitation signal, so the angle change based on a one-pulse excitation signal, i.e., the angle change per step, is approximately 0.714°.

When using a stepping motor 142 with the above configuration, the period from when the start lever 41 is operated until the stepping motor 142 starts to rotate and reaches a constant constant speed can be broadly divided into an acceleration period and a constant speed period. The constant speed period is further divided into a maintenance period during which the rotation speed is maintained until the stop buttons 42-44 are operated, and a stop period during which the motor stops with a certain amount of slippage based on the operation of the stop buttons 42-44. During the stop period, the stepping motor 142 needs to be stopped within a maximum of 190 milliseconds after the stop buttons 42-44 are operated.

Figure 80 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the acceleration table 158 in which the excitation pattern is set when starting the rotation of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

As for the initial excitation phase during acceleration, in addition to one-phase excitation, which drives only a specific excitation phase, two-phase excitation, which drives two specific excitation phases simultaneously, can be considered. Although it differs depending on the size and inertia of the reel, in a normal slot machine, it is possible to accelerate the reel from an initial speed of zero even with one-phase excitation. However, since two-phase excitation has a greater rotational torque than one-phase excitation, in order to obtain sufficient initial speed, two-phase excitation is preferable for the initial excitation.

In the excitation pattern shown in FIG. 80(a), after the two-phase excitation is set in synchronization with the interrupt timing every 1.49 milliseconds, this excitation state is maintained for 130 interrupts. After the two-phase excitation state is maintained for 130 interrupts of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), 1-2 phase excitation is alternately repeated, but as the retention period of the phase excitation, the excitation retention period of the one-phase excitation and the excitation retention period of the two-phase excitation are finely controlled as shown in FIG. 80(a). Specifically, the retention period is set to be gradually shortened, such that the one-phase excitation following the initial two-phase excitation is performed for eight interrupts of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), and the next two-phase excitation is performed for seven interrupts of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11). Finally, one-phase excitation and two-phase excitation are alternately repeated at intervals of two timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11), and finally one-phase excitation is set to be performed over two interrupts of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11). Since the last one in the acceleration table 158 is one-phase excitation, the first type of phase excitation during the constant speed rotation period is two-phase excitation. By successively shortening the retention period for each phase excitation as the constant speed rotation is approached, high-speed acceleration processing can be achieved in a short time, and a smooth transition to constant speed rotation is possible. During constant speed rotation, one-phase excitation and two-phase excitation are alternately repeated at intervals of one timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11).

When stopping the stepping motor 142, four-phase excitation is used. In four-phase excitation, phase A, reverse A, phase B, and reverse B are all excited. When two opposing phases are excited, the magnetic flux cancels each other out, but while the stepping motor 142 is rotating, a back electromotive force is generated by the induced voltage, and a torque is generated that is the difference between the currents flowing through phase A and reverse A, for example. In the case of four-phase excitation, this torque is generated between the two opposing phases. Therefore, it is possible to generate a braking force even with four-phase excitation. However, the braking force in the case of four-phase excitation is smaller than that in the case of one-phase excitation.

The case where the stepping motor 142 is stopped using four-phase excitation will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram in FIG. 80(b). FIG. 80(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the stop table 159 in which the excitation pattern is set when stopping the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

When the stepping motor 142 is stopped, as shown in FIG. 80(b), a stop command is generated in a situation where one-phase excitation and two-phase excitation are alternately repeated, and four-phase excitation is started. In this case, the timing at which four-phase excitation starts is determined to be the timing after two-phase excitation is performed for one interrupt. This four-phase excitation continues for 100 interrupts (149 milliseconds). Then, after four-phase excitation has been performed for 100 interrupts, one-phase excitation is performed for 34 interrupts (50.7 milliseconds) and then the one-phase excitation is terminated. The phase that is the target of this one-phase excitation is the one phase that corresponds to the target stop angle position.

As described above, by using four-phase excitation, which has the weakest braking force, when braking begins, the rotor 151 of the stepping motor 142 can be stopped smoothly. However, if four-phase excitation is performed due to a weak braking force, the rotor 151 will advance to a certain extent due to inertia from the timing when the four-phase excitation begins. The number of steps advanced by this inertia differs depending on the specifications of the reel unit 31, and although the number of steps can be grasped to some extent at the design stage by experiments using the reel unit 31, it is not constant and some degree of variation may occur. In response to this, by performing four-phase excitation for a predetermined period, and then performing one-phase excitation for a predetermined period targeting one phase corresponding to the target stop angle position, it is possible to set the stop position to the designed position.

The number of steps of the stepping motor 142 is used to grasp the rotational position of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Specifically, as already explained, in this slot machine 10, 21 symbols are drawn on each belt of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and the number of steps required for one rotation is 504 steps. In this case, the number of steps required to switch from one symbol to the next symbol at a predetermined position (the lower position of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R within the range visible from the display window 21L, 21M, 21R) (i.e., the number of steps assigned to each symbol) is constant at 24 steps. Therefore, the rotational position of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is determined based on the number of steps from the time when the sensor cut band 145 is detected by the reel index sensor 144 corresponding to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, i.e., the number of times a one-pulse excitation signal is output (i.e., the number of times the excitation phase is switched).

Figure 81 is a flowchart showing the reel control process in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 72.

In the reel control process, it is first determined whether a predetermined start wait period (e.g., 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R started to rotate in the previous game (step S4401). If the start wait period has not elapsed, the process waits in step S4401 until the start wait period has elapsed. If the start wait period has elapsed, the start wait period for the next game is reset (step S4402), and the rotation start flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S4403). This starts the acceleration process of the stepping motor 142 in the stepping motor control process in step S206 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), and each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R starts to rotate.

Then, it is determined whether any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated (step S4404). If none of the stop buttons 42 to 44 have been operated, the process of step S4404 is repeated until any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated. If it is determined that any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated, it is determined whether the valid period flag 162a to 162c (see FIG. 82) provided in the main RAM 74 that corresponds to the stop button 42 to 44 that has been operated this time is set to "1" (step S4405). The valid period flags 162a to 162c are provided in one-to-one correspondence with each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 (i.e., each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R). Each valid period flag 162a-162c is set to "1" when the corresponding reel 32L, 32M, 32R starts to rotate, the acceleration period ends, and the reel starts to rotate at a constant speed, and is cleared to "0" when the corresponding reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops to rotate. In other words, when the valid period flag 162a-162c is set to "1", it corresponds to a situation where the operation of the stop button 42-44 for the corresponding reel 32L, 32M, 32R is enabled.

If the valid period flags 162a to 162c corresponding to the stop buttons 42 to 44 determined to have been operated in step S4404 are not set to "1" (step S4405: NO), the process returns to step S4404. Therefore, even if the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the valid period flags 162a to 162c that are not set to "1" are operated, the operation is treated as invalid. If the valid period flags 162a to 162c corresponding to the stop buttons 42 to 44 determined to have been operated in step S4404 are set to "1" (step S4405: YES), this means that the current operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is valid. Therefore, a process is executed to stop the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the stop buttons 42 to 44 that were currently operated.

Specifically, first, the button light-off process is executed (step S4406). A light-emitting unit (not shown) is provided on the back side of each stop button 42-44. The light-emitting unit is turned on when the constant speed rotation of the corresponding reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started and the operation of the corresponding stop button 42-44 is enabled, and is turned off when control for stopping the corresponding reel 32L, 32M, 32R based on the operation of the corresponding stop button 42-44 is started. In the button light-off process, the light-emitting units corresponding to all stop buttons 42-44, including the stop button 42-44 currently operated, are turned off. When stop control is started for one reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the operation of the stop buttons 42-44 corresponding to the other reels 32L, 32M, 32R is disabled regardless of whether the validity period flags 162a-162c are set to "1". In this case, when stop control is initiated for one of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, a button extinguishing process (step S4406) is executed to turn off all stop buttons 42-44, including those corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R currently spinning, making it possible for the player to recognize that operation of the stop buttons 42-44 has been disabled. Note that when the stop control for the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for which the current stop command has been issued is completed, if there are reels 32L, 32M, 32R for which the stop command has not yet been issued, the light-emitting portions of the stop buttons 42-44 corresponding to those reels 32L, 32M, 32R for which the stop command has not yet been issued are turned on.

Then, a stop command is sent to the performance side MPU 92 (step S4407). The stop command is a command for the performance side MPU 92 to recognize which of the stop buttons 42-44 was operated to generate the stop command. Then, the pattern number of the reaching pattern that has reached the base position (specifically, the lower row) at the timing when the stop button 42-44 was operated on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that are currently being stopped is confirmed (step S4408). Specifically, the pattern number of the reaching pattern that has reached the base position is confirmed based on the number of pulses of the excitation signal (i.e., the number of times the excitation phase has been switched) output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor 144 corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that are currently being stopped is input. Then, based on the stop information stored in the main side RAM 74, the number of slips of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that should be stopped this time is calculated (step S4409).

In this slot machine 10, five stop patterns are prepared for stopping each reel 32L, 32M, 32R when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated: a stop pattern in which the reaching symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as is, a stop pattern in which the corresponding reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped after sliding for one symbol, a stop pattern in which the reel is stopped after sliding for two symbols, a stop pattern in which the reel is stopped after sliding for three symbols, and a stop pattern in which the reel is stopped after sliding for four symbols. Therefore, in step S4409, one of the values "0" to "4" is calculated as the number of slips based on the stop information stored in the main RAM 74.

Then, the calculated slip count is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol, and the symbol number of the stopped symbol to be actually stopped at the base position is determined (step S4410). Then, it is determined whether the symbol number of the reached symbol of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be stopped this time is equal to the symbol number of the stopped symbol (step S4411), and if so, a reel stop process is performed to stop the rotation of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R (step S4412). The main RAM 74 has stop instruction flags 163a to 163c in one-to-one correspondence with reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and in the reel stop process, the stop instruction flags 163a to 163c corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be stopped this time are set to "1". This starts the control to stop the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that are currently to be stopped in the stop control process (Figure 85) described below.

Then, it is determined whether the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that are currently to be stopped have stopped (step S4413). The main RAM 74 has stop completion flags 164a to 164c (see FIG. 82) that correspond one-to-one to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and in step S4413, it is determined whether the stop completion flags 164a to 164c that correspond to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that are currently to be stopped are set to "1". If the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that are currently to be stopped have not stopped, it waits in step S4413. If the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that are currently to be stopped have stopped (step S4413: YES), it is determined whether all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped (step S4414). If all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped, the second stop information setting process is performed (step S4415) and then the process returns to step S4404.

The stop information here refers to information for making the stop mode of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R correspond to the result of the lottery process for winning combinations (FIG. 13). By using this stop information, it is possible to calculate the number of slips (specifically, "0" to "4") for the reaching symbol that reaches the base position when each stop button 42 to 44 is stopped. As the stop information, slip number data showing the correspondence between each symbol and the number of slips is stored in advance in the main ROM 73 in correspondence with each lottery result and the stopping order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. However, this is not limited to this, and the slip number data corresponding to each lottery result and the stopping order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R may be derived during the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, etc.

The processes for setting the above stop information include a first stop information setting process executed in step S409 of the role selection process (FIG. 13) and a second stop information setting process executed in step S4415 of the reel control process (FIG. 81). In the first stop information setting process, the stop information is set according to the result of the role selection process. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information stored in the main RAM 74 in the first stop information setting process or the previous second stop information setting process is changed after the reels have stopped. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed based on the set winning data, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the stop results of the stopped reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

If it is determined in step S4414 that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, a winning determination process is executed in step S4416. In the winning determination process, the type of symbols stopped on the main line ML on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is identified. Then, based on the contents of the winning data stored in the main RAM 74, it is determined whether or not the combination of symbols stopped and displayed on any of the main lines ML on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is a combination of symbols corresponding to a winning combination in the combination lottery process, and if it is a combination of symbols corresponding to a winning combination, a winning combination is established and a winning corresponding process is executed.

In the winning response process, if the winning is a small winning, information on the number of gaming media to be awarded is set in the main RAM 74 so that gaming media can be awarded in the media awarding process. On the other hand, if the winning is a replay winning, a flag setting process is executed so that the replay setting process can be executed.

After executing the winning determination process, a winning result command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S4417). The winning result command contains data indicating whether or not a win has been achieved this time, and if a win has been achieved, contains data indicating the type of win.

Next, we will explain the configuration for controlling the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. Figure 82 is an explanatory diagram for explaining each area of the main RAM 74 used to execute the rotation control of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R.

As shown in FIG. 82, the main RAM 74 is provided with acceleration completion flags 161a to 161c. The acceleration completion flags 161a to 161c include a left acceleration completion flag 161a corresponding to the left reel 32L, a center acceleration completion flag 161b corresponding to the center reel 32M, and a right acceleration completion flag 161c corresponding to the right reel 32R. After the left reel 32L has started to rotate, the left acceleration completion flag 161a is set to "1" when the acceleration period of the left reel 32L has completed and constant speed rotation has started, and the left acceleration completion flag 161a is cleared to "0" when the left reel 32L has stopped. After the center reel 32M starts to rotate, if the acceleration period of the center reel 32M is completed and constant speed rotation is started, the center acceleration completion flag 161b is set to "1", and if the center reel 32M has stopped, the center acceleration completion flag 161b is cleared to "0". After the right reel 32R starts to rotate, if the acceleration period of the right reel 32R is completed and constant speed rotation is started, the right acceleration completion flag 161c is set to "1", and if the right reel 32R has stopped, the right acceleration completion flag 161c is cleared to "0".

The main RAM 74 is provided with valid period flags 162a to 162c. The valid period flags 162a to 162c include a left valid period flag 162a corresponding to the left reel 32L, a center valid period flag 162b corresponding to the center reel 32M, and a right valid period flag 162c corresponding to the right reel 32R. After the constant speed rotation of the left reel 32L has started and the sensor cut band 145 has been detected by the reel index sensor 144 corresponding to the left reel 32L, the left valid period flag 162a is set to "1", and when the left reel 32L has stopped, the left valid period flag 162a is cleared to "0". After the constant speed rotation of the center reel 32M has started, if the reel index sensor 144 corresponding to the center reel 32M detects the sensor cut band 145, the center valid period flag 162b is set to "1", and when the center reel 32M has stopped, the center valid period flag 162b is cleared to "0". After the constant speed rotation of the right reel 32R has started, if the reel index sensor 144 corresponding to the right reel 32R detects the sensor cut band 145, the right valid period flag 162c is set to "1", and when the right reel 32R has stopped, the right valid period flag 162c is cleared to "0".

The main RAM 74 is provided with stop instruction flags 163a to 163c. The stop instruction flags 163a to 163c include a left stop instruction flag 163a corresponding to the left reel 32L, a center stop instruction flag 163b corresponding to the center reel 32M, and a right stop instruction flag 163c corresponding to the right reel 32R. When the left effective period flag 162a is set to "1" and the reel stop process (step S4412) of the reel control process (Figure 81) is executed based on the left stop button 42 being operated, the left stop instruction flag 163a is set to "1", and when the left reel 32L has stopped, the left stop instruction flag 163a is cleared to "0". When the center valid period flag 162b is set to "1", the center stop instruction flag 163b is set to "1" when the center stop button 43 is operated and the reel stop process (step S4412) of the reel control process (FIG. 81) is executed, and the center stop instruction flag 163b is cleared to "0" when the center reel 32M has stopped. When the right valid period flag 162c is set to "1", the right stop instruction flag 163c is set to "1" when the right stop button 44 is operated and the reel stop process (step S4412) of the reel control process (FIG. 81) is executed, and the right stop instruction flag 163c is cleared to "0" when the right reel 32R has stopped.

The main RAM 74 is provided with stop completion flags 164a to 164c. The stop completion flags 164a to 164c include a left stop completion flag 164a corresponding to the left reel 32L, a center stop completion flag 164b corresponding to the center reel 32M, and a right stop completion flag 164c corresponding to the right reel 32R. When the left reel 32L has stopped, the left stop completion flag 164a is set to "1", and when the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has been stopped and a positive determination is made in step S4414 of the reel control process (Figure 81), the left stop completion flag 164a is cleared to "0". When the center reel 32M has stopped, the center stop completion flag 164b is set to "1", and when the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped and a positive determination is made in step S4414 of the reel control process (FIG. 81), the center stop completion flag 164b is cleared to "0". When the right reel 32R has stopped, the right stop completion flag 164c is set to "1", and when the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped and a positive determination is made in step S4414 of the reel control process (FIG. 81), the right stop completion flag 164c is cleared to "0".

The main RAM 74 is provided with acceleration counters 165a to 165c. The acceleration counters 165a to 165c include a left acceleration counter 165a corresponding to the left reel 32L, a center acceleration counter 165b corresponding to the center reel 32M, and a right acceleration counter 165c corresponding to the right reel 32R. Each acceleration counter 165a to 165c is a counter that allows the main MPU 72 to determine whether or not the corresponding reel 32L, 32M, or 32R is in a state where acceleration control is being executed using the acceleration table 158 (Figure 80(a)), and if so, which acceleration order in the acceleration table 158 corresponds to which acceleration control is being executed.

When acceleration control of the left reel 32L is newly started, the left acceleration counter 165a is set to "24", and the value of the left acceleration counter 165a is decremented by one each time the acceleration order data to be referenced for acceleration control of the left reel 32L is changed in the acceleration table 158. If the value of the left acceleration counter 165a becomes "0" after the decrement, it is determined that the acceleration of the left reel 32L is completed. When acceleration control of the center reel 32M is newly started, the center acceleration counter 165b is set to "24", and the value of the center acceleration counter 165b is decremented by one each time the acceleration order data to be referenced for acceleration control of the center reel 32M is changed in the acceleration table 158. If the value of the center acceleration counter 165b becomes "0" after the decrement, it is determined that the acceleration of the center reel 32M is completed. When acceleration control of the right reel 32R is newly started, the right acceleration counter 165c is set to "24", and the value of the right acceleration counter 165c is decremented by 1 each time the acceleration order data to be referenced for acceleration control of the right reel 32R is changed in the acceleration table 158. When the value of the right acceleration counter 165c becomes "0" after the decrement, it is determined that the acceleration of the right reel 32R has been completed.

The main RAM 74 is provided with excitation counters 166a to 166c. The excitation counters 166a to 166c include a left excitation counter 166a corresponding to the left reel 32L, a center excitation counter 166b corresponding to the center reel 32M, and a right excitation counter 166c corresponding to the right reel 32R. Each excitation counter 166a to 166c is a counter that allows the main MPU 72 to identify the remaining excitation period of the acceleration sequence that is currently the target of acceleration control when the corresponding reel 32L, 32M, or 32R is undergoing acceleration control using the acceleration table 158 (Figure 80(a)).

When excitation of a predetermined acceleration sequence is started in the acceleration control of the left reel 32L, the data of the switching interval set in the acceleration table 158 (Fig. 80 (a)) corresponding to the predetermined acceleration sequence is set in the left excitation counter 166a. The value set in the left excitation counter 166a is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (Fig. 11) is executed, and if the value of the left excitation counter 166a after the decrement is "0", the value of the left acceleration counter 165a is decremented by 1, and if the value of the left acceleration counter 165a after the decrement is 1 or more, the data of the switching interval set in the acceleration table 158 (Fig. 80 (a)) corresponding to the acceleration sequence corresponding to the value of the left acceleration counter 165a is set in the left excitation counter 166a. When excitation of a predetermined acceleration sequence is started in the acceleration control of the center reel 32M, the data of the switching interval set in the acceleration table 158 (FIG. 80(a)) corresponding to the predetermined acceleration sequence is set in the center excitation counter 166b. The value set in the center excitation counter 166b is subtracted by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is executed, and if the value of the center excitation counter 166b after the subtraction becomes "0", the value of the center acceleration counter 165b is subtracted by 1, and if the value of the center acceleration counter 165b after the subtraction is 1 or more, the data of the switching interval set in the acceleration table 158 (FIG. 80(a)) corresponding to the acceleration sequence corresponding to the value of the center acceleration counter 165b is set in the center excitation counter 166b. When the right reel 32R starts to be excited in a predetermined acceleration order in the acceleration control, the data of the switching interval set in the acceleration table 158 (FIG. 80(a)) corresponding to the predetermined acceleration order is set in the right excitation counter 166c. The value set in the right excitation counter 166c is subtracted by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is executed, and if the value of the right excitation counter 166c after the subtraction becomes "0", the value of the right acceleration counter 165c is subtracted by 1, and if the value of the right acceleration counter 165c after the subtraction is 1 or more, the data of the switching interval set in the acceleration table 158 (FIG. 80(a)) corresponding to the acceleration order corresponding to the value of the right acceleration counter 165c is set in the right excitation counter 166c.

The main RAM 74 is provided with stop position areas 167a to 167c. The stop position areas 167a to 167c include a left stop position area 167a corresponding to the left reel 32L, a center stop position area 167b corresponding to the center reel 32M, and a right stop position area 167c corresponding to the right reel 32R. Each stop position area 167a to 167c is a storage area for storing data corresponding to the stop position of the corresponding reel 32L, 32M, or 32R when the corresponding reel 32L, 32M, or 32R has stopped. When the left reel 32L stops during rotation, data corresponding to the stop position of the left reel 32L is stored in the left stop position area 167a. When the center reel 32M stops during rotation, data corresponding to the stop position of the center reel 32M is stored in the center stop position area 167b. When the right reel 32R stops while spinning, data corresponding to the stop position of the right reel 32R is stored in the right stop position area 167c.

Figure 83 is a flowchart showing the stepping motor control process executed in step S206 of the timer interrupt process (Figure 11).

First, it is determined whether the spinning flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S4501). The spinning flag is set to "1" when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to spin, and is cleared to "0" when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped. If the spinning flag is not set to "1" (step S4501: NO), it is determined whether the spin start flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S4502). As already explained, if it is determined in the reel control process (Figure 81) that the start wait period has elapsed (step S4401: YES), the spin start flag is set to "1" in step S4403.

If the rotation start flag is set to "1" (step S4502: YES), the acceleration table 158 shown in FIG. 80(a) is read from the main ROM 73 to the main RAM 74 (step S4503). Then, a rotation start process is executed to start the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R (step S4504). In the rotation start process, two-phase excitation is started for each reel 32L, 32M, 32R according to the data set in the initial acceleration order of the acceleration table 158. Then, the rotation flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S4505). In addition, the left acceleration counter 165a is set to "24" corresponding to the initial value at the start of acceleration (step S4506), and the left excitation counter 166a is set to "130", which is the data of the switching interval corresponding to the initial acceleration order in the acceleration table 158 (FIG. 80(a)) (step S4507). In addition, the center acceleration counter 165b is set to "24" corresponding to the initial value at the start of acceleration (step S4508), and the center excitation counter 166b is set to "130" which is the switching interval data corresponding to the first acceleration order in the acceleration table 158 (FIG. 80(a)) (step S4509). In addition, the right acceleration counter 165c is set to "24" corresponding to the initial value at the start of acceleration (step S4510), and the right excitation counter 166c is set to "130" which is the switching interval data corresponding to the first acceleration order in the acceleration table 158 (FIG. 80(a)) (step S4511). In addition, the rotation start flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S4512).

If the spinning flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S4501: YES), the target reel counter provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S4513). The target reel counter is a counter that the main MPU 72 uses to identify the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that are the targets of steps S4514 to S4525. If the target reel counter value is "1", the left reel 32L is the target of steps S4514 to S4525, if the target reel counter value is "2", the center reel 32M is the target of steps S4514 to S4525, and if the target reel counter value is "3", the right reel 32R is the target of steps S4514 to S4525.

Then, it is determined whether the stop completion flags 164a to 164c of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value are set to "1" (step S4514). If a positive determination is made in step S4514, this means that the stopping of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value has already been completed, so the process proceeds to step S4526 without executing the processes of steps S4515 to S4525.

If the negative judgment is made in step S4514, and the stop instruction flags 163a to 163c of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value are set to "1" (step S4515: YES), a stop control process is executed (step S4516), and if the stop instruction flags 163a to 163c are not set to "1" but the valid period flags 162a to 162c of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value are set to "1" (step S4517: YES), a constant speed control process is executed (step S4518). These constant speed control processes and stop control processes will be explained later.

If the validity period flags 162a-162c of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value are not set to "1" (step S4517: NO), it is determined whether the acceleration completion flags 161a-161c of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value are set to "1" (step S4519). If a negative determination is made in step S4519, acceleration control processing is executed (step S4520).

Figure 84 is a flowchart showing the acceleration control process.

First, the value of the excitation counter 166a-166c of reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value is decremented by 1 (step S4601). Then, if the value of the excitation counter 166a-166c after decrementing by 1 is "0" (step S4602: YES), the value of the acceleration counter 165a-165c of reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value is decremented by 1 (step S4603). Then, it is determined whether the value of the acceleration counter 165a-165c after decrementing by 1 is "0" (step S4604).

If a negative judgment is made in step S4604, an excitation switching process is executed (step S4605). In the excitation switching process, the excitation of the stepping motor 142 of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the value of the current target reel counter is switched according to the order set in the excitation order table shown in FIG. 79. In this case, if the current state is one-phase excitation, it is switched to two-phase excitation, and if the current state is two-phase excitation, it is switched to one-phase excitation. Then, a setting process of the corresponding excitation counters 166a to 166c is executed (step S4606). Specifically, the data of the switching interval corresponding to the value of the acceleration counters 165a to 165c that are the current control target is read from the acceleration table (FIG. 80(a)), and the read data of the switching interval is set in the excitation counters 166a to 166c that are the current control target. If a positive determination is made in step S4604, the acceleration completion flags 161a to 161c of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that correspond to the current target reel counter values are set to "1" (step S4607).

Returning to the explanation of the stepping motor control process (FIG. 83), if the corresponding acceleration completion flags 161a to 161c are set to "1" (step S4519: YES), the constant speed control process is executed (step S4521). In the constant speed control process, a one-pulse excitation signal is output to switch the excitation phase so that one-phase excitation and two-phase excitation are alternately repeated at intervals of one interrupt in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11). Then, it is determined whether or not the sensor cut band 145 is detected by the reel index sensor 144 of the reel 32L, 32M, or 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value (step S4522). If the sensor cut band 145 is detected by the reel index sensor 144 (step S4522: YES), the validity period flags 162a to 162c of the reels 32L, 32M, or 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value are set to "1" (step S4523). This enables operation of the stop buttons 42-44 for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that correspond to the current target reel counter value.

Here, the timing at which the sensor cut band 145 is detected by the reel index sensor 144 after constant speed rotation has commenced will differ depending on the previous stop position of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, even if the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is commenced simultaneously and acceleration control is performed using the same acceleration table 158. In contrast, the processing of steps S4522 and S4523, i.e., the processing of setting the validity period flags 162a to 162c to "1" when the sensor cut band 145 is detected by the reel index sensor 144, is performed individually for each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Therefore, the timing at which the stop buttons 42 to 44 are activated will differ for each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which the activation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is performed simultaneously for all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, it is possible to start the stopping operation of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R earlier.

Then, it is determined whether the stop buttons 42 to 44 of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value are already lit (step S4524). Since the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R starts with the stop buttons 42 to 44 in the off state, the corresponding stop buttons 42 to 44 are basically in the off state at the timing when the valid period flags 162a to 162c are set to "1". Therefore, basically, a negative determination is made in step S4524, and the button lighting process is executed (step S4525). In the button lighting process, the stop buttons 42 to 44 of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value are switched from the off state to the on state. As a result, the stop buttons 42 to 44 whose operations are enabled are switched from the off state to the on state in order, making it easier for the player to recognize the stop buttons 42 to 44 whose operations are enabled.

On the other hand, if the rotation of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes abnormal due to a step-out or the like, the step-out response process (step S4528) described later is executed to re-accelerate the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R whose rotation is abnormal. In this case, the operation of the corresponding stop buttons 42 to 44 is not enabled until the acceleration of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is completed, constant speed rotation is started, and the sensor cut band 145 is detected by the reel index sensor 144 corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In contrast, the step-out response process (step S4528) described later does not execute the process for turning off the stop buttons 42 to 44 of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that are the subject of re-acceleration. Therefore, in a situation where the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has already been enabled and the stop buttons 42 to 44 are illuminated, if re-acceleration is performed due to a rotation abnormality occurring in the corresponding reel 32L, 32M, or 32R, the illuminated state of the stop buttons 42 to 44 will be maintained even before the operation is enabled. Therefore, if the processing of step S4523 is executed based on such re-acceleration, since the corresponding stop buttons 42 to 44 are already illuminated, a positive determination is made in step S4524 and the processing of step S4525 is not executed.

If the validity period flags 162a-162c of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value are set to "1" (step S4517: YES), constant speed control processing is executed (step S4518). In this constant speed control processing, as in the constant speed control processing of step S4521, a one-pulse excitation signal is output to switch the excitation phase so that one-phase excitation and two-phase excitation are alternately repeated at intervals of one interrupt of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11). This maintains constant speed rotation of the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, and 32R when the operation of the corresponding stop buttons 42-44 is enabled. In this situation, if the stop buttons 42-44 corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are operated, the reel stop process is executed in step S4412 of the reel control process (Figure 81), and the corresponding stop instruction flags 163a-163c are set to "1."

In the stepping motor control process (Figure 83), if the stop instruction flags 163a to 163c of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current value of the target reel counter are set to "1" (step S4515: YES), the stop control process is executed (step S4516).

Figure 85 is a flowchart showing the stop control process.

First, it is determined whether the stop control flag provided in the main RAM 74 corresponding to the reel 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value is set to "1" (step S4701). The stop control flag is provided in one-to-one correspondence with each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and is used by the main MPU 72 to determine whether stop control has been started for the corresponding reel 32L, 32M, 32R. If the corresponding stop control flag is not set to "1" (step S4701: NO), the stop table 159 shown in FIG. 80(b) is read from the main ROM 73 to the main RAM 74 (step S4702). This read stop table 159 is used to stop the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that correspond to the current target reel counter value, and when stop control is to be started for the other reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the stop table 159 is newly read from the main ROM 73 to the main RAM 74. After that, the stop control in progress flag for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that correspond to the current target reel counter value is set to "1" (step S4703).

If a positive determination is made in step S4701, or if the processing of step S4703 is executed, a stop control execution process is executed (step S4704). In the stop control execution process, reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current value of the target reel counter are stopped according to the stop table 159 shown in FIG. 80(b).

Then, it is determined whether the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value has been stopped (step S4705). Specifically, it is determined whether the last excitation sequence, 1-phase excitation, has been maintained for 34 interrupts in the stop table 159 read out corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. If the reels have been stopped (step S4705: YES), various flags are cleared (step S4706). In the various flags clearing process, the acceleration completion flags 161a to 161c, valid period flags 162a to 162c, stop instruction flags 163a to 163c, and stop control in progress flags of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value are cleared to "0". Then, the stop completion flags 164a to 164c of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that correspond to the current target reel counter value are set to "1" (step S4707). As a result, even if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in question become the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be controlled in the stepping motor control process (FIG. 83), the affirmative determination in step S4514 results in a state in which the processes of steps S4515 to S4525 are not executed.

Then, data corresponding to the stop positions of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stored in the stop position areas 167a to 167c of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that correspond to the current target reel counter value (step S4708). Specifically, data on the number of steps of the stepping motor 142 since the sensor cut band 145 was last detected by the reel index sensor 144 of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stored in the stop position areas 167a to 167c. Note that in the winning determination process (step S4416) of the reel control process (FIG. 81), the combination of symbols that stopped on the main line ML in the current game is determined based on the data stored in the stop position areas 167a to 167c.

Then, by determining whether all of the stop completion flags 164a to 164c are set to "1", it is determined whether the rotation of all of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has stopped (step S4709). If a negative determination is made in step S4709, the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R for which the validity period flags 162a to 162c are set to "1" are switched from an unlit state to a lit state (step S4710). As already explained, the stop buttons 42 to 44 are turned on when the operation is enabled, but when stop control for one of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is started, the button unlit process is executed in step S4406 of the reel control process (FIG. 81), so that even the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that are spinning are turned off. In contrast, by executing the button illumination process in step S4710, when the rotation of one reel 32L, 32M, 32R has been stopped and the stop operation of the remaining reels 32L, 32M, 32R has been enabled, it is possible to illuminate the corresponding stop buttons 42-44 for which the stop operation has been enabled. On the other hand, when the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, 32R has been stopped (step S4709: YES), the spinning flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S4711).

Returning to the explanation of the stepping motor control process (FIG. 83), if a positive judgment is made in step S4514, if the process of step S4516 is executed, if the process of step S4518 is executed, if the process of step S4520 is executed, if a negative judgment is made in step S4522, if a positive judgment is made in step S4524, or if the process of step S4525 is executed, the value of the target reel counter in the main RAM 74 is incremented by 1 (step S4526). If the value of the target reel counter after incrementing by 1 is 3 or less (step S4527: NO), the process returns to step S4514. As a result, the processes of steps S4514 to S4525 are executed for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that are the next targets for rotation control. If the value of the target reel counter after incrementing by 1 is "4" (step S4527: YES), the stepping motor control process is terminated after executing the out-of-step response process in step S4528.

In the out-of-step response process, it is determined whether the number of steps measured for each reel 32L, 32M, 32R during rotation since the last time the sensor cut band 145 was detected by the reel index sensor 144 is equal to or greater than the reference number of steps set as a number greater than the number of steps for one revolution. If the number of steps is equal to or greater than the reference number of steps, it is highly likely that a rotation abnormality such as out-of-step has occurred for that reel 32L, 32M, 32R, so the acceleration completion flags 161a-161c, valid period flags 162a-162c, stop instruction flags 163a-163c, and stop control in progress flags corresponding to that reel 32L, 32M, 32R are cleared to "0", and the process corresponding to that reel 32L, 32M, 32R among steps S4503 to S4511 is executed to start re-acceleration. In this case, the re-acceleration process is not executed for the reels 32L, 32M, 32R other than the reel 32L, 32M, 32R for which the rotation abnormality has been identified. Furthermore, in the out-of-step response process, the process of turning off the stop buttons 42-44 is not executed, including the stop buttons 42-44 corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that are the targets of the re-acceleration process. Therefore, even if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that correspond to the stop buttons 42-44 that are lit are targeted for re-acceleration, the lit state of the stop buttons 42-44 will remain.

Figure 86 is a flowchart showing the main processing in this embodiment that is executed by the main MPU 72. Note that the main processing is executed when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 starts, as in the first embodiment.

In the main process, the initialization process is first performed (step S4801). In the initialization process, an interrupt by the timer interrupt process is permitted, and various initial settings are made to the registers and I/O devices in the main MPU 72. Then, it is determined whether the power is turned on with the setting key inserted into the setting key insertion hole 57 and turned on (step S4802). If the power is turned on with the setting key turned on (step S4802: YES), and if the reset button 56 is not pressed when the power is turned on (step S4803: NO), a partial clear process is performed (step S4804), and then a setting value update process is performed (step S4806). On the other hand, if the reset button 56 is pressed when the power is turned on (step S4803: YES), then a full clear process is performed (step S4805), and then a setting value update process is performed (step S4806). The processing contents of the partial clear processing (step S4804), the full clear processing (step S4805), and the setting value update processing (step S4806) are the same as those in the first embodiment. After that, the setting value update processing is executed, and then the process proceeds to normal processing (FIG. 12) (step S4807).

If the setting key is not turned on in the main process (step S4802: NO), the power recovery process from step S4808 onwards is executed. The power recovery process is a process for returning the state of the slot machine 10 to the state before the power was cut off. In the power recovery process, the main RAM 74 is checked to determine whether the setting value of the slot machine 10 is normal or not (step S4808). Specifically, if the setting value is any of "1" to "6", it is determined to be normal, and if it is "0" or "7" or more, it is determined to be abnormal. If the setting value is normal, it is determined whether the power outage flag is set to "1" (step S4809). The power outage flag is provided in the main RAM 74, and if the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped and a predetermined power outage process is normally executed, the power outage flag is set to "1". If the power outage flag is set to "1", it is confirmed whether the RAM determination value is normal or not (step S4810). Specifically, the checksum value of the main RAM 74 is checked to see if it is normal.

If a negative judgment is made in any of steps S4808 to S4810, an operation prohibition process is executed. In the operation prohibition process, execution of the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is prohibited (step S4811), all output ports of the main MPU 72 are cleared to "0" to turn off all actuators connected to those output ports (step S4812), and an error notification process is executed to notify the hall manager or the like of the occurrence of an error (step S4813). This then becomes an infinite loop. The operation prohibition process is released by executing a partial clear process (step S4804) or a full clear process (step S4805).

If the answer is yes in all of steps S4808 to S4810, it means that the power failure processing at the time of the previous power failure was executed normally. In this case, the value of the stack pointer saved in the main RAM 74 is written to the stack pointer of the main MPU 72, and the data saved in the main RAM 74 is restored to the register of the main MPU 72, thereby restoring the state of the register of the main MPU 72 to the state before the power was cut off (step S4814). In addition, the power failure flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S4815). After that, a power recovery command is sent to the production MPU 92 to make it recognize that the power recovery processing has been executed (step S4816), and then the recovery processing is executed (step S4817).

Figure 87 is a flowchart showing the return process.

First, it is determined whether the spinning flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S4901). The spinning flag is set to "1" when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have started to spin, and is cleared to "0" when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped. In other words, in step S4901, it is determined whether the supply of operating power was stopped while at least one of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R was spinning, and then the supply of operating power was started and the return process was executed. If the spinning flag is not set to "1" (step S4901: NO), the process returns to the processing of the address before the power was cut off.

If the spinning flag is set to "1" (step S4901: YES), it is determined whether the left stop completion flag 164a in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" to determine whether the supply of operating power has been stopped before the left reel 32L has stopped (step S4903). If the left stop completion flag 164a is not set to "1" (step S4903: NO), this means that the supply of operating power has been stopped before the left reel 32L has stopped. In this case, processing is executed to start a new rotation of the left reel 32L.

Specifically, first, the left flag is cleared (step S4904). In the left flag clearing process, the left acceleration completion flag 161a, the left valid period flag 162a, and the left stop instruction flag 163a are each cleared to "0". After that, the left acceleration counter 165a is set to "24" corresponding to the initial value at the start of acceleration (step S4905), and the left excitation counter 166a is set to "130", which is the switching interval data corresponding to the first acceleration order in the acceleration table 158 (Figure 80 (a)) (step S4906).

If a positive determination is made in step S4903, or if the processing of step S4906 is executed, it is determined whether the supply of operating power has been stopped before the center reel 32M has stopped by determining whether the center stop completion flag 164b in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S4907). If the center stop completion flag 164b is not set to "1" (step S4907: NO), this means that the supply of operating power has been stopped before the center reel 32M has stopped. In this case, processing is executed to start a new rotation of the center reel 32M.

Specifically, first, the medium flag is cleared (step S4908). In the medium flag clearing process, the medium acceleration completion flag 161b, the medium validity period flag 162b, and the medium stop instruction flag 163b are each cleared to "0". After that, the medium acceleration counter 165b is set to "24" corresponding to the initial value at the start of acceleration (step S4909), and the medium excitation counter 166b is set to "130", which is the switching interval data corresponding to the first acceleration order in the acceleration table 158 (Figure 80 (a)) (step S4910).

If a positive determination is made in step S4907, or if the processing of step S4910 is executed, it is determined whether or not the supply of operating power has been stopped when the right reel 32R has not yet stopped by determining whether or not "1" has been set in the right stop completion flag 164c of the main RAM 74 (step S4911). If "1" has not been set in the right stop completion flag 164c (step S4911: NO), this means that the supply of operating power has been stopped when the right reel 32R has not yet stopped. In this case, processing is executed to start a new rotation of the right reel 32R.

Specifically, first, the right flag is cleared (step S4912). In the right flag clearing process, the right acceleration completion flag 161c, the right valid period flag 162c, and the right stop instruction flag 163c are each cleared to "0". After that, the right acceleration counter 165c is set to "24" corresponding to the initial value at the start of acceleration (step S4913), and the right excitation counter 166c is set to "130", which is the switching interval data corresponding to the first acceleration order in the acceleration table 158 (Figure 80 (a)) (step S4914).

If a positive determination is made in step S4911, or if the processing of step S4914 is executed, the process proceeds to the processing of the address at the time of midway stop. Specifically, the processing of step S4404 in the reel control processing (FIG. 81) is executed. Also, if the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11) is interrupted and started in a situation where the reel control processing (FIG. 81) is being executed, the processing in a situation where the rotation in progress flag is set to "1" in the stepping motor control processing (FIG. 83), that is, the processing of steps S4513 to S4528, is executed. In this case, since the processing for starting a new rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that have not yet stopped when the supply of operating power is stopped is executed in steps S4903 to S4914, a new acceleration control is started, and when the acceleration is completed, a constant speed control is started, and when the sensor cut band 145 is detected by the reel index sensor 144 in a situation where the constant speed control is being executed, the stop operation is enabled.

With the above configuration, if the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped before the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is completely stopped, when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is resumed, the acceleration control of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, which was before the rotation was completely stopped, is newly started. As a result, when the supply of operating power is resumed, it is possible to start new acceleration of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, which was before the rotation was completely stopped, without waiting until a rotation abnormality of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is detected in the step-out response process of step S4528 in the stepping motor control process (Figure 83), and it is possible to complete the acceleration control of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and start constant speed control early after the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is resumed.

When the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that had stopped spinning do not resume spinning when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is resumed. This makes it possible to quickly resume constant speed rotation only for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that had not stopped when the supply of operating power was stopped, while preventing re-spinning of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that had already stopped.

In the main process (Fig. 86), for reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that had not yet stopped spinning when the supply of operating power was last stopped, information is set to start new acceleration control regardless of their rotation status. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load when the supply of operating power starts while still achieving the excellent effects already described.

Note that, for reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that have not yet stopped spinning when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped, the acceleration control is started again when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is resumed, but this is not limited to this. For example, when a stop command is generated and the number of slips is calculated (step S4409) in the reel control process (FIG. 81), and the stop symbol is determined (step S4410), the stop completion flags 164a to 164c corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may be set to "1". In this case, when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped, the acceleration control is newly started for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R for which the determination of the stop pattern has not been completed when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is resumed, and when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped, the acceleration control is not newly started for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R for which the determination of the stop pattern has been completed when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped, even if the stop has not been completed at that time. Incidentally, in this configuration, the winning determination is made using the information on the stop pattern determined in step S4410, rather than the position of each pattern when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are actually stopped.

In addition, when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped, if some of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped but the other reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have not stopped, acceleration control is newly started only for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that have not stopped when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is resumed. However, this is not limited to this, and if the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped and even one reel 32L, 32M, and 32R has not stopped, acceleration control may be newly started for all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is resumed.

Eleventh embodiment
In this embodiment, the manner in which the control process for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is executed is different from that of the tenth embodiment. The different configuration will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as the tenth embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 88 is a flowchart showing the reel control process in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 72.

If the start wait period has elapsed (step S5001: YES), the start wait period for the next game is reset (step S5002). Then, on condition that the current game is the start game of the pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S5003: YES), the left pseudo bonus start flag, the center pseudo bonus start flag, and the right pseudo bonus start flag provided in the master RAM 74 are each set to "1" (step S5004). The left pseudo bonus start flag is provided corresponding to the left reel 32L, the center pseudo bonus start flag is provided corresponding to the center reel 32M, and the right pseudo bonus start flag is provided corresponding to the right reel 32R. Each pseudo bonus start flag is a flag that allows the master MPU 72 to identify that a reel presentation corresponding to the start game should be executed in the start game of the pseudo bonus state ST4.

If a negative determination is made in step S5003 or if the processing of step S5004 is executed, the rotation start flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S5005). This starts the acceleration processing of the stepping motor 142 in the stepping motor control processing of step S206 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11), and each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R starts to rotate. In steps S5006 to S5019, the same processing as steps S4404 to S4417 in the reel control processing (FIG. 81) in the above-mentioned tenth embodiment is executed.

Figure 89 is a flowchart showing the acceleration control process in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 72. Note that the acceleration control process is executed in step S4520 of the stepping motor control process (Figure 83), as in the 10th embodiment.

First, it is determined whether the pseudo stop control flag of the reel 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value is set to "1" (step S5101). The pseudo stop control flags are provided in the main RAM 74, and a left pseudo stop control flag is provided corresponding to the left reel 32L, a center pseudo stop control flag is provided corresponding to the center reel 32M, and a right pseudo stop control flag is provided corresponding to the right reel 32R. In the start game of the pseudo bonus state ST4, after each reel 32L, 32M, 32R starts to rotate and accelerates, a pseudo stop occurs in which each reel 32L, 32M, 32R moves up and down in small increments while a combination of pseudo stop symbols is present on the main line ML. Each pseudo stop control flag is a flag that the main MPU 72 uses to identify that the corresponding reel 32L, 32M, or 32R is in a pseudo stop position after acceleration for that reel is complete.

If a negative judgment is made in step S5101, the values of the excitation counters 166a to 166c of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value are decremented by one (step S5106). Then, if the values of the excitation counters 166a to 166c after the decrement are "0" (step S5107: YES), the values of the acceleration counters 165a to 165c of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value are decremented by one (step S5108). Then, it is judged whether the values of the acceleration counters 165a to 165c after the decrement are "0" (step S5109).

If a negative judgment is made in step S5109, an excitation switching process is executed (step S5110). Here, in the start game of the pseudo bonus state ST4, a pseudo stop occurs in which each reel 32L, 32M, 32R moves up and down in small increments while a combination of pseudo stop symbols is present on the main line ML as a reel presentation corresponding to the start game. In the start game of the pseudo bonus state ST4, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started first, and after the acceleration is completed, the stop control is performed using the stop table 159 so that the reels 32L, 32M, 32R stay at the rotation position of the pseudo stop. When the stop table 159 is used, the acceleration counters 165a to 165c and the excitation counters 166a to 166c are used in the same way as when the acceleration control is performed using the acceleration table 158. In addition, when a pseudo-stop is being performed, the pseudo-stop table 171 (see FIG. 91) provided in the main ROM 73 is used, but when the pseudo-stop table 171 is used, the acceleration counters 165a-165c and excitation counters 166a-166c are used in the same way as when acceleration control is performed using the acceleration table 158.

In the excitation switching process of step S5110, the process contents differ depending on whether the table to be used is the acceleration table 158, the stop table 159, or the pseudo-stopped table 171. If it is a game other than the start game of the pseudo bonus state ST4, the stop table 159 and the pseudo-stopped table 171 are not the target of use, and the acceleration table 158 is the target of use. On the other hand, if it is the start game of the pseudo bonus state ST4, the acceleration table 158 is the target of use from the initial start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R until the acceleration is completed and until the acceleration is completed again after the pseudo stop is completed, and when the stop control is performed to keep the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R at the pseudo-stopped rotation position after the initial acceleration is completed, the stop table 159 is the target of use, and in a situation where a pseudo stop is being performed, the pseudo-stopped table 171 is the target of use. First, we will explain the case where the acceleration table 158 is to be used, and later we will explain the case where the stop table 159 or the pseudo-stopped table 171 is to be used.

In the excitation switching process when the acceleration table 158 is the target of use, the excitation for the stepping motor 142 of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current value of the target reel counter is switched according to the order set in the excitation order table shown in FIG. 79. In this case, if the current state is one-phase excitation, it is switched to two-phase excitation, and if the current state is two-phase excitation, it is switched to one-phase excitation. Then, the setting process for the corresponding excitation counters 166a to 166c is executed (step S5111). Specifically, the data of the switching interval corresponding to the value of the acceleration counters 165a to 165c that are the current control target is read from the acceleration table (FIG. 80(a)), and the read switching interval data is set in the excitation counters 166a to 166c that are the current control target.

If a positive determination is made in step S5109, it is determined whether the pseudo bonus start flags of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter values are set to "1" (step S5112). If the game is different from the start game of pseudo bonus state ST4, a negative determination is made in step S5112. Also, even if it is the start game of pseudo bonus state ST4, if acceleration has been performed again after the completion of the pseudo stop, a negative determination is made in step S5112. If a negative determination is made in step S5112, the acceleration completion flags 161a to 161c of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter values are set to "1" (step S5113).

If the acceleration period after the pseudo stop has not yet started in the start game of the pseudo bonus state ST4, the pseudo bonus start flag is set to "1", so a positive judgment is made in step S5112. If a positive judgment is made in step S5112, it is judged whether the initial acceleration completion flag of the reel 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the current value of the target reel counter is set to "1" (step S5114). The initial acceleration completion flags are provided in the main RAM 74, and a left initial acceleration completion flag is provided corresponding to the left reel 32L, a center initial acceleration completion flag is provided corresponding to the center reel 32M, and a right initial acceleration completion flag is provided corresponding to the right reel 32R.

If the initial acceleration completion flag of the reel 32L, 32M, or 32R that corresponds to the current target reel counter value is not set to "1" (step S5114: NO), the corresponding initial acceleration completion flag is set to "1" (step S5115). After that, the pseudo stop control flag of the reel 32L, 32M, or 32R that corresponds to the current target reel counter value is set to "1" (step S5116).

If the corresponding pseudo stop control flag is set to "1", an affirmative determination is made in step S5101 and the process proceeds to step S5102. In step S5102, constant speed control processing is executed (step S5102). In the constant speed control processing, similar to steps S4518 and S4521 in the stepping motor control processing (FIG. 83), a one-pulse excitation signal is output to switch the excitation phase so that one-phase excitation and two-phase excitation are alternately repeated at intervals of one interrupt in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11). Then, it is determined whether the rotation position of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current value of the target reel counter has become the stop start position at which the position of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes a pseudo stop position after stop control is performed (step S5103).

If a positive determination is made in step S5103, the pseudo stop control flags for reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that correspond to the current target reel counter value are cleared to "0" (step S5104). After that, processing is executed to start stop control using the stop table 159 for reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that correspond to the current target reel counter value (step S5105).

Specifically, the stop table 159 is read from the main ROM 73 to the main RAM 74. In addition, the acceleration counters 165a to 165c of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value are set to "2", which corresponds to the number of excitation sequences set in the stop table 159, and the excitation counters 166a to 166c of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are set to "100", which is the switching interval data set in the data of the first excitation sequence in the stop table 159. In addition, four-phase excitation is started for the stepping motors 142 of the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

The data set in the excitation counters 166a to 166c is decremented by 1 each time the process of step S5106 is executed, and if the value of the excitation counters 166a to 166c after decrementing by 1 becomes "0" (step S5107: YES), the value of the corresponding acceleration counters 165a to 165c is decremented by 1 (step S5108). If the value of the acceleration counters 165a to 165c after decrementing by 1 is "1" (step S5109: NO), one-phase excitation is started for the stepping motors 142 of the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the excitation switching process (step S5110). In addition, in step S5111, the excitation counters 166a to 166c of the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are set to "34", which is the switching interval data set in the second excitation order of the stop table 159. On the other hand, if the value of the acceleration counters 165a to 165c after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S5109: YES), both the pseudo bonus start flag and the initial acceleration completion flag of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value are set to "1", so an affirmative judgment is made in steps S5112 and S5114 and the process proceeds to step S5117.

In step S5117, it is determined whether the pseudo stop completion flags of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value are set to "1." The pseudo stop completion flags are provided in the main RAM 74, and a left pseudo stop completion flag is provided corresponding to the left reel 32L, a center pseudo stop completion flag is provided corresponding to the center reel 32M, and a right pseudo stop completion flag is provided corresponding to the right reel 32R.

If a negative determination is made in step S5117, the pseudo stop completion flags for reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter values are set to "1" (step S5118). After that, the pseudo stop start process is executed (step S5119).

Figure 90 is a flowchart showing the process of starting a pseudo-stop.

First, the pseudo stop table 171 stored in advance in the main ROM 73 is read into the main RAM 74 (step S5201). The pseudo stop table 171 contains data set for making small vertical movements of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R when a pseudo stop symbol combination is present on the main line ML.

Figure 91 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the pseudo-stopped table 171.

In the pseudo-stop table 171, the first excitation order is set to excitation of phase A as one-phase excitation, and the excitation retention period of the phase A is set as 167 interrupts of the timer interrupt process (Fig. 11). The second excitation order is set to non-excitation, in which no excitation is performed, and the retention period of the non-excitation is set as 167 interrupts of the timer interrupt process (Fig. 11) in the same way as the excitation retention period of the phase A. The third excitation order is set to excitation of phase B as one-phase excitation, and the excitation retention period of the phase B is set as 167 interrupts of the timer interrupt process (Fig. 11) in the same way as the excitation retention period and non-excitation retention period of the phase A. The fourth excitation sequence is set to non-excitation, where no excitation is performed, and the non-excitation hold period is set as 167 interrupts of the timer interrupt process (Figure 11), just like the A-phase excitation hold period, the second non-excitation hold period, and the B-phase excitation hold period. After that, the contents of the first to fourth excitation sequences are repeated three times.

In other words, during a pseudo stop, A-phase excitation and B-phase excitation of the stepping motor 142 are repeated alternately with a non-excitation period in between. When A-phase excitation and B-phase excitation are repeated alternately, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R do not rotate in the same direction, but instead repeat vertical movements at a predetermined rotational position. Figures 92(a) to 92(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining how the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R make small vertical movements during a pseudo stop when a combination of pseudo stop symbols is present on the main line ML.

As shown in FIG. 92(a), in the start game of pseudo bonus state ST4, the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started, acceleration is completed, and stop control is executed using the stop table 159 at a predetermined stop start position, so that the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped with a combination of pseudo stop symbols on the main line ML. As a combination of pseudo stop symbols, a combination of a "white 7" symbol, a "white 7" symbol and a "white 7" symbol is used from the left, but the combination of pseudo stop symbols is arbitrary, and other combinations of the same symbols, such as a combination of the same "red 7" symbol, may be used, or combinations of different types of symbols may be used.

In the above state, control using the pseudo stop table 171 is executed, so that when a combination of pseudo stop symbols is present on the main line ML, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate so that the combination of pseudo stop symbols moves slightly downward as shown in FIG. 92(b), and then the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate so that the combination of pseudo stop symbols moves slightly upward as shown in FIG. 92(c), and then the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R repeat up and down movements between the rotation positions shown in FIG. 92(b) and FIG. 92(c). This allows the player to recognize that a performance is being performed in which the combination of pseudo stop symbols is pseudo-stopped on the main line ML even when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have not completely stopped.

In the pseudo-stop state, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are moved up and down in small increments, allowing the player to recognize that the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped. In particular, the B-phase excitation is started before 500 milliseconds have elapsed since the A-phase excitation is started, and the A-phase excitation is started before 500 milliseconds have elapsed since the B-phase excitation is started, and the A-phase excitation and the B-phase excitation are each continued for 200 milliseconds or more, allowing the player to recognize the up and down movement of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, making it easier to give the player the impression that the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not actually stopped. However, in the case of a configuration in which only the A-phase and B-phase excitations are repeatedly and continuously continued in this manner, there is a risk that the temperature of the stepping motor 142 will rise. In contrast, a non-excitation period is set between the excitation of phase A and the excitation of phase B, and between the excitation of phase B and the excitation of phase A. This makes it possible to suppress the temperature rise of the stepping motor 142.

In the pseudo stop start process (Figure 90), after the pseudo stop table 171 is read into the main RAM 74 in step S5201, the acceleration counters 165a to 165c of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value are set to "16", which is the initial value of the excitation order in the pseudo stop table 171 (step S5202). After that, the excitation counters 166a to 166c of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value are set to "167", which is the switching interval data corresponding to the initial excitation order in the pseudo stop table 171 (step S5203).

The data set in the excitation counters 166a to 166c is decremented by 1 each time the processing of step S5106 in the acceleration control processing (FIG. 89) is executed. If the value of the excitation counters 166a to 166c after decrementing by 1 becomes "0" (step S5107: YES), the value of the corresponding acceleration counters 165a to 165c is decremented by 1 (step S5108). If the value of the acceleration counters 165a to 165c after decrementing by 1 is 1 or more (step S5109: NO), the excitation content corresponding to the value of the acceleration counters 165a to 165c is set in the pseudo-stop table 171 in the excitation switching processing (step S5110). In other words, if the value of the acceleration counters 165a to 165c corresponds to an even numbered excitation sequence, no excitation is performed, if the value of the acceleration counters 165a to 165c is any of "3", "7", "11", and "15", excitation of phase B is started, and if the value of the acceleration counters 165a to 165c is any of "5", "9", and "13", excitation of phase A is started. After that, the switching interval data set for the excitation sequence corresponding to the value of the acceleration counters 165a to 165c in the pseudo-stop table 171 is set in the corresponding excitation counters 166a to 166c (step S5111).

On the other hand, if the value of the acceleration counters 165a to 165c after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S5109: YES), the pseudo bonus start flag, initial acceleration completion flag, and pseudo stop completion flag of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value are each set to "1", so an affirmative judgment is made in each of steps S5112, S5114, and S5117, and the process proceeds to step S5120. In step S5120, a pseudo stop clear process is executed for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value. In this clear process, the pseudo bonus start flag, initial acceleration completion flag, and pseudo stop completion flag of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value are each cleared to "0".

Then, as a re-acceleration process, a process for starting re-acceleration after the pseudo-stop is executed (step S5121). Specifically, the acceleration counters 165a-165c of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value are set to "24", which corresponds to the initial value at the start of acceleration, and the excitation counters 166a-166c of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are set to "130", which is the switching interval data corresponding to the initial acceleration order in the acceleration table 158 (Figure 80(a)).

The data set in the excitation counters 166a to 166c is decremented by 1 each time the processing of step S5106 in the acceleration control processing (FIG. 89) is executed. If the value of the excitation counters 166a to 166c after decrementing by 1 becomes "0" (step S5107: YES), the value of the corresponding acceleration counters 165a to 165c is decremented by 1 (step S5108). If the value of the acceleration counters 165a to 165c after decrementing by 1 is 1 or more (step S5109: NO), the excitation for the stepping motor 142 of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value is switched according to the order set in the excitation order table shown in FIG. 79. In this case, if the current state is one-phase excitation, it is switched to two-phase excitation, and if the current state is two-phase excitation, it is switched to one-phase excitation. Then, the setting processing of the corresponding excitation counters 166a to 166c is executed (step S5111). Specifically, the switching interval data corresponding to the value of the acceleration counters 165a to 165c currently being controlled is read from the acceleration table (Figure 80 (a)), and the read switching interval data is set in the excitation counters 166a to 166c currently being controlled.

On the other hand, if the value of the acceleration counter 165a to 165c after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S5109: YES), in step S5112, it is determined whether the pseudo bonus start flag of the reel 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value is set to "1". When the second acceleration is completed after the pseudo stop ends, the pseudo bonus start flag is not set to "1", so a negative determination is made in step S5109. In this case, the acceleration completion flag 161a to 161c of the reel 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value is set to "1" (step S5113).

Figure 93 is a time chart showing how a pseudo stop is performed in the start game of the pseudo bonus state ST4. Figure 93(a) shows the period during which the game is being executed, Figure 93(b) shows the period during which acceleration control is being executed, Figure 93(c) shows the period during which stop control is being executed, Figure 93(d) shows the period during which a pseudo stop is being executed, Figure 93(e) shows the period during which A-phase excitation is being performed, Figure 93(f) shows the period during which B-phase excitation is being performed, and Figure 93(g) shows the period during which no excitation is performed. Note that although the acceleration control, stop control, and pseudo stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R are performed individually, these controls are performed at the same or approximately the same timing for each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, so in the following explanation, it is assumed that the controls of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R are performed at the same time.

At time t1, as shown in FIG. 93(a), the start game of the pseudo bonus state ST4 is started. At time t1, as shown in FIG. 93(b), the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is started and acceleration is performed, and the acceleration is completed at time t2. When the acceleration is completed and the rotation positions of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R reach the stop start positions, stop control using the stop table 159 is started as shown in FIG. 93(c), and the stop control is completed at time t3. In this case, each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped at a position where a combination of pseudo stop symbols exists on the main line ML.

At the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 93(d), a pseudo stop is started on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In this case, first, A-phase excitation is performed from the timing of t3 to the timing of t4 as shown in FIG. 93(e), then, from the timing of t4 to the timing of t5, there is a non-excitation period as shown in FIG. 93(g), then, from the timing of t5 to the timing of t6, there is a non-excitation period as shown in FIG. 93(f), then, from the timing of t6 to the timing of t7, there is a non-excitation period as shown in FIG. 93(g). Then, at the timing of t7 to the timing of t11, the timing of t11 to the timing of t15, and the timing of t15 to the timing of t19, the same control as at the timing of t3 to the timing of t7 is performed. As a result, the excitation of A-phase and the excitation of B-phase are alternately repeated with non-excitation periods in between. In addition, the excitation period, non-excitation period, and excitation period of phase A, and the excitation period of phase B are all the same length, approximately 249 milliseconds. The total duration of the excitation period of phase A and the subsequent non-excitation period is less than 500 milliseconds, and the total duration of the excitation period of phase B and the subsequent non-excitation period is less than 500 milliseconds.

The final non-excitation period occurs from t18 to t19 as shown in FIG. 93(g), and at t19 when the non-excitation period ends, the pseudo-stop ends as shown in FIG. 93(d). Then, at t19, reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are accelerated again as shown in FIG. 93(b), and the acceleration period ends at t20. After the acceleration period ends, the sensor cut band 145 is detected by the reel index sensor 144, and the stopping operation of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is enabled.

According to the above configuration, during the pseudo stop period, A-phase excitation and B-phase excitation are alternately repeated, and a non-excitation period in which the stepping motor 142 is not excited is set between the A-phase excitation and the B-phase excitation. This makes it possible to perform effects that utilize the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R while suppressing the temperature rise of the stepping motor 142.

The non-excitation period is equal to or shorter than the period during which A-phase excitation is performed and equal to or shorter than the period during which B-phase excitation is performed. This makes it possible to prevent the period during which reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped from becoming excessively long during the pseudo-stop period during which an effect is performed using the rotation of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In a configuration in which excitation of phase A and excitation of phase B are repeated alternately during the pseudo-stop period, not only is a non-excitation period set between excitation of phase A and excitation of phase B, but a non-excitation period is also set between excitation of phase B and excitation of phase A. This makes it possible to more reliably suppress the temperature rise of the stepping motor 142.

The non-excitation period occurring between excitation of phase A and excitation of phase B is the same as the non-excitation period occurring between excitation of phase B and excitation of phase A. This eliminates the need to prepare a separate configuration for controlling the non-excitation period, making it possible to simplify the configuration for said control.

<Alternative to the eleventh embodiment>
Although the non-excitation period existing between the excitation of phase A and the excitation of phase B during the pseudo-stop period is identical to the non-excitation period existing between the excitation of phase B and the excitation of phase A, this is not limited to the above, and these non-excitation periods may be substantially identical with some difference, or these non-excitation periods may be significantly different.

- Although the non-excitation period during the pseudo stop period is configured to be the same as the excitation period of the A phase, this is not limited to this, and the non-excitation period and the excitation period of the A phase may be configured to be substantially the same with a slight difference, or the non-excitation period and the excitation period of the A phase may be configured to be significantly different. Also, although the non-excitation period during the pseudo stop period is configured to be the same as the excitation period of the B phase, this is not limited to this, and the non-excitation period and the excitation period of the B phase may be configured to be substantially the same with a slight difference, or the non-excitation period and the excitation period of the B phase may be configured to be significantly different.

- Although the excitation period of phase A and the excitation period of phase B during the pseudo stop period are configured to be the same, this is not limited to the above, and the excitation period of phase A and the excitation period of phase B may be configured to be substantially the same but slightly different, or the excitation period of phase A and the excitation period of phase B may be configured to be significantly different.

- During the pseudo stop period, there is a non-excitation period between the excitation of phase A and the excitation of phase B, and there is a non-excitation period between the excitation of phase B and the excitation of phase A, but it is also possible for one of these non-excitation periods to not exist.

Twelfth embodiment
In this embodiment, the execution mode of a predetermined lottery process executed by the main MPU 72 is different from that of the first embodiment. The following describes the configuration that differs from the first embodiment. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment is basically omitted.

Figure 94 is a flowchart showing the processing for advantageous states at the start of a game in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 72. Note that the processing for advantageous states at the start of a game is executed as part of the processing for advantageous lottery at the start of a game (step S410) in the lottery process for winning combinations ( Figure 13 ).

If the number of bets for the current game is "3" (step S5301: YES), and the current game state is not the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S5302: NO), it is determined whether the pseudo bonus state flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" to determine whether the current game state is the pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S5303). If the current game state is not the pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S5303: NO), this means that the current game state is the AT state ST5, so AT state processing at the start of the game is executed (step S5304). The processing content of the AT state processing at the start of the game is the same as that of the first embodiment described above.

If the current game state is the pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S5303: YES), a random number for lottery is obtained from a lottery counter that is updated periodically (specifically, every 1.49 milliseconds) in the main RAM 74 (step S5305). The lottery counter is configured as a loop counter in which the value is updated sequentially within the range of "0" to "255". Note that a dedicated circuit for updating the random number for lottery may be provided. In addition, the AT transition lottery table 172 previously stored in the main ROM 73 is read into the main RAM 74 (step S5306).

Figure 95 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the AT transition lottery table 172. In the AT transition lottery table 172, lottery judgment values are set in a one-to-one correspondence with the consecutive addresses "k" to "k+7". The addresses "k", "k+6" and "k+7" have the lottery judgment value "0" set, the addresses "k+1" and "k+5" have the lottery judgment value "80", the address "k+2" has the lottery judgment value "70", the address "k+3" has the lottery judgment value "128", and the address "k+4" has the lottery judgment value "110".

After reading out the AT transition lottery table 172 in step S5306, in steps S5307 and S5308, a process is executed to calculate an offset value used to read out the lottery judgment value from the AT transition lottery table 172. Specifically, the value of the AT transition confirmation flag provided in the main RAM 74 is first read out to a general-purpose register of the main MPU 72, and the process of inverting the read out value is executed (step S5307). As in the first embodiment, the AT transition confirmation flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to determine whether or not the transition condition to the AT state ST5 has already been established in the pseudo bonus state ST4. Since the AT transition confirmation flag can take two values, "0" or "1", a "0" or "1" is read out of the general-purpose register of the main MPU 72, and an inversion process is performed on this. If the value of the AT transition confirmation flag is "0", then the inverted value "1" is stored in the general-purpose register, and if the value of the AT transition confirmation flag is "1", then the inverted value "0" is stored in the general-purpose register.

Then, the inverted value calculated in step S5307 is multiplied by "7", the index value IV value selected in the current role selection process (Figure 13) is added to the result, and the maximum value of the index value IV, "17", is subtracted from this result to calculate the offset value (step S5308). Note that if no index value IV is selected in the role selection process (Figure 13), the index value IV = "0". Also, if the result of subtracting "17" is less than "0", the calculation result is cleared to "0", and the offset value is set to "0".

In detail, as the offset value, in a situation where the AT transition confirmation flag is set to "1", the inverted value is "0", so the result of multiplying it by "7" is also "0". In this case, the offset value is the result of subtracting "17" from the index value IV selected in the role selection process (FIG. 13), but since "17" is the maximum value of the index value IV, the offset value will be "0" or less than "0", and the offset value will ultimately be "0". On the other hand, in a situation where the value of the AT transition confirmation flag is "0", the inverted value is "1", so the result of multiplying it by "7" is "7". In this case, the offset value is the result of subtracting "17" from the result of adding the index value IV selected in the role selection process (FIG. 13) to "7". Therefore, if the hand lottery process (FIG. 13) results in a miss or if the index value IV is set to any of "1" to "10", the offset value will be "0", if the hand lottery process (FIG. 13) results in an index value IV of "11", the offset value will be "1", if the hand lottery process (FIG. 13) results in an index value IV of "12", the offset value will be "2", and if the hand lottery process (FIG. 13) results in an index value IV of "13", the offset value will be "0". The set value will be "3", if the index value IV = "14" is selected in the role selection process (Figure 13), the offset value will be "4", if the index value IV = "15" is selected in the role selection process (Figure 13), the offset value will be "5", if the index value IV = "16" is selected in the role selection process (Figure 13), the offset value will be "6", and if the index value IV = "17" is selected in the role selection process (Figure 13), the offset value will be "7".

After that, the offset value calculated in step S5308 is added to "k", which is the starting address of the AT transition lottery table 172 (step S5309). In this case, when the AT transition confirmation flag is set to "1", the offset value will be "0" regardless of the value of the index value IV selected in the role selection process (Figure 13), so the address calculated in step S5309 will remain "k". Also, when the value of the AT transition confirmation flag is "0", if the role selection process (Figure 13) is unsuccessful or if one of the index values IV = "1" to "10" is selected, the offset value will be "0", so the address calculated in step S5309 will remain "k". In addition, in a situation where the value of the AT transition confirmation flag is "0", if the index value IV="11" is selected in the role selection process (FIG. 13), the offset value will be "1", so the address calculated in step S5309 is "k+1", if the index value IV="12" is selected, the offset value will be "2", so the address calculated in step S5309 is "k+2", and if the index value IV="13" is selected, the offset value will be "3", so the address calculated in step S5309 is "k+3", so the index value IV="14". If the index value IV is "15", the offset value will be "5", so the address calculated in step S5309 will be "k+5". If the index value IV is "16", the offset value will be "6", so the address calculated in step S5309 will be "k+6". If the index value IV is "17", the offset value will be "7", so the address calculated in step S5309 will be "k+7".

Then, the lottery judgment value set in the AT transition lottery table 172 corresponding to the address calculated in step S5309 is obtained (step S5310), and the result of adding the lottery judgment value to the lottery random number obtained in step S5305 is stored as the lottery target value (step S5311). Then, it is determined whether the lottery target value exceeds "255", which is the maximum value of the lottery random number (step S5312). If the lottery target value exceeds "255", it means that a win has been obtained in this AT transition lottery process.

As already explained, the addresses "k", "k+6" and "k+7" in the AT transition lottery table 172 are set with the lottery judgment value "0", the addresses "k+1" and "k+5" are set with the lottery judgment value "80", the address "k+2" is set with the lottery judgment value "70", the address "k+3" is set with the lottery judgment value "128", and the address "k+4" is set with the lottery judgment value "110". When the lottery judgment value is "0", the lottery target value will not exceed "255" regardless of the value of the random number for lottery. Therefore, in a situation where the AT transition confirmation flag is set to "1", the AT transition lottery process will definitely result in a miss. This makes it possible to prevent duplicate wins in the transition to AT state ST5 from occurring. Even if the value of the AT transition confirmation flag is "0", if the result of the lottery process for the role (Figure 13) is a miss, or if the index value IV is any of "1" to "10", "16", or "17", then the result of this AT transition lottery process will definitely be a miss.

In a situation where the value of the AT transition confirmation flag is "0", if the index value IV = "11" is selected in the role selection process (Figure 13), the lottery judgment value will be "80", resulting in a probability of approximately 31%. In a situation where the value of the AT transition confirmation flag is "0", if the index value IV = "12" is selected in the role selection process (Figure 13), the lottery judgment value will be "70", resulting in a probability of approximately 27%. In a situation where the value of the AT transition confirmation flag is "0", if the index value IV = "13" is selected in the role selection process (Figure 13), the lottery judgment value will be "128", resulting in a probability of approximately 50%. When the value of the AT transition confirmation flag is "0", if the index value IV = "14" is selected in the role selection process (Figure 13), the lottery judgment value will be "110", resulting in a probability of approximately 43%. When the value of the AT transition confirmation flag is "0", if the index value IV = "15" is selected in the role selection process (Figure 13), the lottery judgment value will be "80", resulting in a probability of approximately 31%.

If a positive judgment is made in step S5312, the AT transition confirmation flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S5313). In addition, an AT transition winning command indicating that the AT transition has been won is sent to the performance side MPU 92 (step S5314). When the performance side MPU 92 receives the AT transition winning command, it causes a performance indicating that the AT transition has been won to be executed on the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63.

According to the above configuration, the AT transition lottery table 172 is set with selection targets (specifically, addresses) for which lottery judgment values are set that will definitely be judged as losers in the AT transition lottery. This makes it possible to create a situation in which the AT transition lottery is not won, even if the program does not provide a judgment process for determining whether or not to execute the AT transition lottery.

Incidentally, 6 bytes of data capacity is required to prepare a judgment process in a program to determine whether or not to execute an AT transition lottery depending on whether the AT transition confirmation flag is set to "1". In contrast, the data capacity required to add a selection target with a lottery judgment value of "0" to the AT transition lottery table 172 as a selection target selected when the AT transition confirmation flag is set to "1" is 2 bytes, and the data capacity of the processing program added by adding the selection target to the AT transition lottery table 172 is 2 bytes. Therefore, by adding a selection target with a lottery judgment value of "0" to the AT transition lottery table 172 as a selection target selected when the AT transition confirmation flag is set to "1", it is possible to reduce the required data capacity by 2 bytes compared to when a judgment process to determine whether or not to execute an AT transition lottery is prepared in a program.

In a configuration in which multiple selection targets (specifically, addresses) for which lottery judgment values that can be determined as winning in the AT transition lottery are set in the AT transition lottery table 172, selection targets (specifically, addresses) for which lottery judgment values that will definitely be determined as losing in the AT transition lottery are set in the AT transition lottery table 172. In this way, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects described above simply by setting additional selection targets that will definitely be losing in the AT transition lottery table 172, which is prepared for setting multiple selection targets that can be winning.

In the advantageous state processing at the start of the game (Fig. 94), the offset value is calculated by executing a predetermined calculation process in step S5308 using the inverted value of the AT transition confirmation flag in the main RAM 74 and the index value IV selected in the role lottery processing (Fig. 13), and the lottery judgment value corresponding to the selection target is identified by adding the calculated offset value to the start address of the AT transition lottery table 172. In this case, a selection target (more specifically, an address) for which a lottery judgment value that will definitely be determined to be a miss in the AT transition lottery is set in the AT transition lottery table 172, making it possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects by using a configuration in which a predetermined calculation process is executed to calculate an offset value and the lottery judgment value corresponding to the selection target is identified based on the calculated offset value being added to the start address.

The index values IV=16 and 17 may not exist, and the AT transition may be won if the index values IV=16 and 17 are won in the role selection process (FIG. 13). In these cases, a selection determination value of 1 or more is set for addresses other than the address of "k" in the AT transition selection table 172.

In addition, the configuration in which the selection items that are sure to be losers are set in the lottery table may be applied to lottery processes other than the AT transition lottery. For example, the above configuration may be applied to the lottery process for transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4, or the above configuration may be applied to the lottery process for adding on the remaining number of awards in the AT state ST5.

Thirteenth embodiment
In this embodiment, the execution mode of a predetermined lottery process executed by the main MPU 72 is different from that of the first embodiment. The following describes the configuration that differs from the first embodiment. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment is basically omitted.

Figure 96 is a flowchart showing the lottery process for the initial award number executed by the main MPU 72. The lottery process for the initial award number is executed when a transition to the AT state ST5 is won in the pseudo bonus state ST4, and the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends and the AT state ST5 begins. In the lottery process for the initial award number, the initial number of gaming media to be awarded in the AT state ST5 is determined by lottery.

First, a random number for lottery is obtained as a lottery target value from a lottery counter that is updated periodically (specifically, every 1.49 milliseconds) in the main RAM 74 and stored in a general-purpose register of the main MPU 72 (step S5401). The lottery counter is configured as a loop counter whose value is updated sequentially within the range of "0" to "255". Note that a dedicated circuit for updating the random number for lottery may be provided.

Then, the lottery number counter in the main RAM 74 is set to "7", which is the maximum number of lottery draws (step S5402). The lottery number counter is a counter that allows the main MPU 72 to identify the type of object for which the lottery draws in steps S5406 to S5408, which will be described later, are to be performed.

After that, it is determined whether the AT state ST5 to be started this time is a special AT (step S5403). In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, an AT transition lottery process is executed to determine whether to transition to the AT state ST5 in the pseudo bonus state ST4, but in this AT transition lottery process, if a transition to the AT state ST5 is selected, it is determined by lottery whether the normal AT or the special AT will be selected. The special AT is an AT state ST5 in which the initial number of game media awarded is more likely to be greater than that of the normal AT. In addition, the probability of selecting between the normal AT and the special AT is arbitrary, but for example, if a transition to the AT state ST5 is selected, 70% of the time the normal AT will be selected and 30% of the time the special AT will be selected.

If the AT state ST5 to be started this time is a normal AT (step S5403: NO), the first initial award number lottery table 173 is read from the main ROM 73 to the main RAM 74 (step S5404). On the other hand, if the AT state ST5 to be started this time is a special AT (step S5403: YES), the second initial award number lottery table 174 is read from the main ROM 73 to the main RAM 74 (step S5405).

Figure 97(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first initial award number lottery table 173, and Figure 97(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second initial award number lottery table 174.

97(a) and 97(b), the first initial award number lottery table 173 and the second initial award number lottery table 174 are set with data on the number of draws, in which numerical information of consecutive numbers is set, and data on the lottery judgment value that corresponds one-to-one to the data on the number of draws. The first initial award number lottery table 173 is set with data of "1" to "7" as the data on the number of draws, and data on the lottery judgment value, which is numerical information of 1 or more, is set in correspondence with each data on the number of draws. The total number of these lottery judgment values is "256", which is "1" larger than the maximum value of the numerical information of the lottery counter, "255". The second initial award number lottery table 174 is set with data of "4" to "7" as the data on the number of draws, and data on the lottery judgment value, which is numerical information of 1 or more, is set in correspondence with each data on the number of draws. The total number of these lottery judgment values is "256".

When drawing the initial allocation number, a lottery judgment value corresponding to a lottery number of "7" is first added to the lottery random number obtained from the lottery counter, and if the lottery target value, which is the value after the addition, exceeds "255", which is the maximum value of the numerical information of the lottery counter, it is determined that the lottery number has been won. If the lottery target value does not exceed "255", the lottery number to be drawn is changed to "6" by subtracting 1 from the lottery number counter value, and a new lottery target value is derived by adding the lottery judgment value corresponding to the lottery number of "6" to the lottery target value, and if the lottery target value exceeds "255", it is determined that the lottery number has been won, and if it does not exceed "255", a lottery target value for the next lottery number is derived using the lottery judgment value, and it is determined whether the lottery target value after derivation exceeds "255". In this case, as described above, the total number of lottery judgment values is "256" in either the first initial award number lottery table 173 or the second initial award number lottery table 174, so that the lottery target value at that time will exceed "255" in a situation where either of the lottery numbers is the target of the lottery, regardless of whether the first initial award number lottery table 173 or the second initial award number lottery table 174 is referenced. In other words, regardless of whether the first initial award number lottery table 173 or the second initial award number lottery table 174 is referenced, one of the lottery numbers will definitely be won.

In the initial award number lottery process (Figure 96), when step S5404 or step S5405 is executed, a lottery judgment value corresponding to the value of the lottery number counter in the main RAM 74 is read from either the first initial award number lottery table 173 or the second initial award number lottery table 174 that has been read into the main RAM 74 (step S5406). For example, if the lottery number counter value is "7" and the first initial award number lottery table 173 has been read into the main RAM 74, "10" is read as the lottery judgment value. Also, if the lottery number counter value is "4" and the second initial award number lottery table 174 has been read into the main RAM 74, "64" is read as the lottery judgment value.

Then, the current lottery target value is derived by adding the lottery judgment value read in step S5406 to the current lottery target value (step S5407). If the lottery number counter value is "7", the current lottery target value is the lottery random number of the lottery counter obtained in step S5401, so if the first initial award number lottery table 173 has been read into the main RAM 74, the current lottery target value is the result of adding "10" to the lottery random number, and if the second initial award number lottery table 174 has been read into the main RAM 74, the current lottery target value is the result of adding "64" to the lottery random number. Also, if the lottery number counter value is 6 or less, the current lottery target value is the result of adding the lottery judgment value corresponding to the current lottery number counter value to the previously calculated lottery target value.

After that, it is determined whether the lottery target value calculated in step S5407 exceeds "255" (step S5408). If it does not exceed "255" (step S5408: NO), the value of the lottery number counter in the main RAM 74 is decremented by 1 (step S5409), and the processing of steps S5406 to S5408 is then executed for the value of the lottery number counter after decrementing by 1.

If it exceeds "255" (step S5408: YES), the initial award number table 175 is read from the main ROM 73 to the main RAM 74 (step S5410). Figure 97 (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the initial award number table 175. In the initial award number table 175, data of "1" to "7" is set as the number of lotteries, and data of the initial award number, which is numerical information of 1 or more, is set corresponding to each data of the number of lotteries. In this case, the larger the value of the number of lotteries, the larger the initial award number will be, and the smaller the value of the number of lotteries, the smaller the initial award number will be.

After the initial award number table 175 is read into the main RAM 74 in step S5410, the value of the current lottery number counter, i.e., the initial award number corresponding to the current lottery number, is read from the initial award number table 175 (step S5411). In this case, regardless of whether the first initial award number lottery table 173 or the second initial award number lottery table 174 is read as the initial award number lottery table, the common initial award number table 175 is read.

Regarding the reading of the initial award number from the initial award number table 175, for example, if the value of the lottery number counter is "7", the initial award number read from the initial award number table 175 is "300", so the initial award number of game media for the AT state ST5 starting this time will be "300". Also, if the value of the lottery number counter is "4", the initial award number read from the initial award number table 175 is "150", so the initial award number of game media for the AT state ST5 starting this time will be "150". Also, if the value of the lottery number counter is "1", the initial award number read from the initial award number table 175 is "50", so the initial award number of game media for the AT state ST5 starting this time will be "50".

According to the above configuration, even when the second initial award number selection table 174 is referenced, in which the number of types of lottery numbers to be selected is "4", which is less than the maximum number of types "7", the second initial award number selection table 174 has the number of lottery numbers set in consecutive order so that the maximum number of lottery numbers is "7" and the minimum number of lottery numbers is "4". As a result, whether the first initial award number selection table 173 or the second initial award number selection table 174 is referenced, it is sufficient to set the common maximum value "7" as the number of lottery numbers at the start of the lottery, making it possible to standardize the processing configuration when conducting the lottery.

The total number of the lottery judgment values set for each of the lottery numbers in the second initial award number lottery table 174 exceeds "255", which is the maximum value of the lottery random number updated in the lottery counter. As a result, even if the minimum value of the lottery number set in the second initial award number lottery table 174 is "4", any of the numbers "4" to "7" set in the second initial award number lottery table 174 will be a winning number, so a lottery number of "3" or less will never be subject to the lottery.

In addition, in the first initial award number selection table 173, the number of types of the lottery numbers to be selected is "7", and the lottery numbers are set as consecutive numbers from "1" to "7". In the second initial award number selection table 174, the number of types of the lottery numbers to be selected is "4", and the lottery numbers are set as consecutive numbers from "1" to "4". In order to make the initial award number corresponding to the lottery number of "4" in the second initial award number selection table 174 the same as the initial award number corresponding to the lottery number of "7" in the first initial award number selection table 173, it becomes necessary to provide multiple initial award number tables 175 corresponding to the first initial award number selection table 173 and the second initial award number selection table 174, respectively, or to perform a conversion process to match the lottery number determined by referring to the second initial award number selection table 174 with the lottery number in the first initial award number selection table 173. In the former case, the storage capacity increases accordingly, and in the latter case, the processing load increases accordingly. In contrast, even when the second initial award number lottery table 174 is referenced, in which the number of types of lottery numbers to be selected is "4", which is less than the maximum number of types "7" as described above, the second initial award number lottery table 174 has the lottery numbers set in consecutive order so that the maximum number of lottery numbers is "7" and the minimum number of lottery numbers is "4". This makes it possible to directly use the initial award number table 175 used when the first initial award number lottery table 173 is referenced, without the need to perform a conversion process to match the lottery number determined by reference to the second initial award number lottery table 174 with the lottery number in the first initial award number lottery table 173.

<Alternative to the thirteenth embodiment>
A configuration may be adopted in which a third initial to be awarded number lottery table is provided as a lottery table for drawing the initial to be awarded number in addition to the first initial to be awarded number lottery table 173 and the second initial to be awarded number lottery table 174. In this case, the maximum value of the lottery number in the third initial to be awarded number lottery table is set to be the same as the maximum value in the first initial to be awarded number lottery table 173 and the second initial to be awarded number lottery table 174, and the lottery numbers in the third initial to be awarded number lottery table are set as consecutive numbers, thereby making it possible to standardize the processing configuration for drawing the initial to be awarded number and to commonly use the initial to be awarded number table 175.

- The lottery judgment value may be set to "0" for some of the lottery numbers set in the first initial award number lottery table 173. In this case, the lottery numbers for which the lottery judgment value is set to "0" will definitely result in a loss. In this configuration, it is possible to set the lottery numbers to be considered as losses in the first initial award number lottery table 173 while setting the lottery numbers in the first initial award number lottery table 173 as consecutive numbers following the maximum value in the second initial award number lottery table 174.

- The lottery judgment value may be set to "0" for some of the lottery numbers set in the second initial award number lottery table 174. In this case, the lottery numbers for which the lottery judgment value is set to "0" will definitely result in a loss. In this configuration, it is possible to set the lottery numbers to be considered losses in the second initial award number lottery table 174 while setting the lottery numbers in the second initial award number lottery table 174 as consecutive numbers following the maximum value in the first initial award number lottery table 173.

- The data configuration of the first initial award number lottery table 173 and the second initial award number lottery table 174 may be applied to a lottery table used in a lottery process other than the initial award number lottery process.

<Fourteenth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the contents of the command for calling a subroutine when processing using a program is executed in the main MPU 72 differ from those in the first embodiment. The following describes the configuration that differs from the first embodiment. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment is basically omitted.

Figure 98 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the programs stored in the main ROM 73 and the addresses of the main ROM 73.

As shown in FIG. 98(a), the main ROM 73 has many 1-byte memory areas, and each memory area is associated with a 2-byte address. By providing this 2-byte address to the management controller of the main ROM 73, the management controller reads out a program or data from the memory area corresponding to that address. The read program or data is stored in the register of the main MPU 72 or the main RAM 74.

The master ROM 73 is assigned 2-byte addresses "8000h" to "93FFh". "h" indicates that the value is a hexadecimal number. In this case, the program required to execute the timer subtraction process (step S5608) is prestored in the master ROM 73 so that its start address is "8000h", which is the start address of the master ROM 73. In addition, following the timer subtraction process (step S5608), the bet number in/out counter process (step S5609), command output process (step S5610), port output process (step S5611), management process (step S5613), start waiting process (step S5702), reception prohibition process (step S5705), start time setting process (step S5706), and external output setting process (step S5711) are prestored in the master ROM 73 in this order. The programs for these various processes are stored in the address range of "8000h" to "8BFFh", which is the starting address of the main ROM 73, and the last byte of data for the external output setting process (step S5711), which is the last of these various processes to be stored in order, is stored in the memory area at the address of "8BFFh". In the main MPU 72, programs for processes other than the above various processes (such as the partial clear process (step S5504), the full clear process (step S5505), and the setting value update process (step S5506)) are pre-stored in a memory area with an address range of "8C00h" to "93FFh".

When the main MPU 72 calls the various processes described above, it executes a CALLS command. Figure 99 is a flowchart showing the main process executed by the main MPU 72. The process contents of steps S5501 to S5517 are the same as steps S101 to S117 of the main process (Figure 10) in the first embodiment described above. In this case, in the partial clear process of step S5504, the full clear process of step S5505, the setting value update process of step S5506, and the normal process of step S5507, the programs for executing these processes are read from the main ROM 73 by specifying an address with the CALLS command.

Figure 100 is a flow chart showing the timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU 72. The processing contents of steps S5601 to S5614 are the same as steps S201 to S214 of the timer interrupt processing (Figure 11) in the first embodiment described above. In this case, in the power failure processing of step S5603, the stepping motor control processing of step S5606, the sensor monitoring processing of step S5607, the timer subtraction processing of step S5608, the in/out counter processing of the number of bets of step S5609, the command output processing of step S5610, the port output processing of step S5611, and the management processing of step S5613, the programs for executing these processes are read from the main ROM 73 by specifying an address using the CALLS command.

Figure 101 is a flow chart showing normal processing executed by the master MPU 72. The processing contents of steps S5701 to S5712 are the same as steps S301 to S312 of the normal processing (Figure 12) in the first embodiment described above. In this case, in the start waiting processing of step S5702, the reception prohibition processing of step S5705, the start setting processing of step S5706, the role selection processing of step S5707, the reel control processing of step S5708, the medium provision processing of step S5709, the response processing at the end of the game of step S5710, and the external output setting processing of step S5711, the programs for executing these processes are read from the master ROM 73 by specifying an address using the CALLS command.

The CALLS command is stored in advance in the main ROM 73 in correspondence with each type of process to be called. The CALLS command has command identification data indicating that it is a CALLS command, and address data for enabling the management controller of the main ROM 73 to grasp the start address of the program of the process to be called. In this case, the number of bytes of the CALLS command differs depending on whether the start address specified as the address data is included in the 2-byte address range "8000h" to "8BFFh" in the main ROM 73. Specifically, if the start address specified as the address data is not included in "8000h" to "8BFFh", that is, if it is included in "8C00h" to "93FFh", it becomes a 3-byte CALLS command, and if the start address specified as the address data is included in "8000h" to "8BFFh", it becomes a 2-byte CALLS command.

Figure 98 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data structure of a 3-byte CALLS instruction. The 3-byte CALLS instruction has one upper byte UB11, one middle byte UB12, and one lower byte UB13. The upper byte UB11 is set with instruction identification data indicating that it is a CALLS instruction, and the middle byte UB12 and the lower byte UB13 are set with 2-byte data as address data, which is the start address of the program to be read. The address data is set with any 2-byte address in the range of "8C00h" to "93FFh" in the main ROM 73. For example, the address data in a 3-byte CALLS instruction for reading a partial clearing program is set to "8C00h". When the main MPU 72 executes a 3-byte CALLS instruction, it can directly read the 2-byte address, which is the start address of the program to be read, from the address data of the CALLS instruction.

Figure 98(c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data structure of a 2-byte CALLS instruction. The 2-byte CALLS instruction has an upper byte UB21 and a lower byte UB22, each of which is one byte. The 4 bits in the upper byte UB21, from the most significant bit D7 to the bit D4 following the most significant bit D7, contain instruction identification data indicating that the instruction is a CALLS instruction, and the 12 bits consisting of the 4 bits from the lower-order bit D3 to the least significant bit D0 in the upper byte UB21 and the 8 bits in the lower byte UB22 contain the 12 bits of address data, excluding the 4 bits following the most significant bit, of the 2-byte data that is the start address of the program to be read.

Figure 98 (d) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the circuit configuration provided in the main MPU 72 to provide the 2-byte start address of the program to be read to the management controller of the main ROM 73 when a 2-byte CALLS command is executed. The main MPU 72 is provided with a mask circuit 181 and an adder circuit 182. When a 2-byte CALLS command is executed by the main MPU 72, 16-bit data of the CALLS command is provided to the mask circuit 181. The mask circuit 181 executes mask control so that 4 bits from the most significant bit D7 in the upper byte UB21 to the bit D4 following the most significant bit D7 are cleared to "0" out of the 16-bit data of the CALLS command provided. For example, when a CALLS command is executed to read a program for timer subtraction processing, the data after the mask control by the mask circuit 181 is executed becomes "0000h".

The data after the mask control by the mask circuit 181 is provided to the adder circuit 182. The adder circuit 182 performs add control so that "8000h" is added to the data after the mask control by the mask circuit 181 is performed. The data after the add control is performed becomes the start address of the program of the processing to be read by the CALLS instruction. For example, when a CALLS instruction is executed to read a program of a timer subtraction processing, the data after the mask control by the mask circuit 181 is performed becomes "0000h" as described above, and the data after the adder circuit 182 is performed becomes "8000h". This data is the start address of the program for executing the timer interrupt processing. The data after the adder circuit 182 is performed is provided as address data to the management controller of the main ROM 73, and the program of the processing to be read by the CALLS instruction is read from the main ROM 73.

As described above, for addresses in which the upper 4 bits of a 2-byte address are fixed to hexadecimal "8", the address data specified in the CALLS command is compressed to 12 bits by using the mask circuit 181 and adder circuit 182 provided in the main MPU 72 and read out by a 2-byte CALLS command. This makes it possible to reduce the memory capacity required to store programs in the main ROM 73 compared to a configuration in which program reading is performed using only a 3-byte CALLS command.

Here, addresses whose upper 4 bits are fixed to hexadecimal "8" include not only "8000h" to "8BFFh" but also "8C00h" to "8FFFh". Therefore, in theory, it is possible to read out programs for processes included in the address range of "8C00h" to "8FFFh" using a 2-byte CALLS command. However, in the slot machine 10 of this embodiment, if a 2-byte CALLS command is used to read out programs for processes included in the address range of "8C00h" to "8FFFh", the data structure of the CALLS command for some addresses in that address range will match the data structure of the other 2-byte commands. Therefore, in the slot machine 10 of this embodiment, a 3-byte CALLS command is used to read out programs for the address range of "8C00h" to "8FFFh". However, if there is no occurrence of an event in which the data structure of the instruction matches that of another 2-byte instruction, a 2-byte CALLS instruction may be executed when reading a program address included in the address range of "8000h" to "8FFFh", which includes "8C00h" to "8FFFh", and a 3-byte CALLS instruction may be executed when reading a program address included in the address range of "9000h" to "93FFh".

As already explained, the processes that are the targets of program reading by the 2-byte CALLS command are the timer subtraction process (step S5608), followed by the in/out counter process for the number of bets (step S5609), the command output process (step S5610), the port output process (step S5611), the management process (step S5613), the start wait process (step S5702), the reception prohibition process (step S5705), the start setting process (step S5706), and the external output setting process (step S5711). The program capacity of each of the processes that are the targets of these 2-byte CALLS commands is smaller than the program capacity of each of the processes, such as the partial clear process (step S5504), the full clear process (step S5505), and the setting value update process (step S5506), which are stored in the memory area in the address range of "8C00h" to "93FFh". This makes it possible to ensure a large number of different types of processing that can read programs using the two-byte CALLS command.

<Alternative to the fourteenth embodiment>
The address range to be read by the 2-byte CALLS instruction is not limited to "8000h" to "8BFFh", and may be "8000h" to "8FFFh". Even in this case, the upper 4 bits are fixed to hexadecimal "8", so the address to be read can be derived by adding the upper 4 bits, which are hexadecimal "8", to the 12-bit address data specified by the 2-byte CALLS instruction using the mask circuit 181 and the adder circuit 182.

- The configuration is not limited to a 2-byte CALLS command being applied to an address range whose upper 4 bits are fixed to a hexadecimal "8", but may be a 2-byte CALLS command being applied to an address range whose upper 4 bits are fixed to a number other than "8", such as a hexadecimal "9".

- Multiple 2-byte CALLS instructions may be prepared, and one 2-byte CALLS instruction may read programs in an address range where the upper 4 bits are fixed to hexadecimal "8", and the other 2-byte CALLS instruction may read programs in an address range where the upper 4 bits are fixed to hexadecimal "9".

<Fifteenth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the type of processing to be read as a program by a 2-byte CALLS command is different from that in the above-mentioned 14th embodiment. The following describes the configuration that differs from the above-mentioned 14th embodiment. Note that the description of the same configuration as the above-mentioned 14th embodiment is basically omitted. In this embodiment, the execution contents of various processes in the main MPU 72 are premised on the above-mentioned 6th embodiment.

Figure 102 is a flow chart showing the pseudo bonus processing executed by the master MPU 72. The processing content of steps S5801 to S5811 is the same as steps S2701 to S2711 of the pseudo bonus processing in the sixth embodiment (Figure 53). In this case, in the initialization processing of the second section SC2 in step S5809 and the process of turning off the section display unit 67 in step S5810, the programs for executing these processes are read from the master ROM 73 by specifying an address using the CALLS command.

Figure 103 is a flow chart showing the AT processing executed by the master MPU 72. The processing contents of steps S5901 to S5920 are the same as steps S3101 to S3120 of the AT processing (Figure 59) in the sixth embodiment described above. In this case, in the process of adding the number of games played during the AT in step S5902, the process of updating the net increase in the number of net bonuses during the AT in step S5903, the process of adding the remaining number of bonuses in step S5911, the process of setting the freeze counter in step S5916, the process of initializing the second section SC2 in step S5918, and the process of setting the section display unit 67 in step S5919, the programs for executing these processes are read from the master ROM 73 by specifying an address using the CALLS command.

Figure 104 is a flow chart showing the second control process of the game section executed by the main MPU 72. The process contents of steps S6001 to S6017 are the same as steps S3201 to S3217 of the normal process (Figure 12) in the sixth embodiment described above. In this case, in the setting process for the freeze counter in step S6012, the initialization process for the second section SC2 in step S6014, the turning off process for the section display unit 67 in step S6015, and the ending response process in step S6017, the programs for executing these processes are read from the main ROM 73 by specifying an address using the CALLS command.

Figure 105 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the programs stored in the main ROM 73 and the addresses of the main ROM 73 in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, as in the above-mentioned 14th embodiment, when reading out a program included in the address range of "8000h" to "8BFFh" in the main ROM 73, a 2-byte CALLS command is executed, and when reading out a program included in the address range of "8C00h" to "93FFh", a 3-byte CALLS command is executed. In this case, the program to be read out by the 2-byte CALLS command is a program that is read out more frequently than the program to be read out by the 3-byte CALLS command. In detail, the processes that include the program in the address range of "8C00h" to "93FFh", such as the partial clear process, the full clear process, the setting value update process, the process of adding the number of games during the AT, the process of updating the net increase number during the AT, the process of subtracting the AT continuation counter, the process of adding the remaining number of awards, and the ending response process, are read out only in one process. The program for the process that is to be read in only one of these processes is set in the address range of "8C00h" to "93FFh", so a 3-byte CALLS command is executed when reading it.

In contrast, the initialization process of the second section SC2 is read out in the pseudo bonus process (Fig. 102), the AT process (Fig. 103), and the second control process of the game section (Fig. 104). The turn-off process of the section display unit 67 is read out in the pseudo bonus process (Fig. 102), the AT process (Fig. 103), and the second control process of the game section (Fig. 104). The setting process for the freeze counter is read out in the AT process (Fig. 103) and the second control process of the game section (Fig. 104). In addition to these processes, the lottery process and the addition process for the number of premonition games are also read out in multiple processes. And since the programs of the processes that are read out in these multiple processes are set in the address range of "8000h" to "8BFFh", a 2-byte CALLS command is executed when reading them out.

With the above configuration, when reading a program for a process that is read relatively infrequently, a 3-byte CALLS command is executed, and when reading a program for a process that is read relatively frequently, a 2-byte CALLS command is executed. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity of the main ROM 73 required to store the CALLS command.

<Sixteenth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the contents of the command for calling a subroutine when processing using a program is executed in the main MPU 72 differs from that of the above-mentioned 14th embodiment. Below, the configuration that differs from the above-mentioned 14th embodiment will be described. Note that the description of the same configuration as the above-mentioned 14th embodiment will basically be omitted. Also, in this embodiment, the execution contents of various processes in the main MPU 72 are premised on the above-mentioned 6th embodiment.

Figure 106 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the programs stored in the main ROM 73 and the addresses of the main ROM 73 in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, as in the above-mentioned 14th embodiment, not only a 3-byte CALLS instruction but also a 2-byte CALLS instruction is set. When reading a program stored in the address range of "8000h" to "8BFFh", a 2-byte CALLS instruction is executed. Also, when reading a program stored in the address range of "8C00h" to "900Fh", a 3-byte CALLS instruction is executed. The data structure of these 2-byte CALLS instructions and 3-byte CALLS instructions is the same as in the above-mentioned 14th embodiment.

In this embodiment, when reading a program stored in the address range of "9010h" to "93FFh", a CALLV command is executed instead of a three-byte CALLS command. The CALLV command is pre-stored in the main ROM 73 in correspondence with each type of process to be called.

Figure 107(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data structure of a CALLV instruction. A CALLV instruction is one byte, and instruction identification data indicating that it is a CALLV instruction is set in the upper four bits D4 to D7 following the most significant bit D7, and index data is set in the lower four bits D0 to D3 following the least significant bit D0. The index data is used when identifying the address of the program to be read this time from the index table 183 stored in advance in the main ROM 73.

Figure 107 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the index table 183. In the index table 183, index data that is a consecutive number from "1h" to "Fh" in hexadecimal is set, and address data that is the start addresses of multiple programs set in the address range of "9010h" to "93FFh" in one-to-one correspondence with the index data is set. Each index data is 4 bits, and each address data is 2 bytes. Sixteen index data are set in the index table 183, and the address data that is associated with each of these index data is the start addresses of the 16 programs set in the address range of "9010h" to "93FFh".

Figure 107 (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the circuit configuration for providing the 2-byte start address of the program to be read when the CALLV instruction is executed to the management controller of the main ROM 73. The main MPU 72 is provided with an index grasp circuit 184 and an address read circuit 185. When the main MPU 72 executes a CALLV instruction, 8 bits of data of the CALLV instruction are provided to the index grasp circuit 184. The index grasp circuit 184 extracts the lower 4 bits D0 to D3 of the 8 bits of data of the CALLV instruction provided. The extracted lower 4 bits D0 to D3 are provided to the address read circuit 185. The address read circuit 185 identifies the index data that matches the provided lower 4 bits D0 to D3 of the index data of the index table 183 read from the main ROM 73, and reads the address data corresponding to the index data in the index table 183. This read address data corresponds to one of "9010h" to "9315h" and is the start address of the program of the process that was the target of reading by the CALLV command. The address data read by the address reading circuit 185 is provided to the management controller of the main ROM 73, and the program of the process that was the target of reading by the CALLV command is read from the main ROM 73.

Figure 108 is a flowchart showing the pseudo bonus processing executed by the master MPU 72. The processing contents of steps S6101 to S6111 are the same as steps S2701 to S2711 of the pseudo bonus processing (Figure 53) in the sixth embodiment. Figure 109 is a flowchart showing the AT processing executed by the master MPU 72. The processing contents of steps S6201 to S6220 are the same as steps S3101 to S3120 of the AT processing (Figure 59) in the sixth embodiment. Figure 110 is a flowchart showing the second control processing of the play area executed by the master MPU 72. The processing contents of steps S6301 to S6317 are the same as steps S3201 to S3217 of the second control processing of the play area (Figure 60) in the sixth embodiment.

Of the above processes, the initialization process of the second section SC2 is read out in each of the pseudo bonus process (Fig. 108), the AT process (Fig. 109), and the second control process of the play section (Fig. 110). The turn-off process of the section display unit 67 is read out in each of the pseudo bonus process (Fig. 108), the AT process (Fig. 109), and the second control process of the play section (Fig. 110). The setting process of the freeze counter is read out in each of the AT process (Fig. 109) and the second control process of the play section (Fig. 110). In addition to these processes, the lottery process and the addition process of the number of premonition games are also read out in multiple processes. As described above, there are 16 processes that are read out in multiple processes, including the initialization process of the second section SC2, the lighting process of the section display unit 67, the setting process of the freeze counter, the lottery process of the number of premonition games, and the addition process. This number of processes is the same as the number of index data set in index table 183, i.e., the number of processes that can be read from the program by the CALLV command.

As shown in FIG. 106, the programs of the processes to be read in the multiple processes are stored in the address range of "8C00h" to "93FFh", which cannot be read by the 2-byte CALLS command, specifically, in the address range of "9010h" to "93FFh". As already explained, the address data associated with each of the 16 index data in the index table 183 is the start address of the 16 programs set in the address range of "9010h" to "93FFh". In other words, the programs of the processes to be read in the multiple processes are read by the CALLV command, which is a 1-byte command. This makes it possible to use the CALLV command, which has a smaller data capacity than the CALLS command, when reading out a program of a process that is read relatively frequently, and thus makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity of the main ROM 73 required to store the command to read the program.

The addresses that are read by the 1-byte CALLV instruction are set to an address range that cannot be read by the 2-byte CALLS instruction, making it possible to minimize the number of addresses that are read by the 3-byte CALLS instruction. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of memory required to prepare read instructions.

The processes that are the targets of program reading by the 2-byte CALLS command are, as in the 14th embodiment, the timer subtraction process (step S5608), the in/out counter process for the number of bets (step S5609), the command output process (step S5610), the port output process (step S5611), the management process (step S5613), the start waiting process (step S5702), the reception prohibition process (step S5705), the start setting process (step S5706), and the external output setting process (step S5711). The program capacity of each of the processes that are the targets of the 2-byte CALLS command is smaller than the program capacity of each of the processes that are the targets of program reading by the 3-byte CALLS command, such as the partial clear process (step S5504), the full clear process (step S5505), and the setting value update process (step S5506), which are stored in the memory area in the address range of "8C00h" to "900Fh". This makes it possible to ensure a large number of different types of processing that can read programs using the two-byte CALLS command.

The data capacity of index data that can be set in the CALLV instruction is not limited to 4 bits, but may be other numbers of bits less than 8 bits, such as 7 bits, 6 bits, 5 bits, 3 bits, or 2 bits.

In addition, the address to be read by the CALLV instruction is not limited to being an address outside the address range to be read by the 2-byte CALLS instruction, but may be an address within the address range to be read by the 2-byte CALLS instruction.

<Other embodiments>
The present invention is not limited to the contents of the above-described embodiments, and various modifications and improvements are possible within the scope of the present invention. For example, the following modifications may be made. The configurations of the following alternative forms may be applied individually to the configurations of the above-described embodiments, or may be applied in combination. The configurations of the above-described embodiments may be applied in combination with each other, and the configurations of the following alternative forms may be applied individually or in combination with each other to the configuration obtained by combining the configurations of the above-described embodiments with each other.

(1) In the first embodiment described above, the AT state ST5 is not limited to ending when the remaining number of game media awarded in the AT state ST5 becomes "0". The AT state ST5 may end when the remaining number of continuing games in the AT state ST5 becomes "0", or the AT state ST5 may end when the number of predetermined winnings achieved in the AT state ST5 reaches the upper limit. Even in this case, if the state is a false premonition state or a real premonition state, the AT state ST5 may continue even if the remaining number of continuing games in the AT state ST5 becomes "0" or the number of predetermined winnings achieved in the AT state ST5 reaches the upper limit.

(2) In the first embodiment described above, when the value of the AT continuation counter 74e of the main RAM 74 becomes "0" in the false premonition state and the AT state ST5 continues, and a direct win occurs in the additional lottery process (step S1103), the configuration is not limited to a configuration in which the number of awards selected in the direct win is awarded immediately, and the number of awards may be awarded when the false premonition state in progress ends. In this case, even if game media are awarded in a situation in which the false premonition state continues, the remaining number of awards of game media in the AT state ST5 is maintained at "0", and the award of game media that occurs in a situation in which the false premonition state ends and the AT state ST5 continues is used to subtract the number of awards due to the direct win. This makes it easier for the AT state ST5 to continue for a longer period of time.

(3) In the first embodiment described above, if a false premonition is won in the additional lottery process (step S1103) when the player is in a false premonition state, the number of remaining games to be continued in the false premonition state may be increased. For example, if a false premonition is won when the player is in a false premonition state, the number of remaining games to be continued may be increased by resetting the initial number of games to 10 as the number of remaining games to be continued in the false premonition state, or the initial number of games to be continued may be added to the number of remaining games to be continued in the false premonition state, thereby increasing the number of remaining games to be continued. If the event occurs when the player is in a false premonition state and the remaining number of awarded game media in the AT state ST5 is "0", the number of games required until the continued AT state ST5 ends will essentially increase, and the player will hope for a false premonition win.

Also, even if a false premonition win occurs in a false premonition state in a situation where the remaining number of game media awarded in the AT state ST5 is not "0", the number of remaining games to be continued in the false premonition state may not be increased, and if a false premonition win occurs in a false premonition state in a situation where the remaining number of game media awarded in the AT state ST5 is "0", the number of remaining games to be continued in the false premonition state may be increased. This makes it possible to not increase the number of remaining games to be continued in the false premonition state even if a false premonition win occurs in a situation where the AT state ST5 is continuing due to the false premonition state, but to substantially increase the number of games required until the continuing AT state ST5 ends by causing a false premonition win.

(4) In the first embodiment, when the player is in a false premonition state and the player wins the real premonition in the additional lottery process (step S1103), the player may be upgraded to the real premonition state and the number of remaining games to be played in the real premonition state may be increased from the number of remaining games to be played in the previous false premonition state. For example, when the player is in a false premonition state and the player wins the real premonition, the number of remaining games to be played in the real premonition state may be increased by resetting the initial number of games to 10, or the number of remaining games to be played in the previous false premonition state may be increased by adding the initial number of games to the number of remaining games to be played in the previous false premonition state. If the event occurs in a false premonition state and the remaining number of game media awarded in the AT state ST5 is "0", the number of games required until the AT state ST5 is ended will be substantially increased, and the player will expect to win the real premonition.

Also, even if a real premonition win occurs in a false premonition state in a situation where the remaining number of game media awarded in the AT state ST5 is not "0", the remaining number of games to be continued in the false premonition state up to that point may be inherited in the subsequent real premonition state, and if a real premonition win occurs in a false premonition state in a situation where the remaining number of game media awarded in the AT state ST5 is "0", the remaining number of games to be continued in the subsequent real premonition state may be increased from the remaining number of games to be continued in the false premonition state up to that point. In this way, in a situation where the false premonition state is provided simply as a performance, even if a real premonition win occurs, the remaining number of games to be continued in the subsequent real premonition state is not increased, while in a situation where the AT state ST5 is continuing due to the false premonition state, the occurrence of a real premonition win makes it possible to substantially increase the number of games required until the continuing AT state ST5 ends.

(5) In the first embodiment described above, if a false premonition win or a real premonition win is obtained in the additional lottery process (step S1103) when the player is in the real premonition state, the number of remaining games to be continued in the real premonition state may be increased. For example, if a false premonition win or a real premonition win is obtained when the player is in the real premonition state, the number of remaining games to be continued may be increased by resetting the initial number of games to 10 as the number of remaining games to be continued in the real premonition state, or the initial number of games to be continued may be added to the number of remaining games to be continued in the real premonition state, thereby increasing the number of remaining games to be continued. If the event occurs when the player is in the real premonition state and the remaining number of game media awarded in the AT state ST5 is "0", the number of games required until the continued AT state ST5 ends will essentially increase, and the player will hope for a false premonition win or a real premonition win.

Also, in a situation where the remaining number of game media given in the AT state ST5 is not "0", even if a false premonition win or a real premonition win occurs in the real premonition state, the number of remaining games to be continued in the real premonition state may not be increased, and in a situation where the remaining number of game media given in the AT state ST5 is "0", if a false premonition win or a real premonition win occurs in the real premonition state, the number of remaining games to be continued in the real premonition state may be increased. This makes it possible to effectively increase the number of games required until the AT state ST5 continues by the real premonition state, while not increasing the number of remaining games to be continued in the real premonition state even if a false premonition win or a real premonition win occurs in a situation where the AT state ST5 continues due to the real premonition state.

(6) In the first embodiment described above, when a direct win occurs in the additional lottery process (step S1103) in a false premonition state or a real premonition state where the remaining number of game media to be awarded in AT state ST5 is "0", a configuration may be adopted in which a larger number of game media is more likely to be awarded than when a direct win occurs in the additional lottery process (step S1103) in other situations. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of a direct win in a false premonition state or a real premonition state where the remaining number of game media to be awarded in AT state ST5 is "0".

(7) In the second and third embodiments, even if the index value IV = 17 is won in the lottery process for the role in the pseudo bonus state ST4 (FIG. 13), the right reel 32R may be configured to stop for the first time or the combination of the "red 7" symbol, "red 7" symbol and "red 7" symbol on the main line ML, so that the benefit of incrementing the value of the transition advantageous counter in the main RAM 74 by 1 is not given. Also, even if the index value IV = 18 is won in the lottery process for the role in the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4 (FIG. 13), the right reel 32R may be configured to stop for the first time or the combination of the "red 7" symbol, "red 7" symbol and "red 7" symbol on the main line ML, so that the benefit of incrementing the value of the transition advantageous counter in the main RAM 74 by 1 is not given. In addition, even if the index value IV=18 is won in the lottery process (FIG. 13) in the latter half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, the benefit of adding 2 to the value of the transition advantageous counter in the main RAM 74 may not be awarded unless the right reel 32R is stopped for the first time or the combination of the "BAR" symbol, "BAR" symbol, and "BAR" symbol is stopped on the main line ML.

(8) In the second and third embodiments described above, when the index value IV=17 is won in the role selection process (FIG. 13), the first special replay prize can only be won when the right reel 32R is stopped for the first time. However, this is not limited to this, and the first special replay prize can also be won when the middle reel 32M is stopped for the first time, or when either the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped for the first time.

(9) In the second and third embodiments described above, when the index value IV=18 is won in the role selection process (FIG. 13), the first or second special replay prize can only be won when the right reel 32R is stopped for the first time. However, this is not limited to this, and the first or second special replay prize can only be won when the middle reel 32M is stopped for the first time, or the first or second special replay prize can be won when the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped for the first time.

(10) In the second and third embodiments described above, if index value IV = 18 is won in the role selection process (Figure 13), when the right reel 32R is caused to stop for the first time, a first special replay prize may be awarded but a second special replay prize may not be awarded, and when the middle reel 32M is caused to stop for the first time, a second special replay prize may be awarded but a first special replay prize may not be awarded. In this case, if index value IV = 17 or 18 is hit in the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, and if index value IV = 17 is hit in the second half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, a red 7 notification is executed to enable the player to recognize that the first stop is the right reel 32R and that the player should aim for the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML, and if index value IV = 18 is hit in the second half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, a BAR notification is executed to enable the player to recognize that the first stop is the middle reel 32M and that the player should aim for the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML. This makes it possible to reduce the probability of a second special replay winning being achieved when index value IV = 18 is hit in the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, and of a first special replay winning being achieved when index value IV = 18 is hit in the second half of the pseudo bonus state ST4.

(11) In the second and third embodiments described above, when the first special replay winning or the second special replay winning occurs in a situation that is not the pseudo bonus state ST4, a first irregular notification sound is output to allow the player to recognize that a replay winning has occurred, but this is not limited to the above. For example, a first irregular notification sound may be output to indicate that the winning will not trigger a transition to the AT state ST5, or a notification sound may be output to indicate that the current state is not the pseudo bonus state ST4.

(12) In the second and third embodiments described above, when the first special replay winning or the second special replay winning is achieved in a situation other than the pseudo bonus state ST4, the first irregular notification sound is output from the speaker 62, while the upper lamp 61 and the image display device 63 are configured not to execute an irregular notification. However, this is not limited to this, and in addition to or instead of the configuration in which the first irregular notification sound is output from the speaker 62, the upper lamp 61 may be configured to emit light corresponding to the first irregular, and an image corresponding to the first irregular may be displayed on the image display device 63.

(13) In the second and third embodiments described above, when a second special replay winning occurs in the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, the second irregular notification sound is output from the speaker 62, while the upper lamp 61 and the image display device 63 are not configured to perform an irregular notification. However, this is not limited to this, and in addition to or instead of the configuration in which the second irregular notification sound is output from the speaker 62, the upper lamp 61 may be configured to emit light corresponding to the second irregular, and an image corresponding to the second irregular may be displayed on the image display device 63.

(14) In the third embodiment described above, when the index value IV = 18 is won in the latter half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, but the first special replay winning occurs, the third irregular notification sound is output from the speaker 62, while the upper lamp 61 and the image display device 63 do not perform an irregular notification. However, this is not limited to this, and in addition to or instead of the third irregular notification sound being output from the speaker 62, the upper lamp 61 may emit light corresponding to the third irregular, and the image display device 63 may display an image corresponding to the third irregular.

(15) In the second and third embodiments, when the index value IV = 18 is won in the lottery process (FIG. 13), if the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4 is reached, a red 7 notification is executed, and if the second half of the pseudo bonus state ST4 is reached, a BAR notification is executed. However, this is not limited to the above. For example, if the index value IV = 18 is won in the pseudo bonus state ST4, a red 7 notification is executed to prompt the player to win the first special replay, and if the index value IV = 18 is won in the AT state ST5, a BAR notification is executed to prompt the player to win the second special replay. In this case, if the index value IV = 18 is won in a state other than the pseudo bonus state ST4 and the first special replay is won, a corresponding irregular notification is executed, and if the index value IV = 18 is won in a state other than the AT state ST5 and the second special replay is won, a corresponding irregular notification is executed.

(16) In the second and third embodiments, if the index value IV = 17 is selected in the lottery process (FIG. 13) in the pseudo bonus state ST4, the value of the advantageous counter at the transition in the main RAM 74 is incremented by 1 without fail. However, this is not limited to the above, and if the lottery process is executed when the index value IV = 17 is selected, and if the lottery process is a win, the value of the advantageous counter at the transition in the main RAM 74 may be incremented by 1. In this case, if the lottery process is a win, a red 7 notification is executed to indicate that the first stop is the right reel 32R and that the "red 7" symbol should be aimed for on the main line ML, and if the winning lottery process is a miss, it is preferable that the red 7 notification is not executed.

(17) In the second and third embodiments, if the index value IV = 18 is selected in the lottery process (FIG. 13) in the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, the value of the advantageous counter at the transition in the main RAM 74 is incremented by 1 without fail. However, this is not limited to the above, and if the lottery process is executed when the index value IV = 18 is selected, and if the lottery process is a win, the value of the advantageous counter at the transition in the main RAM 74 may be incremented by 1. In this case, if the lottery process is a win, the first stop is the right reel 32R and a red 7 notification is executed to indicate that the "red 7" symbol should be aimed for on the main line ML, and if the winning lottery process is a miss, it is preferable that the red 7 notification is not executed.

(18) In the second and third embodiments, if the index value IV = 18 is selected in the lottery process (FIG. 13) in the latter half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, the value of the advantageous counter at the transition in the main RAM 74 is incremented by 2 without fail. However, this is not limited to the above, and if the lottery process is executed when the index value IV = 18 is selected, and if the lottery process is a win, the value of the advantageous counter at the transition in the main RAM 74 may be incremented by 2. In this case, if the lottery process is a win, a BAR notification is executed to indicate that the first stop is the right reel 32R and that the "BAR" symbol should be aimed for on the main line ML, and if the winning lottery process is a miss, the BAR notification is preferably not executed.

(19) In the fourth and fifth embodiments, the display surface of the image display device 63 is divided horizontally into two regions, a left region A1 and a right region A2, during the first added-on period. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The display surface of the image display device 63 may be divided vertically into two regions, a top region and a bottom region, during the first added-on period. In addition, the display surface of the image display device 63 is divided vertically and horizontally into two regions, a top left region A11, a top right region A12, a bottom left region A13 and a bottom right region A14, during the second added-on period. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The display surface of the image display device 63 may be divided vertically into four regions, or horizontally into four regions, during the second added-on period.

(20) In the fourth and fifth embodiments, the effect of dividing the display surface of the image display device 63 into multiple display areas is configured to occur during the first or second added-on period, but this is not limited to this and may occur in other situations. Also, as the effect of dividing the display surface of the image display device 63 into multiple display areas, a two-division effect and a four-division effect are set, but in addition to or instead of this, a three-division effect, a five-division effect, an eight-division effect, a nine-division effect, etc. may also be present.

(21) In the fourth and fifth embodiments, the image data D1 at the time of division is copied to at least the second divided area DA2 when divided into two of the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn, but this is not limited to the above. The image data D1 at the time of division may be drawn to the first divided area DA1 when divided into two using image data, and the image data D1 at the time of division may be drawn to the second divided area DA2 when divided into two using image data. Even in this case, the image data used to draw the image data D1 at the time of division to the first divided area DA1 when divided into two and the image data used to draw the image data D1 at the time of division to the second divided area DA2 when divided into two are the same, so that the amount of image data read from the memory module 101 to draw the image data D1 at the time of division can be reduced.

(22) In the fourth and fifth embodiments, the left area A1 and the right area A2 on the display surface of the image display device 63 are configured to display the same image as the animation display G21, G22 or the number of winnings notification display G23 for performance purposes, respectively. However, different images may be displayed. Even in this case, the stop order notification image G34 or the operation notification image G35 can be made to stand out by displaying the stop order notification image G34 or the operation notification image G35 across the left area A1 and the right area A2.

(23) The number of active lines is not limited to the main line ML, and may be two, three, four or more active lines. In this case, the number of active lines may be increased as the number of gaming media bets increases, or the maximum number of active lines may be set regardless of the number of gaming media bets.

(24) The type of information transmitted from the main MPU 72 to the presentation MPU 92 is not limited to those in the above embodiments. For example, when a winning event corresponding to the award of game media is achieved, information on the number of game media awarded as a result of the winning event may be transmitted from the main MPU 72 to the presentation MPU 92. In this case, the information on the number of game media awarded as a result of the winning event may be displayed on the image display device 63 or the like. In addition, when some of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped spinning or have stopped spinning even when all of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped, corresponding information may be transmitted from the main MPU 72 to the presentation MPU 92. In this case, a presentation corresponding to the spinning status of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may be performed on the image display device 63 or the like.

(25) In each of the above embodiments, a bonus of paying out medals is awarded when a small winning combination is achieved, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration and may be configured in any way as long as the bonus is awarded to the player. For example, a prize other than medals may be awarded when a small winning combination is achieved. In addition, in a slot machine that does not have a function for inserting actual medals or paying out medals, but rather manages medals owned by the player by credit, an increase in the number of credited medals corresponds to the awarding of a bonus.

(26) The present invention may be applied to so-called B-type slot machines, or to any type of slot machine, such as C-type, a combination of A-type and C-type, a combination of B-type and C-type, or a type equipped with an RT game, CT game, or ART game. The present invention may also be applied to a configuration in which a bonus state advantageous to the player exists.

(27) The symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R are not limited to pictures, numbers, letters, etc., but may also be geometric lines, figures, etc. In addition, symbols may be formed using light, color, etc., or using three-dimensional shapes, etc., or may be a combination of these. In other words, the symbols may function as identifiable information.

(28) In each of the above embodiments, a specific example of a slot machine 10 is shown, but the present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine in which games are played using game balls as a gaming medium, or to a gaming machine that combines a slot machine and a pachinko machine.

(29) The characteristic configurations of the first to sixteenth embodiments may be applied to each other in any combination. For example, the characteristic configurations of the first embodiment, the second embodiment, the fourth embodiment, the sixth embodiment, and the fourteenth embodiment may be combined, and the characteristic configurations of the third embodiment, the fifth embodiment, the eighth embodiment, the tenth embodiment, the thirteenth embodiment, and the sixteenth embodiment may be combined. In addition, the configurations of the other embodiments may be applied in any combination to a configuration in which the characteristic configurations of the first to sixteenth embodiments are applied in a predetermined combination.

<Inventions extracted from the above embodiments>
The following describes the features of the inventions extracted from the above-described embodiments, while indicating, as necessary, their effects, etc. In the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiments are appropriately indicated in parentheses, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations indicated in parentheses.

<Features Group A>
Feature A1. An information update means (a function for executing the process of step S1204 of the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment) for updating the continuation criterion information stored in the continuation criterion storage means (the AT continuation counter 74e in the first embodiment) to the side approaching the end information ("0") based on the occurrence of an update trigger (a game medium being awarded) when the game is executed in a favorable game state (AT state ST5) favorable to the player;
A termination means for terminating the advantageous gaming state based on the fact that the continuation reference information has become the termination information (a function for executing the processing of steps S1213 to S1215 of the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment);
A state continuation means for continuing the advantageous gaming state without terminating the advantageous gaming state by the terminating means even if the continuation reference information becomes the termination information when the advantageous gaming state is in a predetermined performance execution state (false premonition state) (a function for making a negative determination in step S1212 of the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature A1, when a predetermined performance execution status is reached, the advantageous game state continues without ending even if the continuation reference information becomes end information. This makes it possible to create a situation in which the advantageous game state can continue even if the continuation reference information becomes end information. It is also possible to prevent the predetermined performance execution status from ending midway due to the end of the advantageous game state. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Feature A2. The gaming machine described in Feature A1, wherein the termination means terminates the advantageous gaming state when the predetermined performance execution status is reached in the advantageous gaming state and the continuation reference information becomes the termination information and the advantageous gaming state is continued, and when the predetermined performance execution status is reached in a situation where the continuation reference information is the termination information, the advantageous gaming state is terminated.

According to feature A2, if the advantageous game state continues even if the continuation reference information is end information due to the specified performance execution status, the advantageous game state also ends when the specified performance execution status ends while the continuation reference information remains end information. This makes it possible to prevent the advantageous game state from continuing excessively.

Feature A3. A predetermined update means (a function for executing the process of step S1105 of the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment) is provided for updating the continuation reference information to a side away from the end information based on the occurrence of a predetermined trigger (a direct hit in the additional lottery process of step S1103) in the advantageous game state,
The gaming machine described in feature A1 or A2, characterized in that the specified update means updates the continuation standard information to move it away from the end information based on the occurrence of the specified trigger in a situation in which the advantageous gaming state is being continued by the state continuation means.

According to feature A3, the continuation criteria information is updated to move away from the end information based on the occurrence of a predetermined trigger in a favorable gaming state. Therefore, the player will expect the predetermined trigger to occur in the favorable gaming state. In this case, if the favorable gaming state continues even if the continuation criteria information is end information due to the presence of a predetermined performance execution situation, if a predetermined trigger occurs in this continuing state, the continuation criteria information is updated to move away from the end information. This makes it possible to make the player expect that a predetermined trigger will occur even in the continuing state.

Feature A4. A gaming machine according to any one of Features A1 to A3, characterized in that the predetermined performance execution status continues over a predetermined number of games, which is a plurality of games, and in each game in the predetermined performance execution status, the execution content of the performance is determined in a manner corresponding to the predetermined performance execution status.

According to feature A4, the predetermined performance execution status continues for a predetermined number of games, and the execution content of the performance is determined in each game in the predetermined performance execution status in a manner corresponding to the predetermined performance execution status, so that it is possible to provide a series of performances across multiple games in the predetermined performance execution status. In this case, with the configuration of feature A1 described above, when the predetermined performance execution status is present, the advantageous game state continues without ending even if the continuation criteria information becomes end information, so that it is possible to prevent a series of performances across multiple games in the predetermined performance execution status from ending midway due to the end of the advantageous game state.

Feature A5. Equipped with a predetermined performance start means (a function for executing the processes of steps S1116 to S1118 of the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment) for starting the predetermined performance execution situation based on the occurrence of a performance start trigger,
The gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A4, characterized in that the specified performance start means continues the specified performance execution status currently being executed rather than starting a new specified performance execution status even if the performance start trigger occurs during the specified performance execution status.

According to feature A5, even if a trigger occurs to start a performance during a specified performance execution state, the specified performance execution state is not started anew, and the currently running specified performance execution state continues. This makes it possible to prevent the specified performance execution state from continuing excessively.

Feature A6. The predetermined effect execution state continues for a predetermined number of games, which is a plurality of games;
The gaming machine described in feature A5 is characterized in that the specified performance start means does not increase the remaining number of continuing games in the specified performance execution status even if the performance start trigger occurs in the specified performance execution status.

According to feature A6, even if a trigger occurs to start a performance during a specified performance execution situation, the number of remaining games to be continued during that specified performance execution situation is not increased, so it is possible to prevent the specified performance execution situation from continuing excessively.

Feature A7. A gaming machine according to any one of Features A1 to A6, characterized in that the predetermined performance execution status does not trigger an update of the continuation criteria information away from the end information.

According to feature A7, although the specified performance execution status does not trigger an update of the continuation reference information away from the end information, when the specified performance execution status is met, the advantageous game state continues without ending even if the continuation reference information becomes end information. This makes it possible for the specified performance execution status, which only serves as a performance that does not affect the player's profit when the continuation reference information is not end information, to become a status for continuing the advantageous game state when the continuation reference information is end information, making it possible to increase the player's attention to the specified performance execution status.

Feature A8. The state continuation means continues the advantageous gaming state without terminating the advantageous gaming state by the terminating means even if the continuation reference information becomes the termination information when a specific performance execution status (this premonition state) is in the advantageous gaming state,
The gaming machine described in feature A7, characterized in that the specific performance execution status serves as an opportunity to update the continuation standard information to move it away from the end information.

According to feature A8, even if the continuation reference information becomes end information when the specific performance execution status is in effect, the advantageous game state continues, and the specific performance execution status becomes an opportunity to update the continuation reference information to move it away from the end information. As a result, if the advantageous game state continues because the specific performance execution status or the specific performance execution status is in effect, even if the continuation reference information becomes end information, the player will expect to be in the specific performance execution status.

Feature A9. The gaming machine according to any one of Features A1 to A8, wherein the information update means, when the continuation reference information is not the end information in the specified performance execution status, updates the continuation reference information to approach the end information based on the occurrence of the update trigger as the game is executed.

According to feature A9, even if the specified performance execution status is reached, if the continuation criteria information is not end information, the game is executed and an update trigger occurs, and the continuation criteria information is updated to approach the end information. This makes it possible to prevent the advantage of being in the specified performance execution status from becoming too high.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A9, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F9, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H8, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J6, features K1 to K8, features L1 to L7, features M1 to M5, features N1 to N4, features O1 to O5, features P1 to P5, features Q1 to Q13, and features R1 to R5 may be applied to the features A1 to A9. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

The inventions in the above feature group A can solve the following problems:

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, pachinko machines are equipped with a storage section for storing gaming balls, and the gaming balls stored in the storage section are guided to a gaming ball launching device and launched toward the gaming area in response to the player's launching operation. Then, for example, when a gaming ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, a lottery process is executed, or a process is executed to increase the number of gaming balls available to the player.

In a slot machine, when a game value such as medals has been bet and the start lever is operated to start a new game, a lottery process is executed by the control means. Also, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation stop control to stop the rotation of the reels. Then, if the stop result after the rotation of the reels has stopped corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is awarded to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the entertainment value of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Characteristics Group B>
Feature B1. A symbol display means (reel unit 31) that displays symbols in a variable manner;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that is operated to start the variable display of the picture on the picture display means;
a game start means for determining a game execution status based on the operation of the start operation means (a function for making a positive determination in step S304 in the master MPU 72);
A role selection means (a function for selecting a role in the master MPU 72) for selecting a role when the game is in the execution state;
A stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) that is operated to stop the variable display of the picture in the picture display means;
A symbol display control means (a function of executing a reel control process in the main MPU 72) controls the symbol display means so that the display of the symbols is started when the game is in the execution state, and the display of the symbols is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means;
A winning response control means (a function of executing a medium granting process in the main MPU 72 and a response process at the end of a game) for executing a control corresponding to a winning role when a stop result corresponding to a winning role in the lottery process for the winning role is displayed after the changing display of the picture by the control of the picture display control means, as a winning corresponding to the winning role is established;
In a gaming machine equipped with
A special role (index value IV=17 or 18 in the second and third embodiments) is set as a role that will be won in the lottery process of the role,
The picture display control means enables a predetermined stop result (a combination of "red 7" symbols or a combination of "BAR" symbols in the second and third embodiments) to be displayed based on the stop operation means being operated in a predetermined stop mode (a stop operation mode in which the right reel 32R is first stopped and a "red 7" symbol is aimed at on the main line ML, or a stop operation mode in which the right reel 32R is first stopped and a "BAR" symbol is aimed at on the main line ML) when the special combination is won,
This gaming machine is
A special notification control means for executing a special notification (a red 7 notification when the predetermined stop result is a combination of "red 7" symbols, or a BAR notification when the predetermined stop result is a combination of "BAR" symbols) that allows a player to recognize that he or she should operate the stop operation means in the predetermined stop mode when the special combination is won in a predetermined notification target situation (a pseudo bonus state ST4 when the predetermined stop result is a combination of "red 7" symbols, or a latter situation of the pseudo bonus state ST4 when the predetermined stop result is a combination of "BAR" symbols). (When the predetermined stop result is a combination of "red 7" symbols: a function of executing the processes of steps S1406 to S1408 and steps S1410 to S1411 of the master MPU 72 in the second embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step S1502 of the performance side MPU 92; when the predetermined stop result is a combination of "BAR" symbols: a function of executing the processes of steps S1412 to S1413 of the master MPU 72 in the second embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step S1504 of the performance side MPU 92)
A predetermined display that causes a predetermined display notification (the first irregular notification sound in the second and third embodiments or the third irregular notification sound in the third embodiment when the predetermined stop result is a combination of "red 7" symbols, and the first irregular notification sound or the second irregular notification sound when the predetermined stop result is a combination of "BAR" symbols) to be executed based on the predetermined stop result being displayed by operating the stop operation means in the predetermined stop mode in a predetermined non-notification situation in which the special role is won but the special notification is not executed (a situation that is not the pseudo bonus state ST4 when the predetermined stop result is a combination of "red 7" symbols, and a situation that is not the latter half of the pseudo bonus state ST4 when the predetermined stop result is a combination of "BAR" symbols). Notification control means (when the predetermined stop result is a combination of "red 7" symbols: a function for executing the process of step S1704 of the master MPU 72 in the second embodiment and a function for executing the process of step S1510 of the performance side MPU 92, and a function for executing the process of step S1803 or step S1806 of the master MPU 72 in the third embodiment; when the predetermined stop result is a combination of "BAR" symbols: a function for executing the process of step S1707 or step S1710 of the master MPU 72 in the second embodiment and a function for executing the process of step S1510 or step S1512 of the performance side MPU 92, and a function for executing the process of step S1809 or step S1812 of the master MPU 72 in the third embodiment);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature B1, when a special role is won in a predetermined notification target situation, a special notification is executed to enable the player to recognize that the stop operation means should be operated in a predetermined stop mode, so that the predetermined stop result can be displayed by operating the stop operation means in a predetermined stop mode in accordance with the special notification. In this case, a predetermined display notification is executed based on the fact that the stop operation means is operated in a predetermined stop mode and the predetermined stop result is displayed in a predetermined non-notification situation in which a special role is won but a special notification is not executed. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the predetermined stop result has been displayed in a situation in which the predetermined stop result should not be displayed, and prevents the player from becoming confused by the display of the predetermined stop result. This makes it possible to ensure that the game is played in an optimal manner.

Feature B2: The symbol display means includes a plurality of symbol display areas (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) that variably display the symbols;
The predetermined stop mode includes a mode in which the variable display of the symbols in the plurality of symbol display areas is stopped in a predetermined stop order (the right reel 32R is stopped first),
When the special combination is won, even if the stop operation means is operated so that the variable display of the patterns in the plurality of pattern display areas stops in the predetermined stop order, the predetermined stop result may not be displayed,
The gaming machine described in feature B1, characterized in that the specified display notification control means does not execute the specified display notification if the specified stop result is not displayed even if the stop operation means is operated so that the varying display of the patterns in the multiple pattern display areas stops in the specified stop order in the specified non-notification situation.

According to feature B2, even if the image variation display is stopped in a predetermined stop order in a predetermined non-alarm situation, if the predetermined stop result is not displayed, the predetermined display notification is not executed. This makes it possible to limit the situation in which the predetermined display notification is executed to a situation in which the predetermined stop result is displayed in a predetermined non-alarm situation, and makes it possible to prevent the predetermined display notification from being executed excessively.

Feature B3. A gaming machine according to feature B1 or B2, characterized in that no penalty is given to the player even if the predetermined stop result is displayed in the predetermined non-alarm situation.

According to feature B3, when a predetermined stop result is displayed in a predetermined non-notification situation, a predetermined display notification is executed but no penalty is given to the player. This makes it possible to prevent a disadvantage from occurring to a player who has caused a predetermined stop result to be displayed in a predetermined non-notification situation due to an operational error.

Feature B4. A gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3, characterized in that it is equipped with a predetermined benefit granting means (if the predetermined stop result is a combination of "red 7" symbols: a function for executing the processing of step S1604 or step S1608 of the main MPU 72 in the second embodiment, if the predetermined stop result is a combination of "BAR" symbols: a function for executing the processing of step S1610 of the main MPU 72 in the second embodiment) that grants a predetermined benefit to the player when a predetermined event occurs in the predetermined notification target situation, which is either winning the special role or displaying the predetermined stop result, and does not grant the predetermined benefit to the player even if the predetermined event occurs in the predetermined non-notification situation.

According to feature B4, in a configuration in which a predetermined event occurs in a predetermined notification situation, that is, either winning a special role or displaying a predetermined stop result, a predetermined profit is awarded to the player, and the predetermined profit is not awarded even if the predetermined event occurs in a predetermined non-notification situation, a predetermined display notification is executed when the predetermined stop result is displayed in the predetermined non-notification situation. This makes it possible to prevent the player from becoming confused because the predetermined profit was not awarded even though the predetermined stop result was displayed in the predetermined non-notification situation.

Feature B5. A specific profit granting means for granting a specific profit to a player that is less advantageous to the player than the predetermined profit when the special role is won in the predetermined non-notification situation and the predetermined stop result is displayed (when the predetermined stop result is a combination of "red 7" symbols: a function for executing the replay profit of the main MPU 72 in the second embodiment, when the predetermined stop result is a combination of "BAR" symbols: a function for executing the replay profit of the main MPU 72 in the second embodiment and a function for executing the process of step S1604 or step S1608 of the main MPU 72),
The gaming machine according to feature B4, wherein the predetermined display notification is executed so as to enable the player to recognize that the specific benefit has been awarded.

According to feature B5, in a configuration in which a specific benefit that is less advantageous to the player than a specific benefit that is granted to the player when a specific event occurs in which a specific role is won and a specific stop result is displayed in a specific non-notification situation, the specific benefit is granted to the player, and when a specific event occurs in which a specific role is won and a specific stop result is displayed in a specific non-notification situation, a specific display notification is executed so that the player can recognize that a specific benefit has been granted. This makes it possible to make the player recognize that a specific benefit, not a specific benefit, has been granted when a specific role is won and a specific stop result is displayed in a specific non-notification situation.

Feature B6. The gaming machine according to Feature B5, wherein the specific benefit awarding means awards the specific benefit to the player when the special role is won in the specified non-notification situation, regardless of the stop result.

According to feature B6, in a configuration in which a specific benefit is awarded to a player when a special role is won in a specified non-notification situation regardless of the stop result, when a specific role is won in a specified non-notification situation and a specified stop result is displayed, a specified display notification is executed so that the player can recognize that a specific benefit has been awarded, so that the player can recognize that the display of a specified stop result in a specified non-notification situation does not affect the benefit.

Feature B7. A gaming machine according to Feature B5 or B6, characterized in that the specific benefit is a replay benefit.

Feature B7 makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects described above in a configuration in which the replay benefit is awarded as a specific benefit.

Feature B8. The picture display control means enables a specific stop result (a combination of "red 7" symbols, in this case, the predetermined stop result is a combination of "BAR" symbols) to be displayed based on the stop operation means being operated in a specific stop mode (a stop operation mode in which the right reel 32R is stopped first and a "red 7" symbol is aimed on the main line ML, in this case, the predetermined stop mode is a stop operation mode in which the right reel 32R is stopped first and a "BAR" symbol is aimed on the main line ML) when the special role is won;
This gaming machine is provided with a predetermined notification control means (a function for executing the processes of steps S1410 to S1411 of the main MPU 72 in the second embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S1502 of the presentation side MPU 92 in this case; the special notification control means is a function for executing the processes of steps S1412 to S1413 of the main MPU 72 in the second embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S1504 of the presentation side MPU 92) for executing a predetermined notification (red 7 notification, in this case, special notification BAR notification) that enables a player to recognize that he should operate the stop operation means in the specific stop mode when the special role is won in a specific notification target situation (the first half situation of the pseudo bonus state ST4, in this case, the predetermined notification target situation is the second half situation of the pseudo bonus state ST4),
A gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B7, wherein the predetermined non-notification situation is a situation in which the special role is won and the predetermined notification is executed.

According to feature B8, in a configuration in which a predetermined stop result is displayed based on the operation of the stop operation means in a predetermined stop mode when a special role is won, and a specific stop result is displayed based on the operation of the stop operation means in a specific stop mode, a special notification is executed to enable the player to recognize that the stop operation means should be operated in a predetermined stop mode when a special role is won in a predetermined notification target situation, and a predetermined notification is executed to enable the player to recognize that the stop operation means should be operated in a specific stop mode when a special role is won in a specific notification target situation. This makes it possible to vary the type of stop result that prompts the stop display in a situation in which a special role is won. In this case, when the stop operation means is operated in a predetermined stop mode and a predetermined stop result is displayed in a situation in which a predetermined notification is executed to enable the player to recognize that a special role is won in a specific notification target situation and the stop operation means should be operated in a specific stop mode, a predetermined display notification is executed. This makes it possible to enable the player to recognize that a stop result different from the stop result that was the target of notification has been displayed.

Feature B9. A predetermined profit granting means (a function for executing the process of step S1610 of the main MPU 72 in the second embodiment) that grants a predetermined profit to a player when a predetermined event occurs, which is either when the special role is won in the predetermined notification target situation or when the predetermined stop result is displayed;
A specific benefit granting means (a function for executing the process of step S1608 of the main MPU 72 in the second embodiment) for granting a specific benefit to a player when a specific event occurs, which is either when the special combination is won in the specific notification target situation or when the specific stop result is displayed;
Equipped with
The gaming machine described in feature B8, wherein the predetermined profit is more advantageous to the player than the specific profit.

According to feature B9, when a predetermined stop result corresponding to the award of a relatively highly advantageous predetermined benefit is displayed in a specific notification target situation in which a relatively less advantageous specific benefit may be awarded, a predetermined display notification is executed. This makes it possible to make the player aware that the benefit to be awarded is not the predetermined benefit.

Feature B10. A gaming machine according to feature B8 or B9, characterized in that it is provided with a means (a function for executing the process of step S1806 of the main MPU 72 in the third embodiment) for executing a specific display notification (a third irregular notification sound in the third embodiment) based on the fact that the special role is won in the specified notification target situation and the special notification is executed, but the stop operation means is operated in the specific stop mode to display the specific stop result.

According to feature B10, in a situation where a special notification is being executed to enable a player to recognize that a special role has been won in a specific notification situation and that the stop operation means should be operated in a specific stop mode, a specific display notification is executed if the stop operation means is operated in a specific stop mode and a specific stop result is displayed. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that a stop result different from the stop result that was the subject of the notification has been displayed.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A9, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F9, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H8, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J6, features K1 to K8, features L1 to L7, features M1 to M5, features N1 to N4, features O1 to O5, features P1 to P5, features Q1 to Q13, and features R1 to R5 may be applied to the features B1 to B10. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

<Characteristics Group C>
Feature C1. A symbol display means (reel unit 31) having a plurality of symbol display areas (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) that variably display symbols;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that is operated to start the variable display of the picture on the picture display means;
A game start means for setting a game execution status based on the operation of the start operation means (a function for making a positive determination in step S304 in the master MPU 72);
A role selection means (a function for selecting a role in the master MPU 72) for selecting a role when the game is in the execution state;
A stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) that is operated to stop the variable display of the picture in the picture display means;
A symbol display control means (a function of executing a reel control process in the main MPU 72) controls the symbol display means so that the display of the symbols is started when the game is in the execution state, and the display of the symbols is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means;
A winning response control means (a function of executing a medium granting process in the main MPU 72 and a response process at the end of a game) for executing a control corresponding to a winning role when a stop result corresponding to a winning role in the lottery process for the winning role is displayed after the changing display of the picture by the control of the picture display control means, as a winning corresponding to the winning role is established;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The winning combination in the lottery process is as follows:
A first winning combination (index value IV=17 in the second and third embodiments) that allows a first stop result (a combination of “red 7” symbols in the second and third embodiments) to be displayed when the variable display of the symbols in the plurality of symbol display areas is stopped in a predetermined stop order;
A second winning combination (index value IV=18 in the second and third embodiments) in which the first stopping result can be displayed when the variable display of the patterns in the plurality of pattern display areas is stopped in the predetermined stopping order, and a second stopping result (a combination of “BAR” patterns in the second and third embodiments) can be displayed when the first stopping result is not displayed;
A gaming machine characterized in that:

According to feature C1, when the first role is won, the first stop result can be displayed when the changing display of the pictures in the multiple picture display areas is stopped in a predetermined stop order, and when the second role is won, the first stop result can be displayed when the changing display of the pictures in the multiple picture display areas is stopped in a predetermined stop order, and the second stop result can be displayed when the first stop result is not displayed. This makes it possible to increase the probability that the first stop result can be displayed when the changing display of the pictures in the multiple picture display areas is stopped in a predetermined stop order in a situation different from the above-mentioned predetermined situation by using the second role for making the second stop result displayable when the changing display of the pictures in the multiple picture display areas is stopped in a predetermined stop order in a predetermined situation. If the probability of the first role is set to a predetermined probability in order to set the probability that the first stop result can be displayed to a predetermined probability, the first role will be won with the predetermined probability even in the above-mentioned predetermined situation. However, since the first stop result can be displayed even when the second role is won as described above, it is possible to set the probability that the first stop result can be displayed in the above-mentioned predetermined situation to a predetermined probability while setting the probability that the first stop result can be displayed in the above-mentioned predetermined situation to a lower probability than the predetermined probability. This effect can be achieved by using the second role that allows the second stop result to be displayed. This makes it possible to play the game in an optimal manner.

Feature C2. The gaming machine described in Feature C1, characterized in that the picture display control means enables the first stop result to be displayed when the variable display of the pictures in the multiple picture display areas is stopped in the predetermined stop order when the first role is won or the second role is won and the stop operation means is operated at a first operation timing (a timing aimed at the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML), and enables the second stop result to be displayed when the variable display of the pictures in the multiple picture display areas is stopped in the predetermined stop order when the second role is won and the stop operation means is operated at a second operation timing (a timing aimed at the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML).

According to feature C2, when the first role or the second role is won, the first stop result is displayed when the display of the changing patterns in the multiple picture display areas is stopped in a predetermined stop order and the stop operation means is operated at a first operation timing, and when the second role is won, the second stop result is displayed when the display of the changing patterns in the multiple picture display areas is stopped in a predetermined stop order and the stop operation means is operated at a second operation timing. As a result, in a configuration in which the first stop result can be displayed when the display of the changing patterns in the multiple picture display areas is stopped in a predetermined stop order and the second stop result can be displayed when the first stop result is not displayed when the second role is won, it is possible to make the stop result to be displayed different between the first stop result and the second stop result depending on the operation timing of the stop operation means.

Feature C3. A first notification control means (a function for executing the processes of steps S1406 to S1408 and steps S1410 to S1411 of the main MPU 72 in the second embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S1502 of the performance MPU 92) that stops the variable display of the patterns in the plurality of pattern display areas in the predetermined stop order and allows the player to recognize that the stop operation means should be operated at the first operation timing, regardless of whether the first role is won in the first notification target situation (the first half situation of the pseudo bonus state ST4) or the second role is won in the first notification target situation;
A second notification control means (a function for executing the processing of steps S1412 to S1413 of the main MPU 72 in the second embodiment, and a function for executing the processing of step S1504 of the presentation MPU 92) for executing a second notification that stops the variable display of the patterns in the plurality of pattern display areas in the predetermined stopping order and enables the player to recognize that he or she should operate the stop operation means at the second operation timing when the second role is won in the second notification target situation (the latter situation of the pseudo bonus state ST4);
The gaming machine described in feature C2 is characterized by being equipped with:

According to feature C3, in the first notification target situation, the display of the changing patterns in the multiple pattern display areas is stopped in a predetermined stop order regardless of whether the first role is won or the second role is won, and a first notification is executed to enable the player to recognize that the stop operation means should be operated at the first operation timing. This makes it possible to display the first stop result in the first notification target situation, regardless of whether the first role is won or the second role is won. On the other hand, in the second notification target situation, when the second role is won, the display of the changing patterns in the multiple pattern display areas is stopped in a predetermined stop order, and a second notification is executed to enable the player to recognize that the stop operation means should be operated at the second operation timing. This makes it possible to display the second stop result in the second notification target situation, regardless of whether the second role is won.

Feature C4. The gaming machine described in Feature C3, wherein the first notification control means executes the first notification when the first role is won in the second notification target situation.

According to feature C4, the first notification is executed not only in the first notification target situation but also in the second notification target situation when the first role is won, so it is possible to make it so that the first stop result is displayed when the first role is won in the first notification target situation. In other words, in the first notification target situation, the probability that the first stop result can be displayed is the sum of the winning probabilities of the first and second roles, whereas in the second notification target situation, the probability that the first stop result can be displayed corresponds to the winning probability of the first role and the probability that the second stop result can be displayed corresponds to the winning probability of the second role.

Feature C5. A gaming machine as described in Features C3 or C4, characterized in that in the first notification situation, the same first advantage (the value of the transition advantage counter in the main RAM 74 is incremented by 1) is awarded to the player regardless of whether the first role is won and the first stop result is displayed or the second role is won and the first stop result is displayed.

According to feature C5, the same first benefit is awarded to the player in either the case where the first role is won and the first stop result is displayed in the first notification target situation, or the case where the second role is won and the first stop result is displayed, so that it is possible to make the advantage of the first stop result being displayed in the first notification target situation constant in a configuration in which the player performs a stop operation so that the first stop result is displayed in either the case where the first role is won and the second role is won in the first notification target situation.

Feature C6. A gaming machine according to any one of features C3 to C5, characterized in that it is equipped with a first benefit granting means (a function for executing the processing of steps S1604 and S1608 of the main MPU 72 in the second embodiment) that grants a first benefit to a player in either the case where the first role is won or the case where the second role is won in the first notification target situation.

According to feature C6, if the first or second winning combination is won in the first notification situation, the first benefit is awarded to the player regardless of the stopping result after the image changes and is displayed, so it is possible to prevent the first benefit from being lost due to the player's mistake in stopping the reels.

Feature C7. A gaming machine as described in feature C5 or C6, characterized in that it is equipped with a second benefit granting means (a function for executing the process of step S1610 of the main MPU 72 in the second embodiment) that grants a player a second benefit (the value of the transition time advantageous counter in the main RAM 74 is incremented by 2) when a second target event occurs, which is either winning the second role or displaying the second stop result in the second notification target situation.

According to feature C7, the second benefit is granted to the player when a second target event occurs in the second notification target situation, which is either winning the second role or displaying the second stop result. Therefore, the player will expect the second target event to occur in the second notification target situation.

Feature C8. The gaming machine described in Feature C7, in which the second profit is more advantageous to the player than the first profit.

According to feature C8, since the second profit is more advantageous to the player than the first profit, the player will be more likely to expect the second target event to occur in the second notification target situation than to win the first or second role in the first notification target situation or to have the first stop result displayed in the first notification target situation.

Feature C9. The plurality of picture display areas include a left picture display area (left reel 32L), a center picture display area (center reel 32M), and a right picture display area (right reel 32R);
A gaming machine described in any one of features C1 to C8, characterized in that the picture display area that is the first to be targeted for stopping the varying display of the picture in the specified stopping sequence is a specified picture display area (right reel 32R) other than the left side picture display area.

According to feature C9, even if the first role is won, the first stop result will not be displayed unless the changing display of the patterns in the specified pattern display area other than the left pattern display area is stopped first, and even if the second role is won, the first stop result and the second stop result will not be displayed unless the changing display of the patterns in the specified pattern display area other than the left pattern display area is stopped first. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility that the first stop result and the second stop result will be displayed in a situation where the stopping order of the changing display of the patterns has not been notified.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A9, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F9, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H8, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J6, features K1 to K8, features L1 to L7, features M1 to M5, features N1 to N4, features O1 to O5, features P1 to P5, features Q1 to Q13, and features R1 to R5 may be applied to the features C1 to C9. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

The inventions in the above feature group B and feature group C can solve the following problems:

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, pachinko machines are equipped with a storage section for storing gaming balls, and the gaming balls stored in the storage section are guided to a gaming ball launching device and launched toward the gaming area in response to the player's launching operation. Then, for example, when a gaming ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, a lottery process is executed, or a process is executed to increase the number of gaming balls available to the player.

In a slot machine, when a game value such as medals has been bet and the start lever is operated to start a new game, a lottery process is executed by the control means. Also, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation stop control to stop the rotation of the reels. Then, if the stop result after the rotation of the reels has stopped corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is awarded to the player.

However, gaming machines such as those exemplified above need to ensure that play is carried out smoothly, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. A display unit (image display device 63 in the fourth and fifth embodiments) having a display unit (liquid crystal display unit 63a in the fourth and fifth embodiments),
A display storage means (memory module 101 in the fourth and fifth embodiments) in which image data is stored in advance;
and a display control means (the performance side MPU 92 and the VDP 103 in the fourth and fifth embodiments) for setting drawing data in a setting storage area (the first frame area 106 a and the second frame area 106 b in the fourth and fifth embodiments) using the image data, and displaying an image on the display unit based on an image signal corresponding to the drawing data outputted to the display means.
The display control means is provided with a predetermined drawing execution means (a function of executing the processes of steps S2502 to S2505 of VDP103 in the fourth embodiment, and a function of executing the processes of steps S2602 to S2606 of VDP103 in the fifth embodiment) that sets predetermined drawing data (image data D1 when divided) that enables predetermined corresponding images (video displays G21, G22 for performance, award number notification display G23) to be displayed in each of a first setting area (first partitioned area DA1 when divided into two) in the setting memory area that corresponds to the first display area (left area A1) in the display unit, and a second setting area (second partitioned area DA2 when divided into two) in the setting memory area that corresponds to the second display area (right area A2) in the display unit.

According to feature D1, predetermined drawing data is set in each of the first and second setting areas in the setting memory area, and a predetermined corresponding image is displayed in each of the first and second display areas on the display unit. As a result, when displaying a predetermined corresponding image in each of the first and second display areas on the display unit, it is only necessary to set the same predetermined drawing data in each of the first and second setting areas using the same image data. This makes it possible to perform display on the display means in an optimal manner.

Feature D2. The gaming machine described in Feature D1, characterized in that the predetermined drawing execution means includes copy execution means (a function for executing the process of step S2505 of VDP103 in the fourth embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S2606 of VDP103 in the fifth embodiment) that copies the predetermined drawing data to the second setting area.

According to feature D2, the predetermined drawing data is set in the second setting area by copying the predetermined drawing data to the second setting area. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load compared to a configuration in which the predetermined drawing data is set for each of the first setting area and the second setting area using image data.

Feature D3. The predetermined drawing execution means includes a means for setting the predetermined drawing data in the first setting area by using the image data (a function for executing the process of step S2504 of the VDP 103 in the fourth embodiment);
The gaming machine described in feature D2, wherein the copy execution means copies the specified drawing data set in the first setting area to the second setting area.

According to feature D3, the predetermined drawing data is set in the second setting area by copying the predetermined drawing data set in the first setting area using image data to the second setting area. This makes it possible to set the predetermined drawing data in the second setting process using the predetermined drawing data set in the first setting area.

Feature D4: The predetermined drawing execution means includes a means for setting the predetermined drawing data in a memory area (development buffer 105) different from the setting memory area by using the image data (a function for executing the process of step S2604 of VDP 103 in the fifth embodiment);
The gaming machine described in feature D2, wherein the copy execution means copies the specified drawing data set in the different memory areas to each of the first setting area and the second setting area.

According to feature D4, the specified drawing data is set in a memory area different from the setting memory area using image data, and the set specified drawing data is copied to each of the first setting area and the second setting area. This makes it possible to create the specified drawing data to be copied to the first setting area and the second setting area without performing a drawing process in the setting memory area.

Feature D5. The display control means, in addition to displaying the predetermined corresponding image in each of the first display area and the second display area, sets in the setting memory area different corresponding drawing data (image data D2 corresponding to the remaining number of games to be continued image G31, image data D3 corresponding to the number of acquisitions display image G32, image data D4 corresponding to the remaining number of awards display image G33, image data corresponding to the stop order notification image G34, and image data D5 corresponding to the operation notification image G35) that enables different corresponding images (remaining number of games to be continued image G31, image data D3 corresponding to the number of acquisitions display image G32, image data D4 corresponding to the remaining number of awards display image G33, image data corresponding to the stop order notification image G34, and image data D5 corresponding to the operation notification image G35) that are not images displayed with the same content in each of the first display area and the second display area. A gaming machine described in any one of features D1 to D4, characterized in that it is equipped with a different corresponding setting means (a function for executing the processing of steps S2506 to S2513 of the VDP 103 in the fourth embodiment, and a function for executing the processing of steps S2607 to S2614 of the VDP 103 in the fifth embodiment).

Feature D5 makes it possible to display a corresponding image in each of the first and second display areas while displaying a different corresponding image that is not an image with the same content in each of the first and second display areas.

Feature D6. The gaming machine described in Feature D5, wherein the different correspondence setting means sets the different correspondence drawing data in a setting area including the first setting area and the second setting area so that the different correspondence image is displayed in a display area including the first display area and the second display area.

According to feature D6, the different corresponding image is displayed in a display area including the first display area and the second display area, so that while the first display area and the second display area are partitioned, it is possible to perform display that is not limited by the partitions.

Feature D7. The gaming machine described in Feature D6, characterized in that the different corresponding setting means sets the different corresponding drawing data in a setting area including the first setting area and the second setting area after the predetermined drawing data is set in each of the first setting area and the second setting area.

According to feature D7, after the predetermined drawing data is set in each of the first and second setting areas, different corresponding drawing data is set in the setting area including the first and second setting areas, so that the different corresponding image is displayed in front of the predetermined corresponding image displayed in each section of the first and second display areas, without being restricted by the sections of the first and second display areas. This makes it possible to draw the player's attention to each of the predetermined corresponding images displayed in each of the first and second display areas, and the different corresponding image displayed without being restricted by the sections of the first and second display areas.

Feature D8. The gaming machine according to any one of Features D1 to D7, characterized in that the display control means includes a means for setting specific drawing data in a setting area including the first setting area and the second setting area, which enables a specific corresponding image to be displayed in a display area including the first display area and the second display area (a function for causing the display shown in Figures 27(a) to 27(c) in VDP103 to be performed).

Feature D8 also makes it possible to create a display period in which a specific corresponding image is displayed when the first and second display areas are not partitioned.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A9, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F9, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H8, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J6, features K1 to K8, features L1 to L7, features M1 to M5, features N1 to N4, features O1 to O5, features P1 to P5, features Q1 to Q13, and features R1 to R5 may be applied to the features D1 to D8. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

<Features Group E>
Feature E1. A display unit (image display device 63 in the fourth and fifth embodiments) having a display unit (liquid crystal display unit 63a in the fourth and fifth embodiments),
A display control means (the performance side MPU 92 and the VDP 103 in the fourth and fifth embodiments) for displaying an image on the display unit;
Equipped with
The display control means is a section-corresponding control means (a function for executing display control processing for the top-up period of the presentation side MPU 92 in the fourth and fifth embodiments and a function for executing drawing processing of the divided images of the VDP 103) that controls the display means so that the display unit is divided into a plurality of display areas (a left area A1 and a right area A2 when divided into two, an upper left area A11, an upper right area A12, a lower left area A13 and a lower right area A14 when divided into four), and a section-side image (an animation display G21, G22 for presentation and a number of awards notification display G23 when divided into two, an animation display G41, G42 for presentation and a number of awards notification display G43 when divided into four) is displayed in each of the plurality of display areas, and a different corresponding image (a remaining number of continued games image G31, a number of acquisitions display image G32, a remaining number of awards display image G33, a stop order notification image G34 and an operation notification image G35) that is not an image displayed with the same content is displayed in each of the plurality of display areas.

According to feature E1, when a partition side image is displayed in each of a plurality of display areas partitioned in the display unit, a different corresponding image, which is not an image displayed with the same content, is displayed in each of the plurality of display areas. This makes it possible to provide display content different from the partition side image by using a different corresponding image displayed independently of the plurality of display areas, while drawing attention to the partition side image displayed in each of the plurality of display areas. This makes it possible to ensure that the display on the display means is performed optimally.

Feature E2. The gaming machine described in Feature E1, characterized in that the different corresponding image is displayed as if it exists in front of the multiple display areas.

According to feature E2, in a configuration in which a separate corresponding image is displayed while a partition side image is displayed in each of a plurality of display areas, the separate corresponding image is displayed as if it is in front of the plurality of display areas, making it possible to make the separate corresponding image stand out.

Feature E3. The gaming machine according to feature E1 or E2, characterized in that the different corresponding image is displayed across multiple display areas so as to straddle the boundaries between the multiple display areas.

According to feature E3, the partition side images are displayed within the range of their respective display areas, while the separate corresponding images are displayed across the boundaries of the multiple display areas. This makes it possible to display the separate corresponding images at a size larger than the partition side images.

Feature E4. A gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, characterized in that the separate corresponding image is an image for notifying the player of a predetermined content.

According to feature E4, the separate corresponding images for notifying the player of the specified content are displayed independently without being restricted to multiple display areas, making it possible to optimally notify the player of the specified content.

Feature E5. The display control means is provided with a means for displaying an after-operation image (G23 for the number of awards when split into two, G43 for the number of awards when split into four) on the display unit based on the operation of the operation means (operation device for performance 121) during the operation valid period (a function for displaying the image shown in FIG. 43(c) or FIG. 44(c) in VDP 103);
A gaming machine described in any one of features E1 to E4, wherein the different corresponding image is an image that enables a player to recognize that he or she should operate the operating means during the valid operation period.

According to feature E5, the different corresponding image that allows the player to recognize that the operation means should be operated during the valid operation period is displayed independently without being limited to multiple display areas, so that it is possible to preferably notify the player that the operation means should be operated during the valid operation period.

Feature E6. A gaming machine according to any one of Features E1 to E5, characterized in that the number of display areas displayed as the multiple display areas differs between the first display state (when divided into two) and the second display state (when divided into four).

According to feature E6, the number of display areas displayed as multiple display areas differs between the first display status and the second display status, making it possible to diversify the display content when displaying partition side images using multiple display areas.

Feature E7. A gaming machine according to any one of Features E1 to E6, characterized in that the partition side images in each of the plurality of display areas are displayed using the same image data.

According to feature E7, the partition side images in each of the multiple display areas are displayed using the same image data, making it possible to display the partition side images while reducing the processing load.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A9, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F9, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H8, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J6, features K1 to K8, features L1 to L7, features M1 to M5, features N1 to N4, features O1 to O5, features P1 to P5, features Q1 to Q13, and features R1 to R5 may be applied to the features E1 to E7. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

The inventions in the above feature group D and feature group E can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, pachinko machines are equipped with a storage section for storing gaming balls, and the gaming balls stored in the storage section are guided to a gaming ball launching device and launched toward the gaming area in response to the player's launching operation. Then, for example, when a gaming ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, a lottery process is executed, or a process is executed to increase the number of gaming balls available to the player.

In a slot machine, when a game value such as medals has been bet and the start lever is operated to start a new game, a lottery process is executed by the control means. Also, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation stop control to stop the rotation of the reels. Then, if the stop result after the rotation of the reels has stopped corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is awarded to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, the display on the display means needs to be performed appropriately, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Feature Group F>
Feature F1. A game round control means (a function for executing the processing of steps S305 to S312 in the master MPU 72) that controls the execution of each game round so that a game round (game) starts based on the occurrence of a predetermined start trigger (operation of the start lever 41 when gaming media are bet) and ends based on the occurrence of a predetermined end trigger (rotation stop operation by the stop buttons 42 to 44 for all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R);
a warning event control means for executing a predetermined warning event (warning display by displaying a warning image G52) that allows a player to be alerted to a predetermined warning in response to the occurrence of a predetermined target game round (in the sixth embodiment, a final game of the pseudo bonus state ST4 that does not transition to the AT state ST5, in the eighth embodiment, a game in which the remaining number of awards in the AT state ST5 becomes "0" or a game in which an ending condition is established) (in the sixth embodiment, a function for executing control processing of the warning display in the presentation side MPU 92; in the eighth embodiment, a function for executing processing of steps S4103 and S4109 in the presentation side MPU 92; in the ninth embodiment, a function for executing processing of steps S4305 and S4309 in the presentation side MPU 92);
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that, when a next game turn is started for the game turn of the predetermined target while the predetermined attention event is being executed, the execution of the predetermined attention event can be continued.

According to feature F1, a predetermined caution event is executed in response to the occurrence of a predetermined target game turn, so it is possible to alert the player to a predetermined caution in response to the occurrence of a predetermined target game turn. In this case, if the next game turn for the predetermined target game turn is started while the predetermined caution event is being executed, the execution of the predetermined caution event can be continued. This makes it possible to create a situation in which the execution of the predetermined caution event continues without being terminated when a new game turn is executed, and it is possible to ensure an opportunity for the player to be aware of the predetermined caution event.

Feature F2. The gaming machine described in Feature F1, wherein the predetermined caution event is an event that can alert the player to avoid becoming addicted to the game.

According to feature F2, by executing a predetermined warning event, it becomes possible to warn the player against becoming addicted to the game. And by having the configuration of feature F1, it becomes possible to guarantee the opportunity for the player to recognize the event that warns the player against becoming addicted to the game.

Feature F3. A gaming machine according to feature F1 or F2, characterized in that a situation may occur in which the execution of the predetermined caution event is completed before the next game round is started for the predetermined target game round.

According to feature F3, it is possible to generate a situation in which the execution of the specified caution event is terminated before the next game round for the specified target game round is started, in addition to the case where the execution of the specified caution event is continued when the next game round for the specified target game round is started. This makes it possible to diversify the relationship between the execution of the specified caution event and the game round.

Feature F4. A gaming machine according to any one of Features F1 to F3, characterized in that the attention event control means includes a means for terminating the execution of the predetermined attention event based on the lapse of a predetermined duration period that has been determined in advance since the execution of the predetermined attention event was started (a function for executing the processing of step S3009 of the presentation side MPU 92 in the sixth embodiment).

According to feature F4, the specified attention event ends when a predetermined duration has elapsed since the start of its execution, making it possible to reliably ensure that the player has a period of time during which to check the specified attention event over the predetermined duration, and also to reduce the processing load for identifying the trigger for the end of the specified attention event.

Feature F5. A gaming machine according to any one of Features F1 to F4, characterized in that the predetermined target game round is a game round when a predetermined game state (pseudo bonus state ST4 in the sixth embodiment, AT state ST5 in the eighth and ninth embodiments) ends.

According to feature F5, in a configuration in which a predetermined target play round occurs when a predetermined play state ends, a predetermined caution event is executed in response to the occurrence of the predetermined target play round, making it possible to alert the player to a predetermined caution when the predetermined play state ends.

Feature F6. A termination control means (a function for executing the processing of steps S2804 and S2903 in the presentation side MPU 92 in the sixth embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S4102 and S4108 in the presentation side MPU 92 in the eighth embodiment, and a function for executing the processing of steps S4302, S4304, S4309, and S4310 in the presentation side MPU 92 in the ninth embodiment) is provided for performing a termination corresponding display (a bonus termination display in the sixth embodiment, an AT termination display in the eighth embodiment, an end indicating image G61, a total number of games image G62, and a total number of acquisitions image G63 in the ninth embodiment) corresponding to the termination of the predetermined game state when the predetermined game state is terminated,
A gaming machine according to feature F5, characterized in that the execution period of the specified attention event may overlap with all or part of the execution period of the termination response display.

According to feature F6, when the specified game state ends, an end-related display is displayed, making it possible for the player to clearly recognize that the specified game state is ending. In this case, the execution period of the specified attention event may overlap with all or part of the execution period of the end-related display. This makes it possible for a player who is paying attention to the end-related display to also be aware of the specified attention event.

Feature F7. The gaming machine described in Feature F6, characterized in that the attention event control means includes a means for starting the predetermined attention event in a situation where the end-response display is being executed (a function for executing the processing of step S2805 and steps S3002 to S3004 of the presentation side MPU 92 in the sixth embodiment).

According to feature F7, a predetermined caution event is initiated when the end-response display is being executed, making it possible for the player to recognize that the predetermined caution event was executed in response to the end of a predetermined game state.

Feature F8. A gaming machine according to feature F6 or F7, characterized in that a situation may occur in which the predetermined attention event ends before the execution of the end-response display ends, and a situation in which the predetermined attention event ends after the execution of the end-response display ends.

According to feature F8, a situation may occur in which the specified attention event ends before the execution of the end-response display is completed, and a situation in which the specified attention event ends after the execution of the end-response display is completed, so it is possible to diversify the timing at which the specified attention event ends in relation to the end timing of the end-response display.

Feature F9. A gaming machine according to any one of Features F6 to F8, characterized in that the end response control means includes a means for ending the end response display based on the occurrence of a specific trigger (bet setting for gaming media) required to start a new game round while the end response display is being executed (a function for executing the process of step S2903 of the presentation side MPU 92 in the sixth embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S4108 of the presentation side MPU 92 in the eighth embodiment, and a function for executing the processes of steps S4309 and S4310 of the presentation side MPU 92 in the ninth embodiment).

According to feature F9, when the end-response display is being executed, the end-response display is terminated based on the occurrence of a specific trigger required to start a new round of play, so it is possible to prevent the end-response display from continuing for an excessively long period of time.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A9, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F9, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H8, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J6, features K1 to K8, features L1 to L7, features M1 to M5, features N1 to N4, features O1 to O5, features P1 to P5, features Q1 to Q13, and features R1 to R5 may be applied to the features F1 to F9. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

<Feature Group G>
Feature G1. A predetermined game progress means (a function for executing the reel control process of the main MPU 72) that progresses a predetermined game based on the operation of the player (the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R based on the execution of the lottery process (FIG. 13) triggered by the operation of the start lever 41 and the stopping of the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R triggered by the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44);
A restriction generating means (a function of executing the processes of steps S3116, S3117, S3212, and S3213 of the master MPU 72 in the sixth embodiment) for generating a progress restriction state (a freeze period in the sixth embodiment) in which the start or progress of the predetermined game is restricted based on the occurrence of a restriction trigger (the end of the final game in the AT state ST5 in the sixth embodiment);
A warning event control means for executing a predetermined warning event (warning display by displaying a warning image G52) that allows a player to be alerted to a predetermined warning in the progress restriction situation (in the sixth embodiment, a function for executing a control process for warning display in the AT state ST5 in the performance side MPU 92);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature G1, it is possible to draw the player's attention to a specific target event by executing the specific target event. In this case, since the specific attention event is executed in a progress restriction situation in which the start or progress of a specific game is restricted, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the specific attention event.

Feature G2. The gaming machine described in Feature G1, wherein the predetermined caution event is an event that can alert the player to avoid becoming addicted to the game.

According to feature G2, a predetermined caution event is executed, making it possible to warn the player against becoming addicted to the game. And, by having the configuration of feature G1, it becomes possible to draw the player's attention to an event that warns the player against becoming addicted to the game.

Feature G3. The gaming machine described in Feature G1 or G2, wherein the attention event control means starts the execution of the predetermined attention event after the progress restriction situation starts.

According to feature G3, the execution of a specified caution event is started after a progress restriction situation is started, so it is possible to start the execution of a specified caution event in a situation where the progress of a specified game is restricted.

Feature G4. The gaming machine described in any one of Features G1 to G3, wherein the attention event control means causes the execution of the predetermined attention event to end before the progress restriction situation ends.

According to feature G4, the execution of the specified caution event ends before the progress restriction situation ends, making it possible to prevent the specified game from progressing in the middle of the specified caution event.

Feature G5. A gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G4, characterized in that the attention event control means includes a means for terminating the execution of the predetermined attention event based on the lapse of a predetermined duration period that has been determined in advance since the execution of the predetermined attention event was started (a function for executing the processing of step S3009 of the presentation side MPU 92 in the sixth embodiment).

According to feature G5, the specified attention event ends when a predetermined duration has elapsed since the start of its execution, making it possible to reliably ensure that the player has a period of time during which to check the specified attention event over the predetermined duration, and also to reduce the processing load for identifying the trigger for the end of the specified attention event.

Feature G6. The restriction generating means generates the progress restriction situation when a predetermined gaming state (AT state ST5 in the sixth embodiment) ends;
A gaming machine described in any one of features G1 to G5, characterized in that the attention event control means causes the specified attention event to be executed in the progress restriction situation when the specified gaming state ends.

According to feature G6, when a predetermined game state ends, a progress restriction state occurs and a predetermined caution event is executed in the progress restriction state. This makes it possible to prompt the player to give a predetermined caution when the predetermined game state ends.

Feature G7. Equipped with an end response control means (a function for executing the processing of steps S2804 and S2903 of the performance side MPU 92 in the sixth embodiment) for displaying an end response display (AT end display in the sixth embodiment) corresponding to the end of the predetermined game state when the predetermined game state ends,
A gaming machine as described in feature G6, characterized in that the end-response display can be continued even after the progress restriction situation has ended.

According to feature G7, when the predetermined game state ends, an end-response display is displayed, so that the player can clearly recognize that the predetermined game state ends. In this case, the end-response display can be continued even after the progress restriction situation ends, so that the player can clearly recognize that the predetermined game state has ended.

Feature G8. The gaming machine described in Feature G7 is characterized in that the attention event control means includes a means for starting the specified attention event in a situation where the end-response display is being executed (a function for executing the processing of step S2805 and steps S3002 to S3004 of the presentation side MPU 92 in the sixth embodiment).

According to feature G8, a predetermined attention event is initiated when the end-response display is being executed, making it possible for the player to recognize that the predetermined attention event was executed in response to the end of a predetermined game state.

Feature G9. The gaming machine according to feature G7 or G8, characterized in that the end response control means includes a means (a function for executing the process of step S2903 of the presentation side MPU 92 in the sixth embodiment) for terminating the end response display based on the occurrence of a specific trigger (a bet setting on gaming media) necessary to start a new game round when the progress restriction state ends while the end response display is being executed.

According to feature G9, when the end-response display is being executed, the end-response display is terminated based on the occurrence of a specific trigger required to start a new round of play, so it is possible to prevent the end-response display from continuing for an excessively long period of time.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A9, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F9, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H8, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J6, features K1 to K8, features L1 to L7, features M1 to M5, features N1 to N4, features O1 to O5, features P1 to P5, features Q1 to Q13, and features R1 to R5 may be applied to the features G1 to G9. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

<Feature H Group>
Feature H1. A first warning event control means (a function for executing the process of step S3310 of the performance side MPU 92 in the sixth embodiment and the control process of the warning display) that allows a predetermined warning event (warning display by displaying the warning image G52) to be executed when a predetermined game state (AT state ST5 in the sixth and seventh embodiments) is ended,
A second warning event control means for executing the predetermined warning event when the predetermined game state continues (in the sixth embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S3404 and S3408 in the presentation side MPU 92 and a function for executing the control processing of the warning display, and in the seventh embodiment, a function for executing step S3504 in the presentation side MPU 92 and the control processing of the warning display);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature H1, a predetermined caution event is executed when a predetermined game state ends, making it possible to prompt the player to give a predetermined caution when the predetermined game state ends. In addition, by executing the predetermined caution event even when the predetermined game state continues, it is possible to increase the frequency with which the predetermined caution event is executed.

Feature H2. The gaming machine described in Feature H1, wherein the predetermined caution event is an event that can alert the player to avoid becoming addicted to the game.

According to feature H2, a predetermined caution event is executed, making it possible to warn the player against becoming addicted to the game. And by having the configuration of feature H1, it is possible to diversify the situations in which an event occurs that warns the player against becoming addicted to the game.

Feature H3. A means for generating a revival-responsive performance (a revival-responsive performance in the sixth and seventh embodiments) in which a performance is executed to enable the player to recognize that the predetermined game state will actually continue after a performance is executed to enable the player to recognize that the predetermined game state may end even if the predetermined game state continues (a function for executing the processing of steps S3401 to S3407 in the performance-side MPU 92 in the sixth embodiment, and a function for executing the processing of steps S3501 to S3507 in the performance-side MPU 92 in the seventh embodiment),
The gaming machine according to feature H1 or H2, wherein the second caution event control means causes the predetermined caution event to be executed in a situation in which the revival-responsive performance occurs.

According to feature H3, by executing the revival-responsive performance, it is possible to provide an element of surprise in that the predetermined game state actually continues after the player is led to believe that the predetermined game state has ended. In this case, in a situation in which the revival-responsive performance occurs, a predetermined caution event is executed in the same way as when the predetermined game state actually ends, making it easier for the player to believe that the predetermined game state will end in a situation in which a performance is being executed in the revival-responsive performance that allows the player to recognize that the predetermined game state may end.

Feature H4. The first attention event control means includes a first end means (a function of executing the processes of steps S3005 to S3009 of the performance side MPU 92 in the sixth embodiment) that ends the execution of the predetermined attention event based on the occurrence of a first end trigger (the passage of a predetermined display duration),
A gaming machine described in any one of features H1 to H3, characterized in that the second attention event control means is equipped with a second termination means (a function of executing the processing of step S3408 of the presentation side MPU 92 in the sixth embodiment) that terminates the execution of the specified attention event based on the occurrence of a second termination trigger (bet setting on a gaming medium) different from the first termination trigger.

According to feature H4, by differentiating the end conditions for a predetermined attention event that is executed when a predetermined game state ends and a predetermined attention event that is executed when a predetermined game state continues, it is possible to make the end conditions for the predetermined attention event appropriate for each situation.

Feature H5. The gaming machine described in Feature H4, wherein the second attention event control means terminates the execution of the predetermined attention event based on the occurrence of a first termination trigger.

According to feature H5, the predetermined attention event executed when the predetermined game state continues ends not only when the second end trigger occurs but also when the first end trigger occurs. This makes it possible for the predetermined attention event executed when the predetermined game state continues to end with the same trigger as the predetermined attention event executed when the predetermined game state ends, but also to end with a different trigger.

Feature H6. The gaming machine described in Feature H4 or H5, characterized in that the first termination trigger is the passage of a predetermined duration (predetermined display duration) from the start of the execution of the predetermined attention event.

According to feature H6, the specified attention event that is executed when the specified game state ends is ended based on the fact that a predetermined duration has elapsed since the start of its execution. This makes it possible to reliably ensure that the player has a period of time during which to check the specified attention event over the specified duration, and also makes it possible to reduce the processing load for identifying the trigger for the end of the specified attention event.

Feature H7. A gaming machine according to any one of Features H4 to H6, characterized in that the second termination trigger is the occurrence of a specific trigger (a bet setting on gaming media) required to start a new round of play.

According to feature H7, the predetermined attention event that is executed when the predetermined game state continues is terminated based on the occurrence of a specific trigger required to start a new game round, so it is possible to prevent the predetermined attention event from continuing in a situation where a new game round has started.

Feature H8. A predetermined game progress means (a function for executing reel control processing of the main MPU 72) for progressing a predetermined game based on the operation of a player (the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R based on the execution of a lottery process for a role (FIG. 13) triggered by the operation of the start lever 41 and the stopping of the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R triggered by the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44);
A restriction generating means (a function of executing the processes of steps S3116, S3117, S3212, and S3213 of the master MPU 72 in the sixth embodiment) for generating a progress restriction state (a freeze period in the sixth embodiment) in which the start or progress of the predetermined game is restricted based on the occurrence of a restriction trigger (the end of the final game in the AT state ST5 in the sixth embodiment);
Equipped with
The first attention event control means causes the predetermined attention event to be executed in the progress restriction situation,
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H7, wherein the second caution event control means causes the specified caution event to be executed in a situation other than the progress restriction situation.

According to feature H8, the predetermined caution event executed when the predetermined game state ends is executed in a progress restriction situation in which the start or progress of the predetermined game is restricted, so it is possible to prevent the predetermined game from starting or progressing in the middle of the execution of the predetermined caution event. On the other hand, the predetermined caution event executed when the predetermined game state continues is executed in a situation in which there is no progress restriction situation, so it is possible to start or progress the predetermined game even in the middle of the execution of the predetermined caution event.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A9, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F9, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H8, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J6, features K1 to K8, features L1 to L7, features M1 to M5, features N1 to N4, features O1 to O5, features P1 to P5, features Q1 to Q13, and features R1 to R5 may be applied to the features H1 to H8. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

The inventions in the above feature group F, feature group G, and feature group H can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, pachinko machines are equipped with a storage section for storing gaming balls, and the gaming balls stored in the storage section are guided to a gaming ball launching device and launched toward the gaming area in response to the player's launching operation. Then, for example, when a gaming ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, a lottery process is executed, or a process is executed to increase the number of gaming balls available to the player.

In a slot machine, when a game value such as medals has been bet and the start lever is operated to start a new game, a lottery process is executed by the control means. Also, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation stop control to stop the rotation of the reels. Then, if the stop result after the rotation of the reels has stopped corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is awarded to the player.

Here, it is necessary to ensure that gaming machines such as those exemplified above can be played properly, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Characteristics Group I>
Feature I1. A situation setting means (a function for executing the processing of step S705 in the main MPU 72) for setting a favorable transition possible situation (second section SC2);
When the advantageous transition is possible, advantageous transition means (a function for executing the process of step S604 of the master MPU 72, a function for executing the process of steps S2706 and S2707 of the master MPU 72 in the sixth embodiment) for transitioning the game state to an advantageous game state (pseudo bonus state ST4, AT state ST5 in the sixth embodiment) advantageous to the player;
A favorable notification control means (a function for executing the process of step S714 in the main MPU 72) for controlling the favorable notification means (the section display unit 67) so as to be in a notification state (lighting state) in the favorable transition possible situation;
a notification termination means (a function for executing the processes of steps S2710, S3119 and S3215 of the main MPU 72 in the sixth embodiment) for terminating the notification state in the advantageous notification means based on the occurrence of a specific trigger in the game when the advantageous transition possible situation ends (in the sixth embodiment, the stopping of rotation of all reels 32L, 32M and 32R in the case of pseudo bonus state ST4, and the end of a freeze period in the case of AT state ST5);
Equipped with
As the trigger for the end of the advantageous transition possible situation, at least a first situation end trigger (when the second section SC2 ends with the end of the pseudo bonus state ST4 in the sixth embodiment) and a second situation end trigger (when the second section SC2 ends with the end of the AT state ST5 in the sixth embodiment) exist,
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific trigger is different between a case where the advantageous transition possible situation ends based on the occurrence of the first situation ending trigger and a case where the advantageous transition possible situation ends based on the occurrence of the second situation ending trigger.

According to feature I1, the game state can transition to an advantageous game state when an advantageous transition is possible, so the player will hope that the advantageous transition will occur. In addition, by providing an advantageous notification means that becomes a notification state when an advantageous transition is possible, it is possible to know whether or not an advantageous transition is possible by checking the advantageous notification means. In this case, in a configuration in which at least a first status end trigger and a second status end trigger exist as triggers for ending an advantageous transition possible status, the specific trigger that ends the notification state in the advantageous notification means among the various triggers that occur in the game is different between a case in which the advantageous transition possible status ends based on the occurrence of the first status end trigger and a case in which the advantageous transition possible status ends based on the occurrence of the second status end trigger. This makes it possible to set the timing for ending the notification state in the advantageous notification means to an appropriate timing that corresponds to the type of trigger for ending the advantageous transition possible status.

Feature I2. As the advantageous gaming state, there are at least a first advantageous gaming state (pseudo bonus state ST4) and a second advantageous gaming state (AT state ST5) which have relatively different advantageous degrees,
The first situation end trigger is a trigger for ending the advantageous transition possible situation in response to the end of the first advantageous game state,
The gaming machine described in feature I1, wherein the second situation ending trigger is a trigger for the advantageous transition possible situation to end in response to the end of the second advantageous gaming state.

According to feature I2, the specific trigger that ends the notification state of the advantageous notification means among the various triggers that occur in the game differs between the case where the advantageous transition possible state ends in response to the end of a first advantageous game state and the case where the advantageous transition possible state ends in response to the end of a second advantageous game state. This makes it possible to set the timing for ending the notification state of the advantageous notification means to an appropriate timing that corresponds to the type of advantageous game state that triggers the end of the advantageous transition possible state.

Feature I3. Equipped with a picture display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) that variably displays pictures in each game,
The gaming machine described in feature I1 or I2, wherein the specific trigger when the advantageous transition possible situation ends based on the occurrence of the first situation end trigger, and the specific trigger when the advantageous transition possible situation ends based on the occurrence of the second situation end trigger, both occur at a timing after the timing when the varying display of the picture ends.

According to feature I3, the specific trigger when the advantageous transition possible situation ends based on the occurrence of a first situation ending trigger, and the specific trigger when the advantageous transition possible situation ends based on the occurrence of a second situation ending trigger, both occur at a timing after the timing when the display of the changing patterns ends. This makes it possible to prevent the notification state of the advantageous notification means from ending while the display of the changing patterns is being performed, even if the timing for ending the notification state of the advantageous notification means is configured to correspond to the type of trigger for the end of the advantageous transition possible situation.

Feature I4. A gaming machine according to any one of Features I1 to I3, characterized in that the second specific trigger (the end of a freeze period in the sixth embodiment) which is the specific trigger when the advantageous transition possible situation ends based on the occurrence of the second situation ending trigger is a trigger that occurs later within one game than the first specific trigger (the stopping of rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the sixth embodiment) which is the specific trigger when the advantageous transition possible situation ends based on the occurrence of the first situation ending trigger.

According to feature I4, when the advantageous transition possible situation ends based on the occurrence of a second situation ending trigger, the notification state of the advantageous notification means ends based on the occurrence of a specific trigger that occurs at a later timing within one game than when the advantageous transition possible situation ends based on the occurrence of a first situation ending trigger. This makes it possible to vary the period during which the notification state of the advantageous notification means continues in the game in which it ends, depending on the type of trigger that ends the advantageous transition possible situation.

Feature I5. The gaming machine described in Feature I4, characterized in that the second specific trigger occurs when a specific period (freeze period) has elapsed since the occurrence of the first specific trigger.

According to feature I5, when a situation in which a favorable transition is possible ends due to the occurrence of a second situation ending trigger, it is possible to reliably ensure that the period during which the notification state of the advantageous notification means continues in a game in which the notification state of the advantageous notification means ends is longer than when a situation in which a favorable transition is possible ends due to the occurrence of a first situation ending trigger.

Feature I6. A predetermined game progress means (a function for executing reel control processing of the main MPU 72) for progressing a predetermined game based on the operation of the player (the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R based on the execution of a lottery process (FIG. 13) triggered by the operation of the start lever 41 and the stopping of the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R triggered by the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44);
A restriction generating means (a function of executing the processes of steps S3116, S3117, S3212, and S3213 of the master MPU 72 in the sixth embodiment) for generating a progress restriction state (a freeze period in the sixth embodiment) in which the start or progress of the predetermined game is restricted based on the occurrence of the first specific opportunity;
Equipped with
The gaming machine described in feature I4 or I5, wherein the second specific trigger is the lifting of the progress restriction situation.

According to feature I6, in a configuration in which a progress restriction situation can occur based on the occurrence of a first specific trigger in one game, if a situation in which an advantageous transition is possible ends based on the occurrence of a second situation ending trigger, the notification state of the advantageous notification means ends when the progress restriction situation is lifted. This makes it possible to prevent a new game from starting before the notification state of the advantageous notification means ends in a configuration in which the period during which the notification state of the advantageous notification means continues is varied in a game in which the notification state of the advantageous notification means ends depending on the type of trigger that ends the situation in which an advantageous transition is possible.

Feature I7. As the advantageous gaming state, there are at least a first advantageous gaming state (pseudo bonus state ST4) and a second advantageous gaming state (AT state ST5) which is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous gaming state;
The first situation end trigger is a trigger for ending the advantageous transition possible situation in response to the end of the first advantageous game state,
A gaming machine described in any one of features I4 to I6, characterized in that the second situation ending trigger is a trigger for the advantageous transition possible situation to end in response to the end of the second advantageous gaming state.

According to feature I7, in a game in which the notification state of the advantageous notification means ends, the timing of the end of the notification state is later in a case in which the advantageous transition possible situation ends in response to the end of a second advantageous game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous game state, than in a case in which the advantageous transition possible situation ends in response to the end of the first advantageous game state. This makes it possible to ensure a longer period for which the notification state of the advantageous notification means continues when the advantageous transition possible situation ends in response to the end of a relatively advantageous game state.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A9, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F9, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H8, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J6, features K1 to K8, features L1 to L7, features M1 to M5, features N1 to N4, features O1 to O5, features P1 to P5, features Q1 to Q13, and features R1 to R5 may be applied to the features I1 to I7. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

The inventions in Group I above can solve the following problems:

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, pachinko machines are equipped with a storage section for storing gaming balls, and the gaming balls stored in the storage section are guided to a gaming ball launching device and launched toward the gaming area in response to the player's launching operation. Then, for example, when a gaming ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, a lottery process is executed, or a process is executed to increase the number of gaming balls available to the player.

In a slot machine, when a game value such as medals has been bet and the start lever is operated to start a new game, a lottery process is executed by the control means. Also, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation stop control to stop the rotation of the reels. Then, if the stop result after the rotation of the reels has stopped corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is awarded to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to ensure that notifications are given appropriately according to the game situation, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Characteristics Group J>
Feature J1. A situation setting means (a function for executing the processing of step S705 in the main MPU 72) for setting a favorable transition possible situation (second section SC2);
When the advantageous transition is possible, advantageous transition means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2706 and S2707 of the main MPU 72 in the sixth embodiment) for transitioning the game state to an advantageous game state (AT state ST5 in the sixth embodiment) advantageous to the player;
A favorable notification control means (a function for executing the process of step S714 in the main MPU 72) for controlling the favorable notification means (the section display unit 67) so as to be in a notification state (lighting state) in the favorable transition possible situation;
a notification end means (a function for executing the processes of steps S3119 and S3215 of the main MPU 72 in the sixth embodiment) for ending the notification state in the advantageous notification means based on the occurrence of a specific trigger (the end of a freeze period in the sixth embodiment) in the game when the advantageous game state and the advantageous transition possible situation end;
a revival response control means (a function for executing the processing of steps S3401 to S3407 in the presentation side MPU 92 in the sixth embodiment, and a function for executing the processing of steps S3501 to S3507 in the presentation side MPU 92 in the seventh embodiment) for generating a revival response performance (a revival response performance in the sixth and seventh embodiments) in which a second performance (revival display) is executed to enable the player to recognize that the advantageous gaming state will actually continue after a first performance (AT end display) is executed to enable the player to recognize that the advantageous gaming state may end even if the advantageous gaming state continues;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the timing at which the second effect is started in a game in which the revival-compatible effect is executed is a timing before the timing at which the specific trigger occurs in a game in which the notification state in the advantageous notification means ends.

According to feature J1, the game state can transition to an advantageous game state when an advantageous transition is possible, so the player will hope that the advantageous transition will occur. In addition, by providing an advantageous notification means that becomes a notification state when an advantageous transition is possible, it becomes possible to know whether or not an advantageous transition is possible by checking the advantageous notification means. In addition, by executing a revival response performance, it becomes possible to provide an element of surprise by making the player think that a predetermined game state has ended, but in fact the predetermined game state will continue.

In this case, the timing at which the second effect begins in a game in which the revival-compatible effect is executed is a timing before the timing at which a specific trigger occurs in a game in which the notification state of the advantageous notification means ends. This makes it possible to prevent a player from distinguishing whether the first effect is actually an effect executed at the end of the advantageous game state or an effect related to the revival-compatible effect, even if the player checks the advantageous notification means in a situation in which the first effect is being executed. This makes it possible to make a player expect that the second effect will occur after the first effect is being executed, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

Feature J2. Equipped with a picture display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) that variably displays pictures in each game,
The gaming machine described in feature J1 is characterized in that the specific trigger occurs when a specific period (freeze period) has elapsed from a predetermined timing when the varying display of the image has ended.

According to feature J2, when the advantageous game state and advantageous transition possible situation end, in a configuration in which the notification state of the advantageous notification means ends when a specific period of time has passed since the specified timing when the display of the changing patterns in the game ends, in a game in which a revival-compatible effect is executed, the second effect is started at a timing before the specific period of time has passed since the specified timing when the display of the changing patterns ended. This makes it possible to prevent a player from distinguishing whether the first effect is actually an effect executed at the end of the advantageous game state or an effect related to the revival-compatible effect, even if the player checks the advantageous notification means in a situation in which the first effect is being executed.

Feature J3: A predetermined game progress means (a function for executing reel control processing of the main MPU 72) for progressing a predetermined game including the variable display of the image based on the operation of the player (the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R based on the execution of the lottery process (FIG. 13) of the role triggered by the operation of the start lever 41 and the stopping of the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R triggered by the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44);
A restriction generating means (a function of executing the processes of steps S3116, S3117, S3212, and S3213 of the main MPU 72 in the sixth embodiment) for generating a progress restriction state (a freeze period in the sixth embodiment) in which the start or progress of the predetermined game is restricted based on the fact that the predetermined timing has come in the game when the advantageous game state and the advantageous transition possible state end;
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature J2, wherein the progress restriction state ends upon the passage of the specific period.

According to feature J3, in a game in which the advantageous game state and advantageous transition possible state end, a progress restriction state is entered until a specific period has elapsed from the specified timing when the display of the changing patterns ends, and the notification state of the advantageous notification means ends when the progress restriction state ends, so in that game, the notification state of the advantageous notification means does not end until a specific period has elapsed from the specified timing when the display of the changing patterns ends. In contrast, in a game in which a revival-compatible effect is executed, the second effect starts at a timing before the specific period has elapsed from the specified timing when the display of the changing patterns ends. This makes it possible to prevent a player from distinguishing whether the first effect is actually an effect executed at the end of the advantageous game state or an effect related to the revival-compatible effect, even if the player checks the advantageous notification means in a situation in which the first effect is being executed.

Feature J4. The gaming machine described in feature J2 or J3, characterized in that the revival response control means includes a means for starting the second performance based on the lapse of a switching response period (pre-revival period) set as a period shorter than the specific period from the predetermined timing at which the variable display of the image ended in the game in which the revival response performance is executed (a function for making a positive judgment in step S3405 based on the lapse of the pre-revival period of the performance side MPU 92 in the sixth embodiment and executing the processing of step S3406).

According to feature J4, in a game in which a revival-responsive performance is executed, the second performance is started based on the passage of a switching-responsive period that is set as a period shorter than a specific period from a predetermined timing when the display of the changing patterns ends, so that it is possible to reliably start the second performance at a timing before the timing when the notification state of the advantageous notification means ends in a game in which the advantageous game state and the advantageous transition possible situation end.

Feature J5. The gaming machine described in Feature J4, characterized in that the revival response control means includes a means for starting the second performance based on the occurrence of a specific trigger (a bet setting on a gaming medium) required to start a new game round even if the switching response period has not elapsed since the predetermined timing at which the variable display of the image ended in the game in which the revival response performance is executed (a function for making a positive determination in step S3405 and executing the process of step S3406 based on the occurrence of a bet on the next game of the performance side MPU 92 in the sixth embodiment).

According to feature J5, in a game in which a revival-responsive effect is executed, even if the switching-responsive period has not elapsed since the specified timing at which the display of the changing patterns ended, the second effect is started based on the occurrence of a specific trigger required to start a new round of play, making it possible to diversify the triggers for starting the second effect.

Feature J6. A gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J5, characterized in that it is provided with a means (a function for executing the processing of step S3309 of the presentation side MPU 92 in the sixth embodiment) for executing the first presentation before the specific opportunity occurs in a game in which the advantageous gaming state and the advantageous transition possible situation end.

According to feature J6, in a game in which the advantageous gaming state and the situation in which an advantageous transition is possible end, the first effect is executed before a specific trigger occurs, making it possible for the player to recognize that the advantageous gaming state and the situation in which an advantageous transition is possible end. In this case, in a game in which a revival-compatible effect is executed, the first effect is executed before the second effect is executed. This makes it possible for the player to expect that the advantageous gaming state will continue in a situation in which the first effect is being executed.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A9, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F9, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H8, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J6, features K1 to K8, features L1 to L7, features M1 to M5, features N1 to N4, features O1 to O5, features P1 to P5, features Q1 to Q13, and features R1 to R5 may be applied to the features J1 to J6. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

The inventions in the above feature group J can solve the following problems:

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, pachinko machines are equipped with a storage section for storing gaming balls, and the gaming balls stored in the storage section are guided to a gaming ball launching device and launched toward the gaming area in response to the player's launching operation. Then, for example, when a gaming ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, a lottery process is executed, or a process is executed to increase the number of gaming balls available to the player.

In a slot machine, when a game value such as medals has been bet and the start lever is operated to start a new game, a lottery process is executed by the control means. Also, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation stop control to stop the rotation of the reels. Then, if the stop result after the rotation of the reels has stopped corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is awarded to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the entertainment value of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Feature K group>
Feature K1. A means for shifting the game state to a favorable game state (AT state ST5 in the eighth embodiment) favorable to the player (a function for executing the processing of steps S2706 and S2707 of the main MPU 72);
a pre-termination setting means (a function for executing the process of step S3909 of the main MPU 72 in the eighth embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S4209 of the main MPU 72 in the ninth embodiment) for setting the pre-termination state of the advantageous gaming state (the termination waiting period in the eighth embodiment) based on the fact that the first target number (the remaining awarded number measured by the AT continuation counter 74e), which is a number that can change as the game is executed in the advantageous gaming state, has become the termination target number ("0");
an advantageous end means for ending the advantageous game state based on a second target number (the number of remaining games measured by the end waiting counter), which is a number that can change as the game is executed in the pre-end state, becoming the end target number ("0") (a function for executing the processing of steps S3912 and S3913 of the main MPU 72 in the eighth embodiment, and a function for executing the processing of steps S4212 and S4213 of the main MPU 72 in the ninth embodiment);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature K1, when the first target number becomes the end target number in an advantageous gaming state, the advantageous gaming state does not end, but enters a pre-end state in the advantageous gaming state, and when the second target number becomes the end target number in the pre-end state, the advantageous gaming state ends. This allows the target to be focused on in the middle of an advantageous gaming state in order to identify the end trigger, making it possible to increase the player's attention to the advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

Feature K2. The first target number is the number of remaining game values that can be awarded or increased in the advantageous game state;
The gaming machine described in feature K1, characterized in that the second target number is the remaining number of games that can be played in the pre-end state.

According to feature K2, before the advantageous gaming state enters a pre-end state, the player focuses on whether the number of remaining game values is the end target number, and when the advantageous gaming state enters a pre-end state, the player focuses on whether the number of remaining games is the end target number. Generally, it is easier for a player to understand whether the number of remaining games is the end target number than whether the number of remaining game values is the end target number, so by configuring the pre-end state to end when the number of remaining games is the end target number as described above, it becomes easier for a player to identify the end trigger of an advantageous gaming state in a configuration in which the target to focus on in order to identify the end trigger in the advantageous gaming state is changed midway.

Feature K3. The gaming machine described in Feature K2, characterized in that the pre-end state ends after one game.

According to feature K3, the pre-end state ends after one game, making it possible to prevent the pre-end state from continuing excessively.

Feature K4. A gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K3, characterized in that it is equipped with end response control means (a function for executing the processing of step S4102 of the presentation side MPU 92 in the eighth embodiment, and a function for executing the processing of step S4302 of the presentation side MPU 92 in the ninth embodiment) that causes an end response display (an AT end display in the eighth embodiment, an end explicit display in the ninth embodiment) corresponding to the end of the advantageous gaming state to be started when the pre-end state is started.

According to feature K4, the end-compatible display is initiated when the pre-end state begins, which allows the player more opportunities to see the end-compatible display compared to a configuration in which the end-compatible display is initiated when the pre-end state ends.

Feature K5. The end corresponding display includes a result corresponding display (total game number image G62, total acquisition number image G63) corresponding to the result of each game executed in the advantageous gaming state,
The gaming machine according to feature K4, characterized in that the result of the game executed in the pre-end state is not reflected in the content of the result-corresponding display.

According to feature K5, the end corresponding display includes a result corresponding display corresponding to the outcome of each game executed in the advantageous gaming state, so that a player who checks the end corresponding display can understand not only that the advantageous gaming state has ended, but also the outcome of each game executed in that advantageous gaming state. In this case, the outcome of the game executed in the pre-end state is not reflected in the content of the result corresponding display in the end corresponding display. This makes it possible to prevent the content of the result corresponding display that has started to be displayed from being changed midway in a configuration that ensures a long display period for the end corresponding display including the result corresponding display.

Feature K6. The end corresponding display does not include a result corresponding display (total game number image G62, total acquisition number image G63) corresponding to the result of each game executed in the advantageous gaming state,
This gaming machine is characterized in that it is equipped with a result response control means (a function of executing the processing of step S4304 of the presentation side MPU 92 in the 9th embodiment) that causes result corresponding displays (total game number image G62, total win number image G63) corresponding to the results of each game executed in the current advantageous gaming state, including the game executed in the pre-end state, when the game in the pre-end state is executed, to be displayed when the game in the pre-end state is executed.

According to feature K6, the result corresponding display corresponding to the outcome of each game executed in the advantageous gaming state is not included in the end corresponding display, and when a game in the pre-end state is executed, a result corresponding display corresponding to the outcome of each game executed in the current advantageous gaming state, including the game executed in the pre-end state, is displayed. This makes it possible to display a result corresponding to the overall outcome of the advantageous gaming state in a configuration that ensures a long display period for the end corresponding display.

Feature K7: Equipped with a picture display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) that variably displays pictures in each game;
The gaming machine according to feature K6, wherein the result response control means starts the result response display when the varying display of the picture has ended in the game in the pre-end state.

According to feature K7, when the display of changing images in a game in a pre-end state ends, a result-based display is started, making it possible to perform a result-based display based on the result of the game in a pre-end state.

Feature K8. A situation setting means (a function for executing the processing of step S705 in the main MPU 72) for setting a favorable transition possible situation (second section SC2);
A situation ending means (a function for executing the processes of steps S3214 and S3215 in the main MPU 72) for ending the advantageous transition possible situation based on the occurrence of a situation ending trigger (satisfaction of an ending condition) in the advantageous transition possible situation;
Equipped with
The advantageous transition means transitions a gaming state to the advantageous gaming state when the advantageous transition is possible,
A gaming machine described in any one of features K1 to K7, characterized in that when the advantageous transition possible situation ends based on the occurrence of the situation end trigger, the advantageous gaming state ends without the pre-end state occurring even if the first target number in the advantageous gaming state has not become the end target number.

According to feature K8, the game state can transition to an advantageous game state when an advantageous transition is possible, so the player will hope that the advantageous transition will occur. In addition, since the advantageous transition possible state ends when a state end trigger occurs, it is possible to prevent the advantageous transition possible state from continuing excessively. In this case, when the advantageous transition possible state ends when a state end trigger occurs, the advantageous game state ends without a pre-end state occurring even if the first target number has not become the end target number in the advantageous game state. This makes it possible to prevent the advantageous game state from continuing despite the end of the advantageous transition possible state in a configuration in which a pre-end state occurs when the advantageous game state ends.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A9, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F9, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H8, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J6, features K1 to K8, features L1 to L7, features M1 to M5, features N1 to N4, features O1 to O5, features P1 to P5, features Q1 to Q13, and features R1 to R5 may be applied to the features K1 to K8. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

The inventions of the above feature group K can solve the following problems:

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, pachinko machines are equipped with a storage section for storing gaming balls, and the gaming balls stored in the storage section are guided to a gaming ball launching device and launched toward the gaming area in response to the player's launching operation. Then, for example, when a gaming ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, a lottery process is executed, or a process is executed to increase the number of gaming balls available to the player.

In a slot machine, when a game value such as medals has been bet and the start lever is operated to start a new game, a lottery process is executed by the control means. Also, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation stop control to stop the rotation of the reels. Then, if the stop result after the rotation of the reels has stopped corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is awarded to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to increase the player's attention to advantageous gaming states that are favorable to the player, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Feature L group>
Feature L1. Based on the occurrence of an update opportunity (a win in the lottery process (FIG. 13) of the index value IV = 1 to 13) in a predetermined game state (AT state ST5 in the eighth embodiment), an information update means (a function to execute the processing of step S3906 of the main MPU 72 in the eighth embodiment) that updates the end opportunity information (numerical information of the AT continuation counter 74e) of the end opportunity storage means (AT continuation counter 74e) to the side approaching the end target information ("0");
A means for ending the predetermined game state after the end trigger information becomes the end target information (a function for executing the processes of steps S3912 to S3914 of the master MPU 72 in the eighth embodiment);
a predetermined benefit granting means (a function for executing the process of step S3710 of the main MPU 72 in the eighth embodiment) for granting a predetermined benefit (awarding of gaming media of "15") to a player when a predetermined renewal trigger occurs (winning any of the index values IV = 1 to 9 in the role lottery process (Figure 13)) and the player performs a grant corresponding operation (operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 in the stopping sequence that enables the first bell win or the second bell win to be achieved), and preventing the predetermined benefit from being granted to the player when the predetermined renewal trigger occurs and the player does not perform the grant corresponding operation;
Equipped with
The information update means updates the end trigger information to approach the end target information by common numerical information ("12", which is the result of subtracting the number of bets "3" from "15") regardless of whether the specified update trigger occurs, the player performs the award-response operation, or the player does not perform the award-response operation.

According to feature L1, the end trigger information of the end trigger storage means is updated to approach the end target information based on the occurrence of an update trigger in a predetermined game state, and the predetermined game state is ended based on the end trigger information becoming the end target information. In this case, in a configuration in which a predetermined update trigger occurs and a grant corresponding operation is performed by the player, a predetermined benefit is granted to the player, and in a configuration in which a predetermined update trigger occurs and a grant corresponding operation is not performed by the player, when a predetermined update trigger occurs, the end trigger information is updated to approach the end target information by the common numerical information regardless of whether a grant corresponding operation is performed by the player or not. As a result, when a predetermined update trigger occurs, the end trigger information is updated to approach the end target information by the common numerical information regardless of whether a predetermined benefit is granted or not, so that the end time of the predetermined game state is not delayed depending on the operation mode of the player. Therefore, it is possible to play the game favorably.

Feature L2. A predetermined display control means (the performance side MPU 92 in the eighth embodiment) is provided to control the display of a predetermined display means (the image display device 63) so that a termination trigger corresponding display (the remaining awarded number display image G12) corresponding to the termination trigger information is performed;
The predetermined display control means is
a first update control means (a function for executing the process of step S3802 of the presentation side MPU 92 in the eighth embodiment) for updating and displaying the value corresponding to the common numerical information of the value displayed in the termination trigger corresponding display in a first update display mode (sequential update shown in FIG. 66(A)) when the predetermined update trigger occurs and the player performs the grant corresponding operation;
A gaming machine as described in feature L1, characterized in that it is equipped with a second update control means (a function of executing the processing of steps S3607 and S3804 of the presentation side MPU 92 in the eighth embodiment) that, when the specified update trigger occurs but the player does not perform the grant-responsive operation, updates and displays the value displayed in the end trigger-responsive display corresponding to the common numerical information in a second update display mode (visibility-reducing effect G66 shown in Figure 66 (B) and bulk update).

According to feature L2, in a configuration in which the end trigger information in the end trigger storage means is updated to approach the end target information based on the occurrence of an update trigger in a specified game state, and the specified game state ends based on the end trigger information becoming the end target information, an end trigger corresponding display corresponding to the end trigger information is displayed on the specified display means. This allows the player to predict the end time of the specified game state by checking the end trigger corresponding display.

In this case, if a specified update trigger occurs and the player performs an operation corresponding to the grant, the update display of the value displayed in the end trigger corresponding display is performed in a first update display mode by the amount corresponding to the common numerical information, and if a specified update trigger occurs and the player does not perform an operation corresponding to the grant, the update display of the value displayed in the end trigger corresponding display is performed in a second update display mode by the amount corresponding to the common numerical information. This makes it possible to make the display mode of the update display an appropriate display mode corresponding to whether or not a specified bonus has been granted, while updating the value displayed in the end trigger corresponding display by the amount corresponding to the common numerical information, regardless of whether or not a specified bonus has been granted, in a configuration in which the end trigger information is updated by the amount of common numerical information to bring it closer to the end target information, regardless of whether or not a specified bonus has been granted, when a specified update trigger occurs.

Feature L3. The gaming machine described in Feature L2, characterized in that the second update display mode is a display mode in which the update display of the value corresponding to the common numerical information is more difficult for a player to recognize than the first update display mode.

According to feature L3, the second update display mode is a display mode in which the update display mode when the value displayed in the end trigger corresponding display is updated by a value corresponding to the common numerical information is less recognizable to the player than the first update display mode, so that even if a specified update trigger occurs but a specified bonus is not awarded, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the end trigger information has been updated by the common numerical information to bring it closer to the end target information.

Feature L4. The gaming machine described in feature L2 or L3, characterized in that the second update display mode is a display mode in which the period required to complete the update display of the value corresponding to the common numerical information is shorter than the period required for the first update display mode.

According to feature L4, the second update display mode is a display mode in which the update period when updating the value displayed in the end trigger corresponding display by the value corresponding to the common numerical information is shorter than that of the first update display mode, so it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player will see a situation in which the end trigger information has been updated by the common numerical information to approach the end target information even though a specified update trigger has occurred but a specified bonus has not been awarded.

Feature L5. The second update control means is
A visibility reducing means (a function of executing the process of step S3607 of the performance side MPU 92 in the eighth embodiment) for reducing the visibility of the content displayed on the predetermined display means to a visibility reducing state (visibility reducing effect G66) in which the visibility of the content displayed on the predetermined display means is reduced from the previous state;
An update execution means (a function for executing the process of step S3804 of the performance side MPU 92 in the eighth embodiment) for updating and displaying the value displayed in the end trigger responsive display in the visibility reduced state by a value corresponding to the common numerical information;
A gaming machine according to any one of features L2 to L4, characterized in that it is equipped with:

According to feature L5, when a specified update trigger occurs but a specified bonus is not awarded, the visibility of the content displayed on the specified display means is reduced, and in this reduced visibility state, an update is displayed by a value corresponding to the common numerical information of the value displayed in the end trigger corresponding display, making it difficult for the player to recognize that the end trigger information has been updated to bring it closer to the end target information.

Feature L6. The reel has a plurality of image display areas (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) that display changing images.
The grant corresponding operation is an operation of stopping the variable display of the patterns in the plurality of pattern display areas in a predetermined order,
The visibility reducing means sets the visibility to the reduced state when it is determined that the stop order of the variable display of the patterns is different from the predetermined order even in a situation where the variable display of the patterns in all of the pattern display areas has not been stopped,
The gaming machine described in feature L5 is characterized in that the update execution means updates and displays the value displayed in the end trigger corresponding display by a value corresponding to the common numerical information when the varying display of the images in all of the image display areas is stopped.

According to feature L6, in a configuration in which a predetermined bonus is awarded when a predetermined update trigger occurs and the variable display of the patterns is stopped in a predetermined order, even if the variable display of the patterns in all the pattern display areas is not stopped, if it is determined that the stop order of the variable display of the patterns is different from the predetermined order, a state of reduced visibility is entered. This allows the player to recognize that the state of reduced visibility has occurred due to an incorrect stop order. In this situation, when the variable display of the patterns in all the pattern display areas is stopped, an update display is performed for the value corresponding to the common numerical information of the value displayed in the end trigger corresponding display, so that it is possible to update the end trigger corresponding display in a situation in which the player's attention to the predetermined display means is reduced due to the reduced visibility state. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the end trigger information has been updated to approach the end target information, even if the predetermined bonus has not been awarded.

Feature L7. The predetermined update opportunity occurs based on winning a predetermined role (index value IV = 1 to 9) in the role selection process,
The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L6, characterized in that the award-responsive operation is an operation for stopping the variable display of pictures in a predetermined manner when the predetermined role is won.

According to feature L7, in a configuration in which a predetermined bonus is awarded when a predetermined combination is won and the operation to stop the changing display of the patterns is performed in a predetermined manner, and in which a predetermined bonus is not awarded when a predetermined combination is won and the operation to stop the changing display of the patterns is performed in a manner different from the predetermined manner, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects described above.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A9, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F9, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H8, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J6, features K1 to K8, features L1 to L7, features M1 to M5, features N1 to N4, features O1 to O5, features P1 to P5, features Q1 to Q13, and features R1 to R5 may be applied to the features L1 to L7. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

The invention of the above feature group L can solve the following problems:

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, pachinko machines are equipped with a storage section for storing gaming balls, and the gaming balls stored in the storage section are guided to a gaming ball launching device and launched toward the gaming area in response to the player's launching operation. Then, for example, when a gaming ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, a lottery process is executed, or a process is executed to increase the number of gaming balls available to the player.

In a slot machine, when a game value such as medals has been bet and the start lever is operated to start a new game, a lottery process is executed by the control means. Also, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation stop control to stop the rotation of the reels. Then, if the stop result after the rotation of the reels has stopped corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is awarded to the player.

Here, it is necessary to ensure that gaming machines such as those exemplified above can be played smoothly, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Feature M group>
Feature M1. A predetermined rotating body (reels 32L, 32M, 32R),
A driving means (stepping motor 142) for rotating the predetermined rotating body;
A drive control means for controlling the drive means (a function for executing the reel control process and the stepping motor control process of the main MPU 72 in the tenth embodiment);
Equipped with
The drive control means
An acceleration control means for executing acceleration control for accelerating the predetermined rotating body (a function for executing the processes of steps S4503 to S4511, steps S4601 to S4607, and steps S4903 to S4914 of the main MPU 72 in the tenth embodiment);
A constant speed control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S4518 and S4521 of the main MPU 72 in the tenth embodiment) that executes constant speed control for rotating the predetermined rotating body at a constant speed after the acceleration control is completed;
A stop control means (a function for executing a stop control process of the main MPU 72 in the tenth embodiment) that executes stop control to stop the rotation of the predetermined rotating body when a predetermined stop trigger (operation of the stop button 42 to 44) occurs;
Equipped with
The acceleration control means of this gaming machine is characterized in that it is equipped with a post-supply start means (a function of executing the processing of steps S4903 to S4914 of the main MPU 72 in the tenth embodiment) that restarts the acceleration control of the specified revolving body when the supply of operating power is stopped during a specified operating situation before the stopping of the specified revolving body is completed and the supply of operating power is resumed.

According to feature M1, if the supply of operating power is stopped in a specified operating situation before the specified rotating body has stopped, acceleration control of the specified rotating body is newly initiated when the supply of operating power is resumed. This makes it possible to start new acceleration of the specified rotating body when the supply of operating power is resumed without waiting until a rotation abnormality of the specified rotating body is detected, and shortens the period required for the acceleration control of the specified rotating body to be completed and constant speed rotation to be initiated after the supply of operating power is resumed. This makes it possible to preferably play games that utilize the rotation of the rotating body.

Feature M2. The gaming machine described in Feature M1 is characterized in that it is equipped with a means (a function for executing the processing of step S4528 of the main MPU 72 in the tenth embodiment) for starting the acceleration control of the specified rotating body anew when it is determined that the rotation of the specified rotating body is not normal.

According to feature M2, when it is determined that the rotation of the specified rotating body is not normal, acceleration control of the specified rotating body is newly started, so that if an abnormality occurs in the rotation of the specified rotating body, it is possible to deal with it by starting the rotation anew. In this case, by having the configuration of feature M1, if the supply of operating power is stopped in a specified operating situation before the stopping of the specified rotating body is completed, acceleration control of the specified rotating body is newly started when the supply of operating power is resumed. This makes it possible to start new acceleration of the specified rotating body when the supply of operating power is resumed without waiting until a rotation abnormality of the specified rotating body is detected, and it is possible to shorten the period required for the acceleration control of the specified rotating body to be completed and constant speed rotation to be started after the supply of operating power is resumed.

Feature M3. The gaming machine according to feature M1 or M2, wherein the post-supply start means restarts the acceleration control of the specified rotating body when the supply of operating power is resumed even if the supply of operating power is stopped in the specified operating situation after the acceleration control of the specified rotating body is completed.

According to feature M3, even if the supply of operating power is stopped after the acceleration control of a specific rotating body is completed, the acceleration control of the specific rotating body is restarted when the supply of operating power is resumed. Therefore, when the supply of operating power is resumed, the acceleration control of the specific rotating body can be restarted without determining whether the acceleration control has been completed or not, which makes it possible to reduce the processing load when the supply of operating power starts.

Feature M4. The reel 32L, 32M, 32R is provided as a reel other than the predetermined reel,
The gaming machine described in any one of features M1 to M3, characterized in that when the supply of operating power is stopped in the specified operating situation after the other revolving body has been stopped but before the specified revolving body has been stopped, when the supply of operating power is resumed, the acceleration control means newly starts the acceleration control of the specified revolving body without executing the acceleration control for the other revolving body.

According to feature M4, if the supply of operating power is stopped when a specific rotating body is in a specific operating state before stopping and another rotating body has stopped, when the supply of operating power is resumed, acceleration control is newly started for the specific rotating body without executing acceleration control for the other rotating body. This makes it possible to quickly resume constant speed rotation only for the rotating body that was in the specific operating state, while preventing re-rotation of the rotating body that has already stopped.

Feature M5: A predetermined operation storage means (the rotating flag and each stop completion flag 164a to 164c of the main RAM 74 in the tenth embodiment) that stores predetermined operation information (information of "1") when the predetermined rotating body is in the predetermined operation state;
A means for supplying power during power interruption (power supply device 54) that enables the predetermined operation information to be stored and held in the predetermined operation storage means when the supply of operating power is stopped;
A gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M4, characterized in that it is equipped with:

According to feature M5, power during power outage is supplied to a predetermined operation storage means in which predetermined operation information is stored when a predetermined rotating body is in a predetermined operating state, so that it is possible to determine whether or not acceleration control should be newly started for a predetermined rotating body simply by determining whether or not predetermined operation information is stored in the predetermined operation storage means when the supply of operating power is started.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A9, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F9, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H8, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J6, features K1 to K8, features L1 to L7, features M1 to M5, features N1 to N4, features O1 to O5, features P1 to P5, features Q1 to Q13, and features R1 to R5 may be applied to the features M1 to M5. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

<Feature N group>
Feature N1. Rotating body (reels 32L, 32M, 32R),
A driving means (stepping motor 142) for rotating the rotating body;
A drive control means for controlling the drive means (a function for executing a reel control process and an acceleration control process of the main MPU 72 in the eleventh embodiment);
Equipped with
The driving means is a stepping motor (stepping motor 142) that rotates the rotating body by being excited,
The drive control means includes a special control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S5101 to S5111 and steps S5114 to S5119 of the main MPU 72 in the eleventh embodiment) for repeatedly generating a special excitation pattern (a part of the excitation pattern according to the pseudo-stop table 171) for exciting a specific phase (excitation of phase B) after exciting a predetermined phase (excitation of phase A) for the drive means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the special control means generates a non-excitation period in which no excitation is performed on the drive means after exciting the specified phase in the special excitation pattern and before exciting the specific phase.

According to feature N1, a situation occurs in which a special excitation pattern is repeated in which a specific phase is excited after a specific phase is excited in the drive means, making it possible to use the rotation of the orbiting body to create an effect. In this case, a non-excitation period occurs after the specific phase is excited in the special excitation pattern and before the specific phase is excited. This makes it possible to create an effect that utilizes the rotation of the orbiting body while suppressing the temperature rise of the drive means. This makes it possible to optimally play games that utilize the rotation of the orbiting body.

Feature N2. The gaming machine described in Feature N1, characterized in that the non-excitation period is equal to or shorter than the period during which the excitation of the specified phase is performed in the special excitation pattern and equal to or shorter than the period during which the excitation of the specific phase is performed in the special excitation pattern.

According to feature N2, the non-excitation period is equal to or shorter than the period during which a specific phase is excited in the special excitation pattern and equal to or shorter than the period during which a specific phase is excited in the special excitation pattern, so that it is possible to prevent the period during which the rotating body is stopped from becoming excessively long during the period during which a performance using the rotation of the rotating body is being performed.

Feature N3. The gaming machine according to feature N1 or N2, wherein the special control means generates a non-excitation period in which no excitation is performed on the drive means after exciting the specific phase and before exciting the predetermined phase when the special excitation pattern is repeatedly generated.

According to feature N3, in a situation where the special excitation pattern is repeated, a non-excitation period occurs not only after excitation of a specified phase and before excitation of a specific phase, but also after excitation of a specific phase and before excitation of a specified phase. This makes it possible to perform a performance that utilizes the rotation of the rotating body while suppressing the temperature rise of the drive means.

Feature N4. The gaming machine described in Feature N3, characterized in that the non-excitation period occurring after the excitation of the predetermined phase and before the excitation of the specific phase is the same or approximately the same as the non-excitation period occurring after the excitation of the specific phase and before the excitation of the predetermined phase.

According to feature N4, in a configuration in which a non-excitation period occurs not only after excitation of a specified phase and before excitation of a specific phase in a situation in which a special excitation pattern is repeated, but also after excitation of a specific phase and before excitation of a specified phase, these non-excitation periods are the same or approximately the same. This eliminates the need to separately prepare a configuration for controlling the non-excitation periods, making it possible to simplify the configuration for this control.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A9, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F9, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H8, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J6, features K1 to K8, features L1 to L7, features M1 to M5, features N1 to N4, features O1 to O5, features P1 to P5, features Q1 to Q13, and features R1 to R5 may be applied to the features N1 to N4. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

The inventions in the above feature group M and feature group N can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, pachinko machines are equipped with a storage section for storing gaming balls, and the gaming balls stored in the storage section are guided to a gaming ball launching device and launched toward the gaming area in response to the player's launching operation. Then, for example, when a gaming ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, a lottery process is executed, or a process is executed to increase the number of gaming balls available to the player.

In a slot machine, when a game value such as medals has been bet and the start lever is operated to start a new game, a lottery process is executed by the control means. Also, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation stop control to stop the rotation of the reels. Then, if the stop result after the rotation of the reels has stopped corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is awarded to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to ensure that games utilizing the rotation of the rotating body can be played in an optimal manner, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Characteristic group O>
Feature O1. A target specification means (a function for executing the processing of steps S5307 to S5309 of the main MPU 72 in the 12th embodiment) for specifying a selection target to be selected from among a plurality of selection targets (various addresses set in the AT transition lottery table 172 in the 12th embodiment);
An information storage means (main ROM 73 in the 12th embodiment) for storing in advance lottery set information (AT transition lottery table 172 in the 12th embodiment) in which lottery numerical information (various lottery judgment values set in the AT transition lottery table 172 in the 12th embodiment) is set in correspondence with the plurality of types of selection objects;
An information reading means (a function of executing the process of step S5310 of the main MPU 72 in the twelfth embodiment) for reading out the lottery numerical information corresponding to the selection target identified by the target identification means by using the lottery set information;
A winning/losing determination means (a function for executing the processes of steps S5311 and S5312 of the main MPU 72 in the twelfth embodiment) that performs a winning/losing determination using the lottery numerical information read by the information reading means;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the selection target (the address of "k" in the AT transition lottery table 172 of the 12th embodiment) is set with the lottery set information, and the selection numerical information that will definitely be determined to be a loss in the win/loss judgment is set.

According to feature O1, the selection numerical information corresponding to the selection target identified as the selection target is read out using the selection set information, and the win/loss determination is performed using the read selection numerical information. In this case, the selection target for which selection numerical information that will definitely be determined to be a loss in the win/loss determination is set is set in the selection set information. This makes it possible to create a situation in which the win/loss determination does not result in a win, even without preparing a determination process to determine whether or not to perform the win/loss determination. This makes it possible to perform the lottery process in an optimal manner.

Feature O2. The gaming machine described in Feature O1, characterized in that the set information for lottery contains a plurality of selection targets (addresses "k+1" to "k+5" in the AT transition lottery table 172 of the 12th embodiment) for which the numerical information for lottery is set and which may be determined to be a winning combination in the win/loss determination.

According to feature O2, in a configuration in which multiple selection objects with lottery numerical information that can be determined to be a win in a win/loss judgment are set in the lottery set information, a selection object with lottery numerical information that will be determined to be a loss in a win/loss judgment is set in the lottery set information. In this way, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described by simply setting additional selection objects that will be a loss in the lottery set information prepared for setting multiple selection objects that can be a win.

Feature O3. In the lottery set information, the plurality of types of selection objects are set in a predetermined order;
The gaming machine described in feature O1 or O2, characterized in that the target identification means identifies an offset value for the first order among the specified orders in order to identify which order of the selection objects in the lottery set information will be the objects to be selected for the lottery.

According to feature O3, by using a configuration for identifying an offset value for the initial order in the lottery set information, it is possible to create a situation in which the winning/losing determination is reliably a losing result.

Feature O4. The gaming machine described in any one of Features O1 to O3, characterized in that the target identification means identifies, as the lottery target, the selection target for which the lottery numerical information is set and which will definitely be determined to be a loss in the win/loss determination in a specified game situation (a situation in which the AT transition confirmation flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1").

According to feature O4, since the win/lose judgment in a specified game situation will definitely result in a miss, it is possible to prevent an event in which the win/lose judgment in a specified game situation results in a win even without providing a judgment process that identifies whether the game situation is a specified game situation or not and does not execute the win/lose judgment if the game situation is a specified game situation.

Feature O5. The gaming machine described in Feature O4, characterized in that the target identification means identifies, as the selection target to be selected, the selection target for which the selection numerical information for selection is set and which can be determined to be a win in the hit/miss judgment in a specific game situation (a situation in which the value of the AT transition confirmation flag in the main RAM 74 is "0") and which corresponds to a game content event (the result of the lottery process for the hand (Figure 13)), and identifies, as the selection target to be selected, the selection target for which the selection numerical information for selection is set and which will definitely be determined to be a miss in the hit/miss judgment regardless of the game content event in the specified game situation.

According to feature O5, in a configuration in which the presence or absence of a win in the win/lose judgment occurs according to a game content event in a specific game situation, the win/lose judgment will definitely result in a miss in a specified game situation regardless of the game content event. This makes it possible to prevent an event that results in a win in the win/lose judgment in a specified game situation from occurring, even without providing a judgment process that specifies whether or not the game situation is a specified game situation and prevents the win/lose judgment from being executed if the game situation is a specified game situation.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A9, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F9, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H8, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J6, features K1 to K8, features L1 to L7, features M1 to M5, features N1 to N4, features O1 to O5, features P1 to P5, features Q1 to Q13, and features R1 to R5 may be applied to the features O1 to O5. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

<Feature P group>
Feature P1. An information storage means (main ROM 73) that stores in advance a lottery information group (the first initial award number lottery table 173 and the second initial award number lottery table 174 in the 13th embodiment) in which lottery numerical information (lottery judgment value in the 13th embodiment) is set in correspondence with a plurality of consecutive selection target numerical information (lottery numbers in the 13th embodiment);
An information reading means for reading out the selection numerical information corresponding to the selection target numerical information that is the selection target in the selection information group (a function for executing the process of step S5406 of the main MPU 72 in the thirteenth embodiment);
A predetermined winning/losing judgment means (a function of executing the processing of steps S5407 and S5408 of the main MPU 72 in the 13th embodiment) that executes a predetermined winning/losing judgment (step S5408 of the main MPU 72 in the 13th embodiment) using the lottery numerical information read by the information reading means;
A selection update means (a function for executing the process of step S5409 of the main MPU 72 in the thirteenth embodiment) for updating the selection target numerical information to be selected in the lottery when the predetermined pass/fail judgment is a miss to the selection target numerical information of the next order in the lottery information group, so that the selection target numerical information becomes the target of the predetermined pass/fail judgment;
Equipped with
The information storage means stores at least a first selection information group (a first initial award number selection table 173 in the thirteenth embodiment) used in a predetermined game situation (a normal AT) and a second selection information group (a second initial award number selection table 174 in the thirteenth embodiment) used in a specific game situation (a special AT) as the selection information group,
The first selection information group includes the plurality of selection target numerical information items.
A gaming machine characterized in that the second selection information group includes a plurality of consecutive selection target numerical information that are part of the plurality of selection target numerical information.

According to feature P1, in a specified game situation, the selection target numerical information set in the first lottery information group is selected in sequence, and the selection target numerical information corresponding to the selection target numerical information that has been selected is read from the first lottery information group to perform a specified win/lose judgment. In addition, in a specific game situation, the selection target numerical information set in the second lottery information group is selected in sequence, and the selection target numerical information corresponding to the selection target numerical information that has been selected is read from the second lottery information group to perform a specified win/lose judgment.

In this case, the first lottery information group contains a plurality of pieces of selection target numerical information, while the second lottery information group contains a plurality of pieces of selection target numerical information that are consecutive and are part of the plurality of pieces of selection target numerical information. This makes it possible to standardize the selection target numerical information even if the number of pieces of selection target numerical information set in the second lottery information group is less than the number of pieces of selection target numerical information set in the first lottery information group. This makes it possible to perform the lottery process in an optimal manner.

Feature P2. The gaming machine described in Feature P1, characterized in that the selection target numerical information set in the second selection information group is numerical information whose maximum value is the same as the maximum value of the selection target numerical information set in the first selection information group, whose minimum value is greater than the minimum value of the selection target numerical information set in the first selection information group, and which is a consecutive number.

According to feature P2, the selection target numerical information set in the second lottery information group is numerical information whose maximum value is the same as the maximum value of the selection target numerical information set in the first lottery information group and whose minimum value is greater than the minimum value of the selection target numerical information set in the first lottery information group, and which is a consecutive number. As a result, even if the number of selection target numerical information set in the second lottery information group is less than the number of selection target numerical information set in the first lottery information group, it is possible to match the maximum values of these selection target numerical information, and it is possible to sequentially make the selection target numerical information with the common maximum value the subject of the specified pass/fail judgment.

Feature P3: A means for setting the maximum value in the target storage means (the lottery number counter of the master RAM 74 in the thirteenth embodiment) regardless of whether the predetermined game status or the specific game status is present (a function for executing the process of step S5402 of the master MPU 72 in the thirteenth embodiment);
The information reading means is configured to read out the selection numerical information corresponding to the selection target numerical information of a value stored in the target storage means,
The gaming machine described in feature P2 is characterized in that the selection update means is configured to subtract 1 from the value stored in the target memory means when the specified win/loss judgment results in a miss in the specified game situation.

According to feature P3, when the predetermined win/loss judgment is started in either the predetermined game situation or the specific game situation, the maximum value of the common selection target numerical information in each of the first lottery information group and the second lottery information group is set in the target storage means. Then, the selection target numerical information corresponding to the value of the selection target numerical information stored in the target storage means is read from the first lottery information group or the second lottery information group, and the predetermined win/loss judgment is performed using the read selection target numerical information. If the predetermined win/loss judgment is a miss, the value stored in the target storage means is decremented by 1, and the selection target numerical information of the value after decrementing by 1 becomes the new lottery target, and the predetermined win/loss judgment is performed. In this way, the maximum value of the selection target numerical information is common in the first lottery information group and the second lottery information group, so that the predetermined win/loss judgment can be performed with a common processing configuration whether the first lottery information group or the second lottery information group is referenced.

Feature P4. A gaming machine according to any one of features P1 to P3, characterized in that when the numerical information for selection is read from the second group of information for selection and the predetermined hit/miss judgment is performed, any of the selection target numerical information in the second group of information for selection is judged to be a win in the predetermined hit/miss judgment.

According to feature P4, even if the second lottery information group is configured to contain multiple selection target numerical information that are consecutive and are part of the multiple selection target numerical information, when the selection numerical information is read from the second lottery information group and a predetermined hit/miss judgment is performed, any of the selection target numerical information in the second lottery information group is judged to be a winning item in the predetermined hit/miss judgment, so that it is possible to prevent selection target numerical information that is not set in the second lottery information group from being subject to the predetermined hit/miss judgment in a situation where the second lottery information group is referenced.

Feature P5: The information storage means stores in advance a result correspondence information group (initial award number table 175 in the thirteenth embodiment) in which result correspondence information (initial award number in the thirteenth embodiment) is set in correspondence with the selection target numerical information of the first lottery information group,
This gaming machine is a gaming machine described in any one of features P1 to P4, characterized in that it is equipped with a means for reading and using the result corresponding information corresponding to the selection target numerical information that has been determined to be a win in the specified win/loss judgment from the result corresponding information group (a function for executing the processing of step S5411 of the main MPU 72 in the 13th embodiment).

According to feature P5, in a configuration in which result corresponding information corresponding to the selectable numerical information that was the subject of the lottery in the event of a win in the specified win/loss judgment is read out from the result corresponding information group and used, the second lottery information group is configured to have a plurality of selectable numerical information that are consecutive numbers and are part of the plurality of selectable numerical information. Therefore, even in a situation in which the specified win/loss judgment is made using the second lottery information group, it is possible to use the result corresponding information group that is used when the specified win/loss judgment is made using the first lottery information group as is.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A9, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F9, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H8, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J6, features K1 to K8, features L1 to L7, features M1 to M5, features N1 to N4, features O1 to O5, features P1 to P5, features Q1 to Q13, and features R1 to R5 may be applied to the features P1 to P5. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

The inventions in the above feature group O and feature group P can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, pachinko machines are equipped with a storage section for storing gaming balls, and the gaming balls stored in the storage section are guided to a gaming ball launching device and launched toward the gaming area in response to the player's launching operation. Then, for example, when a gaming ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, a lottery process is executed, or a process is executed to increase the number of gaming balls available to the player.

In a slot machine, when a game value such as medals has been bet and the start lever is operated to start a new game, a lottery process is executed by the control means. Also, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation stop control to stop the rotation of the reels. Then, if the stop result after the rotation of the reels has stopped corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is awarded to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to ensure that the lottery process is carried out efficiently, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Feature Q group>
Feature Q1. A program storage means (main ROM 73 in the fourteenth to sixteenth embodiments) that stores in advance a read command for reading a program (CALLS command in the fourteenth and fifteenth embodiments, and CALLS command and CALLV command in the sixteenth embodiment),
A program execution unit (a function of executing various read commands of the main MPU 72 in the fourteenth to sixteenth embodiments) that reads the program that is the target of the read command and executes processing by the program;
Equipped with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the read instructions include a first read instruction (a 3-byte CALLS instruction in the 14th to 16th embodiments) and a second read instruction (a 2-byte CALLS instruction in the 14th and 15th embodiments, and a 2-byte CALLS instruction or CALLV instruction in the 16th embodiment) having different amounts of data.

According to feature Q1, a first read command and a second read command are set as read commands for reading a program so that the data amounts are different. This makes it possible to reduce the program capacity by using the read command with the smaller amount of data, while appropriately reading the program by using the read command with the larger amount of data in a situation where the read command with the smaller amount of data cannot be used. This makes it possible to appropriately execute processing using the program.

Feature Q2. The first read command and the second read command each have a data capacity in bytes;
The gaming machine described in feature Q1, wherein the second read command has a data capacity that is a predetermined number of bytes smaller than that of the first read command.

According to feature Q2, in a configuration in which the first read command and the second read command have different data capacities, both have data capacities in bytes, making it possible to treat them as byte-based commands.

Feature Q3. The second read instruction is an instruction (a 2-byte CALLS instruction in the fourteenth to sixteenth embodiments) for reading a program stored in a predetermined range of addresses ("8000h" to "8BFFh") in the program storage means,
The gaming machine described in feature Q1 or Q2, wherein the first read instruction is an instruction (a 3-byte CALLS instruction in the 14th to 16th embodiments) for reading a program stored at an address outside the specified range in the program storage means.

According to feature Q3, the second read instruction is an instruction for reading a program stored in a predetermined range of addresses in the program storage means, and the first read instruction is an instruction for reading a program stored in an address outside the predetermined range in the program storage means. This makes it possible to vary the range of addresses to be read depending on the type of read instruction with a different data capacity.

Feature Q4. The gaming machine described in Feature Q3, characterized in that the addresses included in the specified range are addresses in which the numerical information of upper range bits (upper 4 bits), which are a specified number of bits contiguous from the most significant bit of the address including the most significant bit of the address, and which are a part of the address, is the same.

According to feature Q4, the address of the program to be read by the second read instruction is an address in which the numerical information of the upper range bits, which are a predetermined number of bits contiguous from the most significant bit of the address including the most significant bit of the address, and which are a part of the address, is the same. This makes it possible to make the numerical information of the upper range bits in the address of the program to be read by the second read instruction the same.

Feature Q5. The first read command includes a predetermined address of the program to be read,
The gaming machine described in feature Q4 is characterized in that the second read command is set with information on designated bits (12 bits excluding the upper 4 bits) which are the bits excluding the upper range bits of a specified address of the program to be read.

According to feature Q5, in a configuration in which the numerical information of the upper range bits in the address of the program to be read by the second read instruction is the same, the second read instruction sets information of specified bits, which are the bits excluding the upper range bits in the specified address of the program to be read. As a result, less address information is set in the second read instruction compared to the first read instruction in which the entire specified address of the program to be read is set, and it is possible to make the data capacity of the second read instruction smaller than that of the first read instruction.

Feature Q6. The gaming machine described in Feature Q5, wherein the program execution means includes a means (mask circuit 181 and adder circuit 182 in the fourteenth to sixteenth embodiments) for deriving a predetermined address of the program to be read by combining the information of the designated bit set in the second read command with the numerical information of the upper range bits.

According to feature Q6, in a configuration in which the second read instruction is set with designated bit information, which is the number of bits excluding the upper range bits of the specified address to be read, when the second read instruction is executed, the specified address of the program to be read is derived by combining the designated bit information set in the second read instruction with the numerical information of the upper range bits. As a result, in a configuration in which the second read instruction is set with designated bit information that is a part of the specified address rather than the entire address, it becomes possible to derive the entire specified address by the second read instruction.

Feature Q7. The second read command has a smaller data capacity than the first read command,
A gaming machine described in any one of features G1 to G6, characterized in that the program to be read by the second read command is a program that is executed more frequently than the program to be read by the first read command.

According to feature Q7, in a configuration in which the second read command has a smaller data capacity than the first read command, the program to be read by the second read command is a program that is executed more frequently than the program to be read by the first read command, making it possible to reduce the data capacity of the read command for reading the program that is executed more frequently.

Feature Q8. The second read command has a smaller data capacity than the first read command;
A gaming machine described in any one of features G1 to G6, characterized in that the program to be read by the second read command is a program having a smaller data capacity than the program to be read by the first read command.

According to feature Q8, in a configuration in which the second read command has a smaller data capacity than the first read command, the program to be read by the second read command has a smaller data capacity than the program to be read by the first read command, making it possible to ensure a large number of programs that can be read by the second read command, which has a relatively small data capacity.

Feature Q9: A means (a storage area for storing the index table 183 of the main ROM 73 in the sixteenth embodiment) for storing in advance a correspondence relationship information group (index table 183 in the sixteenth embodiment) in which a correspondence relationship between a predetermined address required to read out a program stored in the program storage means and identification information (index data) having a data capacity smaller than that of the predetermined address is set,
The first read command has a predetermined address of a program to be read set therein,
A gaming machine described in any one of features Q1 to Q8, characterized in that the second read command has the identification information set therein.

According to feature Q9, a group of correspondence information is stored in advance, in which a correspondence is set between a specific address required to read a program and identification information having a smaller data capacity than the specific address, and the second read command is set with the above identification information rather than the specific address itself. This makes it possible to make the data capacity of the second read command smaller than that of the first read command, in which the entire specific address of the program to be read is set.

Feature Q10. The gaming machine described in Feature Q9 is characterized in that the program execution means includes a means for reading out an address corresponding to the identification information set in the second read command from the correspondence relationship information group (index grasping circuit 184 and address reading circuit 185 in the sixteenth embodiment).

According to feature Q10, in a configuration in which identification information is set in the second read command, when the second read command is executed, an address corresponding to the identification information set in the second read command is read from the correspondence information group. This makes it possible to derive the entire specified address by the second read command in a configuration in which identification information having a smaller data capacity than the specified address is set in the second read command, rather than the entire specified address.

Feature Q11. A means (a storage area for storing the index table 183 of the main ROM 73 in the sixteenth embodiment) is provided for storing a correspondence relationship information group (index table 183 in the sixteenth embodiment) in which a correspondence relationship between an address required to read out a program stored in the program storage means and identification information (index data) having a data capacity smaller than that of the address is set,
The second read instruction is an instruction (a 2-byte CALLS instruction in the sixteenth embodiment) for reading a program stored in an address range ("8000h" to "8BFFh") in the program storage means,
the first read instruction is an instruction (a 3-byte CALLS instruction in the sixteenth embodiment) for reading a program stored in an address outside the predetermined range in the program storage means,
The second read command has a smaller data capacity than the first read command,
The read instruction includes a third read instruction (a CALLV instruction in the sixteenth embodiment) in which the identification information is set,
A gaming machine described in any one of features Q1 to Q8, characterized in that the program corresponding to the identification information is stored at an address outside the specified range in the program storage means.

According to feature Q11, the second read instruction is an instruction for reading a program stored in a predetermined range of addresses in the program storage means, and the first read instruction is an instruction for reading a program stored in an address outside the predetermined range in the program storage means. This makes it possible to vary the range of addresses to be read depending on the type of read instruction with a different data capacity.

In addition, a correspondence relationship information group that sets the correspondence between a specific address required to read a program and identification information having a smaller data capacity than the specific address is stored in advance, and the third read command sets the above identification information rather than the specific address itself. This makes it possible to make the data capacity of the third read command smaller than that of the first read command, in which the entire specific address of the program to be read is set.

The program corresponding to the identification information set in the correspondence information group is stored in the program storage means outside the predetermined range of addresses specified by the first read command, not in the predetermined range of addresses specified by the second read command. This makes it possible to read addresses in a range that is not the target of reading by the second read command, which has a relatively smaller data capacity than the first read command, using a third read command, which has a smaller data capacity than the first read command.

Feature Q12. The gaming machine described in Feature Q11, characterized in that the program execution means includes a means for reading out an address corresponding to the identification information set in the third read command from the correspondence relationship information group (index grasping circuit 184 and address reading circuit 185 in the sixteenth embodiment).

According to feature Q12, in a configuration in which identification information is set in the third read command, when the third read command is executed, an address corresponding to the identification information set in the second read command is read from the correspondence information group. This makes it possible to derive the entire specified address by the third read command in a configuration in which identification information having a smaller data capacity than the specified address is set in the third read command, rather than the entire specified address.

Feature Q13. The address included in the predetermined range is an address in which the numerical information of the upper range bits (upper 4 bits) which are a predetermined number of consecutive bits from the most significant bit including the most significant bit of the address and are a part of the address, is the same;
The first read command has a predetermined address of a program to be read set therein,
The second read instruction is set with information of designation bits (12 bits excluding the most significant 4 bits) which are bits excluding the most significant bits of a predetermined address of a program to be read,
A gaming machine described in feature Q11 or Q12, characterized in that the third read command has a smaller data capacity than the second read command.

According to feature Q13, the address of the program to be read by the second read instruction is an address in which the numerical information of the upper range bits, which are a predetermined number of bits contiguous from the most significant bit of the address including the most significant bit of the address, and which are a part of the address, is the same. This makes it possible to make the numerical information of the upper range bits in the address of the program to be read by the second read instruction the same.

In a configuration in which the numerical information of the upper range bits in the address of the program to be read by the second read instruction is the same, the second read instruction sets information of specified bits, which are the bits excluding the upper range bits in the specified address of the program to be read. As a result, less address information is set in the second read instruction compared to the first read instruction in which the entire specified address of the program to be read is set, and it is possible to make the data capacity of the second read instruction smaller than that of the first read instruction.

Furthermore, in a configuration in which the second read command has a smaller data capacity than the first read command as described above, the third read command has a smaller data capacity than the second read command. This makes it possible to diversify the types of read commands in terms of data capacity.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A9, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F9, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H8, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J6, features K1 to K8, features L1 to L7, features M1 to M5, features N1 to N4, features O1 to O5, features P1 to P5, features Q1 to Q13, and features R1 to R5 may be applied to the features Q1 to Q13. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

<Feature R group>
Feature R1. A program storage means (main ROM 73 in the fourteenth to sixteenth embodiments) that stores in advance read instructions for reading a program (CALLS instructions and CALLV instructions in the fourteenth to sixteenth embodiments);
A program execution unit (a function of executing various read commands of the main MPU 72 in the fourteenth to sixteenth embodiments) that reads the program that is the target of the read command and executes processing by the program;
In a configuration comprising:
a storage unit (a storage area for storing the index table 183 of the main ROM 73 in the sixteenth embodiment) for storing a correspondence relationship information group (an index table 183 in the sixteenth embodiment) in which a correspondence relationship between an address required to read out a program stored in the program storage unit and identification information (index data) having a data capacity smaller than that of the address is set,
A gaming machine characterized in that the read command includes a specific read command (a CALLV command in the sixteenth embodiment) in which the identification information is set rather than the entirety of a specific address of the program to be read.

According to feature R1, a group of correspondence information is stored in advance, which sets the correspondence between a specific address required to read a program and identification information having a smaller data capacity than the specific address, and the specific read command sets the above identification information rather than the entire specific address. This makes it possible to reduce the data capacity of the specific read command compared to a configuration in which the entire specific address of the program to be read is set. This makes it possible to ensure that processing using the program is executed in an optimal manner.

Feature R2. The gaming machine described in feature R1, characterized in that the program execution means includes means for reading out an address corresponding to the identification information set in the specific read command from the correspondence relationship information group (index grasping circuit 184 and address reading circuit 185 in the sixteenth embodiment).

According to feature R2, in a configuration in which identification information is set in a specific read command, when the specific read command is executed, an address corresponding to the identification information set in the specific read command is read from the correspondence information group. This makes it possible to derive the entire specified address by the specific read command in a configuration in which identification information with a smaller data capacity than the specified address is set in the specific read command, rather than the entire specified address.

Feature R3. The read instruction includes a first read instruction (a 3-byte CALLS instruction in the sixteenth embodiment) and a second read instruction (a 2-byte CALLS instruction in the sixteenth embodiment) having a smaller data capacity than the first read instruction;
the second read command is a command for reading a program stored in a predetermined address range ("8000h" to "8BFFh") in the program storage means,
the first read instruction is an instruction for reading a program stored in an address outside the predetermined range in the program storage means,
A gaming machine according to feature R1 or R2, characterized in that the program corresponding to the identification information is stored in an address outside the specified range in the program storage means.

According to feature R3, the second read instruction is an instruction for reading a program stored in a predetermined range of addresses in the program storage means, and the first read instruction is an instruction for reading a program stored in an address outside the predetermined range in the program storage means. This makes it possible to vary the range of addresses to be read depending on the type of read instruction with a different data capacity.

The program corresponding to the identification information set in the correspondence information group is stored in the program storage means outside the predetermined range of addresses specified by the first read command, not in the predetermined range of addresses specified by the second read command. This makes it possible to read addresses in a range that is not the target of reading by the second read command, which has a relatively smaller data capacity than the first read command, using a specific read command with a smaller data capacity than the first read command.

Feature R4: The address included in the predetermined range is an address in which the numerical information of upper range bits (upper 4 bits), which are a predetermined number of bits consecutive from the most significant bit of the address including the most significant bit of the address, and which are a part of the address, is the same;
The first read command has a predetermined address of a program to be read set therein,
The second read instruction is set with information of designation bits (12 bits excluding the most significant 4 bits) which are bits excluding the most significant bits of a predetermined address of a program to be read,
A gaming machine described in feature R3, characterized in that the specific read command has a smaller data capacity than the second read command.

According to feature R4, the address of the program to be read by the second read instruction is an address in which the numerical information of the upper range bits, which are a predetermined number of bits contiguous from the most significant bit of the address including the most significant bit of the address, and which are a part of the address, is the same. This makes it possible to make the numerical information of the upper range bits in the address of the program to be read by the second read instruction the same.

In a configuration in which the numerical information of the upper range bits in the address of the program to be read by the second read instruction is the same, the second read instruction sets information of specified bits, which are the bits excluding the upper range bits in the specified address of the program to be read. As a result, less address information is set in the second read instruction compared to the first read instruction in which the entire specified address of the program to be read is set, and it is possible to make the data capacity of the second read instruction smaller than that of the first read instruction.

In addition, in a configuration in which the second read command has a smaller data capacity than the first read command as described above, the specific read command has a smaller data capacity than the second read command. This makes it possible to diversify the types of read commands in terms of data capacity.

Feature R5. The gaming machine described in Feature R4, characterized in that the program execution means includes a means (mask circuit 181 and adder circuit 182 in the fourteenth to sixteenth embodiments) for deriving a predetermined address of the program to be read by combining the information of the designated bit set in the second read command with the numerical information of the upper range bits.

According to feature R5, in a configuration in which the second read instruction is set with designated bit information, which is the number of bits excluding the upper range bits of the specified address to be read, when the second read instruction is executed, the specified address of the program to be read is derived by combining the designated bit information set in the second read instruction with the numerical information of the upper range bits. As a result, in a configuration in which the second read instruction is set with designated bit information that is a part of the specified address rather than the entire address, it becomes possible to derive the entire specified address by the second read instruction.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A9, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F9, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H8, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J6, features K1 to K8, features L1 to L7, features M1 to M5, features N1 to N4, features O1 to O5, features P1 to P5, features Q1 to Q13, and features R1 to R5 may be applied to the features R1 to R5. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

The inventions in the above feature Q group and feature R group can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, pachinko machines are equipped with a storage section for storing gaming balls, and the gaming balls stored in the storage section are guided to a gaming ball launching device and launched toward the gaming area in response to the player's launching operation. Then, for example, when a gaming ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, a lottery process is executed, or a process is executed to increase the number of gaming balls available to the player.

In a slot machine, when a game value such as medals has been bet and the start lever is operated to start a new game, a lottery process is executed by the control means. Also, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation stop control to stop the rotation of the reels. Then, if the stop result after the rotation of the reels has stopped corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is awarded to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to ensure that processing using programs is executed appropriately, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: A game machine that has an operating means operated by the player, a game ball launching means that launches game balls based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage that guides the launched game balls to a specified game area, and various game components arranged within the game area, and that awards a special prize to the player when the game ball passes through a specified passage section of each of the game components.

Slot machines and other reel-type gaming machines: A gaming machine that starts the rotation of a rotating body based on the operation of a start operation means, stops the rotation of the rotating body based on the operation of a stop operation means, and awards a bonus to the player based on the image that appears after the rotation has stopped.

10... slot machine, 31... reel unit, 32L... left reel, 32M... center reel, 32R... right reel, 41... start lever, 42-44... stop buttons, 54... power supply, 63... image display device, 63a... liquid crystal display unit, 67... interval display unit, 72... main MPU, 73... main ROM, 74... main RAM, 74e... AT continuation counter, 92... performance MPU, 101... memory module , 103...VDP, 105...expansion buffer, 106a...first frame area, 106b...second frame area, 121...performance operation device, 142...stepping motor, 164a-164c...stop completion flag, 171...pseudo-stop table, 172...AT transition lottery table, 173...first initial award number lottery table, 174...second initial award number lottery table, 175...initial award number table, 18 1: mask circuit, 182: adder circuit, 183: index table, 184: index grasp circuit, 185: address read circuit, A1: left region, A2: right region, A11: upper left region, A12: upper right region, A13: lower left region, A14: lower right region, D1: image data at the time of division, D2 to D5: image data, DA1: first partition region, DA2: second partition region, G21, G22: operation Video display for output, G23...number of awards notification display, G31...remaining number of games to continue image, G32...number of wins display image, G33...remaining number of awards display image, G34...stop order notification image, G35...operation notification image, G41, G42...video display for presentation, G43...number of awards notification display, G52...warning image, G61...end indication image, G62...total number of games image, G63...total number of wins image, G66...effect for reducing visibility.

Claims (1)

A predetermined game progress means for progressing a predetermined game based on an operation by a player;
An attention event control means for executing a predetermined attention event that can prompt a player to give a predetermined attention when an advantageous game state advantageous to the player ends;
A predetermined execution means for executing a predetermined attention event that can prompt a player to give a predetermined attention in a predetermined situation in which the advantageous game state continues;
A means for executing a termination corresponding display corresponding to the termination of the advantageous gaming state when the advantageous gaming state is terminated;
Preparation,
The predetermined execution means is configured not to execute the predetermined attention event when the predetermined game is started before the predetermined attention event is started in the predetermined situation,
The attention event control means comprises means for causing the predetermined attention event to occur in a situation where the termination corresponding display is being executed.

Images